PUBLIC

Document Version: 2105 – 2021-05-23

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset

Insights
© 2021 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

THE BEST RUN

Content

1 SAP Predictive Asset Insights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

1.1 Accessing Applications and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2 Supported Browsers and Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
1.3 Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

2 SAP Fiori Launchpad with SAP Predictive Asset Insights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3 Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
3.1 Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Analysis Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Explorer Global Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.2 Features in Indicator Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.3 Equipment Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.4 Failure Mode Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using Failure Mode Analytics on the Equipment or Model Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using Failure Mode Analytics in the Failure Modes Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Using the Failure Mode Analytics Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.5 Personal Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.6 Analytics Dashboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating an Analytics Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Viewing an Analytics Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Editing an Analytics Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Deleting an Analytics Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.7 Emerging Issue Detection (EID). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

4 Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
4.1 Improvement Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Creating an Improvement Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reviewing an Improvement Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Completing an Improvement Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Resubmitting an Improvement Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Confirming an Improvement Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Viewing the List of Improvement Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Deleting an Improvement Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
4.2 Obsolescence Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Viewing the Obsolescence Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.3 Lookup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Managing Lookup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

2 PUBLIC Content
4.4 Smart Matcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Performing a Smart Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.5 Work Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Viewing a Work Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

5 Master Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.1 Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Managing Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.2 Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Managing Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.3 Functional Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Creating a Functional Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Updating Indicator Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Viewing and Updating a Functional Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Viewing Alerts of Functional Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Viewing Time Series Data (Indicator Chart) of a Functional Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5.4 Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Creating a Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Updating a Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Deleting a Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Viewing Work Orders of a Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Viewing Notifications of Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
5.5 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Creating and Editing Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Deleting Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.6 Failure Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Managing Failure Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.7 Fingerprints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Creating a Fingerprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Viewing a Fingerprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Editing a Fingerprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Deleting a Fingerprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
5.8 Spare Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Managing Spare Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
5.9 Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Managing Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
5.10 Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Managing Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
5.11 Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Uploading a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Maintaining Different Language Versions of a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Editing Document Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Content PUBLIC 3
 Updating a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Assigning Documents to Business Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Deleting a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Creating Hotspots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Guided Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
5.12 Announcements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Managing Announcements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
5.13 Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Managing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.14 Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Managing Templates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5.15 Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Creating Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Rule Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
5.16 Equipment Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
5.17 State Transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
5.18 Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions and Published State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
5.19 Export to Excel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

6 Machine Learning Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

6.1 Configuring Data Sets for Equipment Health Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fields for Configuring a Data Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Calculation of Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
6.2 Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Configuring a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Training a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Scoring a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
6.3 Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Configuring a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Training a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Scoring a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
6.4 Validating Failure Mode Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
6.5 Managing Models for Leading Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Configuring a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Training a Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
6.6 Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Managing Model Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

7 Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
7.1 Managing Company Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Adding Location Details of your Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Updating Location Details of your Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

4 PUBLIC Content
 Deleting Location Details of your Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Creating Subsidiary Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Viewing Company Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Recording Industry ID Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Maintaining External Organizations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Editing Company Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
7.2 Configuring the Document Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
7.3 Application Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Configuration Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
7.4 User Authorizations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Creating Organizational Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Assigning Business Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Assigning Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Deleting an Organizational Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Assigning Role Collections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
7.5 Data Protection and Privacy (DPP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Information Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
7.6 Mass API Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
7.7 Equipment Technical Sync Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
7.8 Manage Workflows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Creating Sample App and Trigger from Asset Central Foundation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

8 Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

8.1 Equipment Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
SAP Internet of Things Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
8.2 Creating Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
8.3 Machine Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
8.4 Configuring Failure Mode Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Mean Time Indicators Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Notification Language Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
8.5 Enabling Analytics Dashboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Enabling Custom Live Dashboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Enabling Custom Offline Dashboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Analytics Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
8.6 Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Preconfigured Variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Fields for Configuring Alerts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Fields for Configuring Equipment Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Fields for Configuring the Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Fields for Configuring the Explorer Global Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Fields for Configuring the Indicator Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Fields for Configuring the Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Content PUBLIC 5
 Fields for Configuring Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Fields for Configuring Work Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Fields for Configuring Transformer Health Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

6 PUBLIC Content
1 SAP Predictive Asset Insights

SAP Predictive Asset Insights is an Internet of Things (IoT) application. You can reach all the functions from the
SAP Fiori launchpad.

The business benefits include:

● Avoidance of costly disruptions by predicting equipment malfunctions before they happen by processing
huge volumes of information technology (IT) and operational technology (OT) data using sophisticated
machine learning algorithms.
● Use insights from sensor data to improve product quality, reliability, and customer satisfaction
● Manage complex asset (equipment) structures
● Build an asset network collaboration for better service and maintenance processes

The functions are organized in the following categories:

● Analytics [page 13]

● Processes [page 80]
● Master Data [page 94]
● Machine Learning Engine [page 317]
● Administration [page 419]

Supported Languages

The following languages are supported:

● English (default UI language)

● German
● Italian
● Simplified Chinese (locale: zh-CN)
● Japanese
● French
● Russian
● Spanish
● Czech Republic (locale: cs-CZ)
● Korean (locale: ko-KR)
● Hungarian (locale: hu-HU)
● Polish (pl)
● Portuguese (locale: pt-BR, only UI texts and Web Assistant)
● Romanian

The language in which the UI is displayed depends on the language you have set in your browser settings. If you
have set a language that is not one of the supported languages, the UI of SAP Predictive Asset Insights is
displayed in the default language.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 7
1.1 Accessing Applications and Functions

Here is an overview of how to reach the various applications and functions for SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Access URLs

The SAP Intelligent Asset Management Fiori launchpad URL provides access to all the available applications for
SAP Predictive Asset Insights. For information about subscribing to the launchpad, see Subscribing to SAP
Predictive Asset Insights and Other Solutions.

The following table provides you with an overview of all URLs depending on your licenses:

Access To URL

SAP Intelligent Asset Management Fiori launchpad for a https://<tenant

standard license subdomain>.iam.cfapps.<region>.hana.onde
mand.com

SAP Intelligent Asset Management Fiori launchpad for a test https://<tenant subdomain>.iam-
and demo license pr.cfapps.<region>.hana.ondemand.com

Please contact your Identity Management Administrator if you cannot see the applications you require. They
will ensure the appropriate role collection is assigned to your user.

Related Information

SAP Fiori Launchpad with SAP Predictive Asset Insights [page 10]

1.2 Supported Browsers and Devices

You can use the SAP Predictive Asset Insights applications on a number of devices and browsers.

The browser support for the solution is aligned with the browsers supported by SAP BTP cockpit. For more
information, see the Browser Support sub-section in the topic Prerequisites and Restrictions for SAP BTP.

Some of the features are not supported on few devices or browsers. The following list provides you this
information:

● You cannot work with hotspots or 3D visual files on any of the handheld devices other than a PC and a
MAC.
● You cannot upload files on an iPad that is using an SAP Fiori Client.
● Personal dashboard is preconfigured for end users only and does not include administrator relevant
transactions. However, administrator can directly access the URL to navigate to each individual Admin app.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

8 PUBLIC SAP Predictive Asset Insights
1.3 Terminology

Here we describe the meanings of some fundamental terms in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Term Definition

Asset A resource with economic value that a company owns or

controls with the expectation that it will increase the value of
a firm or benefit the firm's operations. An asset can be
thought of as something that will generate income, reduce
expenses, improve production, and so on. The asset is man­
aged and modeled holistically, comprising, for example, sys­
tems, locations, model, and parts.

Equipment Technical object, for example, a pump that is maintained as

an autonomous unit.

 Note
The term equipment is a noncount noun. Hence:

● A piece of equipment (singular) = one piece of

equipment
● Equipment (plural) = two or more pieces of equip­
ment

Top Equipment Equipment that is at the top level of an equipment hierarchy.

Component Subequipment of a piece of equipment

Machine Thing that turns electrical energy into work.

Tool Thing that that turns physical energy into work.

 Note

Search for terminology definitions for SAP Predictive Asset Insights under component IOT-PDM at https://
sapterm.com .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 9
2 SAP Fiori Launchpad with SAP Predictive
Asset Insights

You access SAP Predictive Asset Insights using the SAP Intelligent Asset Management launchpad. This
launchpad includes the applications from the SAP Intelligent Asset Management relevant products on a single
SAP Fiori launchpad based on your subscriptions. We provide several roles that allow the display of groups that
logically group related applications. You can customize the launchpad to show and hide applications as you
require.

Supported Features

The launchpad supports the following SAP Fiori launchpad features:

● Anchor navigation
● Search
● User actions menu
○ App Finder - find applications and add them to the SAP Fiori launchpad
○ Settings - maintain the settings for the SAP Fiori launchpad, for example, changing the appearance of
the launchpad, specifying a unit of measure, or selecting an automatic data refresh interval for the
analysis tools
○ Edit Home Page - change the visibility and placement of groups and applications
○ Theme Manager - create your own themes for the SAP Fiori launchpad

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

10 PUBLIC SAP Fiori Launchpad with SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Groups

The applications are organized into the following groups:

Group Functions

Analytics Provides abilities to view, filter, and analyze data

across all your equipment and perform follow-up
tasks, as well as get an overview of applications in
the personal dashboard and view analytics dash­
boards.

 Note
The Explorer [page 13] is the place where
most of the activities for SAP Predictive Asset
Insights occur, bringing together sensor and
business data to analyze data for equipment
and functional locations, and help you decide
how to proceed.

Processes Find the important business processes for SAP

Predictive Asset Insights.

Master Data If you are a business user you can browse all kinds
of related information about your equipment. Addi­
tionally create and edit master data.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

SAP Fiori Launchpad with SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 11
Group Functions

Machine Learning Engine Find tools for your data science tasks:

● For health indicators, data scientists can use

the algorithms of the machine learning engine
to calculate the health status and predict fail­
ures for their equipment. In that process, they
configure data sets, configure, train, and score
models.
● For failure mode analytics, they can use the al­
gorithms of the machine learning engine to an­
alyze their notifications in order to get insights
and analytics about the patterns of failures for
their equipment and equipment models. In
that process, they configure, train, and score
models, and also perform validation tasks.
● For leading indicators, they can use an algo­
rithm to determine the leading indicators that
have the highest influence on failures for their
equipment. In that process, they configure and
train models.
● For failure curve analytics, they can use an al­
gorithm to calculate the probability of failure
for their equipment. In that process, they cre­
ate, train, and score model configurations.

Administration Access applications for user management and con­

figuration of the Explorer and its analysis tools

Roles

The role collections assigned to your user determine which groups and applications are visible. For an overview
of the roles that need to be assigned to see and use the applications, see the Security Information for SAP
Predictive Asset Insights.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

12 PUBLIC SAP Fiori Launchpad with SAP Predictive Asset Insights
3 Analytics

The tiles under Analytics on the SAP Fiori launchpad provide you the abilities to view, filter, and analyze data
across equipment, perform follow-up tasks, as well as overview the dashboards.

Overview of Analytics

Tile Use

Explorer [page 13] Use analysis tools in the Explorer to analyze data for your
equipment and functional locations, and then decide on fol­
low-up actions. The Explorer brings together sensor and
business data and from here you can navigate to different
object pages to get an overview of all the data associated
with a selected object.

Failure Mode Analytics [page 60] Use failure mode analytics to get insights and analytics
about the last occurring failures for your equipment and
equipment models. Failure mode analytics uses machine
learning to turn the human knowledge contained within the
texts of notifications into insights about the nature of fail­
ures.

Personal Dashboard [page 69] This app is personalized to be a one-stop point to navigate to
the applications, your frequently viewed items of equipment,
favorites and unread announcements.

Analytics Dashboards [page 70] View your data in analytics dashboards.

3.1 Explorer

The Explorer is an application that contains analysis tools to analyze data for equipment and functional
locations.

 Note

If you are using the application with a touch-enabled device, not all features work using the touch feature.

Features

Working with Analysis Tools

You can use analysis tools to analyze data for your equipment and functional locations, for example, by
exploring sensor data or displaying alerts.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 13
For more information about the analysis tools, see Analysis Tools [page 15].

Using Filter Functions for Analysis Tools

To focus your analysis, you can use different filter functions. The following functions are available:

● Filtering in one analysis tool in the Explorer by choosing (Filter).

● Filtering across all analysis tools in the Explorer.

 Note

The filter functions across all analysis tools filter based on top equipment. For the alerts, equipment
indicators, and map analysis tools, they also filter based on top functional locations.

To filter across all analysis tools, you can use the following options:
○ Choose an analysis tool, select, for example, one or more work orders, notifications, or equipment. All
of these belong to certain top equipment. By choosing Apply as Filter, all analysis tools are filtered and
only show data for the same top equipment. If you use the alerts, equipment indicators, or map
analysis tool, data for the same top equipment and top functional locations is shown.
○ Use the Explorer global filter and apply multiple filters to all analysis tools in the Explorer in one go.

You can combine the different filter functions. For example, when you filter in an analysis tool and use the global
filter, the analysis tool displays data filtered by both criteria.

For more information about the different filter functions, see Analysis Tools [page 15] and Explorer Global
Filter [page 48].

Using Refresh Functions for Analysis Tools

To refresh data across all your analysis tools, you can use different refresh functions. The following functions
are available:

● Manually refreshing data across all analysis tools in the Explorer by choosing Refresh.
● Automatically refreshing data across all analysis tools in the Explorer by activating an automatic data
refresh with a refresh interval in the Settings of the SAP Fiori launchpad.

You can combine the data refresh functions. For more information about the data refresh functions, see
Analysis Tools [page 15].

Saving a Set of Analysis Tools in the Explorer as a Tile

You can save a current set of analysis tools with their selected variants in the Explorer as a new tile by choosing

(Save as Tile). This allows you to save different sets of analysis tools and analysis tool variants, for
example, a set of analysis tool variants that focuses on a specific piece of equipment. The new tile is then
added to your selected group on the SAP Fiori launchpad. Any applied filter functions or other settings of the
analysis tools are not carried over to the new tile.

To update the set in the new tile, you can select different analysis tool variants, add or remove analysis tools,
and use all features of the Explorer and the analysis tools. Once you exit the tile, your updates are saved. Other
settings are not saved.

To manage the tile, for example, to rename or move the tile, you can go to the user menu on the SAP Fiori
launchpad and choose Edit Home Page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

14 PUBLIC Analytics
Navigating to Pages from the Explorer
To go into a detailed analysis for a single piece of equipment, you can reach the Equipment page by clicking an
equipment link in the analysis tools. It is also possible to navigate to the details page of alerts, notifications,
work orders, and functional locations from the respective analysis tools.

For more information about the Equipment page, see Equipment Page [page 58].

3.1.1 Analysis Tools

An analysis tool is a self-contained part of the application with its own user interface and functionality that
provides an insight into one or more pieces of equipment and functional locations.

Analysis Tools Variants

For every analysis tool, variants can be configured by an administrator. The analysis tool variants contain
different settings. As a business user, you can adapt the analysis tools to work with the Explorer according to
the personal business scenario. For more information about the configuration, see Explorer and Analysis Tools
Configuration [page 489].

 Note

Consider the following:

● In addition to the variants configured by an administrator, we also deliver preconfigured variants

entitled SAP Standard. If your administrator has deleted some of the preconfigured variants, they are
not available to you. For more information about the settings for the available preconfigured variants,
contact your administrator.
● The transformer health analytics analysis tool has only one variant.

Analysis Tools Catalog

You can add analysis tools from the Analysis Tools Catalog to the Explorer and then select a specific variant for
each analysis tool. In the Analysis Tools Catalog, you can also remove added analysis tools. For more
information, see Adding Analysis Tools to the Explorer [page 19] and Removing Analysis Tools from the
Explorer [page 20].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 15
Here is an overview of the available analysis tools:

Overview of Available Analysis Tools in the Analysis Tools Catalog

Analysis Tool Description

Alerts [page 22] Provides a list of current alerts based on rules defined for
sensor data, key figures, and health scores. Provides data
visualization so that you can see when alerts have occurred.

Indicator Chart [page 21] Provides data visualization across one or more measure­
ments.

 Note
Besides adding the indicator chart from the Analysis
Tool Catalog, you can also reach the indicator chart from
the alerts analysis tool.

Work Orders [page 35] Provides a list of current work orders and their details.

Notifications [page 34] Provides a list of notifications and their details

Equipment Indicators [page 32] Provides a list of master data, attributes, and indicators for
equipment and functional locations. These indicators indi­
cate if the behavior of technical object is normal or not.

Map [page 36] Provides a geographic map with the locations of top equip­
ment and top functional locations and allows you to select
indicators and apply their colors to the map markers. It also
allows spatial selection.

Transformer Health Analytics [page 41] Provides insights into the health status of mineral oil-filled
transformers using the Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA). DGA
checks the concentration of dissolved gases in the insulating
oil and detects the type and severity of fault in the trans­
former.

Features

Functionality and behavior can differ from one analysis tool to another, depending on its purpose. However,
some features are the same in most analysis tools:

Full Screen Mode (Relevant for map, indicator chart, and equipment indicators)

If you want to focus your analysis on one specific area, for example, if you only want to look at the map where
your equipment are located, you can open an analysis tool in full screen mode and hide the other analysis tools

by choosing (Enter Full Screen).

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

16 PUBLIC Analytics
Settings (Relevant for all analysis tools except for map and transformer health analytics)
For all analysis tools containing a list, you can define the sorting and filtering behavior for the list, and what list

columns you want to see on the UI by choosing (Settings).

 Note

Search and filter options in analysis tools are case-sensitive.

Filter in One Analysis Tool (Relevant for all analysis tools except for indicator chart)
For almost all analysis tools, you can filter your analysis tool. Depending on the analysis tool, the filter

mechanism differs. For example, for work orders, you can choose (Filter), select the filters, enter the
values and then choose Go to apply this selection to the analysis tool. In the map, you can filter by drawing
geofences around the technical objects. In transformer health analytics, you can use a time filter. The filter
function in one analysis tool does not affect filters in other analysis tools.

Filter Across Analysis Tools (Relevant for all analysis tools)

 Note

This filter function filters based on top equipment. For the alerts, equipment indicators, and map analysis
tools, it also filters based on top functional locations.

In the Explorer, you can filter across all analysis tools. Select, for example, one or more work orders,
notifications, or equipment. All of these belong to certain top equipment. By choosing Apply as Filter, all
analysis tools are filtered and only show data for the same top equipment. If you use the alerts, equipment
indicators, or map analysis tool, data for the same top equipment and top functional locations is shown. If you
add a new analysis tool to the Explorer after you have selected a certain set of equipment, the newly added
analysis tool automatically displays data based on your existing selection. If you want to reset the filters in all

analysis tools, choose (Reset Global Filter).

 Note

The transformer health analytics analysis tool only shows the filter results if you choose Apply as Filter in
another analysis tool, but the Apply as Filter button itself is not available in the analysis tool, so you cannot
apply a selection from this analysis tool across the other analysis tools.

Besides applying filters to all analysis tools by using the Apply as Filter function in an analysis tool, you can also
use the global filter in the Explorer. For more information, see Explorer Global Filter [page 48].

Navigation and Editing (Relevant for all analysis tools)

You choose the selected analysis tools using anchor navigation (tabs).

 Note

The tabs are only displayed when you have added at least two analysis tools to the Explorer.

Add Evidence (Relevant for notifications, work orders, and indicator chart)
Add evidence enables you to identify, monitor, and manage an equipment issue early. To analyze an issue, you
need to gather information or 'evidence'. This evidence is collected in improvement requests. You can add an

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 17
improvement request or edit an existing improvement request by choosing Add Evidence in the analysis tools,
Work Orders, Indicator Chart, Alerts, and Notifications.

Unit of Measure (UoM) Conversion (Relevant for indicator chart and equipment indicators)
In the SAP Fiori launchpad, you can define if the unit of measure system for the application is metric (default)

or imperial. To change the unit of measure, go to the (User Actions Menu). Choose Settings Unit of
Measure .

UoM conversion deals with conversion of values across units within a dimension, and a source unit is converted
to a target unit. For example, if the unit system is metric and dimension is length, any source unit (miles) must
be converted to target unit (kilometers).

State Preservation (Relevant for all analysis tools)

When you navigate from the Explorer back to the SAP Fiori launchpad or to another application, any ad-hoc
table settings, filter settings, and the selected variant of an analysis tool are preserved.

Automatic Data Refresh (Relevant for all analysis tools)

You can activate an automatic data refresh across all analysis tools in the Explorer. With this automatic data
refresh, the data of the analysis tools is reloaded in a regular interval, so that you can view the latest data. By
default, the automatic data refresh is not active.

To activate automatic data refresh and define the refresh interval, go to (User Actions Menu). Choose
Settings Automatic Data Refresh . Once you have activated and defined the automatic data refresh, the
Explorer initiates the data refresh on the analysis tools based on the defined refresh interval. The last refreshed
date and time is then displayed at the top of the Explorer. If you add or delete any analysis tool, the closest
refresh cycle is reset, and the refresh interval starts again.

For the analysis tools, Indicator Chart and Alerts, the automatic data refresh is also applied in the Equipment
application. For more information about viewing Indicator Chart and Alerts, see Viewing Time Series Data
(Indicator Chart) of an Equipment [page 122] and Viewing Alerts of an Equipment [page 121].

The manual and automatic data refresh features result in refresh of all analysis tool with its data from the
database. Depending on the analysis tool, its variant settings, the number of records the analysis tool need to
fetch, and overall system load, the time to complete the refresh may differ. If for a scenario, the time to refresh
all the analysis tools take 3 seconds, and the refresh rate is set to that interval or shorter, for instance, 1 second,
a continuously refreshing analysis tools will be visible

And, during the refresh, a major area of an analysis tool will not be functioning.

To trigger an automatic refresh, set a higher refresh rate, for instance a minute. Observe the time it takes to
refresh the data. This will also indicate the lowest refresh rate you should use. For example, if the refresh takes
3 seconds, you can trigger an automatic refresh rate not lesser than 5 seconds.

Manual Data Refresh (Relevant for all analysis tools)

You can also manually refresh data across all analysis tools in the Explorer by choosing Refresh. The manually
refreshed date and time is then displayed at the top of the Explorer. The manual data refresh has no effect on
the automatic data refresh. That means if you have activated the automatic data refresh and you manually
refresh data, the refresh interval of the automatic data refresh is not reset and continues. Once the automatic
data refresh is completed, the displayed date and time of the manual refresh is overwritten by the date and
time of the automatic refresh.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

18 PUBLIC Analytics
For the analysis tools, Indicator Chart and Alerts, the manual refresh is also possible in the Equipment
application. For more information about viewing Indicator Chart and Alerts, see Viewing Time Series Data
(Indicator Chart) of an Equipment [page 122] and Viewing Alerts of an Equipment [page 121]

Health Score Explanation (Relevant for equipment indicators)

The Health Score Explanation gives additional information about an indicator. It shows, for example, the
defined thresholds and uses color coding to show whether the value is in the value range or not.

You can display the health score information by clicking on an indicator value link in the Equipment Indicator
analysis tool.

Languages

For information on the supported user interface (UI) languages, refer SAP Predictive Asset Insights [page 7].

3.1.1.1 Adding Analysis Tools to the Explorer

This topic describes how to add analysis tools to the Explorer.

Prerequisites

At least one analysis tool variant has been configured by an administrator or the respective preconfigured
variant is available. For more information about the configuration, see Explorer and Analysis Tools
Configuration [page 489].

Context

To analyze data of your equipment, you need to add analysis tools to the Explorer.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Analytics group and open the Explorer application.
2. At the top of the Explorer, choose Manage Tools.

The Analysis Tools Catalog is displayed.

3. In the Analysis Tools Catalog, select the analysis tools that you want to use to analyze equipment.
4. Choose OK.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 19
 The analysis tools are added to the Explorer and the first configured variant for each analysis tool is
displayed.
5. To select a different variant, expand the variant dropdown list next to the analysis tool title.

 Note

The transformer health analytics analysis tool has only one variant. That means that for this analysis
tool, you cannot expand the dropdown list and select a different variant.

6. From the My Views dropdown list, select the desired analysis tool variant. You can choose from all
configured variants.
7. If required, repeat step 5 and 6 for all your added analysis tools.

Results

The analysis tools are added to the Explorer.

You can navigate between the analysis tools by using the anchor navigation (tabs).

 Note

The tabs are only displayed when you add at least two analysis tools to the Explorer.

Related Information

Analysis Tools [page 15]

Removing Analysis Tools from the Explorer [page 20]

3.1.1.2 Removing Analysis Tools from the Explorer

This topic describes how to remove analysis tools from the Explorer.

Context

At least one analysis tool has been added to the Explorer. For more information, see Adding Analysis Tools to
the Explorer [page 19].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

20 PUBLIC Analytics
Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Analytics group and open the Explorer application.
2. At the top of the Explorer, choose Manage Tools.

The Analysis Tools Catalog with the selected analysis tools is displayed.
3. In the Analysis Tools Catalog, deselect the analysis tools that you want to remove from the Explorer.

Results

The analysis tools are removed from the Explorer.

You can later add the removed analysis tools to the Explorer again.

Related Information

Analysis Tools [page 15]

3.1.1.3 Indicator Chart

This analysis tool enables you to visualize data across one or more indicators with the same unit of measure
across multiple hierarchies. You can also view thresholds related to an equipment and functional location.

By default, the chart is empty on navigating to this section. Using the Apply as Filter option, you now visualize
data related to a functional location. Use the Select Indicators option to select or deselect the indicators.

 Note

● Alerts, notifications, work orders and indicator forecast are not displayed in the indicator chart in
Explorer
● Legends display equipment name in Explorer
● The Indicator Chart pop-up displays Alert Description.

For more information on features within the indicator chart, refer Features in Indicator Chart [page 51]

Related Information

Explorer [page 13]

Analysis Tools [page 15]
Fields for Configuring the Indicator Chart [page 497]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 21
3.1.1.4 Alerts

This analysis tool displays a list of the current alerts that are triggered by equipment events or rules defined for
sensor data and health scores.

Alerts calculated from sensor data or health scores give you information about the issues your equipment or
functional locations (technical objects) are experiencing. Within the alert analysis tool, you can display an alert
page that contains the alert details and additional information. The information provided helps you to decide on
prescriptive maintenance and helps to identify potential actions to be taken for the incoming alerts.

 Note

Alerts Analysis Tool supports Planning Plant, Planner Group and Maintenance Plant fields.

As soon as a notification status is set as complete, the alerts associated with the notification is also set as
complete. This occurs only if the alert type for an alert has the auto close option enabled.

Working with the Alert Analysis Tool

Action Further Information

Display list of alerts You can display the alert list in one of the following ways:

● From the Explorer, by Adding Analysis Tools to the Ex­

plorer [page 19].
● From the Equipment page, by choosing Monitoring
→ Alerts.

Display Alert Page with additional alert information Click an alert in the alert list to navigate to the Alert Page
[page 26].

View related top technical object/technical object Click the Top Equipment/ Top Functional Location or Equip­
ment/ Functional Location link to view details about the top
technical object or technical object for which the alerts were
created.

For more information, see Equipment Page [page 58] and

Functional Locations [page 150].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

22 PUBLIC Analytics
 Action Further Information

Information on alert occurrence The following alert occurrence information is available in the
alert list:

● Column Created On: When did the alert occur for the
first time?
● Column Updated On: When did the alert get last up­
dated?

 Note
Once the deduplication period is completed or the exist­
ing alert with the specific alert type for this piece of
equipment is set to Completed, a new alert instance is
generated. This definition is not valid for alerts that ex­
isted before the deduplication period was defined for
this alert type. For more information, see Alert Dedupli­
cation [page 26].

Sort and filter alerts Sort and filter the alerts and columns you want to display.
You can also use the Settings option to search for attributes
for the alerts.

The Status column supports sorting and filtering with value

help.

The Severity column supports sorting and filtering with value

help

Filter Use the Filters option to enable filter settings, view default
settings defined in the configuration screen, add and edit fil-
ters, and define whether these filters are shown in the filter
bar. Click Go to apply the specified filters. You can also use
the Show Filter Bar option to edit the filter and filter condi­
tions.

You can filter Alerts by Date or Date Range. However, the

equal (=) operation is not supported to filter the Date field.

Overview of available features Some features (for example refreshing data automatically or
manually, filtering or default variants) are relevant for the Ex­
plorer in general or relevant for all analysis tools. For more in­
formation, see Explorer [page 13]and Analysis Tools [page
15].

User Authorization configuration The alert analysis tool complies to user and network authori­
zation configuration for Equipment and Alert Type.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 23
Action Further Information

Language-specific descriptions In the Alert list, language-specific descriptions are available

for Top Equipment, Equipment, Top Functional Location,
Functional Location, Indicator, and Model.

 Note
This is displayed only when language specific descrip­
tions are maintained in asset central foundation.

Create alert for technical object Create alerts for functional locations by using machine
alarms and display the functional locations in different appli­
cations.

Violated and Related Indicators Violated indictators are indicators that are used in rules con­
ditions and these conditions are true in rule evaluation.

Related indicators are indicators that are related to an alert

from alert type or from rules.

Custom fields Custom field values are available in addition to the standard
fields that are delivered by SAP. This includes the following:

● Configure custom fields for alerts and use them when

you create an alert using the create alert API.
● After the creation of the alert using custom fields, the
fields are displayed in the alert list and on the alert page.
● When you have set the deduplication for an alert type of
the alert to On and activated the Allow Updates check­
box, the fields on the alert page are updated.

Prerequisites

To be able to perform the activites described below for alerts, you need the following roles:

● Role AlertProcessorAdmin: Users can change the alert status, create notifications and set/change the
processor.
● Role AlertProcessor : Users can change the alert status, create notifications, but cannot assign an alert to
processors.

Button Contents

Add Evidence Create a new improvement request or edit an existing im­

provement request by choosing Add Evidence. You navigate
to the Improvement Request page.

For more information, see Creating an Improvement Request

[page 82] and Emerging Issue Detection (EID) [page 79].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

24 PUBLIC Analytics
 Button Contents

Set in Process Change alert status to in process or completed using the re­
spective buttons.
Set to Completed
When you set an alert to in process, you are automatically
assigned as the processor.

The status sequence is New → In Process →

Completed or New to Completed. The changes to the
alert status do not change already assigned processors.

 Note
If you select more than 10 alerts at one time, the Set in
Process and Set to Completed buttons will be disabled.

Set Processor Use the Set Processor button to change the alert processor.

 Note
If you select more than 10 alerts at one time, then the
Set Processor button will be disabled.

Create Notification Create a new notification for the selected alerts. The new no­
tification added is visible as link in the alert list and on the
alert page. Click the Notification link to view more details
about the notification.

 Note
You can create notifications for multiple alerts, only if
the alerts belong to the same equipment. If not, the
Create Notification button will be disabled.

Sharing Alerts with Invitee

Invitee will see alerts only for the equipment and alert types that are shared by premium users.

Related Information

Fields for Configuring Alerts [page 492]

Fields for Configuring the Indicator Chart [page 497]
Features in Indicator Chart [page 51]
Adding Alert Types [page 285]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 25
3.1.1.4.1 Alert Deduplication

Deduplication option allows the user not to create duplicate alerts for an existing alert type and equipment.
New alerts can be generated once the deduplication period is over or the status of existing alert is set to
Completed.

Procedure

1. Define deduplication in alert type - Define alert deduplication at the alert type level using the Templates
application. For more information, refer Adding Alert Types [page 285]
2. Assign alert type to model - Alert type must be grouped as alert type group and assigned to model. For
more information, refer Assigning Alert Type Groups to a Model [page 144]
3. Create alerts - Create alerts for the alert types.
4. View alerts - View alerts for a list of equipment in the Equipment application or Explorer. For more
information, refer Viewing Alerts of an Equipment [page 121] and Alerts [page 22]

3.1.1.4.2 Alert Page

You use the alert page to see an overview of data associated with a selected alert.

You can access the alert page with its holistic view of different information by clicking an alert in the alert list.

For more information about prerequisites and available functions for alerts (for example changing the status of
alerts, setting processors), see Alerts [page 22].

Information Available on the Alert Page

 Note

● For an alert of a functional location, the Information Section and Indicator Chart is available.
● For an alert of a Functional Location, Indicator Chart is displayed in the Alert page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

26 PUBLIC Analytics
 Section Contents

Information Shows information about the alert (such as alert type, pro­
cessor, origin of the alert, alert occurrence and last alert oc­
currence), and information about the related piece of equip­
ment or functional location, and the notifications. If a notifi-
cation has been created for the alert, you can click the notifi-
cation to display details.

An occurrence count is shown to indicate how often an alert

reoccurred since the deduplication mode for the particular
alert was switched on. For more information, see Alert Dedu­
plication [page 26].

When you access an alert of Functional Location:

● Functional Location Name and Functional Location

Description fields are displayed in the Information tab.
● Equipment Name, Equipment Description and Location
details are not displayed (these fields will have no data).

When you access an alert of Equipment:

● Functional Location Name and Functional Location

Description details are not displayed (these two fields
will have no data).

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 27
Section Contents

Indicator Chart Indicator chart will be the default section displayed in the
alert details page.

The indicator chart helps you visualize the alert in a time-

based line chart, together with contributing indicators.

The default time period for the indicator chart in alert details
page can be configured in the indicator chart variant. The
first time period configured in the indicator chart variant will
be used as the default one.

In the indicator chart, you can see the overlapping indicators

as a default:

● Indicators assigned to an alert type that is assigned to

the alert.
● Indicators assigned to a piece of equipment / functional
location is assigned to the alert.

You can manually add all indicators assigned to the piece of

equipment that is assigned to the alert.

 Note
Depending on your configuration settings, additional
alert attributes are displayed in one or more tabs next to
the indicator chart.

● Violated Indictors and Related Indicators are displayed.

● Related indicators are displayed in initial load of the In­
dicator Chart in the Alert Details page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

28 PUBLIC Analytics
 Section Contents

Failure Modes and Causes This section shows failure modes and causes, alert types
and instructions related to the piece of equipment (asset).
The information helps you to understand which failure
modes occurred for the particular alert and helps you to de­
cide how to proceed with an alert.

All overlapping failure modes are displayed:

● ○ Failure modes coming from the pieces of equip­

ment (asset) are assigned to the selected alert.
○ Failure modes assigned to an alert type that is as­
signed to the selected alert.

 Example
In this example, the highlighted failure modes (failure
mode 1 and failure mode 6) are displayed.

The failure modes assigned to the related piece of

equipment (asset) and alert type are as below:

Failure Mode assigned to equipment:

● Failure mode 1
● Failure mode 3
● Failure mode 4
● Failure mode 6

Failure Mode assigned to Alert Type:

● Failure mode 1
● Failure mode 2
● Failure mode 5
● Failure mode 6

The Failure modes table with description of each column

is as follows:

● Top Failure Modes (Ranked): Displays short de­

scription and name of the failure mode. The failure
modes are ranked in the table based on how often
the failure modes appeared in the notifications for
the equipment and equipment model.
● Causes: The list of causes associated with the fail­
ure mode are displayed.
● Recommended Actions: Displays the number of in­
structions associated with the failure mode.
● Occurrence Compared to Model and Equipment:
Displays the extent to which the piece of equipment

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 29
Section Contents

compares against all notifications analyzed for the

equipment model.

 Note
The ranking of Failure Modes and occurrence is
displayed only if Failure Model Analytics is
available and the required role is assigned to
the user.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

30 PUBLIC Analytics
 Section Contents

Equipment Maintenance History The maintenance history for the piece of equipment shows
an overview of what maintenance has taken place for the
piece of equipment up to now. The notifications/work orders
of the most recent top 3 alerts assigned to the related piece
of equipment are shown and ordered by creation date. The
most recent one is shown first. You can navigate to the notifi-
cations and work orders and display them to see details.

Which top 3 alerts are relevant? All alerts for the related
piece of equipment for the last 365 days until now are taken
into account. All alerts for which a notification has been cre­
ated, and to which the same alert type has also been as­
signed, are relevant for display. The notifications/work or­
ders of the 3 most recent alerts are then displayed in the
Equipment Maintenance History section.

If a notification has been created for the currently displayed

alert, the notification is be shown under section Information.

 Example
You display the alert page with detailed information
about an alert. Alert type ABC is assigned. In this exam­
ple the highlighted notifications and work orders are
shown as top 3.

The following alerts have been created for the related

piece of equipment:

● Alert 2 (Alert type ABC) - Has no notification.

● Alert 3 (Alert type DEF) - Has no notification.
● Alert 4 (Alert type ABC) - Notification 1 - Work or­
der 1
● Alert 5 (Alert type DEF) - Notification 2
● Alert 6 (Alert type ABC) - Notification 3
● Alert 7 (Alert type ABC) - Notification 4 - Work or­
der 2
● Alert 8 (Alert type ABC) - Notification 5 - Work Or­
der 3

Related Information

Adding Alert Types [page 285]

Indicator Chart [page 21]
Failure Modes [page 176]
Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 31
Instructions [page 251]
Notifications [page 34]
Work Orders [page 35]

3.1.1.5 Equipment Indicators

This analysis tool provides a list of equipment and functional locations (technical objects) with their indicators,
attributes, and master data. You can also assess the technical object status.

It is also possible to view technical objects, their heirarchy, attributes, and indicator by navigating to the details
page of a piece of equipment or functional location. The Apply as Filter option also provides the flexibility to
filter all analysis tools in the Explorer.

 Note

The indicator value is not in real time. A job, which is scheduled every 15 minutes, pulls the data from the
timeseries store that is displayed in the Equipment Indicator analysis tool.

The equipment indicators provide you the following options:

● Select columns for a technical object

● Identify health status of an technical object
● Sort and filter
● Apply filter
● Search

 Note

The equipment indicator only shows equipment where Predictive Maintenance is selected as the product
relevance or no product relevance is selected.

Columns

The columns marked as default while configuring a variant by the administrator display in this analysis tool.
Choose the Settings option and either select or deselect the required columns from the available list. Use the
move up and down option to change the column position. You can restore the previous position of columns.

On clicking an indicator, additional information of that particular indicator displays. For more information, refer
Analysis Tools [page 15]

Sort and Filter

You can sort the technical objects in an ascending or descending order. Possible to filter technical objects
according to all selected filters. By default, the list of technical objects and their columns in this analysis tool
are sorted and filtered according to sort and filter defined in the configuration variant.

 Note

● The search, sort, and filter options will display only the columns configured in the variant by the
administrator.
● The attributes of data type Currency are treated as strings in equipment indicators and all the
operation on the field will work as string operations.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

32 PUBLIC Analytics
 ● Equipment indicators also supports Planning Plant, Planner Group and Maintenance Plant fields.

Apply Filter

The Apply as Filter option provides the flexibility to filter all the analysis tools in the analysis tool catalog
according to the selection in the Equipment Indicators

Select the Reset Global Filter option to reset your filtered selection in the analysis tool

Search

Using this analysis tool, you can search for technical objects, their master data, attributes, and indicators.

Unit of Measure (UoM) Conversion

The Equipment indicator tool displays the indicator values in the display UoM.

The numeric values displayed in the equipment indicators complies with the unit system configured in the SAP
Fiori launchpad. Choose Unit of Measure Variant in the Settings option of the SAP Fiori launchpad to
personalize. For more information on UoM, see Analysis Tools [page 15]

Auto Refresh

Possible to refresh data automatically. For more information, refer Analysis Tools [page 15]

Indicator Threshold

Using this analysis tool, it is possible to visualize the indicator threshold range where in the indicator value lies.
These thresholds are visible as colored icons on the page. The indicator thresholds are configured in the
Indicators application. For more information, refer Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273]

Sharing Equipment with Invitee

Invitee will be able to see only the shared equipment and its shared indicators and attribute values.

Related Information

Fields for Configuring Equipment Indicators [page 494]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 33
Adding Analysis Tools to the Explorer [page 19]

3.1.1.6 Notifications

We use the term notification to describe an object created in a back end system (for example, Enterprise Asset
Management) that has been replicated into SAP Predictive Asset Insights and is visible in the Notifications
analysis tool. You use this analysis tool to view notifications for all equipment.

Using this analysis tool, you can perform the following:

● Click a notification in the notification list to view details. You can view details such as failure modes and
causes
● Click the Equipment, Top Equipment, Equipment Description, and Top Equipment Description links to view
details of the top equipment and equipment for which the notifications are created. Details are available in
the Equipment page. For more information, refer Viewing and Creating Equipment Notifications [page 123]
● View the progress of notifications, defined as Planned, Pending, and Completed
○ Planned: All notifications with the basis start date greater than the current date
○ Pending: All notifications with the basic complete date greater than the current date or all notifications
with the basic start date lesser than the current date
○ Completed: All notifications with the status Completed or Closed
● Create a new improvement request or edit an existing improvement request using the Add Evidence
button. You navigate to the Improvement Request page. For more information, refer Creating an
Improvement Request [page 82] and Emerging Issue Detection (EID) [page 79]
● Create a new notification and assign it to a top equipment. You can provide additional information such as
type, priority, and description. The newly added notification displays as Notification among the attributes.
Click the Notification to view more details about the notification.
● Use the Filters option to enable filter settings, view default settings defined in the configuration screen, add
and edit filters, and define whether these filters are shown in the filter bar. Click Go to apply the specified
filter(s). In addition, you can also use the Show Filter Bar option to edit the filter and filter conditions
● You can filter Notifications by Date or Date Range. However, the equal (=) operation is not supported to
filter the Date fields.
● Using the Settings option, sort and filter notifications. In addition, search the attributes for a notification
● Automatic or manual refresh of data. For more information, see Analysis Tools [page 15]

Related Information

Fields for Configuring Notifications [page 507]

Equipment [page 95]
Analysis Tools [page 15]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

34 PUBLIC Analytics
3.1.1.6.1 Locations to Add Notifications

You can create notifications from the following locations:

● In the Alerts analysis tool, select one or multiple alerts and create a notification. The notification ID is
updated and you can navigate to view further details of the notification
● In the Notifications analysis tool, create new notification for a piece of equipment. The newly created
notification appears in the analysis tool and you can navigate to view more details
● On the Equipment page, navigate to the alerts view on the Monitoring tab. Select one or multiple alerts and
create a notification. The notification ID is updated in the alerts view with the status. You can navigate to
view more details
● On the Equipment page, navigate to the notifications view on the Maintenance and Services tab. In this view
choose Manage Notification to create a new notification for a piece of equipment. The newly created
notification is displayed in the notification view. You can navigate to view more details

 Note

The notifications are saved in SAP Predictive Asset Insights. They can be pushed to the back end
system using the integration possibilities.

Related Information

Notifications [page 34]

3.1.1.7 Work Orders

We use the term work order to describe an object created in a back end system that has been replicated into
SAP Predictive Asset Insights and is visible in the Work Orders analysis tool.

Using this analysis tool, you can perform the following functions:

● Get an overview of all existing work orders, or just those for a particular top equipment by selecting it and
choosing Apply as Filter. Alternatively you can view the work orders for just one piece of equipment when
using this analysis tool on the Equipment List page.
● Get more information about the work order, for example, view details such as associated documents and
spare part details. Your administrator can configure tabs and organize the information you would like to
see, for example, the service organization or group of subject matter experts to which the work order is
assigned (planner group).
● On clicking the Equipment, Top Equipment, Equipment Description and Top Equipment Description link, the
details of the equipment for which the work order is created displays in the Equipment page. For more
information, refer Viewing Work Orders of an Equipment [page 125] and Equipment Page [page 58].
● View progress of work orders, that is, Planned, Pending, and Completed.
○ Planned: All work orders with the basic start date greater than the current data
○ Pending: All work orders with the basic end date greater than the current date or all work orders that
have start date lesser than the current date

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 35
 ○ Completed: All work orders with the status Completed or Closed
● Start date and end date of work orders display the dates that signify the progress of work orders, which is
as follows:
○ If the work order progress is Planned or Pending, the basic start and end dates display
○ For Completed work order, the actual start and end dates display
● Create an improvement request or edit an existing improvement request using the Add Evidence button.
You navigate to the Improvement Request page. For more information, see Emerging Issue Detection (EID)
[page 79] and Creating an Improvement Request [page 82]
● Use the Filters option to enable filter settings, view default settings defined in the configuration screen, add
and edit filters, and define whether these filters are shown in the filter bar. Click Go to apply the specified
filters(s). In addition, you can also use the Show Filter Bar option edit the filter and filter conditions.
● You can filter Work Orders by Date or Date Range. However, the equal (=) operation is not supported to
filter the Date fields.
● Using the Settings option, sort and filter the work orders. In addition, search the attributes for a work order.
● Automatic or manual refresh of data. For more information, see Analysis Tools [page 15]

Related Information

Explorer [page 13]

3.1.1.8 Map

This analysis tool provides a geographic map with the locations of equipment and functional locations
(technical objects) and allows you to select indicators and apply their colors to the map markers. It also allows
spatial selection.

You can use the map to display where the technical objects are located and analyze them on a map.

 Note

Consider the following:

● The map displays top equipment and top functional locations.

● The map displays a maximum of 10,000 top equipment and top functional locations.
● The map displays top equipment and top functional locations for a maximum of 50 selected models.
● If you are filtering across the analysis tools, the map filters and displays a maximum of 150 top
equipment and top functional locations.
● The map only shows top equipment where Predictive Maintenance is selected as the product relevance
or no product relevance is selected.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

36 PUBLIC Analytics
Layers

On the map, you can use different layers to display specific types of equipment and the functional locations.
The following example displays three different layers in one map as follows:

● Pipelines are displayed as equipment lines.

● Pumps are displayed as equipment markers.
● Mines are displayed as functional location polygons.

Technical Object Information

You can hover over a marker to view information about the top equipment or top functional location that is
represented by that marker. The following information is displayed:

● Technical object ID
● Technical object description
● Model description

 Note

If you hover over a line or polygon, the technical object ID, technical object description, and model
description are not displayed.

If you want to get more information, you can choose a marker or line. The details include links to the
Equipment, Model or Indicator detail pages.

 Note

If a line is fully covered by a polygon, you cannot choose it to show the details.

Also, markers can be visualized by different indicators that you create in Indicators section of the Templates
application, for example, Bearing Temperature. In general, all markers on the map are displayed in blue. When
you select an indicator, only the relevant top equipment and top functional locations for this indicator are

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 37
displayed on the map and the color of the marker changes to visualize the indicator value of the technical
objects according to the thresholds configuration of the indicator, for example:

● Yellow: Warning
● Red: Critical
● Grey: Unknown

If the selected indicator has no value, the marker remains blue.

Additional details about the indicator can be seen by choosing a marker. The details include, for example, the
indicator value, color, threshold, a link to view indicator details, and more. If you have questions about
indicators for your business scenario, ask your administrator.

 Note

The map only correctly displays data for an indicator that is assigned to a single indicator group. If an
indicator is assigned to two indicator groups, and both groups are assigned to the same model template,
the data is not displayed correctly. If your data is displayed incorrectly, contact your administrator who can
ensure that indicators are only assigned to one indicator group or that indicator groups are only assigned to
one model template.

Map Views

You can switch between different map views by hovering over . By hovering over this icon, the related models
are also displayed, and you can focus your analysis by selecting or deselecting models.

You can choose from multiple map views if these are configured accordingly by your administrator. If you have
questions about the map views for your business scenario, ask your administrator.

 Note

The map views list does not have a scroll bar. That means if you have a list with multiple map views and
models, you only see the map views and models, which are located within the display size of the map. If the
list is longer than the display size of the map, you cannot see all map views and models. Therefore, we
recommend to limit the list of map views and models.

The following list shows some sample map views that can be configured:

● Open Street Maps

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

38 PUBLIC Analytics
 ● Satellite

● Streets

● National Geographic

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 39
● Simple

Features

Zoom In and Depending on which area you want to focus, you can zoom in and zoom out by:
Zoom Out
● Using the corresponding buttons
● Using the mouse wheel

Spatial
 Note
Selection
If you want to draw geofences using a touch-enabled device, consider that the touch
feature does not work in Internet Explorer. In Internet Explorer, you need to turn the
touch feature off in your device manager and use the mouse. Depending on your device,
once you have turned the touch feature off, you may also need to do a restart so that
your change becomes effective.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

40 PUBLIC Analytics
 You can select specific top equipment and top functional locations by drawing one or more
geofences around them, as follows:

● Choose (Draw Polygon) to activate the drawing cursor.

● To draw the geofence, use single mouse clicks/ taps to set points that form the polygon.
● To close the geofence, either double-click/ double-tap at the area on the map where you
want the last point to be or single-click/ tap on the first point. You can draw several
polygons.

● To cancel the geofence, choose (Clear All).

● After selecting top equipment or top functional locations on the map in this way, you can
choose Apply As Filter to filter all analysis tools by that selection. Thus, you can narrow
down your analysis and focus only on the technical objects you want to analyze in more
detail.

Indicator You can select indicators by using the Select Indicator dropdown list to view markers by
Selection different colors and values that you created in the Indicators section of the Templates
application.

Panning the You can pan the map by dragging and dropping it. If you zoomed out to the lowest level, the
Map world maps repeat horizontally. Once you drag the map to the next map, the equipment on
the map is also moved.

Data Refresh You can refresh data automatically or manually. For more information, see Analysis Tools
[page 15].

Related Information

Explorer [page 13]

Adding Analysis Tools to the Explorer [page 19]

3.1.1.9 Transformer Health Analytics

This analysis tool provides insights into the health status of mineral-oil filled transformers using the Dissolved
Gas Analysis (DGA) and helps you detect anomalies in the gas concentration of transformers. This helps to
reduce the risk of failure of the transformers in service.

Dissolved Gas Analysis

When a transformer undergoes abnormal thermal and electrical stresses, hydrocarbon gases are produced due
to the decomposition of transformer's insulating oil. Based on the oil samples of the transformer, DGA checks
the concentration of dissolved gases in the insulating oil and detects the type and severity of fault in the
transformer. The faults are displayed using different Duval triangles.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 41
The Duval triangles display the concentration ratio (%) of hydrocarbon gases. There are three Duval triangles:

● Duval Triangle 1
● Duval Triangle 4
● Duval Triangle 5

Each of these Duval triangles displays the concentration ratio of three different hydrocarbon gases and displays
different types of faults. The three sides of the triangle represent the gas concentrations from 0 to 100%. The
types of faults are displayed as fault zones. There are multiple thermal and electrical fault zones. Each fault
zone has a different color and name. The point where a transformer fault is plotted on the fault zones is called a
fault point. The fault points are displayed as dots in the Duval triangles.

Fault Zones
Depending on the Duval triangle and the faults, a combination of the following fault zones is diplayed:

Name Short Description Long Description

PD Corona partial discharge Localized dielectric breakdown of a

small portion of the insulation system
under high voltage stress.

S Stray gassing of mineral oil Stray gassing of oil due to chemical

instability, which is mostly observed in
a newly installed transformer or a
transformer that has not been used for
a long time.

C Thermal faults T3-C, T2-C, and T1-C Hot spots or carbonization of paper
with carbonization of paper due to thermal fault with T > 300 °C.

O Overheating < 250°C Overheating from faults involving

carbonization of paper, potentially very
dangerous.

T1 Thermal faults < 300°C Thermal faults in oil and/or in paper

below 300°C which turns the paper
brown in color.

T2 Thermal faults of 300°C to 700°C Thermal faults in oil and/or in paper

above 300°C but less than 700°C,
resulting in carbonization of paper.

T3 Thermal faults > 700°C Thermal faults in oil and/or in paper

above 700°C, with strong evidence of
carbonization of oil, metal coloration
(800°C), or metal fusion (> 1000°C).

D1 Low energy discharges Low-energy arcing that induces

carbonized perforation or surface
tracking of paper, or formation of
carbon particles in oil.

D2 High energy discharges Discharges in paper or oil, resulting in

extensive damage to paper or large
formation of carbon particles in oil,
metal fusion and tripping of
equipment.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

42 PUBLIC Analytics
 Name Short Description Long Description

T3-H Thermal faults in oil only High temperature thermal fault above
700°C only for the oil and not for paper.

DT Thermal and electrical faults An intermediate zone, attributed to a

combination of thermal and low energy
arcing (electrical faults) in the
transformer.

ND Not determined No specific explanation available for

this zone.

Duval Triangle 1

Duval Triangle 1 is the default triangle that is displayed. It is widely used to detect faults in mineral oil-filled
transformers. The triangle displays the following hydrocarbon gases:

● CH4 (Methane)
● C2H4 (Ethylene)
● C2H2 (Acetylene)

The following graphic displays an example of Duval Triangle 1. In this example, there are four transformers in
the D1, D2, T3 fault zones. The fault points are displayed as white dots:

Duval Triangle 4

Duval Triangle 4 diagnoses low temperature faults in mineral oil-filled transformers. It is used only when the
fault point falls under PD, T1, or T2 fault zones in Duval Triangle 1. The triangle displays the following
hydrocarbon gases:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 43
● H2 (Hydrogen)
● CH4 (Methane)
● C2H6 (Ethane)

The following graphic displays an example of Duval Triangle 4. In this example, there are two transformers in
the ND and S fault zones. The faults point are displayed as white dots:

Duval Triangle 5
Duval Triangle 5 diagnoses low temperature faults in mineral oil-filled transformers. It is used only when the
fault point falls under T2 or T3 fault zones in Duval Triangle 1. The triangle displays the following hydrocarbon
gases:

● CH4 (Methane)
● C2H4 (Ethylene)
● C2H6 (Ethane)

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

44 PUBLIC Analytics
The following graphic displays an example of Duval Triangle 5. In this example, there is one transformer in the
ND fault zone. The fault point is displayed as a white dot:

Working with the Analysis Tool

In order that your administrator can configure the analysis tool, the oil sample data needs to be available in the
system. You can then access the configured analysis tool in one of the following ways:

● From the Explorer, by Adding Analysis Tools to the Explorer [page 19].
● From the Equipment page, by choosing Analytics Transformer Health .

Depending on where the analysis tool is displayed, the analysis tool offers different features for different
analyses.

Working with the Analysis Tool in the Explorer

When you open the analysis tool in the Explorer, per default, the Duval Triangle 1 is displayed for the latest valid
oil sample of each transformer.

There are different features that you can use to work with the analysis tool. Some of these features are
common across the analysis tools. For more information about the common features across all analysis tools,
see Analysis Tools [page 15]. Besides this, the analysis tool offers the following features in the Explorer:

Feature Description

Select Duval triangles You can use the Duval triangle dropdown list to select the
Duval triangle that you would like to view.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 45
Feature Description

View fault zone details Next to the Duval triangle, you can hover over the fault
zones in the legend to view the descriptions of the fault
zones.

View fault point details In the Duval triangle, you can hover over a fault point to
display the ID of the transformer. When you choose the fault
point, the following information is displayed:
● Equipment
● Sample Date
● Fault Zone
● Gas Concentrations

If you want to get more information about the transformer,

you can choose View Equipment.

View transformer % per fault zone Next to the Duval triangle, you can view the number of faulty
transformers and their fault zones in a bar chart. Above the
chart, the total number of faulty transformers is displayed.
Each bar represents a fault zone. The percentage value
represents the distribution of the faulty transformers in a
fault zone. You can hover over the bar chart to view the
distribution of the faulty transformers across the fault
zones.

 Example
Above the bar chart, the total number of faulty
transformers is three. The bar chart displays three fault
zones with a percentage value of 33,33%. The rest of
the fault zones have 0%. That means that there are
three fault zones and in each of these fault zones there
is one faulty transformer.

Select oil sample time ranges Per default, all of the oil samples are selected for the
analysis. With the All Time dropdown list, you can select the
samples for a certain time range, for example, the last five
days. The time ranges that you can select in the dropdown
list depend on the ranges that have been defined during the
configuration of the analysis tool.

Working with the Analysis Tool on the Equipment Page

When you open the analysis tool on the Equipment page, per default, the Duval Triangle 1 is displayed for the
latest valid oil sample of the transformer. The analysis tool offers the following features on the Equipment page:

Feature Description

Select Duval triangles You can use the Duval triangle dropdown list to select the
Duval triangle that you would like to view.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

46 PUBLIC Analytics
 Feature Description

View fault zone details Next to the Duval triangle, you can hover over the fault
zones in the legend to view the descriptions of the fault
zones.

View fault point details In the Duval triangle, you can hover over a fault point to
display the sample date. When you choose the fault point,
the following information is displayed:
● Sample Date
● Fault Zone
● Gas Concentrations

Switch between the chart view and table view You can switch between the chart view and the table view by

choosing (Chart View) or (Table View). The chart

view includes the Duval triangles. The table view includes
the oil sample details.

View oil sample details of the transformer If you have switched to the table view, you can view the oil
sample details of the transformer in the descending order of
date. The table shows the concentration level of the
dissolved gases together with the units of the gases in parts
per million (ppm) and the fault zones of the Duval triangles.
Hydrogen, Methane, Ethane, Ethylene, and Acetylene are
mandatory gases required for calculating the coordinates
for the fault point.

In the table, the oil samples can have any of the following
statuses:

● Valid: If all gas concentrations are available for the

analysis, the oil sample is considered as valid and can
be shown in the Duval triangles.
● Invalid: If one or more mandatory gas concentrations
are not available for the analysis, then the oil sample is
considered as invalid and not shown in the Duval
triangles. However, the invalid sample is listed in the
table and marked respectively.
● Limited: If all gas concentrations are available for the
analysis, but a threshold has been defined during the
configuration of the analysis tool for any of the gas
concentrations, and one the gas concentrations falls
below the threshold, the oil sample is considered as
limited and is not shown in the Duval triangles.
However, the limited sample is listed in the table and
marked respectively.

Select oil samples for Duval triangles Although, the latest valid oil sample is displayed in the Duval
triangle per default, you can also select multiple oil samples
from the oil sample details table. You can choose from all oil
samples, but only the valid oil samples will be used. When
you then switch back to the chart view, the fault zones and
fault points for the selected valid oil samples are displayed
in the Duval triangle.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 47
Feature Description

View the sequence of faults If you have selected multiple oil samples in the oil sample
details table, you can view the sequence of faults in the
Duval triangle. The fault points are connected by arrows.
The direction of the arrows represents the oil sample data
trend in ascending order of date.

Related Information

Explorer [page 13]

3.1.2 Explorer Global Filter

The Explorer global filter is a filter function in the Explorer that enables you to filter all your analysis tools in the
Explorer based on several attributes, for example, class or location in one go.

The Explorer global filter is displayed at the top of the Explorer.

 Note

Consider the following:

● The Explorer global filter filters based on top equipment and top functional locations. Currently, the
alerts, equipment indicators, and map analysis tools return both technical objects. The rest of the
analysis tools return top equipment only.
● The Explorer global filter filters a maximum of 10,000 top equipment across all analysis tools.
● The Explorer global filter only filters top equipment where Predictive Maintenance is selected as the
product relevance or no product relevance is selected.

Explorer Global Filter Variants

For the Explorer global filter, variants can be configured by an administrator. The variants contain different
filters. When you select a variant in the Explorer, the defined filters are applied to all analysis tools in the
Explorer. When you then leave the Explorer and later open it again, the variant is selected and automatically
applied. For more information about the configuration, see Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page
489].

 Note

In addition to the variants configured by an administrator, we also deliver a preconfigured variant entitled
SAP Standard. This variant contains no filters so that the analysis tools show data for all top equipment and
depending on the analysis tool for all top functional locations. If your administrator has deleted this
preconfigured variant, it is not available to you.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

48 PUBLIC Analytics
As a business user, you can also adjust variants in the Explorer by defining additional filters or removing filters
to work with the Explorer according to the personal business scenario. These filters are only temporary and are
not adapted to the variant.

Using the Explorer Global Filter

For more information about using the Explorer global filter with variants and filters, see Using the Explorer
Global Filter with Variants [page 49] and Using the Explorer Global Filter with Filters [page 50].

Related Information

Explorer [page 13]

Analysis Tools [page 15]

3.1.2.1 Using the Explorer Global Filter with Variants

This topic describes how to use variants to filter all analysis tools in the Explorer.

Prerequisites

● At least one analysis tool has been added to the Explorer. For more information, see Adding Analysis Tools
to the Explorer [page 19].
● At least one variant for the Explorer global filter has been configured by an administrator or the
preconfigured variant is available. For more information about the configuration, see Explorer and Analysis
Tools Configuration [page 489].

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Analytics group and open the Explorer application.

The Explorer global filter with the preconfigured variant is displayed. If the preconfigured variant has been
deleted, another configured variant or the last selected variant is displayed.
2. To select a different variant, expand the variant dropdown list next to the variant title.

The My Views pop over is displayed.

3. In the pop over, select the desired variant. You can choose from all configured variants.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 49
Results

The filters are applied to all analysis tools in the Explorer and the analysis tools show data for the same top
equipment and depending on the analysis tool also for the same top functional locations. Below the variant
title, you can view which filters are applied, for example, Model (1).

To view the number of the returned technical objects (top equipment and/or top functional locations), expand
the filter bar by choosing (Expand Header) below the Explorer global filter. You can later collapse the filter
bar again.

To reset the applied filters in the analysis tools, choose (Reset Global Filter).

Related Information

Explorer Global Filter [page 48]

3.1.2.2 Using the Explorer Global Filter with Filters

This topic describes how to select a combination of filters from scratch to filter all analysis tools in the Explorer.

Prerequisites

● At least one analysis tool has been added to the Explorer. For more information, see Adding Analysis Tools
to the Explorer [page 19].
● At least one variant for the Explorer global filter has been configured by an administrator or the
preconfigured variant is available. For more information about the configuration, see Explorer and Analysis
Tools Configuration [page 489].

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Analytics group and open the Explorer application.

The Explorer global filter with the preconfigured variant is displayed. If the preconfigured variant has been
deleted, another configured variant or the last selected variant is displayed.

2. Expand the filter bar by choosing (Expand Header) below the Explorer global filter.
3. Define the filters. You can choose between the following options:

○ Select the filters and values for the filters in the filter bar directly.
○ Choose Adapt Filters and select the filters and values for the filters in the dialog box. In the dialog box,
you can also deselect filters. The filters are then hidden in the filter bar.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

50 PUBLIC Analytics
 4. Choose Go.

Results

The filters are applied to all analysis tools in the Explorer and the analysis tools show data for the same top
equipment and depending on the analysis tool also for the same top functional locations. In the filter bar, you
can view the number of the returned technical objects (top equipment and/or top functional locations).

You can also collapse the filter bar by choosing (Collapse Header). Below the variant title, the applied
filters are then displayed, for example, Model (1).

To reset the applied filters in the analysis tools, choose (Reset Global Filter).

Related Information

Explorer Global Filter [page 48]

3.2 Features in Indicator Chart

This analysis tool enables you to visualize data across one or more indicators. You can also view the alerts,
notifications, work orders, and threshold related to an equipment and functional location.

Variants

You can select variants created using the configuration screen. Depending on the selected variant, the default
time range and number of points on the chart varies. SAP delivers two preconfigured variants Indicator Chart -
SAP Default and Indicator Chart - SAP Default Indicators for a Model.

 Note

The variant Indicator Chart-SAP Default Indicators for a Model is available only in Equipment page and
not in Explorer.

For more information, see Fields for Configuring the Indicator Chart [page 497]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 51
Duration

You can choose the time interval for your analysis as follows:

● By selecting an analysis tool variant with the required time interval

● By picking a specific start and end date from the calendar by clicking the Custom Data option

 Note

By selecting dates accordingly, it is possible to visualize work orders and notifications that are yet to be
created/added.

Add Evidence

You can create an improvement request or edit an improvement request. The selected date range in the
indicator chart and selected indicators are available within the Description tab of an improvement request. For
more information, see Emerging Issue Detection (EID) [page 79] and Creating an Improvement Request [page
82]

Select Indicators

You select, group, and sort indicators using the Select Indicators dialog box (maximum of 30 indicators). By
default, indicators set as Favorite displays. To select the maximum number of indicators for a piece of
equipment with indicators more than 30, select the checkbox in the header row. The first 30 indicators are
selected.

Depending on the indicator color selected in the Templates application, the indicator chart displays in the same
color.

 Note

This feature is not enabled for the indicator chart from the Explorer.

Legend

You have the following options:

● Hide and display legend. Remove indicators via legends.

● Icons in the legend represent different indicator types. On clicking the indicator, the respective indicator
types display (highlighted) on the chart:
○ Circle represents flow
○ Triangle represents level
○ Square denotes the indicator type discrete

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

52 PUBLIC Analytics
Reset

You can reset time selections you made for the indicator chart to their initial state by choosing Reset Selection

Settings

You can decide the settings required on the chart. The following options are available:

● Indicators: Select the option to decide whether indicators must display as points or lines or as both on the
chart
● Threshold: On selecting, the primary thresholds selected in the Indicator's application displays in the
indicator. The number of thresholds defned as primary in the Indicator's application displays.
● Forecast: On selecting a duration, the forecast data for the highlighted indicator displays on the chart. The
duration starts from the day you select the duration.
● Values: Select to view a maximum or minimum value or both value of the displayed indicator points on the
chart
● Events: Select to view alerts, work orders, and notifications, if any on the chart

Autoscaling

You can scale the Y axis of the indicator chart automatically or manually. Click any of the Y axis labels to view
the Y-Axis Setting popup. Automatic scaling is activated by default. If you deselect the Default Values checkbox,
you can enter minimum and maximum values to manually scale the Y axis.

Time Selector

Using the time line selector available at the bottom of a chart, you can select a particular time period within the
time interval to narrow down your analysis and zoom into the indicator chart. The shorter the time period, the
higher the granularity of the indicator chart. You can also select a time period directly in the indicator chart. To
do so, place your cursor directly in the chart at the starting point of the time period. Then click and drag the
cursor to the end point of the time period. When you release the mouse button, the indicator chart is focused
on the selected time period.

Indicators

There are three categories of indicator in the indicator charts, that is, flow, level, and discrete. Depending on the
indicator chosen, the corresponding graph is displayed.

 Note

Consider the following:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 53
 ● Only numeric indicators are supported.
● The included indicator values are within the retention period. The retention period is maintained for the
SAP Internet of Things store and can have a maximum range of 5 years. For more information, see
Create Retention Period for Time Series Data Store.

● Flow: These variables are visible as continuous variations on the chart.

● Level: These variables remain unchanged until a new value exists, that is, level variables are not
interpolated linearly between indicators, but a step function is used (the last value is repeated until a new
value exists). An example of a level variable is stock inventory.
● Discrete: Three statuses are considered for discrete, that is, 0, 1 and 2.

Value Status Color

0 Off Nil

1 On Dark shade

2 Idle Light shade

 Note

Any other value apart from 0, 1 and 2 represents a null status and will be hatched

The mouseover for a value displays the value as a string. The strings are hard coded, but language
dependent. You can find more information on SAP Help Portal under Templates in the API Tutorial

Let's take the pump as an example. From the Select Indicators option, choose pressure (flow), waterlevel
(level), and the blower status (discrete) as the indicator.

● Flow variable: Pressure displays the line graph for values that are available within the selected range
● Level variable: Waterlevel displays the step graph for values that are available within the selected range.
● Discrete variable: Blower status displays the active (On, Off) or inactive (Idle) status of the indicator in
colors.
The legend is displayed at the side of the chart.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

54 PUBLIC Analytics
Indicator Forecasting

The indicator chart supports the forecasting of indicator values of an equipment of an equipment model. You
can select the duration for which the forecast needs to be displayed. The supported duration is one day, one
week, one month, and 3 months. The duration starts from the day you select the duration.

The indicator that is forecasted displays as a dotted line. The blue area displays the confidence interval with the
upper and lower boundry. The confidence interval also indicates how reliable the forecasting is. A small
confidence interval indicates a reliable forecasting. If no data is available for a particular time in the time range
of historical time series data, no lines displays within the indicator chart.

Prerequisite: You should configure forecasting for the indicator in the Models application. For more
information, refer Configuring Indicator Forecasting for a Model [page 147].

 Note

Consider the following:

● This feature is available only within the indicator chart in the equipment page.
● To view the indicator forecast after the configuration, the related piece of equipment needs to be
synchronized with SAP Internet of Things.

Alerts

The indicator chart visualizes alerts for the selected indicators and selected equipment hierarchy. Same type of
alerts for a top equipment or equipment aggregate within small intervals and are visible on the chart. By
default, alerts that are related to an equipment and not linked to an indicator displays in the indicator chart. On
adding the indicators, the alerts linked to the selected indicator also displays in the chart.

Alerts associated to multiple indicators are displayed in Indicator Chart in the Equipment Details page and Alert
Details page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 55
View the alerts and threshold related to a technical object. For an alert of a technical object, indicator chart is
displayed on the Alert page.

You can control the visibility of alerts using the Settings option.

Work Orders

The indicator chart visualizes work orders for the selected equipment or component hierarchy. Same type of
work orders for a top equipment or equipment aggregate and are visible on the chart as a line. Click the
corresponding icon to view the work order details.

Notifications

The indicator Chart visualizes notifications for the selected equipment or component hierarchy. Same type of
notifications for a top equipment or equipment aggregate and are visible on the chart as a line. Click the
corresponding icon to view the notification details.

Threshold

You can view the thresholds for the highlighted indicators in the indicator chart. The primary thresholds
selected in the Indicator's application displays on the chart. The number of thresholds defined as primary in the
Indicators application displays. By default, except for the border lines, the threshold color appears transparent.
Transparency is maintained to prevent overlapping of chart details.

 Note

Thresholds are only displayed for the indicator category, Flow and Level.

Unit of Measure (UoM) Conversion

Global UoM Settings

The values displayed in the indicator chart complies with the unit system configured in the SAP Fiori
launchpad. Choose Unit of Measure in the Settings option of the SAP Fiori launchpad to personalize. For more
information on UoM, see Analysis Tools [page 15]

The indicator chart tool will display the indicator values in the display UoM.

Indicator Chart Specific UoM Conversion

The indicator chart support conversion of indicator values from one UoM to another. Click the Y axis to display
the UoM conversion popover. Once the conversion is performed for a UoM, all indicators of that particular UoM
will be converted.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

56 PUBLIC Analytics
When you switch from regular chart to multi chart, the unit of measure conversion also reflects accordingly.
You cannot perform the new UoM conversion in the multi chart.

 Note

After the conversion, the target unit of measure will be displayed in the Y axis and tooltip. The select
indicator popup will display the previous unit of measure.

Multi Chart

Multi chart provides capability to display multiple charts and segregate indicators according to unit of measure
(UoM). Click the Multi Chart option in the indicator chart to perform this action.

When switching from regular chart to multi chart, the indicators within the indicator chart is segregarated into
multiple charts according to unit of measure. You can add or delete chart of unit of measure using the new
select indicators option. A maximum of 5 charts is supported with 6 indicators per chart. If any of the
conditions are not met, a corresponding indicator selection popup with warning message displays.

 Note

You cannot view events, threshold, indicator forecast, and values.

 Note

Any changes with respect to multi chart persists when navigating from the indicator chart to multi chart
and back only if there are no changes to the indicators.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 57
AutoRefresh

Possible to refresh data automatically or manually. For more information, refer Analysis Tools [page 15]

Sharing Indicator with Invitee

Invitee will be able to see the time-series data only of the shared equipment and shared indicators.

Related Information

Indicator Chart [page 21]

Explorer [page 13]
Adding Analysis Tools to the Explorer [page 19]
Fields for Configuring the Indicator Chart [page 497]

3.3 Equipment Page

You use the Equipment page to get an overview of all the data associated with a selected piece of equipment.

You can access the Equipment page in the following ways:

● From the Explorer by choosing an equipment link in the Alerts, Indicator Chart, Work Orders, Notifications,
Equipment Indicator, Map, or Transformer Health Analytics analysis tools.
● From the Equipment List via the Equipment application under Master Data on the SAP Fiori launchpad.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

58 PUBLIC Analytics
Overview of Information Available on the Equipment Page

Tab Contents

Information ● Highlights
● Data Sheet
● Model Information
● Equipment Information
● Business Partner
● Sales Organization Data
● Installation Location
● Life Cycle Information
● Systems
● Groups

Structure and Parts ● Highlights

● Structure
● Spare Parts
● Visual Parts

Documentation ● Highlights
● Documents
● Instructions
● Failure Modes
● Alert Types
● Announcements
● Improvement Requests
● Fingerprints

Monitoring ● Alerts [page 22]

● Indicators
● Component Indicators
● Indicator Chart [page 122]

Maintenance & Services ● Highlights

● Notifications [page 123]
● Work Orders [page 125]
● Baseline

Analytics ● Analytics Dashboards [page 70]

● Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]
● Leading Indicators [page 127]
● Failure Curve
● Transformer Health Analytics [page 41]

Timeline All updates of the equipment are recorded here.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 59
Related Information

Explorer [page 13]

3.4 Failure Mode Analytics

Failure mode analytics uses machine learning to turn the human knowledge contained within the texts of
notifications into insights about the nature of failures. This provides you with insights and analytics about the
patterns of failures for your equipment and equipment models.

Background Information

● Failure mode analytics uses unsupervised and supervised machine learning to analyze notification texts
and extract the most related topics and words from notification texts. It then assigns them to standard
failure modes for your equipment and equipment models.
● The system uses various metrics and visualizations to provide you with insights and analytics about the
patterns of failures for your equipment and equipment models.

Failure Mode Analytics for Multiple Applications

Failure mode analytics is displayed in multiple applications for different analyses:

● On the equipment and model pages of the business object applications

On these object pages, the failure mode cards show how often the failure modes appeared in the
notifications for the equipment and equipment model. On the failure mode cards, you can also view details
that include KPIs for MTTR (Mean Time To Repair), MTTF (Mean Time To Failure), MTBF (Mean Time
Between Failure), and the top bad actors.
● In the Failure Modes and Failure Mode Analytics applications
In these applications, you can find the top words found within the notifications for the selected failure
mode and equipment model. For the top words, you can also view the top-related notifications with their
work orders.

 Example

Rose, a reliability engineer, spots a problematic asset, Pump-00554, which pumps crude through a
pipeline. She reviews its alerts in the Explorer. The alerts point towards a bearing problem, so Rose checks
on two influencing factors: the oil lubrication level, and the temperature of the inflow. She suspects that the
inflow temperature is an issue and that the root cause could be a crack in the pump casing. To confirm her
assumption, she uses failure mode analytics to get more information. The failure mode OHE (Overheating)
has the most occurrences and the MTBF (Mean-Time-Between-Failure) is 1515 hours. She views the
detailed analysis for OHE (Overheating) and the top words from the notification text data are Oil level and
Temperature High. She looks at the notification that is ranked as most relevant and sees that it was created

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

60 PUBLIC Analytics
 1440 hours ago, which means that the next failure is predicted to occur soon because the MTBF is 1515
hours. She also looks up the related work order to see how it was fixed.

Related Tasks

Using Failure Mode Analytics on the Equipment or Model Pages [page 61]

Using Failure Mode Analytics in the Failure Modes Application [page 67]

Using the Failure Mode Analytics Application [page 68]

Related Information

Failure Modes [page 176]

3.4.1 Using Failure Mode Analytics on the Equipment or

Model Pages

This topic describes how to use failure mode analytics on the equipment or model pages.

Prerequisites

● Failure mode analytics has been configured. For more information, see Configuring Failure Mode Analytics
[page 461].
● The roles AC_ORG_DATA_READ and APP_READ are assigned to your user.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Master Data group and open the Equipment or Models application.
2. Choose the piece of equipment or equipment model that you want to analyze.

 Note

Only choose the piece of equipment for which equipment model failure mode analytics has been
configured, or the equipment model for which failure mode analytics has been configured. Otherwise,
the results are empty. If you are unsure for which equipment model failure mode analytics has been
configured, contact your administrator.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 61
3. Choose ANALYTICS Failure Modes .

Results

The top 5 failure modes for the equipment model within the last 365 days are displayed in cards.

 Note

You can also select a different time period and choose the Go button to apply your selection. Be aware that
if you, for example, select the time period from January 8 to January 9, this is a 48 hour time span, not a 24
hour time span.

The failure modes are ranked by the number of occurrences, depending on how often specific words related to
the failure mode occurred in the notifications for this piece of equipment or equipment model. You can view
details about a failure mode by choosing the failure mode description on the card. You can also display all
failure modes that are assigned to the equipment model by choosing All Failure Modes.

On the failure mode cards, the following KPIs are displayed:

● The number of times this failure mode was identified in the notifications created during the time period
● For the piece of equipment, to what extent this figure compares against all notifications analyzed for the
equipment model
● The MTTR (Mean Time To Repair), MTTF (Mean Time To Failure), and MTBF (Mean Time Between Failure =
The sum of MTTR + MTTF) for each failure mode. For more information about the calculation of these KPIs,
see Calculation of Mean Time KPIs [page 63].
● For the equipment model, the top bad actors for each failure mode

 Note

If there are more than 5 failure modes found for the equipment model and some failure modes were
removed from the equipment model after the configuration of failure mode analytics (after the model
scoring), the following can happen: when you switch from the top 5 failure modes cards to all failure modes,
the card data might change for the same failure mode, for example, the occurrence of the failure mode in
notifications.

Next Steps

To view the top words of a specific failure mode and the top-related notifications with their work orders, you
can now navigate to the Failure Mode Analytics application by choosing View Analytics on a failure mode card.
For more information about the results when using the application, see Using the Failure Mode Analytics
Application [page 68].

Related Information

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

62 PUBLIC Analytics
Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]

3.4.1.1 Calculation of Mean Time KPIs

On the failure mode cards, you can view KPIs for Mean Time to Repair (MTTR), Mean Time to Failure (MTTF),
and Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) for each failure mode at equipment level and model level. This topic
provides you with an overview of how these KPIs are calculated including examples.

Overview

During the failure mode analysis, notifications for all equipment of a model are collected within the time range.
Based on these collected notifications, the downtimes caused by failures and the subsequent uptimes when a
failure has been rectified, can be identified. Failures are notifications with a breakdown. That means these
notifications have the breakdown attribute set to True or the notificationTypeDescription attribute set
to Breakdown. For more information about viewing the notificationTypeDescription attribute, see
Viewing and Creating Equipment Notifications [page 123]. For more information about viewing the breakdown
attribute, see Notifications.

These failures and corresponding downtimes as well as uptimes are the basis for the calculation of the KPIs for
MTTR, MTTF, and MTBF. The following graphic illustrates these dependencies:

Mean Time to Repair (MTTR)

The mean time to repair is the expected average time period that it takes to repair a piece of equipment or
model that is down because of a failure or planned maintenance. It is the downtime of a piece of equipment or
model. The KPI for this mean time is calculated as follows:

Mean Time to Repair = (The total time period when the piece of equipment or model is down for a repair
during the time range) / (the number of repairs during the time range)

The total time period when the piece of equipment or model is down for a repair during the time range is
the time period between the malfunction start date and the malfunction end date of a notification. The number
of repairs during the time range is the total number of collected notifications for which the time to repair
(downtime) is known.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 63
  Example

You have selected 1 month as a time range for your failure mode analysis. Within this period, 1 notification
was collected. This notification has a malfunction start date at 4:30 a.m. January 1, 2019 and a malfunction
end date at 4:30 p.m. January 1, 2019.

This means that the total time period when the piece of equipment or model is down for a repair is 12 hours
and the number of repairs for which the time to repair (downtime) is known is 1. The resulting mean time to
repair is 12 hours (12/1).

 Example

You have selected 2 months as a time range for your failure mode analysis. Within this period, 3
notifications were collected. For all these 3 notifications, the time to repair (downtime) is known:

● The first notification has a malfunction start date at 3:00 a.m. January 1, 2019 and a malfunction end
date at 3:00 p.m. January 1, 2019.
● The second notification has a malfunction start date at 3:00 a.m. January 2, 2019 and a malfunction
end date at 3:00 p.m. January 2, 2019.
● The third notification has a malfunction start date at 3:00 a.m. January 3, 2019 and a malfunction end
date at 9:00 a.m. January 3, 2019.

This means that the total time period when the piece of equipment or model is down for a repair is 30 hours
(12+12+6) and the number of repairs for which the time to repair (downtime) is known is 3. The resulting
mean time to repair is 10 hours (30/3).

Mean Time to Failure (MTTF)

The mean time to failure is the expected average time period between an ended failure and the next expected
failure. It is the uptime of a piece of equipment or model and a basic measure of how reliable an ideally non-
repairable system is. Furthermore, the mean time to failure is a statistical value and is meant to be the mean
over a long period of time and a large number of units. The KPI for this mean time is calculated as follows:

Mean Time to Failure = (The total time period when the piece of equipment or model is up before a failure
during the time range) / (the number of failures during the time range)

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

64 PUBLIC Analytics
The total time period when the piece of equipment or model is up before a failure during the time range is
the time period between the malfunction end date of a notification and the malfunction start date of the next
notification with a breakdown. The number of failures during the time range is the total number of collected
notifications that have a breakdown and for which the uptime before a failure is known.

 Example

You have selected 1 month as a time range for your failure mode analysis. Within this period, 2 notifications
with a breakdown were collected. For the second notification, the uptime before a failure is known. For the
first notification, the uptime before the first failure is not known:

● The first notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 2:00 a.m. January 1, 2019 and a
malfunction end date at 2:00 p.m. January 1, 2019.
● The second notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 8:00 p.m. January 1, 2019
and a malfunction end date at 2:00 a.m. January 2, 2019.

This means that the total time period when the piece of equipment or model is up before a failure is 6 hours
and the number of failures for which the uptime before a failure is known is 1. The resulting mean time to
failure is 6 hours (6/1).

 Example

You have selected 2 months as a time range for your failure mode analysis. Within this period, 3
notifications with a breakdown were collected. For 2 of these notifications, the uptimes before a failure are
known. For the first notification, the uptime before the first failure is not known:

● The first notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 2:00 a.m. January 1, 2019 and a
malfunction end date at 2:00 p.m. January 1, 2019.
● The second notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 8:00 p.m. January 1, 2019
and a malfunction end date at 2:00 a.m. January 2, 2019.
● The third notification with a breakdown has as malfunction start date at 10:00 a.m. January 2, 2019
and a malfunction end date at 1:00 p.m. January 2, 2019.

This means that the total time period when the piece of equipment or model is up before a failure is 14
hours (6+8) and the number of failures for which the uptime before a failure is known is 2. The resulting
mean time to failure is 7 hours (14/2).

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 65
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)

The mean time between failures is the expected average time period between the last failure and the next
upcoming failure. It is a measure of how reliable a system is. The KPI for this mean time is calculated as follows:

Mean Time Between Failures = (The total time period between two subsequent failures during the time
range) / (the number of failures during the time range)

The total time period between two subsequent failures during the time range is time period between the
malfunction start date of a previous notification with a breakdown and the malfunction start date of the next
notification with a breakdown. The number of failures during the time range is the total number of collected
notifications that have a breakdown and for which the time period between two subsequent failures is known.

 Example

You have selected 1 month as a time range for your failure mode analysis. Within this period, 2 notifications
with a breakdown were collected. For the first notification, the time period between the subsequent failures
is known. For the second notification, the time period between the subsequent failures is not known as the
next failure has not yet started:

● The first notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 8:00 a.m. January 1, 2019 and a
malfunction end date at 1:00 p.m. January 1, 2019.
● The second notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 5:00 p.m. January 1, 2019 a
malfunction end date at 2:00 a.m. January 2, 2019.

This means that the total time period between subsequent failures is 9 hours and the number of failures for
which the time period between the subsequent failures is known is 1. The resulting mean time between
failures is 9 hours (9/1).

 Example

You have selected 2 months as a time range for your failure mode analysis. Within this period, 3
notifications with a breakdown were collected. For 2 of these notifications, the time period between the
subsequent failures is known. For the third notification, the time period between the subsequent failures is
not known as the next failure has not yet started:

● The first notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 8:00 a.m. January 1, 2019 and a
malfunction end date at 1:00 p.m. January 1, 2019.
● The second notification with a breakdown has a malfunction start date at 5:00 p.m. January 1, 2019 a
malfunction end date at 2:00 a.m. January 2, 2019.
● The third notification with a breakdown has as malfunction start date at 10:00 a.m. January 2, 2019
and a malfunction end date at 2:00 p.m. January 2, 2019.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

66 PUBLIC Analytics
 This means that the total time period between subsequent failures is 26 hours (9+17) and the number of
failures for which the time period between the subsequent failures is known is 2. The resulting mean time
between failures is 13 hours (26/2).

3.4.2 Using Failure Mode Analytics in the Failure Modes

Application

This topic describes how to use failure mode analytics in the Failure Modes application.

Prerequisites

● Failure mode analytics has been configured. For more information, see Configuring Failure Mode Analytics
[page 461].
● The roles AC_ORG_DATA_READ and APP_READ are assigned to your user.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Master Data group and open the Failure Modes application.
2. In the Failure Mode List window, select the failure mode that you want to analyze.
3. Choose the ANALYTICS tab.
4. Select the equipment model to which the failure mode belongs.

 Note

Only choose the equipment model for which failure mode analytics has been configured. Otherwise,
the results are empty. If you are unsure for which equipment model failure mode analytics has been
configured, contact your administrator.

5. Choose Go.

Results

The failure mode analysis is complete and the following results are displayed:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 67
● In the Top words bar graph, the most frequently occurring words found within the notifications for the
selected failure mode and equipment model are displayed. This helps you to see if there is a term that
seems relevant to the issues you may have with the related equipment. The top words are ranked by
relevancy. The ranking contains values from 1 as the most relevant, to 0 as the least relevant.
● In the Top Notifications table, the top-related notifications for the top words are displayed. This helps you to
find a solution for your issues. The top notifications are ranked by relevancy, and likelihood of belonging to
a failure mode. The ranking contains values from 1 as the most relevant, to 0 as the least relevant. The
colors for the ranking are provided in three groups:
○ Green scores = 0.670 to 1
○ Yellow scores = 0.340 to 0.669
○ Red scores = 0 to 0.339
You can view details of a notification by clicking the notification link.
● Under Related Order in the Top Notifications table, the work orders for the notifications are displayed. From
the work orders, you can derive the actions taken for equipment of the same equipment model. You can
view details of a work order by clicking the work order link.

Related Information

Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]

3.4.3 Using the Failure Mode Analytics Application

This topic describes how to use the Failure Mode Analytics application.

Prerequisites

● Failure mode analytics has been configured. For more information, see Configuring Failure Mode Analytics
[page 461].
● The role APP_READ is assigned to your user.

 Note

If the required role is not assigned to your user, you cannot see the application on the launchpad.
Contact your Identity Management Administrator if the role has not been assigned to your user yet.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Analytics group and open the Failure Mode Analytics application.
2. Select the equipment model that you want to analyze. You can choose from all equipment models for
which failure mode analytics has been configured.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

68 PUBLIC Analytics
 3. Select a failure mode that belongs to the equipment model. You can choose from all failure modes that
have been assigned to the equipment model during the failure mode analytics configuration.
4. Choose Go.

Results

The failure mode analysis is complete and the following results are displayed:

● In the Top words bar graph, the most frequently occurring words found within the notifications for the
selected failure mode and equipment model are displayed. This helps you to see if there is a term that
seems relevant to the issues you may have with the related equipment. The top words are ranked by
relevancy. The ranking contains values from 1 as the most relevant, to 0 as the least relevant.
● In the Top Notifications table, the top-related notifications for the top words are displayed. This helps you to
find a solution for your issues. The top notifications are ranked by relevancy, and likelihood of belonging to
a failure mode. The ranking contains values from 1 as the most relevant, to 0 as the least relevant. The
colors for the ranking are provided in three groups:
○ Green scores = 0.670 to 1
○ Yellow scores = 0.340 to 0.669
○ Red scores = 0 to 0.339
You can view details of a notification by clicking the notification link.
● Under Related Order in the Top Notifications table, the work orders for the notifications are displayed. From
the work orders, you can derive the actions taken for equipment of the same equipment model. You can
view details of a work order by clicking the work order link.

Related Information

Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]

3.5 Personal Dashboard

This app is personalized to be a one-stop point to navigate to the applications, your frequently viewed items of
equipment, favorites, and unread announcements.

Personal Dashboard has the following sections:

● Overview: Contains a search bar to find objects from applications such as Equipment, Models, and
Instructions.
● Applications: Allows you to navigate directly to applications from this section.

 Note

The application links are displayed based on roles assigned to you.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 69
● Frequently Viewed: Displays your frequently viewed items of equipment, locations, models, and systems as
thumbnails. You can navigate to an item of equipment, location, model, or system through these
thumbnails.
● My Favorites: Shows up to 20 items of equipment, locations, models, and systems that you’ve marked as
favorites on the object page.
● Suggested Tasks: Displays unread announcements.

3.6 Analytics Dashboards

Analytics dashboards visualize data, for example, by using interactive charts or tables. This provides you with
insights and allows you to analyze and explore your data.

Stories from SAP Analytics Cloud

The source of the analytics dashboards are stories from SAP Analytics Cloud. A story is a presentation-style
report that uses charts, visualizations, text, images, and pictograms to describe data. You can embed the
stories as analytics dashboards in SAP Predictive Asset Insights. The following graphic displays an example of
a story:

Creation of Analytics Dashboards

You have two options how you can create dashboards. You can use both options in parallel. The following
graphic displays the options:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

70 PUBLIC Analytics
Custom Live

 Note

The custom live option is only available with Amazon Web Services (AWS).

You can use the custom live option. This option is useful if you want to combine data from SAP Predictive Asset
Insights with other data to do own calculations, and so on. The data from SAP Predictive Asset Insights
includes the following:

● Master data: Most of the attributes for equipment (including custom attributes), models, locations,
installation locations, notifications, and alerts
● Time series data: Non-numeric indicators, hourly aggregated data for numeric indicators, and last
indicator values

You can use the data live in the dashboard. Any data changes are reflecting in your dashboard. To use this
option, you need your own SAP HANA database and access to SAP Analytics Cloud.

Custom Offline

There is also the option to copy data from SAP Predictive Asset Insights. This includes the following data:

● Header data of equipment (without custom attributes), models, locations, spare parts, notifications, and
work orders
● Last indicator values

This option is useful to include spare parts in the dashboard. Any data changes are not reflecting in your
dashboard unless you schedule a data replication job. To use this option, you need access to SAP Analytics
Cloud.

For more information about the technical requirements to use the options, see Enabling Analytics Dashboards
[page 468].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 71
Analytics Dashboards for Multiple Applications

You can view the dashboards in multiple applications. This includes the following:

● Dashboards in the Analytics Dashboards application: With these dashboards, you can view analytics on
data that is related to multiple objects, for example, for all equipment or models with their related data like
notifications.
● Dashboards on object pages: With these dashboards, you can view analytics on data that is related to a
single object, for example, one piece of equipment or one model. One analytics dashboard is displayed per
object. The objects include:
○ Equipment
○ Models
○ Locations
○ Spare Parts

 Note

Spare parts are only available for custom offline dashboards.

Features in Analytics Dashboards

To analyze and explore your data, you can perform different actions in the dashboards. Possible features are,
for example:

● You can filter table cells or chart data points or exclude non-relevant cells / data points.
● You can interactively select for a chart by which attributes the data should be reduced.
● You can show top or bottom ranked elements in a chart.
● You can add a reference line or trellis chart in a chart.

For more information about all available features, see the SAP Analytics Cloud documentation.

Related Tasks

Creating an Analytics Dashboard [page 73]

Viewing a Dashboard in the Application [page 75]

Viewing a Dashboard on Object Pages [page 76]

Editing an Analytics Dashboard [page 77]

Deleting an Analytics Dashboard [page 78]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

72 PUBLIC Analytics
3.6.1 Creating an Analytics Dashboard

This topic explains how to create a dashboard.

Prerequisites

All configuration steps to enable the creation of custom dashboards in SAP Predictive Asset Insights have been
completed. For more information, see Enabling Custom Live Dashboards [page 471] and Enabling Custom
Offline Dashboards [page 476].

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Analytics Dashboards application.

The Dashboards screen is displayed. The screen lists all available dashboards.

2. To create a custom dashboard, choose New Custom .

The New Custom Dashboard dialog box is displayed.

3. In the dialog box, fill in the following fields:

Name Enter a name for the dashboard.

 Note
You can use all characters, except for \, :, and *.

Description Enter a description for the dashboard.

Data Source Select where the data for the dashboard should come
from. You can choose from the following options:
○ Custom Live: If you select this option, the dashboard
includes "live" data from SAP Predictive Asset
Insights together with your own data.
○ Custom Offline: If you select this option, the
dashboard includes copied data from SAP Predictive
Asset Insights
For the users of the application who later view the
dashboards in the list, the data source is only for
informational purposes to understand whether the data
of the dashboard is live or offline, for example, for offline,
the data refreshes only after a replication.

Story URL Paste the URL of your story from SAP Analytics Cloud.

To paste the URL, open the story in SAP Analytics Cloud

and add the parameter ;mode=embed at the end of the
URL.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 73
  Example
https://<domain>/sap/fpa/ui/
app.html#;view_id=story;storyId=<sto
ry ID>;mode=embed

Display In Select where the dashboard should be displayed. You can

choose from the following options:
○ Analytics Dashboards: If you select this option, the
dashboard is displayed in the Analytics Dashboards
application.
○ Equipment: If you select this option, the dashboard is
displayed in the Analytics Dashboards application
and on the object page of the Equipment application.
○ Model: If you select this option, the dashboard is
displayed in the Analytics Dashboards application
and on the object page of the Models application.
○ Location: If you select this option, the dashboard is
displayed in the Analytics Dashboards application
and on the object page of the Locations application.
○ Spare Part: If you select this option, the dashboard is
displayed in the Analytics Dashboards application
and on the object page of the Spare Parts
application.

 Note
Consider the following:
○ For each of the object pages, you can choose
one dashboard. If you later edit a custom
dashboard or create a new custom dashboard
and you select an object page for which a
dashboard is already chosen, the already
existing dashboard for this object page will be
replaced with the new dashboard.
○ Spare parts are only available for custom offline.
This means, if you select spare parts for custom
live dashboards, no data will later be displayed
on the respective object page.

Data Model ID (Only displayed when you have selected an Paste the model ID of your story from SAP Analytics
object page from the dropdown list) Cloud. The model ID filters the story data by a specific
object, for example, a piece of equipment.

To paste the model ID, open SAP Analytics Cloud and add
the string /api/v1/stories?include=models to
the domain of the URL.

 Example
https://<domain>/api/v1/stories?
include=models

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

74 PUBLIC Analytics
 A list with all stories and model information is then
displayed. For the model ID, go to the desired story. The
attribute id is the model ID.

Dimension (Only displayed when you have selected an Enter the dimension of your object. The dimension is the
object page from the dropdown list) ID of your object and filters the story data by that ID, for
example, for the specific piece of equipment.
You can enter the following dimensions:
○ For custom live, the dimension is based on the
internal ID column name, for example,
EQUIPMENT_INTERNALID for equipment.
○ For custom offline:
○ internalId for equipment, models, and
locations
○ sparepartinternalID for spare parts

4. Choose Save.

Results

The dashboard is created.

Related Information

Viewing a Dashboard in the Application [page 75]

Viewing a Dashboard on Object Pages [page 76]

3.6.2 Viewing an Analytics Dashboard

3.6.2.1 Viewing a Dashboard in the Application

This topic explains how to view a dashboard in the application.

Prerequisites

A dashboard has been created.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 75
Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Analytics Dashboards application.

The Dashboards screen is displayed. The screen lists all available dashboards.
2. From the list, choose the dashboard that you want to view.

Results

The dashboard is displayed and you can view the data.

You can later close the dashboard by choosing the back button on the screen.

3.6.2.2 Viewing a Dashboard on Object Pages

This topic explains how to view a dashboard on the object pages.

Prerequisites

● A dashboard for the objects has been created.

● The role AC_ORG_DATA_READ is assigned to your user.
● (Only relevant for configuring the sections of the object pages): The following roles are assigned to your
user:
○ Model page: MODEL_EDIT or MODEL_DELETE
○ Equipment page: EQUIPMENT_EDIT or EQUIPMENT_DELETE
○ Location page: FUNCTIONAL_LOCATION_EDIT or FUNCTIONAL_LOCATION_DELETE

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the application for which you want to view the dashboard. Depending on
the dashboard, you can choose between the following applications:

○ Equipment application
○ Models application
○ Locations application
○ Spare Parts application

 Tip

You can also navigate to the equipment page from the Explorer. For more information, see Explorer
[page 13].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

76 PUBLIC Analytics
 2. Choose the object that you want to analyze, for example, the piece of equipment or model.

The object page is displayed.

3. View the analytics dashboard for the object. Choose between the following options:

○ On the equipment and model page, choose ANALYTICS Dashboard .

○ On the location and spare part page, choose ANALYTICS DASHBOARD.

 Note

If the tab for the analytics dashboard is not displayed, choose (Configure Sections) and activate the
checkbox for Analytics Dashboard. For some of the object pages, the checkbox is within the Analytics
checkbox. In this case, activate both checkboxes. The roles that are required to configure the sections
are listed in the prerequisites.

Results

The dashboard is displayed and you can view the data.

3.6.3 Editing an Analytics Dashboard

This topic explains how to edit a dashboard.

Prerequisites

A dashboard has been created.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Analytics Dashboards application.

The Dashboards screen is displayed. The screen lists all available dashboards.
2. From the list, select the dashboard that you want to edit.
3. Choose Edit.
The Edit Dashboard dialog box is displayed.
4. In the dialog box, change the required fields.
For more information about the fields, see Creating an Analytics Dashboard [page 73].

 Note

Consider the following for the Display In field:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 77
 ○ For each of the object pages, you can choose one dashboard. If you change the selection and you
select an object page for which a dashboard is already chosen, the already existing dashboard for
this object page will be replaced with the new dashboard.
○ Spare parts are only available for custom offline. This means, if you select spare parts for custom
live dashboards, no data will later be displayed on the respective object page.

5. Choose Save.

Results

The dashboard is edited.

3.6.4 Deleting an Analytics Dashboard

This topic explains how to delete a dashboard.

Prerequisites

A dashboard has been created.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Analytics Dashboards application.

The Dashboards screen is displayed. The screen lists all dashboards.

2. From the list, select the dashboard that you want to delete.
3. Choose Delete and confirm the displayed dialog box.

Results

The dashboard is deleted.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

78 PUBLIC Analytics
3.7 Emerging Issue Detection (EID)

Emerging Issue Detection (EID) enables you to identify, monitor, and manage an equipment issue early. As part
of this process, you gather information such as issue history, relevant documents, and investigation details that
will help to make a more detailed analysis of the issue.

The evidence is collected in an improvement request [page 82], using the Add Evidence button.

During your evidence collection, you can create a new improvement request or edit an existing improvement
request. You can manually collect the evidence related to an issue and attach it to an improvement request
using the following analysis tools:

● Indicator Chart

● Features in Indicator Chart [page 51]

● Alerts [page 22]
● Notifications [page 34]
● Work Orders [page 35]

Related Information

Creating an Improvement Request [page 82]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Analytics PUBLIC 79
4 Processes

The tiles under Processes on the SAP Fiori launchpad give you access to the various business processes
offered by SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Overview of Processes

Tile Use

Improvement Requests [page 80] Get suggestions or a solution for an equipment issue by cre­
ating an improvement request.

Obsolescence Management [page 87] A report that graphically illustrates deadlines for manufac­
turer support for a model or a piece of equipment.

Lookup [page 88] Search for error codes and look up related information for an
equipment or a model.

Smart Matcher [page 90] Use this application to assign models to a lean (equipment
with no model assignment to it) equipment.

Work Orders [page 91] View a list of work orders. A work order is an order, which
specifies a task to be carried out on the equipment.

4.1 Improvement Requests

While using an equipment, you could face issues with regard to its process or maintenance. To get suggestions
or a solution, you can create an improvement request. By creating this request, you involve the relevant
stakeholders who can collaborate and provide you with a suggestion or even a solution.

If stakeholders within your organization can resolve your request, create an internal improvement request. If
you want to involve stakeholders outside your organization, create an external improvement request.

The parties involved in this workflow are:

● Requester: The user who requests for a suggestion or a solution by creating an improvement request.
● Reviewer: The user who reviews the improvement request sent by the improvement requester.
● Provider: The user who suggests a solution for the improvement request sent by the requester.

 Note

The user who is currently processing the improvement request is referred to as the Processor. The
processor can be the requester, reviewer or the provider.

Using the Improvement Requests application, you can perform the following tasks:

● Create, Review and submit an improvement request

Creating an Improvement Request [page 82]
Reviewing an Improvement Request [page 83]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

80 PUBLIC Processes
 ● Complete or reject an improvement request
Completing an Improvement Request [page 84]
● Resubmit an improvement request
Resubmitting an Improvement Request [page 84]
● Confirm an improvement request
Confirming an Improvement Request [page 85]
● Reopen a confirmed improvement request
Reopening a Confirmed Improvement Request [page 85]

The following table describes the statuses of an improvement request:

Status Description

Draft The requester has created an improvement request.

In Review The requester has created an improvement request and sent

it to the reviewer for review.

Submitted The requester has submitted the improvement request to

the provider;

OR

The reviewer has submitted the improvement request (cre­

ated by the requester) to the provider.

In Process The improvement request is being processed by the pro­

vider.

Author Action The provider sends the improvement request to the reviewer
or requester for more details.

Rejected The provider has rejected the case as invalid.

Completed The provider has provided a suggestion or a solution.

Confirmed The reviewer has closed the case after it was processed by
the provider.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Processes PUBLIC 81
The following figure illustrates the process flow of an improvement request between an requester, reviewer and
the provider:

4.1.1 Creating an Improvement Request

You create an improvement request when you want suggestions or solutions about a piece of equipment, its
process, or maintenance.

Procedure

1. Open the Improvement Requests application.

2. To create an internal improvement request, choose New Internal .

The system displays the Improvement Request window.

3. To define a case, enter the following details in the New Improvement Request dialog box:
a. Enter a request description
b. Choose a reference object type (Model, Equipment, Location)
c. Choose a reference object ID, based on reference object type chosen.
d. Select an improvement category

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

82 PUBLIC Processes
 In case the selected improvement category is Master Data Improvement, a new revision has to be
created for the reference object.

 Note

In revision is created in the following cases.

○ Only if the reference object ID is either a model or equipment.
○ Requestor must have write access to reference object ID.
○ Reference object must not have an active in revision, that is, if reference object mmust be in a
published state.

e. Choose a priority
f. Select a reviewer to review your improvement request.
g. Select a provider who can provide a resolution to your improvement request.
h. Choose OK.
4. To add one or more items of equipment, choose Edit→ Affected Equipment and perform the following tasks:
a. Choose Add
b. Select one or more items of equipment
c. Choose Assign

5. To add additional information to the case, choose Request Description and provide the necessary
description of the case in the Description text box.

6. To assign instructions to the case, choose Request Instructions and perform the following tasks:
a. Choose the Assign button in the Instructions section.
b. Select one or more instructions from the Select Instructions popup.
c. Choose Assign in the popup.

7. To add additional information to the case using documents, choose Request Documents and
perform the following tasks:

a. Choose Add Assign .

b. Select the relevant document.
c. Choose Assign.
8. Choose Save.
9. Choose Send for Review to submit the case to the reviewer.

○ Choose Submit to submit the request directly to the provider.

4.1.2 Reviewing an Improvement Request

As an reviewer, you perform this procedure to review an improvement request created by an requester.

Context

You have a case assigned to you for review by an requester.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Processes PUBLIC 83
Procedure

1. Open the Improvement Requests application.

The system displays the Improvement Requests window with a list of existing cases.
2. Choose a request from the improvement requests list, or search for a request that you want to review.
3. You can modify information in the request as necessary and add comments in the comments section to
enhance the information required for the processing the request.
4. To submit the request to a provider, choose Submit.

○ To request additional information from the requester, choose Send to Requester for Update.

4.1.3 Completing an Improvement Request

You perform this task to provide a suggestion or a solution to an improvement request created by a requester,
or submitted by a reviewer.

Context

As a provider, you have a request assigned to you that requires resolution either by the reviewer or by the
requester.

Procedure

1. Open the Improvement Requests application. The system displays the improvement requests window
with a list of existing requests.
2. Choose a request from the improvement requests list, or search for a request that you want to resolve.
3. To process the improvement request, choose In Process.
4. To provide a solution for the request, add comments or documents, as required, in the Recommendation
section.
5. Choose Completed.

○ To request additional information from the requester, choose Author Action.

○ To reject the request as an invalid request, choose Reject Improvement Request.

4.1.4 Resubmitting an Improvement Request

As an requester or a reviewer, you can resubmit an improvement request to the provider for further processing.

You can resubmit an improvement request in the following scenarios:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

84 PUBLIC Processes
 ● When the provider sends the improvement request for Author Action asking for additional details from the
requester or reviewer.
● When the provider has already provided the recommendation for the improvement request.
● When the provider has rejected the improvement request.

4.1.5 Confirming an Improvement Request

As an reviewer, you can confirm a request after the provider has provided a recommendation or rejected the
improvement request.

Context

You have received an improvement request that either has a recommendation from a provider, or has been
rejected by the provider.

Procedure

1. Open the Improvement Requests application.

The system displays the Improvement Cases window with a list of existing cases in statuses
Recommendation Provided or Rejected.
2. To add any additional comments, choose Edit.
3. For an improvement request in status Recommendation Provided, choose Confirm to close the request.

○ For a rejected improvement request, you can perform either of the following:
○ Choose Confirm Rejection to close the rejected request.
○ Choose Resubmit to Provider to resubmit the request.

4.1.5.1 Reopening a Confirmed Improvement Request

You perform this activity if you need more information about an improvement request after a recommendation
has been provided or the case has been rejected by the provider.

Prerequisites

● You are either the requester or the reviewer.

● You have an improvement request in the status Confirmed in your Improvement Cases window. For more
details about statuses of improvement cases, refer to the table in Improvement Requests [page 80].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Processes PUBLIC 85
Procedure

1. Open the Improvement Requests application.

2. Choose the improvement request in the status Confirmed.
3. Choose Reopen Request.
4. Choose Yes.
5. Add comments and edit the improvement request as necessary.
6. Click the More icon and choose Resubmit to Provider.
7. Add a comment and choose OK.

The reopened improvement request is sent to the provider.

4.1.6 Viewing the List of Improvement Requests

As a reviewer, provider or requester you might want to see the improvement requests based on certain filters.

Context

The user has an easier way to see the requests based on different statuses and roles.

Procedure

1. Open the Improvement Requestsapp and view the list of the requests. Now, you want to see the requests
that you need to process as a requester.
2. Choose For Processing in the drop down next to the table.
3. Choose <My Processing Role> from the filter bar. Automatically, the request list will be filtered out
based on the statuses set on the filter bar.

4.1.7 Deleting an Improvement Request

You can delete an improvement request that you no longer want to have on the network.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles IMPROVEMENT_DELETE assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

86 PUBLIC Processes
Procedure

1. Open the Improvement Requests app.

2. Select the Improvement Request which is one of the following status: Draft, Rejected, Completed, In
Review or Author Action and go to the details screen.
3. Select Delete Request.

You get a confirmation message. Choose OK to delete the request.

Results

You can view the improvement request in the list screen with status as Deleted.

 Note

You can still submit the deleted requesst to external providers.

4.2 Obsolescence Management

An application that graphically illustrates deadlines for manufacturer support for a model or a piece of
equipment. These deadlines pertain to:

● Support for repair

● Accepting model or equipment orders
● Calibration services
● Availability of spare parts

This application allows timely tracking of the model or equipment lifecycle.

For more information, refer to Viewing the Obsolescence Management [page 87].

4.2.1 Viewing the Obsolescence Management

You use this application to visualize models that will be obsolete in the next 3 years and affected equipment.

Procedure

1. Launch the Obsolescence Management application.

2. In the Obsolescence Management details page, you can set the following filters:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Processes PUBLIC 87
 a. In the Expiry Date dropdowns, choose the option for which you want to view the items due for expiry.

 Note

The report displays information for every month in the time period that you have selected.

b. Choose the manufacturer.

c. Choose the relevant expiry date.
d. Choose Class and Subclass from the filters as necessary.

Results

You see a graphical representation of the number of models and items of equipment that are due for expiry for
your given time period.

 Note

The tabular view below the graphical representation displays information about the Model Count and
Equipment Count that are clickable links. Clicking on the Equipment Count, you can navigate to the
equipment list. You can select equipment from the list to view the details page.

You have an option in the chart tool bar to view this data in the following views:

● Chart and Tabular View

● Chart View
● Tabular View

For chart view, you can use Select Chart Type to visualize the data in different chart types, for example, line
chart, bar chart, and so on.

By default, the chart view displays data based on month/year dimension. You can also add additional
dimensions to drill down the data using the View By option on the chart tool bar.

You can select a segment from the interactive chart and use the Details option on the chart tool bar to view
details of the selected option. You can personalize the data in the chart using the Settings option from the chart
tool bar.

You can opt to view all the details in the tabular view or details of only the selected segment from the interactive
chart by using the options from the table tool bar. You can personalize the data in the table using the Settings
option from the table tool bar.

4.3 Lookup

You use this app to search the error code and look-up related information for an equipment or a model.

Lookup application also allows you to find troubleshooting information for an equipment or a model. You can
use the Scan Bar Code option to find the equipment and its details.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

88 PUBLIC Processes
Due to the common pattern across manufacturer, field technicians and engineers in the field can look up error
codes much faster using this app. Regardless of the manufacturer, operating, and service providing, companies
will always find error codes and solutions to it in the same place.

You can use the look-up option to search for a model or a piece of equipment. Manufacturers can maintain
error codes on the model level:

● Error code descriptions and failure modes for a particular error code can be provided
● Breakdown instructions assigned to the respective model and failure mode are automatically displayed for
each model

For more information, refer to Managing Lookup [page 89].

In devices that support RFID, in addition to scanning of QR/barcodes you can also scan NFC tags to identify
equipment (Custom Fiori client needed). Set up the bar code configurations under General Application
Settings Bar Code Configurations , you have to define the <Prefix> and <Suffix> in order to use this
feature.

4.3.1 Managing Lookup

You can perform various operations on lookup such as lookup and error code-related information for an
equipment or a model.

Context

You can use this app to search for <Error Code> and <Lookup>. You can perform the following operations
using the lookup application:

● Lookup a model using it’s <ShortDescription> or <Model ID> or <PrimaryExternalID> or

<ExternalID>
● Lookup an equipment using its <ShortDescription> or <Equipment ID> or <PrimaryExternalID>
or <ExternalID> or <SerialNumber>
● Search for specific:
○ Lookup of equipment
○ Error code of equipment
○ Lookup of Model
○ Error code of model
● Scan bar code on devices for equipment
● Publish equipment details
● Search by both Equipment ID and Model ID irrespective of whether the equipment has been assigned to a
model
● Display Alert Types of type error code for the selected equipment or model.
● NFC enabled for devices that support RFID.
With devices that support RFID, in addition to scanning of QR/barcodes you can also scan NFC tags to
identify equipment (Custom Fiori client needed). Set up the bar code configurations under General

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Processes PUBLIC 89
 Application Settings Bar Code Configurations , you have to define the <Prefix> and <Suffix> in order
to use this feature.
Then the app looks for equipment ID, Description, and Serial Number. So, write anything on the tag where
you have an equivalent equipment object in SAP Asset Intelligence Network to look it up.
● If you perform an exact search for equipment based on Equipment ID, Description, UID, or Serial No, then
the search also displays equipment owned by connected partners.
In case the connected business partner also has authorizations to create equipment requests, then you
also get an option create an equipment request.
You can view the list of connected business partners who have authorizations to create equipment request
under Application Settings General Application Settings Equipment Requests .

4.4 Smart Matcher

Operator can use this information during their maintenance processes.

Manufacturer provides the information on the model level. The operator in turn synchronizes installed base
information from SAP Plant Maintenance (SAP PM) to SAP Predictive Asset Insights. With this, operator
owns a significant amount of equipment from SAP PM in SAP Predictive Asset Insights. If the data quality of the
equipment is sufficient enough, the smart matcher can help you link a lean equipment (equipment with no
model assignment to it) to the respective model it belongs to.

The above is based on an algorithm that involves fuzzy search. In case of poor or incomplete data on
equipment level, the smart matcher application provides a card view in which you can match recommended
models to equipment. The recommendation is again based on the same algorithm. The output of the algorithm
is a match factor between 0.75 (75%) and 1 (100%).

For more information, refer to Performing a Smart Match [page 90].

4.4.1 Performing a Smart Match

You can perform various operations on smart matcher such as matching an equipment to model or updating
the model details in model app and checkin Smart Matcher application.

Context

You use the Smart Matcher application to assign models to a lean (equipment with no model assignment to it)
equipment. You can perform the following operations using the Announcements application:

● Assign model to a lean equipment

All equipment that have an active model request associated with it will not be visible in the equipment list.
Equipment in <Sold> and <Retired> are not displayed.
● Identify lean equipment without a fitting model to create model requests

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

90 PUBLIC Processes
 ● Update the equipment details using the Equipment application and check this using Smart Matcher
● Search for a model in the Equipment application and check the equipment for a given matching factor
● View the count on the smart matcher tile. This depicts the probable matches for lean equipment
● Remove visibility of equipment for a particular model by choosing the NO MATCH button
● Display equipment both in list and grid view
● Match equipment to a model by choosing the Match button on the equipment file
● Remove the visibility of equipment for a particular model by selecting No Match button
● You can Matchor No Match model assignments for multiple equipment.

4.5 Work Orders

An order which specifies a task to be carried out on the equipment.

The term "work order" is a generic term for the following order types:

● production orders
● process orders
● inspection orders
● maintenance orders
● networks

The work order list page contains a list of the work orders and work order operations that you have selected
using the filter criteria.

On the list page, you can select multiple work orders and work order operations, and choose Manage to view
the orders, operations, equipment, documents associated with one or more work orders. You can deselect and
select the work orders in the carousel and accordingly the associated items for the selected work orders is
refreshed on the respective sections.

Work order lifecycle status and collaboration status are displayed in the Status field of the list page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Processes PUBLIC 91
● The following work order lifecycle status are available:

● The following collaboration status are available:

Any work order that is shared with or shared by you will have the collaboration status enabled.

4.5.1 Viewing a Work Order

Prerequisites

You must have the authorized role WORKORDER_READ, WORKORDER_DELETE, or WORKORDER_EDIT.

Procedure

1. Open the Work Orders app.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

92 PUBLIC Processes
 2. In the Work Orders screen, search for a work order using the filters.
3. Choose a work order from the search list.
4. In the Basic Data section, choose the Work Order Detail tab to view the details that are specific to the work
order. These details can include order type, priority, planned duration, Equipment ID, main work center,
actual duration, plant, and long description.
5. In the Basic Data section, choose the Dates tab to view the dates that are specific to the work order. These
dates can include basic start and end date, actual start and end date.
6. In the Operations section, you can view the details of the operations required to be performed for the work
order. You can select each operation to view more details about the operation like the relevant operator,
location, equipment ID, and priority of the operation, start and end date, work center, earlier start and
finish date and time, latest start and finish date and time, actual start and finish, actual and planned
work,and long description.
7. In the Notifications section, you can view the details of the notifications relevant for the work order. You can
select each notification to view more details about the operation like the relevant operator, location,
equipment ID, status and priority of the operation, start and end date, work center, earlier start and finish
date and time, latest start and finish date and time, actual start and finish, actual and planned work,and
long description.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Processes PUBLIC 93
5 Master Data

The tiles under Master Data on the SAP Fiori launchpad enable you, as a business user, to browse all kinds of
related information about your equipment. If you are an administrator you can additionally create and edit
master data.

Objects: Any item that you create in the SAP Predictive Asset Insights can be referred to as an object.

Business objects: You can also refer to all the objects involved in a business scenario as business objects.

Technical objects: The following objects can be referred to as technical objects:

● Equipment
● Functional Locations

 Note

Unit of Measure (UoM) Conversion: SAP provides a basic set of unit of measures. And, unit of measure
conversion is applicable only for this basic set of unit of measures.

Overview of Master Data

Tile Use

Equipment [page 95] Create/display equipment. An item of an equipment is a physical instance of a

model. An operator maintains additional information specific to an item of an
equipment such as installation information, installation location, documents.

Equipment Search [page 313] Search for equipment based on attributes of an equipment.

Models [page 131] Create/display models. A model is an abstract representation from the manufac­
turer that defines all maintenance and specification information related to a new
or existing product. A physical equipment is an instance of a model.

Functional Locations [page 150] Maintain functional location information for a piece of equipment and systems. A
functional location represents the area at which a piece of equipment can be in­
stalled and you can perform maintenance tasks.

Locations [page 165] Create/display a location is a virtual record of the location where an equipment
is installed.

Functions [page 175] Defines how the assigned objects are intended to operate. For example, you can
assign functions to equipment, models etc.

Failure Modes [page 176] Create/display failure modes. A failure mode is a probable failure that could oc­
cur to piece of equipment.

Fingerprints [page 185] Defined as a collection of snapshot of the indicator chart derived from a set of
indicators and meta data (type, data and time, description, equipment state) for
a specific time period. It describes the reference state of a single equipment that
can be used for further process steps, for example, equipment documentation,
trending, failure analytics.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

94 PUBLIC Master Data
 Tile Use

Spare Parts [page 189] Create/display spare parts. Spare parts are components that are kept in your in­
ventory as spare. Typically, these components are not fitted into your equip­
ment, but can be fitted into a piece of equipment when needed.

Groups [page 199] Create/display groups. You can group together different business objects for
multiple purposes.

Systems [page 206] Define systems based on a system model and assign system template to it.

Documents [page 218] Create/assign/download/display documents for your equipment.

Announcements [page 243] Create/display announcements. An announcement is information communi­

cated to equipment owners or operators, for example, to inform that an instruc­
tion has been updated.

Instructions [page 251] Create/display instructions. An instruction is a set of steps that help the user to
carry out a specific task, for example, maintenance of a specific piece of equip­
ment

Templates [page 262] Create/display templates. A template is a format created by the manufacturer to
maintain metadata related to a model, piece of equipment or a location.

Rules [page 307] Create and manage rules and associated actions.

5.1 Equipment

A piece of equipment is a physical instance of a model. An operator maintains additional information specific to
an item of an equipment such as the following:

● Information:
Maintain information related to an equipment such as serial number of the equipment, tag number of the
equipment, installation date of the equipment, and build date of the equipment.
● Installation location:
Maintains geographical coordinates of the piece of an equipment to locate the location.
● Documents:
Maintains some best practices information while using the item of an equipment using unstructured
documents.

An equipment can be in any of the following states:

● Unpublished
● In Revision
● Published

For more information, see State Transitions [page 314].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 95
5.1.1 Managing Equipment

You can create, view, update, and delete a piece of equipment.

Context

More Information

Create a piece of equipment and assign additional informa­

tion such as installation information, location information,
and attach documents.

Add and remove equipment components. For more information, see Adding Equipment Components
[page 107].

View details of an existing equipment and update an existing For more information, see Viewing and Updating a Piece of
equipment.For more information, see
Equipment [page 115].

Delete a piece of equipment. For more information, see Deleting a Piece of Equipment
[page 119].

 Note
In addition, you can use the Lookup application to scan
the bar code, or the QR code of an item of equipment to
view the details related to an item of equipment and per­
form actions such as update equipment phase, or edit
header information for an item of equipment.

View work orders for a piece of equipment Viewing Work Orders of an Equipment [page 125]

View notifications for a piece of equipment Viewing and Creating Equipment Notifications [page 123]

View and edit indicators Viewing and Editing Indicators [page 126]

View and analyze leading indicators for a piece of equip­ Viewing and Analyzing Leading Indicators for Equipment
ment.

View an analytics dashboard for a piece of equipment. Viewing a Dashboard on Object Pages [page 76]

View the top failure modes for a piece of equipment. Using Failure Mode Analytics on the Equipment or Model Pa­
ges

View a failure curve with different insights for a piece of Viewing a Failure Curve for Equipment [page 130]
equipment.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

96 PUBLIC Master Data
5.1.1.1 Creating a Piece of Equipment

You create a piece of equipment based on an existing model, and add additional information such as operator,
equipment installation information, equipment location information, and assign documents relevant to the
equipment.

Prerequisites

● You have created an operator .

● You have identified your organization's profile on the SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
● Your user ID has the roles EQUIPMENT_DELETE or EQUIPMENT_EDIT assigned.

Context

You use the Equipment application to:

● Create a piece of equipment for your own operations purposes

● Create a piece of equipment for another customer
For simplicity purpose, we describe the procedure to create a piece of equipment for your own operations.

Additional Infor­
Step # Description mation

1 Open the Equipment application.

2 Choose New.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 97
 Additional Infor­
Step # Description mation

3 In the New Equipment dialog box:

1. You can optionally assign a model template for the equipment. Select the model
template in the Model ID.
In the Model ID dropdown, select an existing model from which you want to in­
herit the properties for the item of the equipment.
If SAP Predictive Asset Insights is available, once the model template is selected
the <IoT Sync> field is enabled. This field enables you to replicate the selected
object in SAP Internet of Things and maintain connection between these sys­
tems. You can choose a <Yes> or <No>. By default, the sync is always set to
<Yes>.

 Note
For more information, see https://help.sap.com/viewer/
067e3d8253654398996ec49271b7441a/latest/en-US/
ac5129f13f6c43eb99025ebdd079f83b.html.

2. In the Equipment ID field, enter a unique name for an item of equipment.

Multiple pieces of equipment can have same IDs if they are synced to different
SAP ERP / S/4HANA external systems.
3. In the Description field, enter a short description for an item of equipment.
4. In the Equipment Templates dropdown, choose the equipment template you
have created and want to assign to the equipment.
For more information about creating an equipment template, see Creating an
Equipment Template [page 294].
5. In the Product Relevance, you can select the relevant products in which you in­
tend to use this equipment:
○ Asset Network
○ Strategy and Performance Management
○ Predictive Maintenance
○ Vehicle Management
6. In the Operator field, enter an operator for the equipment. Your company is se­
lected as default value.
7. SAP ERP / S/4HANA Sync: By default, the switch is enabled and is relevant if the
equipment needs to be synced with the connected SAP ERP / S/4HANA exter­
nal system.
In case the switch is enabled, an additional field SAP ERP/ S/4HANA External
System is displayed. You can select the relevant SAP ERP / S/4HANA system
from the list. If there is one SAP ERP / S/4HANA system maintained, then the
system will be automatically considered.
8. In the Phase, select:
○ Fully Operational or Partially Operational status if a piece of physical equip­
ment exists.
○ Planned if a piece of physical equipment does not exist, or you have chosen
to update the physical equipment details later.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

98 PUBLIC Master Data
 Additional Infor­
Step # Description mation

○ Not Operational
9. In the UID field, enter the unique ID that could be used to identify the equipment
in any system.

 Note
○ UID must be in the following format: <Unique company identifier>/
<Model-ID>/<Serial No>.

10. In the Long Description field, enter a long description for an item of equipment.
11. Choose Save to create a single piece of equipment. Enable the Create
Components switch to create equipment hierarchy from the model template. In
the Set Components tab, you can define the individual subequipment. Create
Components creates the individual items of equipment, use Save to finalize the
activity.

 Note
Component hierarchy is added to the equipment when a model is assigned
to it.

4 Add values/infomation to the attributes of the underlying templates in the data sheet Adding Data in the
section, model information, equipment information, business partner information, Information Section
installation location, lifecycle information, system, or groups [page 102]

5 Add structure components, spare parts or visaul parts information Adding Structure &
Parts [page 105]

6 Add equipment component Adding Equipment

Components [page
107]

7 Add documents, instructions, failure modes, alert types announcements or create Adding Information
improvement request for the equipment in the Documenta­
tion Section [page
108]

8 Configure indicator or component indicator Adding Information

in the Maintenance
& Service Section
[page 114]

10 View changes made on the equipment data Timeline [page 114]

To publish an item of equipment, choose Publish Publishing Multiple

Equipment [page
Once equipment is published, it is synchronized with SAP Internet of Things. 118]

System publishes the item of the equipment and creates a first revision of the item of
the equipment.

12 To create revisions of an item of an equipment and to switch between the published

and revision states, see the steps provided in the procedure Creating Revisions and
Switching Between Revisions and Published State [page 315].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 99
5.1.1.1.1 Editing Header Information

The object page of the equipment displays the header information that includes information like Phase/
System Status, External IDs, Status (of the equipment), Languages and so on.

Context

You can view or edit the following in the header information:

Procedure

1. Phase/System Status

You can view the phase of the equipment using the icon next to the equipment name in the header. The
icon displays the following symbols for the relevant phases:

Icon Phase

Planned

Partial or Fully Operational

Not Operational

Dispose, Retired, Sold

You can also view the system status, the date when the record was created and also navigate to the
Manage Phase feature.
You can document the different life cycle phases of the equipment using Manage Phase. Equipment can be
in one of the following phases:
○ Current phase: It has three subsections:
○ Planned
○ Actual
○ Phased out
These main phases are followed by a subsequent status schema, for example, Fully Operational.
○ Fully Operational
○ Planned => (Not <=> Partially <=>Fully) Operational
○ Operational <=> Dispose => Retire
○ Retire => Sold

 Note

Legends:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

100 PUBLIC Master Data
 ○ => one time step, not reversible
○ <=> back and forth

Dependencies:
○ Dismantle the equipment assigned to location, otherwise they can't reach the state of Dispose,
Retire, and Sell.
○ The Sold phase needs a Published status and an assigned model to the equipment.
○ Sold means a Transfer of Ownership. Equipment in that stage is not furthermore editable for the
old Owner, but listed in their repository with the app. Date of ownership transfer.
Equipment exposed as a System can have an additional(optional) status (ISO 14224):
○ Redundant or Passive Standby:
Redundancy wherein parts of the system for performing a required function are operational, while
the remaining parts of the system are inoperative until needed.
○ Standby or Active Standby:
Redundancy wherein all the parts of the system for performing a required function are intended to
operate simultaneously.
○ Next Phase
With the next phase, you can document or plan the upcoming, multiple phase changes.
○ This planned phase change does not have a mandatory phase change as consequence.
○ This selectable phase here, do not follow a status schema or dependency.
○ Current and planned phase will be exposed in the Manage Phase dialog and on the related highlight
card. In addition, all current phase changes are notified in the Timeline of the Equipment with
information of status change, timestamp, and changes done by internal person or business partner.

Equipment can be in one of the following phases:

You can document the different life cycle phases of the equipment.

2. If a UID is available for the equipment, then you can view the UID field.

You can click on the UID field and choose Copy to copy the UID.
3. External IDs: You can view the Object ID of the equipment and also view the IDs used for the equipment in
the external systems. You can also use Add button to add external IDs.
4. Status: You can view the status of the equipment.
5. Languages: You can view the languages supported.
6. Manage:

You can perform the following actions using the Manage button in the published equipment:
○ New Revision: This option is available only if the equipment is already in Published state.
○ View Last Published/View Last Revision: This option is available only if the equipment is in In Revision
state.
○ Update Model: You can update the model associated with the equipment. This option is available only if
the equipment is already in Unpublished or In Revision state.
○ Remove Model: You can remove the model associated with the equipment. This option is available only
if the equipment is already in Published or In Revision state.
○ View Lifecycle Changes
○ Delete
○ Edit Header: You can edit the equipment information like equipment ID, description, and image. This
option is available only if the equipment is already in Unpublished or In Revision state.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 101
 ○ Request Model: This option is available only if the equipment is already in Published state.
When creating a new model request using Manage Request Model :
○ If the equipment manufacture is also configured as the model's provider then the Provider field in
the New Request dialog box is by default prepopulated as the equipment manufacturer. You also
have the option to change this, if required.
○ If the equipment manufacture is not configured as the model's provider then the Provider field in
the New Request dialog box is not prepopulated. You will have to set it manually.
○ New Notification: Create a notification.

5.1.1.1.2 Adding Data in the Information Section

Context

You can add data in the Information section.

Procedure

1. Highlights: You can view the highlight cards and also set their visibility using the Settings button.

2. To add values to the attributes of the underlying templates, choose INFORMATION Data Sheet and
perform the following steps:
a. Choose Edit and enter values for the attributes as defined by the underlying templates.

You can select the values if codelist are defined for the attributes. You can do multiple selections for
datatypes of type String and Date.
b. You can reorder the attribute groups using Reorder Groups.
c. If you have not assigned any equipment template while creating the equipment, you can add it later
using Add Template. You can add or remove multiple equipment templates.
d. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .
e. Choose Save.

You can now add equipment templates with nested structures, but will not be able to maintain the values.
You can only maintain the values using the value PUT API. In case you have added nested structure
templates and templates with flat structure attributes (old kind of template), then also you can only
maintain the values using the API.

3. To view the model-related information, select INFORMATION Model Information

4. To add installation information, select the INFORMATION Equipment Information tab and perform
the following tasks:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

102 PUBLIC Master Data
 a. Choose Edit and enter the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Serial Number Update the serial number issued by the manufacturer.

 Note
Serial number is not mandatory for equipment with
model assigned to them. Serial numbers can be
added at a later lifecycle phase of the equipment.

Equipment Tag Number Specify the tag number issued by your organization
when the manufacturer has not specified any serial
number or batch number.

Batch Number Specify the batch number issued by the manufacturer,

if applicable.

Technical Identification Number Enter the Technical Identification Number for the equip­
ment

Operator Equipment ID Enter an alternative key for stakeholder equipment

identification.

Procurement Number Enter Purchase Order Number to reference purchasing

process or Order Code.

Long Description Enter a description for the piece of equipment.

Manufacturer Part Number Enter manufacturer part number.

Model ID Enter a model ID.

Subclass Select a subclass.

Build Date Specify the date of manufacture issued by the manufac­

turer.

b. To assign the equipment location, proceed as follows:

1. Choose Assign/Unassign Location .
2. In the Assign/Unassign popup, enter the location if you have created from the Locations
application.

 Note

○ When a location is assigned or unassigned to a piece of equipment, the location is

adjusted based on parent equipment.
○ You can now inherit the address from the location to the equipment.

c. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 103
 ○ To assign a tag, choose Assign/Unassign Tag and type in your tag.

You can use tags to help you logically categorize activities, information, or reminders about your
equipment. You can now inherit the address from the location to the equipment.

5. To add business partner information, select the INFORMATION Business Partners tab and perform
the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and enter the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Source Business Partner Role Update the source business partner role, if necessary.

Manufacturer Select the manufacturer.

Service Providers Select the name of the service provider for the piece of
equipment.

Regulators/Authority Select the official who certifies if the equipment is in­

stalled or assembled correctly.

Insurers Select the name of the insurer for the piece of equip­
ment.

Suppliers/Dealers Select the name of the dealer for the piece of equip­
ment.

Sold-to Party Select the name of the party to which the equipment is
sold.

Ship-to Party Select the name of the party to which the equipment is
shipped to.

Bill-to Party Select the name of the party to which the equipment is
billed.

6. To add Sales Organization Data, select INFORMATION Sales Organization Data tab and perform the
following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and select inputs for the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Sales Organization Enter the sales organization details.

Distribution Channel Enter the distribution channel.

Division Enter the division.

Sales Office

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

104 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Sales Group

b. Choose Save.

7. To add installation location information, select INFORMATION Installation Location tab and perform
the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and enter the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Object Address Enter an address at which the equipment is installed

and any additional information.

Contact Person Enter the contact person details for the location.

Geospatial Data Specify the latitude, longitude coordinates of the instal­

led location.

 Note
Optionally you can specify the geo coordinates us­
ing the visual map.

b. Choose Save.

8. You can view the successor to the current model information under INFORMATION Life Cycle
Information .

9. You can view the list of systems to which the equipment is assigned under INFORMATION Systems .
○ All parent systems are displayed.
○ A piece of equipment can be part of one or more systems. The equipment page now displays the
associated system information.
For example, a compressor can be a part of the compressed air system in a plant.
10. To add the equipment to a group, go to INFORMATION→ GROUPS → Add.

You can view the list of groups to which the equipment is added.

5.1.1.1.3 Adding Structure & Parts

Context

You can add, view, edit, or delete equipment components, spare parts, and visual parts to a piece of equipment.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 105
You can also view the equipment hierarchy using the button.

● Adding and removing location to equipment.

When location is added or removed, equipment structure is adjusted based on the location.
● You can change the order of equipment subcomponents in the structure.
● You can link equipment to an existing location hierarchy. You can do this by selecting a location and
equipment relationship. The status of the assignment to a location is saved with a future or past date. This
is used for calculating the due date status.

Procedure

1. Highlights: You can view the highlight cards and also set their visibility using the Settings button.

2. To add equipment components, navigate to STRUCTURE AND PARTS Structure Edit and perform
the following tasks:

a. To add equipment, choose Assign Equipment

b. From the Select Component dialog box, select the appropriate component.

You can also filter the equipment based on Source and Product Relevance.
c. Choose Add.
d. To add systems, choose Assign Systems
e. From the Select Systems dialog box, select the appropriate system.
f. Choose Assign.
g. Choose Save.

 Note

You can now inherit the address from the location. You can publish a component directly from the
Structure section. Select the component and use the Publish button.

3. To add equipment spare parts, navigate to STRUCTURE AND PARTS Spare Parts Assign and
perform the following tasks:
a. From the Assign Spare Parts dialog box, select the appropriate spare parts.
b. Choose Provide Quantity to specify the quantity of each spare part. You can also enter a comment if
necessary.
c. Choose Assign.

Assign new spare parts or maintain existing spare parts for an equipment using the Edit and Remove
buttons. Similarly, you can view the associated documents when a spare part is being shared.

 Note

If you have integration with SAP Commerce Cloud, then you can also view the Add to Cart button for
each spare part. Currently, you can only add one spare part for each order request.

4. To view Visual Parts for an item of equipment, upload a relevant 3D visual file in the DOCUMENTATION
DOCUMENTS section and view them under STRUCTURE AND PARTS Visual Parts .

Shopping cart enabled on VE file for mapped visual parts.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

106 PUBLIC Master Data
 The viewer search is extended to search for part name, description, manufacturer part number, and EAM
number. You can select search result and display it in the viewer window.

5.1.1.1.3.1 Adding Equipment Components

You can alter equipment components to suit your equipment needs.

Prerequisites

● You have created an item of equipment in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

● The item of equipment is in status Unpublished or In Revision.
● Ensure that the component you want to add already is created in the network as equipment.

Procedure

1. Launch the Equipment application.

2. Open your item of equipment.
3. From the Equipment object page, choose New Revision.
4. Choose the Structure section.
5. Choose Assign.
6. In the Select Component dialog box, select the component you want to add.
7. Choose Add.
8. Choose Save.

Results

The equipment components have been added.

● To remove an equipment component, proceed as follows:

○ From the Structure section, choose Edit.
○ Select the components from the list, choose Remove.
○ Choose Save.
● To publish a component directly from the Structure section, select the component from the list that is in
Unpublished or In Revision state and choose Publish.
● To replace a component, proceed as follows:
○ From the Structure section, choose Edit.
○ Select the components from the list, choose Replace.
○ Select a component from the dialog box and choose Replace.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 107
 ○ Choose Save.

5.1.1.1.4 Adding Information in the Documentation Section

Context

Procedure

1. Highlights: You can view the highlight cards and also set their visibility using the Settings button.

2. To add, or assign, or edit an existing document to the equipment, choose the Documentation
Documents tab, and perform the following tasks:

In the Documents section, choose Add menu to upload a new document, and perform the following steps.

a. Choose Add Add Image to add an image

1. In the Add Image pop-up, browse for a file.
2. In the Additional Information section:
○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
b. Choose Add Add Document to add a document.
1. In the Add Document popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

108 PUBLIC Master Data
 ○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
c. Choose Add Add Link to add a document link.
1. In the Add Link popup, provide a URL link to the document along with a Display Name.

 Note

○ You cannot upload private domains such as .corp as links.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 109
 d. You can add a new version of a document by selecting the document from the list and choose Add
Add New Version .
1. In the Add New Version popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section, enter a Description for the document. You can also enter a
long description, if necessary.
3. Choose Upload.
3. In the Documents section, from the Add menu choose Assign to upload an existing document and perform
the following steps:
a. In the Select Documents dialog box, search for an appropriate file.
b. From the Documents search results list, select a document.
c. Choose OK.

You can also use Remove and Download to remove or download any of the documents assigned to the
equipment.

4. To add instructions to the equipment, go to DOCUMENTATION INSTRUCTIONS and perform the

following tasks:
a. Choose Assign.
b. From the Select Instructions dialog box, select the appropriate instruction.
c. Choose OK.

5. To assign failure modes to the equipment, go to DOCUMENTATION Failure Modes and perform the
following tasks:
a. Choose Assign.
b. Select a failure mode.
c. Choose OK.

You can select a failure mode and choose Remove to unassign the failure mode.

 Note

You cannot remove failure modes that are inherited from the model. Only failure modes assigned to the
equipment instance can be removed.

If you have write access to the equipment even though you do not have write access to the failure mode,
you can still edit the failure mode instance page of the equipment.

When you copy a failure mode and Save & Publish it:
○ A new failure mode is created with the same causes and instructions from the source failure mode
○ The newly created failure mode is directly assigned to the object
○ The new failure mode is in published state
○ You navigate to the new failure mode instance page that includes all the copied failure mode instances:
effects, causes, instructions, and detection method

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

110 PUBLIC Master Data
 ○ The new failure mode appears in the failure mode section list.

You can view the failure mode instance, which is directly assigned (at the same time), you can now view
different object icons in the <From> field of the failure mode section if the failure mode is inherited or
assigned directly to the equipment.

You can now flag inherited failure modes to not relevant using the Not Relevant button. This excludes the
failure modes from any assessments relevant to the equipment. Inherited failure modes that are marked as
Not Relevant, when assigned explicitly, will be set to Relevant.

In the failure mode instance page:

○ You can add new effects using Add New or assign existing effects using Add Assign in the
Effects section. For each effect, you can Add Effect Details like:
○ Local Effect Description: describes the direct effect on the equipment or the how it affects the
equipment it is part of.
○ Higher-Level Effect Description: describes how is the system affected the equipment is part of.
○ End Effect Description: describes the ultimate effect that the failure has on safety and/or the
environment (if any) and any impact on production or operational capability.
○ Potential Worst-Case Effect Description: specifies what would happen in case no measures would
be taken to anticipate, prevent, or detect the failure.
○ You can add new causes using Add New or assign existing causes using Add Assign in the
Causes section. You can assign a Low Level Failure Mode to the new causes that you create.
○ You can assign existing spare parts to the failure mode instance using Assign in the Spare Parts
section.
You can select the assigned spare parts from the list and choose Remove to unassign them.
Spare parts that can be assigned to the failure mode instance are displayed in the assign dialog box.
Spare parts already assigned to the failure mode are filtered out from the list.
○ You can assign existing instructions to the failure mode instance using Instructions Assign .
Once you have assigned instructions, you can assign causes for the selected the instructions using
Manage Cause.
You can also select instructions from the list and unassign them using Remove.
○ Under Analytics, you can view the failure mode analytics for failure modes that are inherited from the
model.
like:

6. You can view the alert types associated with the equipment under DOCUMENTATION Alert Types

You can also view the list of rules or create rules using the Manage Rule.

7. To view announcements assigned to the equipment, choose DOCUMENTATION Announcements

8. To create an improvement request for the equipment, perform the following tasks:

1. Choose DOCUMENTATION New Improvement Request .

2. Enter the relevant details in the New Improvement Request dialog box.
3. Choose OK.
9. View and create baselines

Baselines are snapshot that is used as a reference point. Multiple snapshots can be created over a period
of period to view and monitor the full extent of the data change over time. Baselines provide you the ability
to travel back in time to see how the equipment data was, and where & when data has changed.

You can create a baseline:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 111
 ○ Using the New button in the Baseline section.
○ Using the Create Baseline option in the Phase Manage Phase .

 Note

You need to have the BASELINE_EDIT role to view and create baselines, and BASELINE_READ role to
view baselines.

10. You can view the list of functions assigned to the equipment under DOCUMENTATION Functions .
a. Choose Assign.
b. Select a function.
c. Choose OK.

You can select a function and choose Remove to unassign a function.

 Note

You cannot remove functions that are inherited from the model. Only functions assigned to the
equipment instance can be removed.

For more information, refer to Functions [page 175].

11. You can also view the list of fingerprints assigned to the equipment under DOCUMENTATION
Fingerprints .

You can create a fingerprint using the New button.

You can also directly access fingerprints using the Fingerprints [page 185] app.

 Note

For more information you can refer to the following topics:

○ Creating a Fingerprint [page 185]
○ Viewing a Fingerprint [page 186]
○ Editing a Fingerprint [page 187]
○ Deleting a Fingerprint [page 188]

5.1.1.1.5 Adding Information in the Monitoring Section

Context

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

112 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. You can view and configure the list of indicators inherited from the model or equipment templates under
Monitoring.

You can add/remove an indicator to the favorites list using the star icon in the <My Favorites>.

For numeric and numeric flexible datatypes, <Reset>, <Normal>, <Max>, and <Min> fields are available
while definition the threshold. You can also define threshold value range for these datatypes (only threshold
value not range is available for other data types). The Reset button is functional only for these two
datatypes and will delete all the existing values and insert the reset value wherever applicable.

 Note

○ You can set upto a maximum of 10 thresholds. In the case of indicators of data type Boolean, the
maximum number of thresholds selected must be 2 with values True and False. By default, its set
to 0. Anything else can lead to inconsistency.
○ You can personalize the indicator filters and columns in the Indicator section. When you logon again
the same filters and columns are displayed.
○ If you are assigned the role AC_CUSTOMER_ADMIN, then a new variant Default Indicators is
available to display the indicators marked as default at model and equipment level in the Indicators
section.
○ You can select a maximum of 4 Primary Thresholds. The primary threshold is mainly used in the
indicator chart of SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
○ Values of indicator are displayed based on Display UoM that is maintained at the template level.

If the same indicator is assigned to the model and also to the equipment, you can define different threshold
values for the indicator at the model level and at the equipment level. If the values are defined both at the
equipment and model level, the values defined at the equipment level will be considered. If not, the values
defined at the model level are considered.

To map the indicators of your item of equipment with an external system, follow the procedure in Mapping
Indicators with an External System [page 119].

You can maintain a manual entries for the indicators by selecting an indicator and choosing New Manual
Entry. You can edit or delete these manual entries by selecting the indicator and choosing Manage
Manual Entry Edit or Manage Manual Entry Delete .

 Note

If URL is provided by the source application (using API), then the value in Context column will be a
hyperlink. Click on the hyperlink to open the underlying URL in a new tab.

2. You can also view Alerts and Indicator Chart under Monitoring.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 113
5.1.1.1.6 Adding Information in the Maintenance & Service
Section

Context

In the Maintenance & Service section, you can:

Procedure

1. Highlights: You can view the highlight cards and also set their visibility using the Settings button.
2. View Notifications

Use Add Evidence to assign/add improvement requests.

 Note

You can also create notifications using the New button. You can also create new notifications using
Manage New Notifications .

3. View the Work Orders assigned to the equipment.

You can view a list of completed, planned and pending work orders for the equipment.

5.1.1.1.7 Timeline

Context

Procedure

To view changes on the performance improvement cases, attributes, components, documents,

announcements, functional locations, status, equipment header, and firmware for the selected equipment,
choose the Timeline tab.
○ Maintain comments or tags for a timeline event.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

114 PUBLIC Master Data
 If a comment is owned by your organization, you can delete it. You can also see the person's name if the
user belongs to your organization, otherwise the company name is displayed as the creator of the
comment.
○ Old and new images are shown on the <Timeline> if image relevant fields have been updated in the
Model and the Equipment.
○ Field names are displayed in the logon language with English as default language in the <Timeline>.

 Note

For the nested structure attributes, timeline and completeness is not yet supported.

5.1.1.2 Viewing and Updating a Piece of Equipment

You can update information such as installation information, installation location, and documents that relate to
an existing item of equipment.

Prerequisites

● To view an item of equipment, your user ID has the roles EQUIPMENT_READ assigned.
● To update an item of equipment, your user ID has the roles EQUIPMENT_DELETE or EQUIPMENT_EDIT
assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Equipment app.

2. You can perform the following tasks by selecting one or more items of equipment from the list:

○ Request Model
○ Publish
○ Group
○ Assess
○ Delete
3. Search for an item of equipment that you want to update using the search filters.
4. Select the item of equipment from the search results.
5. You can perform the following actions using the Manage button in the published equipment:
○ New Revision
○ View Lifecycle Changes
○ Delete
○ Request Model

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 115
 ○ Sync with SAP Internet of Things:

 Note

Note: This option is available only if the equipment is in Published state, the <IoT Sync Flag> is
set to Yes and SAP Cloud Platform Internet of Things 4.0 system is configured.

6. If you choose an item of equipment that is in a published state, choose Manage New Revision from
the Equipment screen.
7. View and navigate to the open model request for the equipment from the icon in the <Model ID> under
INFORMATION Model Information
○ You can view only the icon in <Model ID> for a piece of equipment if it not assigned to any model.
○ If the equipment is assigned to a model or if you have entered a free text, you can view the icon
together with the model ID or free text.

 Note

You can only assign model request for items of equipment that are published at least once.

8. To update additional attributes related to an item of equipment, select tab INFORMATION Data
Sheet and perform these substeps.
a. Choose Edit.
b. You can reorder the attribute groups using Reorder Groups.
c. You can assign equipment templates using Add Template after the equipment is created.
d. You can select templates from the list and choose Remove Template to remove the template.
e. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .
f. Choose Save.

9. To update attributes such as installation information, select tab INFORMATION Equipment

Information and perform the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit in the Equipment Information section.
b. Choose Save.

10. To view the parent systems associated with the equipment, select tab INFORMATION Systems .
11. To assign Documents, Instructions, and Announcements, choose the DOCUMENTATION tab.

a. To add documents related to the item of the equipment, choose the tab DOCUMENTATION
DOCUMENTS and perform the following tasks:

1. Choose Add New to add a document to the equipment.

2. Choose Add Assign to assign an existing document to the equipment.
3. Choose Edit to edit the properties of the document.
4. To remove a document, select the document or documents from the list and choose Remove.
b. To assign existing planned maintenance instructions, or troubleshooting and breakdown instructions
to the equipment; or to unassign the instructions related to the equipment, choose the
DOCUMENTATION INSTRUCTIONS tab and perform the following tasks:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

116 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

You must have instructions created .

1. Choose Edit in the Instructions section.

2. To assign an instruction, choose Assign.

 Note

If you are unable to see the Assign button, change your browser zoom and retry.

3. To remove an instruction, choose Remove.

c. To view announcements assigned to the equipment, choose DOCUMENTATION Announcements
d. View the list of failure modes assigned to the equipment. You can also assign failure modes by
choosing Failure Modes Assign .

You can view the causes and effects of the failure modes assigned to the equipment in this section.

If you have write access to the equipment even though you do not have write access to the failure
mode, you can edit the failure mode instance page of equipment.

When you copy a failure mode and Save & Publish it:
○ A new failure mode is created with the same causes and instructions from the source failure mode
○ The newly created failure mode is directly assigned to the object
○ The new failure mode is in published state
○ You navigate to the new failure mode instance page that includes all the copied failure mode
instances: effects, causes, instructions, and detection method
○ The new failure mode appears in the failure mode section list

You can view the failure mode instance which is inherited and directly assigned (at the same time), you
can now view different object icons in the <From> field of the failure mode section if the failure mode is
inherited or assigned directly to the equipment.

You can now flag inherited failure modes to not relevant using the Not Relevant button. This excludes
the failure modes from any assessments relevant to the equipment.
e. View the improvement requests assigned to the equipment.

To create an improvement request for the equipment, perform the following tasks:
1. Choose New Improvement Request.
2. Enter the relevant details in the New Improvement Request dialog box.
3. Choose OK.
f. You can view the alert types associated with the equipment under DOCUMENTATION Alert
Types
g. You can view the list of functions assigned to the equipment under DOCUMENTATION
Functions .

You can assign functions using the Functions app. For more information, refer to Functions [page 175].
12. You can perform the following activities in the MONITORING tab:
a. View the indicators related to the equipment in the Indicators section.
To define, model, and edit additional properties of the indicators and their thresholds, select an
indicator and choose Configure.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 117
 You can also view the aggregated indicator value and trend for the indicators in this section.
b. View indicators related to the equipment components in the Component Indicators section.
13. You can perform the following activities in the MAINTENANCE & SERVICE tab:
a. View notifications related to the equipment in the Notifications section.

Use Add Evidence to assign/add improvement requests. You can also create notifications using the
New button.
b. View work orders related to the equipment in the Work Orders section.
c. View the list of fingerprints assigned to the equipment under Fingerprints.

You can create a fingerprint using the New button.

14. View the modifications made on the equipment data in the Timeline tab.

You can view the update statistics based on:

○ Updates By Type
○ Time Range
○ Updates by Partner
○ Updates on model or equipment data

You can click the equipment time range to perform the following the Filter By dialog box:
○ Show Timeline Events for: Select if you want to view the changes only on the equipment or the model
associated with the equipment or all the changes made on the equipment data.
○ Time Range: Select a time range to view only the changes during that timeframe.

 Note

You can track addition and removal of component and parent equipment. Sharing activities are also
tracked in the timeline.

15. Choose Publish to publish the updated equipment.

5.1.1.3 Publishing Multiple Equipment

When you have more items of Equipment created using public APIs provided by SAP Predictive Asset Insights,
you can view these items of equipment using the Equipment application and also publish multiple equipment.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles EQUIPMENT_DELETE or EQUIPMENT_EDIT assigned.

● You have created an item of equipment and the item of equipment is in any of the following states:
○ Unpublished
○ Published
○ In Revision

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

118 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. Open the Equipment application.

2. Search for items of equipment that are either in unpublished, or in revision state.
3. Select one or more items of equipment from the search results.
4. Choose Publish.

5.1.1.4 Deleting a Piece of Equipment

You can delete an item of equipment that you do not want to have on the network.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the role EQUIPMENT_DELETE assigned.

● You have created an item of equipment and the item of equipment is in any of the following states:
○ Unpublished
○ Published
○ In Revision

Procedure

1. Open the Equipment application.

2. Search for an item of equipment.
3. Select an item of equipment from the search results.
4. Choose Delete.

5.1.1.5 Mapping Indicators with an External System

You perform this activity to retrieve the indicator values of your equipment from an external system of type SAP
Internet of Things. When you have equipment data or machine data existing in an external system, you can
retrieve that data by mapping your equipment with the external system.

Prerequisites

● The external system is configured with SAP Predictive Asset Insights. For more information, see
Configuring External Systems.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 119
● Make sure that the IoT Sync Flag is set to "No".

 Note

If this flag is set to "Yes", refer to the help portal under SAP Predictive Asset Insights Application
Help SAP Internet of Things Synchronization .

● Your user ID has the roles EQUIPMENT_DELETE or EQUIPMENT_EDIT assigned.

● You have created an item of equipment. Equipment must be in Fully Operational or Partially Operational
phase. For more information, see Creating a Piece of Equipment [page 97]
● You have created indicators from the Templates app, and the equipment in question has inherited this
template. For more information, see Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273].

Context

In this procedure, you map indicators of equipment between an external system and SAP system.

Procedure

1. Launch the Equipment application.

2. Open the item of equipment in question.
3. In the Monitoring tab, go to Indicators section.
4. Select the relevant indicator and click Map Indicators.

5. In the Map Indicators window, enter the following:

Field Description

System Name Choose the name of the external system.

Equipment The corresponding equipment name in the external sys­

tem.

6. Under the Indicators section, select an indicator and choose the corresponding indicator from the listed
equipment indicators (external system) by choosing Map.
7. Choose Save.

You see that the new indicator values appear on the Equipment object page.

 Note

In order to unmap an indicator go to, Monitoring Indicators Map Indicators select the indicator
form the indicator list, and choose the corresponding delete/close icon.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

120 PUBLIC Master Data
5.1.1.6 Viewing Alerts of an Equipment

Visualize all the alerts related to the top equipment and the relevant equipment.

Prerequisites

● View only alerts for the equipment for which you are authorized.
● You need to have Edit authorization to perform action on alerts.

Context

Using this option, it is also possible to sort and filter the alerts and columns that should display on the screen.
Click the respective icons to perform these actions. Click an alert to view the same on the indicator chart. This
chart displays the alert in a time-based line chart together with contributing sensor or score values.

You can view the following alert details: status, type, severity, code, code description, source and indicator.

 Note

By default, the default variant displays. It is possible to override the default variant. On navigating from this
page or relogging, the user selected variant persists.

It is also possible to create notification for an alert. Select the alerts for which you want to create notifications
and click the Create Notification button. The newly created notification displays as <Notification ID>
within the Alerts details. For more details of the newly created notification, click the Notification ID hyperlink.

Using the Add Evidence button, it is possible to create a new improvement request or edit an existing
improvement request.

Click the Set to In Process and Set to Completed button to change the status of alerts. The change in status do
not result in change in processor. To change the processor, click the Set Processor button. The sequence of
status is from New --> In Process --> Completed and from New → Completed. The change in alert status do
not change the processor. And, click Set Processor to change the processor.

 Note

Only users with the role, AlertProcessor can change the alert status.

The role AlertProcessorAdmin can set/change the processor and change the alert status.

Use the Manage Rules button to navigate to the Rules page. You can view all the rules related to the model. For
more information, refer Rule Management [page 312].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 121
Related Information

Improvement Requests [page 80]

5.1.1.7 Viewing Time Series Data (Indicator Chart) of an

Equipment

This analysis tool enables you to visualize data across one or more indicators for one hierarchy. By default, the
indicators selected as favorite for a user displays on the chart.

Prerequisites

The scope pdms.AppAccess is required.

Context

The analysis tool, indicator chart enables you to visualize time series data across one or more indicators for an
equipment hierarchy. You can also view the alerts, notifications, work orders, threshold, and indicator forecast
related to a particular equipment.

By default, the first variant displays. You can override the existing variant by selecting from the dropdown. On
navigating from this page or relogging, the user selected variant persists.

 Note

For more information about indicator chart, refer to Features in Indicator Chart [page 51].

Procedure

1. Open the Equipment application

2. From the Equipment List screen, use the search filters to select equipment.
3. In the Monitoring tab, select Indicator Chart to view the chart.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

122 PUBLIC Master Data
5.1.1.8 Viewing and Creating Equipment Notifications

You can view all the notifications associated with a piece of equipment and also create a notification.

Prerequisites

You must have the role EQUIPMENT_READ assigned to your user ID in the SAP BTP account.

Context

Using this option, it is also possible to sort, filter, group notifications, and create notifications. Click the
respective icons to perform these actions. Depending on the action performed on these notifications, the
progress status - completed, planned, and pending displays against each notification. It is also possible to
create an improvement request or edit an improvement request using the Add Evidence button. Also, create a
notification using the <New> option.

Click a notification ID to view more details of the same in the object page. A indicator chart displays with the
notification details. You can view the start and end date of notifications. If these dates are not available, the
current date of notification is plotted on the chart, with the measurement point time series data.

 Note

In case of notifications that do not have an assigned equipment, then the indicator chart will not work.

For more information about indicator chart, refer Viewing Time Series Data (Indicator Chart) of an Equipment
[page 122].

To view the details of notification, click the respective notification ID. The progress of notifications is as below:

● Completed - All notifications with status Completed or Closed.

● Planned - All notifications that have start date equal or greater than the current date.
● Pending - All notifications that have end date greater than current date or all notifications that have the
start date lesser than the current date.

Procedure

Viewing Notifications
1. Open the Equipment application.
2. From the Equipment list screen, select the equipment for which you want to view notifications.
3. In the MAINTENANCE & SERVICE tab, select Notifications.

You can view a list of notifications associated with the piece of equipment.
Creating a New Notification

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 123
4. Choose New.

You are navigated to the New Notification dialog box. Enter the following details:

Fields Description

Type (*) Select the type of notification:

○ Breakdown
○ Maintenance Request

Priority (*) Select the priority of the notification:

○ Emergency
○ Very High
○ High
○ Medium
○ Low

Description (*) Enter a description.

Long Description Enter the detailed description for the notification.

Required Start Date Select the start date.

Required End Date Select the end date.

Malfunction Start Date Select the start date when the malfunction occurred.

User Proposed Failure Mode Select a failure mode. If no relevant failure mode is availa­
ble, you can select No appropriate failure mode available.

Instruction Select an instruction.

 Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*).

5. Choose Create.

The notification is displayed in the notification section. Choose the notification to view details.

Related Information

Improvement Requests [page 80]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

124 PUBLIC Master Data
5.1.1.9 Viewing Work Orders of an Equipment

You can use this procedure to view a list of work orders related to an equipment.

Prerequisites

To view a piece of equipment, your user ID has the roles EQUIPMENT_READ assigned to it.

Context

You can view the following work orders details: work order ID, order short description, order status, order type,
order priority, order long description, start date, end date, actual duration, or planned duration.

Click a work order ID to view more details of the same in the object page. A indicator chart displays with the
work order details. You can view the start and end date of work orders. If these dates are not available, the
current date of work order is plotted on the chart, with the measurement point time series data.

 Note

In case of work orders that do not have an assigned equipment, then the indicator chart will not work.

For more information about indicator chart, refer Viewing Time Series Data (Indicator Chart) of an Equipment
[page 122].

You can perform the following actions:

● Sort the work orders by - Ascending, Descending, Type, Priority, Start Date, or End Date.
● Group work orders by- Ascending, Descending, Type, or Priority.
● Filter work orders by - Type or Priority.

You can have more than one service provider for a piece of equipment. Multiple business partners can have the
same role.

 Note

If the order status is <TECO> or closed, then the actual duration is displayed, otherwise the planned
duration is displayed.

Procedure

1. Open the Equipment application.

2. From the Equipment screen, select an equipment for which you want to view work orders.
3. To view information related to work orders, go to MAINTENANCE & SERVICE→ Work Orders section.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 125
 You can view the list of work orders associated with the equipment. Select and open a work order to view
more details of work order.

5.1.1.10 Viewing and Editing Indicators

You can view and edit the indicators associated with a piece of equipment and its relevant components and add
additional properties to it.

Context

 Note

Component indicators section displays all the indicators associated with the equipment components
(components of the equipment in the Structure section of the equipment object page) and cannot be
edited.

Procedure

1. Open the Equipment application.

2. From the Equipment list screen, select a piece of equipment for which you want to view the indicators.
3. In the Monitoring tab, select Indicators.
4. To add additional properties to the indicator, select an indicator and choose Edit.

You can maintain the following properties for an indicator:

○ Unit of Measurement (UoM)
○ Threshold Range
○ Indicator Category
The following values are valid:
○ Continuous
○ Discrete
○ Level
○ Indicator type: Following values are valid:
○ Calculated
○ Measured
○ Assessed

You can maintain values for the indicators for which you have defined the properties by using New Manual
Indicator.
5. To view indicators associated with the equipment component, go to Component Indicatorssection.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

126 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

○ Component Indicators are displayed only if any indicators are assigned to the equipment
component and cannot be edited.

5.1.1.11 Viewing and Analyzing Leading Indicators for

Equipment

Use this procedure to view and analyze the leading indicators for a piece of equipment.

Prerequisites

● You have trained a model in the Leading Indicators Model Management application. For more information,
see Managing Models for Leading Indicators [page 399].
● The roles AC_ORG_DATA_EXPERT and DataScienceRead are assigned to your user.

Context

To monitor and predict the performance of your equipment, you can view and analyze leading indicators for a
piece of equipment of an equipment model.

Leading indicators are the indicators whose conditions are most related to failures of the piece of equipment.
The leading indicators are automatically determined by a machine learning algorithm using historical sensor
data and notification data as input. Identifying these leading indicators and their conditions helps you to
prevent upcoming failures by proactively maintaining the piece of equipment and creating effective condition-
based maintenance (CBM) rules to monitor the performance and predict upcoming failures.

 Example

Rose, a reliability engineer, suspects potential failures for her Pump-0054 due to overheating. She reviews
the leading indicators for the failure mode OHE (Overheating) of her pump. From the top indicators table,
she sees that the temperature has the highest influence on failures. To get a better understanding, she
reviews the most related conditions and sees that a temperature higher than 70 degrees has the highest
influence. To prevent failures from occurring, she creates a rule for the condition to get notified when the
pump is about to fail because of the condition and she can proactively maintain the pump.

Procedure

1. Open the Equipment application.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 127
2. From the Equipment screen, select the piece of equipment for which you want to view and analyze the
leading indicators.

The equipment page is displayed.

3. To view and analyze the leading indicators, choose ANALYTICS Leading Indicators .

The leading indicators for the piece of equipment are displayed as follows:
○ For the piece of equipment regardless of any failure mode: By default, the leading indicators are
displayed for the piece of equipment regardless of any failure mode. In this case, all failures that
occurred in the past are included.
○ For a failure mode related to the piece of equipment: If there are one or more failure modes available
for the piece of equipment, you can also display the leading indicators for a specific failure mode by
selecting the failure mode. You can choose from all failure modes that are assigned to the piece of
equipment.
The indicators are ranked by their strength indicating which indicators have the highest influence on
failures. You can view details about the strength threshold values by clicking the strength link.
4. To view and analyze the conditions for the leading indicators, choose Conditions.

The top conditions for the selected indicator are displayed. The conditions are ranked by their strength
indicating which conditions have the highest influence on failures. You can view details about the strength
threshold values by clicking the strength link.

 Note

Only conditions whose strength is above 50% are displayed. Conditions below this strength are
considered as having no influence on failures and the piece of equipment is operating under normal
conditions.

5. To create a new rule for one condition, select the condition and choose New Rule. For more information
about rules and how to create rules, see Rules [page 307].

Results

You have viewed and analyzed the leading indicators for your piece of equipment.

Related Information

Viewing and Analyzing Leading Indicators for a Model [page 146]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

128 PUBLIC Master Data
5.1.1.12 Viewing Alert Type Groups of Model Assigned to
Equipment

You can view the alert type groups assigned to a model of an equipment.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role EQUIPMENT_READ assigned.

Context

 Note

It is not possible to assign or unassign alert type groups to an equipment template or an equipment.

Procedure

1. Open the Equipment application.

2. Select an equipment for which you want to view the assigned alert type group.
3. Click Alert Types from the Documentation tab.

List of assigned alert types display.

Related Information

Rules [page 307]

Adding Alert Types [page 285]
Adding Alert Type Groups [page 288]
Assigning Alert Type Groups to a Model [page 144]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 129
5.1.1.13 Viewing a Failure Curve for Equipment

Use this procedure to view a failure curve with different insights for a piece of equipment.

Prerequisites

● The model configuration has been trained and scored successfully at least once. For more information, see
Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management [page 405].
● One of the following roles is assigned to your user:
○ FailureCurveAnalyticsUser
○ FailureCurveAnalyticsRead
○ FailureCurveAnalyticsEdit
○ FailureCurveAnalyticsDelete
● (Only relevant for configuring the sections of the equipment page): The role EQUIPMENT_EDIT or
EQUIPMENT_DELETE is assigned to your user.

Procedure

1. To open the failure curve, choose between the following options:

○ Open the failure curve using the Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management
application:
1. In the application, navigate to the details screen of the model configuration.
2. On the details screen of the model configuration, choose Input Data Sets Equipment .
3. From the list, choose the piece of equipment for which you want to view the failure curve with
different insights.
○ Open the failure curve using the Equipment application:
1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Equipment application.
2. From the list, choose the piece of equipment for which you want to view the failure curve with
different insights.
3. On the equipment page, choose ANALYTICS Failure Curve .

Per default, the failure curve is displayed for the latest scored model configuration and for the failure mode
with the most notifications. If multiple failure modes have the same notification count, the alphabetically
earliest is selected.

 Note

If the failure curve is not displayed, choose (Configure Sections) and activate the Analytics and
Failure Curve checkboxes. On the main screen again, choose ANALYTICS Failure Curve . The role
that is required to configure the sections is listed in the prerequisites.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

130 PUBLIC Master Data
 On the curve, a flag with the current age and the (conditional) probability of failure (PoF) for the current age
is displayed. Above the curve, the predicted failure date and time to failure for the current age are
displayed.
2. To view the PoF for any other age or to view the confidence interval, choose the respective point on the
failure curve.

The Current Selection dialog box with the selected age, the PoF, and the confidence interval is displayed.

 Note

The actual age value of the data point may have decimals, for example, 27.6. In the Current Selection
dialog box, a rounded version of the value is displayed, for example, 28. That has the effect that
sometimes the age in the Current Selection dialog box slightly differs from the age on the x-axis.

3. To view the failure curve and the insights for a different model configuration or failure mode, select the
respective model configuration and failure mode from the dropdown lists.

 Note

If you select another model configuration, the related failure mode with the most notifications is
automatically selected.

Results

The failure curve with the different insights for the selected model configuration or failure mode is displayed.

5.2 Models

A model is an abstract representation from the manufacturer that defines all maintenance and specification
information related to a new or existing product. A physical equipment is an instance of a model.

A model is based on a template and allows users to add values to the definitions used in the underlying
template.

A model maintains maintenance information using the following business entities:

● Instruction:
An instruction is a collection of steps from the manufacturer that make up a procedure on how to carry out
a service by an operator. An instruction consists of information that help the operator to maintain the
equipment better. There are five types of instructions: Planned Maintenance Instruction, Troubleshooting
and Breakdown Instruction, Installation instructions, Operations instruction, Disposal instruction.
● Announcement:
An announcement is a way of communicating structured information from a manufacturer to an operator,
or a set of operators.. For example: change in instruction
● Parts
A part is a single piece of an equipment. A manufacturer provides a list of parts used in the model along
with the visual representation of each one of them. An operator can select a specific part of the model from

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 131
 the list to view the manufacturer details, spare part number, and the quantity of the part used in the model
and use these details for procurement purposes.
● Document
A document is a material of reference provided by the manufacturer and contains information relevant to a
specific phase in the life cycle of the model.
● Hotspot
A hotspot is an area on the visual image that is of more interest. A hotspot allows you to view detailed
information of a model component in a pictorial way. You can assign additional information to a hotspot
such as model, equipment, and instruction to which users can navigate to.

A model can be in any of the following states:

● Unpublished
● In Revision
● Published

For more information, see State Transitions [page 314].

5.2.1 Managing Models

You use the Models app to work with a model. You can perform the following operations using the Models app:

Context

Features More Information

● Create a model and assign business entities such as in­ Creating a Model [page 133]
structions, documents, announcements, parts informa­
tion of the model.
● Update successor model information.
● Add hotspots to the images of a model.
● Old and new images are shown on the timeline if image-
relevant fields are updated on model and equipment
level.
● Create a model request to contact another business
partner when you do not find respective models for
equipment in the network. The newly-created model re­
quest is saved with the status <Draft>. While in Draft
status, the model request is not visible to the provider.
You can edit the model request and save the changes.
Changes or updates saved are logged in the timeline.

Add and remove model components. Adding Model Components [page 141]

View details of an existing model and update an existing Updating a Model [page 142]
model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

132 PUBLIC Master Data
 Features More Information

Delete a model to clean up the data that is not required to be Deleting a Model [page 144]
on the network.

Reuse the created models within your organization.

View and analyze leading indicators for a model. Viewing and Analyzing Leading Indicators for a Model

View an analytics dashboard for a model. Viewing a Dashboard on Object Pages [page 76]

Configure indicator forecasting to forecast indicator values Configuring Indicator Forecasting for a Model
for your equipment of an equipment model.

View the top failure modes for a model. Using Failure Mode Analytics on the Equipment or Model Pa­
ges

Create models relevant for systems.

You can create a system using Manage Create System option. You can also create multiple systems from a model as
components.

You can view all the indicators associated with a model using the Indicators section under Monitoring. You can define,
model, and edit additional properties of the indicators and their thresholds using the Edit option in the Indicators section.

5.2.1.1 Creating a Model

You use this procedure to: create a model and add business entities to it such as instructions, documents,
announcements, parts information, hotspots to the images uploaded as documents for a model.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles MODEL_DELETE or MODEL_EDIT assigned.

● To create a model, you must have a subclass or a model template to inherit from.
● You have identified a manufacturer profile to assign to a model.

Procedure

1. Launch the Models app.

2. Choose New.
3. In the New Model dialog box, enter the following details:
a. In the Type field, select if the model is relevant for equipments, systems, or functional locations.
b. In the Model ID field, enter the ID for the model.

 Note

Provide a unique model ID, as ID is unique for a specific manufacturer.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 133
 c. In the Short Description field, enter a short description for the model.
d. In the Long Description field, enter a long description for the model.
e. In the Tracking drop-down, select the type of tracking you want to assign to an item of equipment that
is based on the model.
The following list helps you to select an appropriate value:
○ Serial number tracking at model level: As a manufacturer, you want to track an item of
equipment within a model using unique serial number. An operator uses the unique serial number
while creating an item of equipment.
○ Serial number tracking at manufacturer levelAs a manufacturer, you want to track all
items of equipment using unique serial number. An operator uses the unique serial number while
creating an item of equipment.
○ Batch number tracking at batch levelAs a manufacturer, you want to track all items of
equipment within a batch using a batch number. An operator uses the batch number while
creating an item of equipment.

 Note

This field is not relevant when creating models for functional location.

f. In the Parent Subclass/Model Template field, select a subclass or model templates.

If you select more than one template, then the Primary Template field is displayed where you need to
select one of the templates as the primary template.

You can assign one or more parent subclasses or model templates to a model. If you enter more than
one parent subclass/model template, you must additionally select a primary template in the dropdown
of field <Primary Template>. This primary template is used for class/subclass/template display in
the breadcrumb as well as in the model list. The assignment of the primary template can later be
changed in the Data Sheet section of the model.

 Note

All assigned templates and subclasses (as well as associated classes) are available in the Model
Information section. If there are more than one class/subclass/template, count values are
displayed in the respective fields. When clicking on one of the count values, you can view the
complete template hierarchy for your model.

g. In the Manufacturer field, select the manufacturer name.

 Note

This field is not relevant when creating models for functional location.

h. Choose OK.

4. To add values to the attributes of the underlying templates, choose INFORMATION Data Sheet and
perform the following steps:
a. Choose Edit and enter values for the attributes as defined by the underlying templates.
b. You can reorder the attribute groups using Reorder Groups.
c. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

134 PUBLIC Master Data
 d. You can add additional Templates or Subclasses using Add Template.

If there are multiple templates assigned, you get filtering options on the data sheet:
○ All = displays all attribute groups and attributes
○ <Industry Standard> = displays all attribute groups and attributes that have the respective
industry standard maintained
○ <Custom> = displays all attribute groups and attributes that are coming from customer-created
model templates
e. If there are multiple Subclasses and Templates assigned, you can change the Primary Template using
Update Primary Template.
f. If there are multiple Subclasses and Templates assigned, you can remove assigned objects using
Remove Template.

 Note

It is mandatory to have at least one parent object assigned, that is, it is not possible to remove all
assigned objects.

g. Choose Save.

You can now add model templates with nested structures, but will not be able to maintain the values. You
can only maintain the values using the value PUT API. In case you have added nested structure templates
and templates with flat structure attributes (old kind of template), then also you can only maintain the
values using the API.

5. To add model-specific information, choose INFORMATION Model Information and perform the
following steps:
a. Choose EditAs a manufacturer, you want and enter the following fields:

Field Description

Tracking Update the tracking mechanism, if necessary.

Safety Risk Select a recommended safety risk for the model during
its operating condition.

Generation Specify a number that indicates the version of the

model.

Model Release Date Enter a date by which the model will be released.

Description Enter a model description.

Firmware Support Specify if the model supports firmware.

b. To assign a tag, choose Add/Remove Tags.

c. In the Add/Remove Tags dialog box, assign a tag.
d. Choose OK.

You can assign such tags that logically categorize model information, maintenance, and other model-
relevant data.
e. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 135
6. In the Model Usage section, you can view the extent of model's usage.

If consumer or operator is sharing equipment based on the model relation, the usage is linked to the
related equipment and operators.

 Note

When the model is published, you can also create an equipment using this model from the Create
Equipment button.

7. To update a model as the successor to the current model, choose INFORMATION Life Cycle
Information and perform the following steps:
a. Choose Assign in the Successor Model section.
b. In the Assign Successors popup, select the model you want to assign as successor.
c. Choose OK.

 Note

The successor model you want to assign must have the same subclass as the current model.

8. To add the model to a group, go to INFORMATION → Groups→ Add.

You can view the list of groups to which the model is added.
9. To add model components, perform the following:

a. Choose STRUCTURE AND PARTS Structure → Edit.

a. Choose Assign. From the Select Component dialog box, select the model component.
b. Choose Add.
c. You can define if an assigned structure component is mandatory or optional for a model.
d. You can adjust the quantity and the item description for the structure components. You can change the
Quantity to a quantity range using the Define Quantity Range.
e. You can select an enum attribute to define default list of description to be assigned to the components
using Select Description Attribute.
f. Choose Save.
10. To assign spare parts to a model, perform the following:

a. Choose STRUCTURE AND PARTS Spare Parts Assign.

a. From the Assign Spare Parts dialog box, select the spare part, and choose Provide Quantity.
b. In the Provide Quantity dialog box, enter values for Default Delivered Quantity, Advised Stock Quantity,
and BoM Quantity. You can also enter a comment if necessary.
c. Choose Assign.
11. To assign a visual part to a model, perform the following steps:

a. Go to Documentation Documents section.

b. Choose Add. You can assign an existing or a new document.
c. To assign a visual part, you must add a document of type .vds.
d. Choose Assign. You can now view the visual parts under Structure & Parts Visual Parts .

The viewer search is extended to search for part name, description, manufacturer part number, and
EAM number. You can select search result and display it in the viewer window.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

136 PUBLIC Master Data
 12. To add an instruction to the model, choose the Documentation Instructions tab and perform the
following tasks:
a. In the Instructions section, choose Assign to perform the following steps:
b. In the Assign Instructions to a Model dialog box, search for an appropriate instruction.
c. From the Instructions search results list, select an instruction.

 Note

You can assign instructions that are in a published state only to a model.

d. Choose OK.

You can view the different instruction types in the following tabs: Planned Maintenance, Breakdown,
Installation, Operations, and Disposal.

13. To add, or assign, or edit an existing document to the model, choose the Documentation Documents
tab, and perform the following tasks:

In the Documents section, choose Add menu to upload a new document, and perform the following steps.

a. Choose Add Add Image to add an image

1. In the Add Image pop-up, browse for a file.
2. In the Additional Information section:
○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
b. Choose Add Add Document to add a document.
1. In the Add Document popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 137
 ○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
c. Choose Add Add Link to add a document link.
1. In the Add Link popup, provide a URL link to the document along with a Display Name.

 Note

○ You cannot upload private domains such as .corp as links.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
d. You can add a new version of a document by selecting the document from the list and choose Add
Add New Version .
1. In the Add New Version popup browse for a file.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

138 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section, enter a Description for the document. You can also enter a
long description, if necessary.
3. Choose Upload.
14. In the Documents section, from the Add menu choose Assign to upload an existing document and perform
the following steps:
a. In the Select Documents dialog box, search for an appropriate file.
b. From the Documents search results list, select a document.
c. Choose OK.

You can also use Remove and Download to remove or download any of the documents assigned to the
model.

15. To assign a failure mode, choose Documentation Failure Modes perform the following steps:
a. Choose Assign.
b. In the Select Failure Modes dialog box, select the failure modes that you want to assign to the model.
c. Choose OK.

You can create a copy of the failure mode using Copy.

 Note

When you copy a failure mode and Save & Publish it:

○ A new failure mode is created with the same causes and instructions from the source failure
mode
○ The newly created failure mode is directly assigned to the object
○ The new failure mode is in published state
○ You navigate to the new failure mode instance page that includes all the copied failure mode
instances: effects, causes, instructions, and detection method
○ The new failure mode appears in the failure mode section list

If you have write access to the model even though you do not have write access to the failure mode,
you can edit the failure mode instance page of the model.

In the failure mode instance page:

○ You can add new effects using Add New or assign existing effects using Add Assign in
the Effects section. For each effect, you can Add Effect Details like:
○ Local Effect Description: describes the direct effect on the model or the how it affects the
model it is part of.
○ Higher-Level Effect Description: describes how is the system affected the model is part of.
○ End Effect Description: describes the ultimate effect that the failure has on safety and/or the
environment (if any) and any impact on production or operational capability.
○ Potential Worst-Case Effect Description: specifies what would happen in case no measures
would be taken to anticipate, prevent, or detect the failure.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 139
 ○ You can add new causes using Add New or assign existing causes using Add Assign in
the Causes section. You can assign a Low Level Failure Mode to the new causes that you create.
○ You can assign existing spare parts to the failure mode instance using Assign in the Spare Parts
section.
You can select the assigned spare parts from the list and choose Remove to unassign them.
Spare parts that can be assigned to the failure mode instance are displayed in the assign dialog
box. Spare parts already assigned to the failure mode are filtered out from the list.
○ You can assign existing instructions to the failure mode instance using Instructions Assign .
Once you have assigned instructions, you can assign causes for the selected the instructions using
Manage Cause.
You can also select instructions from the list and unassign them using Remove.
○ Under Analytics, you can view the failure mode analytics for failure modes that are inherited from
the model.
like:

16. In the Documentation Alert Types section, you can, Assign or Remove alert type group.

17. To add an announcement to the model, choose the Documentation ANNOUNCEMENTS tab and
perform the following steps:
a. In the Announcements section, choose Assign to assign an existing announcement and perform the
following steps.
b. In the Assign Announcements to a Model dialog box, search for an appropriate announcement using
the filters – Announcement Type, or Priority, or Status.
c. From the Announcements search results list, select an announcement.
d. Choose OK.

18. You can create an improvement request for the model using Documentation Improvement Requests
New Improvement Requests .

You can enter the details in the New Improvement Request dialog box. Choose OK.

You are navigated to the new improvement request object page where you can further edit the request and
save it.

 Note

This section is not available for models created for functional location.

19. You can view the list of functions assigned to the model under DOCUMENTATION Functions .
a. Choose Assign.
b. Select a function.
c. Choose OK.

You can select a function and choose Remove to unassign a function.

For more information, refer to Functions [page 175].

20.In the Monitoring Indicators section, you can view the list of indicators associated with the model.
You can select an indicator from the list and use Configure to define the Threshold values for the indicator.

For Numeric and Numeric Flexible datatypes, you can also define the <Reset>, <Min>, <Max>, and
<Normal> values. You can also define threshold range for these datatypes. Reset button is functional only
for these two datatypes and will delete all the existing values and insert the reset value wherever applicable.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

140 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

○ You can set upto a maximum of 10 thresholds. In the case of indicators of data type Boolean, the
maximum number of thresholds selected must be 2 with values True and False. Anything else can
lead to inconsistency.
○ You can personalize the indicator filters and columns in the Indicator section. When you log in again
the same filters and columns are displayed.
○ If you are assigned the role AC_CUSTOMER_ADMIN, then a new variant Default Indicators is
available to display the indicators marked as default at model and equipment level in the Indicators
section.
○ You can select a maximum of 4 Primary Thresholds. The primary threshold is mainly used in the
indicator chart of SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
○ Values of indicator are displayed based on Display UoM that is maintained at the template level.

21. In the Monitoring Nested Structure Indicators section, you can view the list of indicators inherited by
the model from the associated nested structures.
22. To publish model, choose Publish.
System publishes the model and creates a first revision of the model in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
Users of your organization can view the published model. If you navigate away from the Models application
without saving the model, the model remains in the unpublished state and is not visible to any users in the
organization until you publish the model.
23. You can view the changes made on the model data in the Timeline section.

You can click the model date range to open the Filter By dialog box. You can select to show the event for a
particular object and define the time range during which you want to see the changes.

For each change entry, you can view changes made in other languages on the timelines using the Show
Details button.

 Note

For the nested structure attributes, timeline and completeness is not yet supported.

5.2.1.1.1 Adding Model Components

You perform this activity when you need to alter the model components to customize to your requirement.

Prerequisites

● You have already created a model in SAP Predictive Asset Insights. For information about creating a model,
see Creating a Model [page 133].
● The model is in status Unpublished or In Revision.
● Ensure that the component you want to add already is created in the network as a model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 141
Procedure

1. Launch the Models application.

2. Open the relevant model.
3. From the Model object page, choose New Revision.
4. Choose the Model Component icon.
5. Choose Add Component.
6. In the Select Component pop-up box, select the component you want to add.
7. Choose Add.

○ To remove component, proceed as follows:

○ From the Model Component page, select the model and choose Remove Component.
○ From the Select Component page, select the component you want to remove.
○ Choose Remove.

5.2.1.2 Updating a Model

You use this procedure to update an existing model that has either incorrect or missing information.

Prerequisites

● You have created a model that is either in an unpublished state, or in the in revision state.
● Your user ID has the roles MODEL_DELETE or MODEL_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Models application.

2. Search for a model that you want to update using the search filters.
3. Select the model from the search results.
4. If you choose a model that is in a published state, choose New Revision from the Model screen and perform
the following tasks:
a. To update attributes such as manufacturer’s name, or model name, or any of the model related
attributes select INFORMATION Model Information tab and perform the following tasks:
b. Choose Edit in the Model Information section and update the relevant fields. For more information on
the field descriptions, see Creating a Model [page 133].
c. Choose Save.

5. To update additional attributes related to the model, select INFORMATION Attributes tab and
perform the following tasks:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

142 PUBLIC Master Data
 a. Choose Edit in the Attributes section and update the relevant fields. For more information on the field
descriptions, see Creating a Model [page 133].
b. Choose Save.
6. To assign existing planned maintenance instructions, or troubleshooting and breakdown instructions to the
model; or to unassign the instructions related to the model, choose the INSTRUCTIONS tab and perform
the following tasks:

 Note

You must have instructions created in the SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

a. Choose Edit in the Instructions section.

b. To assign an instruction, choose Assign.
If you are unable to see the Assign button, change your browser zoom and re-try.
c. To unassign an instruction, choose UnAssign.
7. Choose Publish to publish the updated model.

5.2.1.3 Publishing a Model

When you have more models created using public APIs provided by SAP Predictive Asset Insights, you can view
these models using the Models application and perform a mass publish of such models.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles MODEL_DELETE or MODEL_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Models application.

2. Search for models that are either in unpublished, or in the in revision state.
3. Select one or more models from the search results.
4. Choose Publish.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 143
5.2.1.4 Deleting a Model

You can delete a model that you do not want to have on the network.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the role MODEL_DELETE assigned.

● You have created a model and the model is in any of the following states:
○ Unpublished
○ Published
○ In Revision

Procedure

1. Open the Models app.

2. Search for a model.
3. Select a model from the search results.
4. Choose Delete.

5.2.1.5 Assigning Alert Type Groups to a Model

You can assign alert type groups to a model of an equipment.

Prerequisites

● You have created a model that is in the revision state.

● Your user ID has the scopes MODEL_DELETE or MODEL_EDIT assigned.

Context

On assigning an alert type group, the alert types are automatically assigned to a model.

 Note

You cannot assign alert type group to a model template.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

144 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. Open the Models application.

2. Search for a model or models that you want to assign an alert type group.

 Note

You can assign the same alert type group to more than one model.

3. Click Alert Types from the Documentation tab.

List of alert types assigned to a particular alert type group displays.

4. Click Assign Alert Type Group to assign.

You can view details of the alert type such as category, severity, alert type group, indicator, origin, and
failure modes.
○ If rules are maintained for the alert type, the message Rules Maintained display against the alert type.
This is visible within the Documentation section in the model and equipment page.
The message Rules not maintained displays if rules are not maintained for the alert type. You can
navigate to the Rules page and view the list of rules related to a model using the Manage Rules option.
For more information, refer Rule Management [page 312].
○ It is not possible to unassign an alert type group from a model, if its alert types are used in the rules.

 Note

○ Make sure that you add only the alert groups having alert types that have indicators matching with
the indicators of the model. In case this criteria is not met, the rules created using these alert types
will not be functional.
For example, indicator I1 and I2 are assigned to alert types A1 and A2, respectively. These alert
types are grouped within an alert type group, AG1. This alert type group (AG1) can be assigned to a
model only if the indicators I1 and I2 are already part of the model.
This is not applicable to failure modes.
○ Do not delete indicators that are assigned to a model and used in an alert type. Considering the
above example, I1 or 12 should not be deleted as these indicators are used in the alert type groups,
as well.
○ Alert types without indicators can be assigned to models with or without indicators.

Related Information

Rules [page 307]

Adding Alert Types [page 285]
Adding Alert Type Groups [page 288]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 145
5.2.1.6 Viewing and Analyzing Leading Indicators for a
Model

Use this procedure to view and analyze the leading indicators for an equipment model.

Prerequisites

● You have trained a model in the Leading Indicators Model Management application. For more information,
see Managing Models for Leading Indicators [page 399].
● The roles AC_ORG_DATA_EXPERT and DataScienceRead are assigned to your user.

Context

To monitor and predict the performance of your equipment, you can view and analyze leading indicators for all
your equipment of an equipment model.

Leading indicators are the indicators whose conditions are most related to failures of the equipment. The
leading indicators are automatically determined by a machine learning algorithm using historical sensor data
and notification data as input. Identifying these leading indicators and their conditions helps you to prevent
upcoming failures by proactively maintaining the equipment and creating effective condition-based
maintenance (CBM) rules to monitor the performance and predict upcoming failures.

 Example

Rose, a reliability engineer, is interested in activating data-driven condition-based maintenance (CBM) for
all her equipment of a specific equipment model to prevent failures. She reviews the leading indicators for
her equipment model EM202 and sees that output voltage has the highest influence on failures. To get a
better understanding, she reviews the most related conditions and sees that an output voltage less than
600 volt has the highest influence. To prevent failures from occurring and activate condition-based
maintenance (CBM), she creates a rule for the condition to get notified when any of her equipment of the
equipment model is about to fail because of the condition so she can proactively maintain all equipment of
the equipment model.

Procedure

1. Open the Models application.

2. From the Models screen, select the equipment model for which you want to view and analyze the leading
indicators.

The model page is displayed.

3. To view and analyze the leading indicators, choose ANALYTICS Leading Indicators .

The leading indicators for the equipment model are displayed as follows:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

146 PUBLIC Master Data
 ○ For the model regardless of any failure mode: By default, the leading indicators are displayed for the
model regardless of any failure mode. In this case, all failures that occurred in the past are included.
○ For a failure mode related to the model: If there are one or more failure modes available for the
model, you can also display the leading indicators for a specific failure mode by selecting the failure
mode. You can choose from all failure modes that are assigned to the model.
The indicators are ranked by their strength indicating which indicators have the highest influence on
failures. You can view details about the strength threshold values by clicking the strength link.
4. To view and analyze the conditions for the leading indicators, choose Conditions.

The top conditions for the selected indicator are displayed. The conditions are ranked by their strength
indicating which conditions have the highest influence on failures. You can view details about the strength
threshold values by clicking the strength link.

 Note

Only conditions whose strength is above 50% are displayed. Conditions below this strength are
considered as having no influence on failures and the equipment of the equipment model are operating
under normal conditions.

5. To create a new rule for one condition, select the condition and choose New Rule. For more information
about rules and how to create rules, see Rules [page 307].

Results

You have viewed and analyzed the leading indicators for your equipment model.

Related Information

Viewing and Analyzing Leading Indicators for Equipment [page 127]

5.2.1.7 Configuring Indicator Forecasting for a Model

Use this procedure to configure indicator forecasting to forecast indicator values for the equipment of an
equipment model.

Prerequisites

● The role ConfigUser is assigned to your user.

● The Indicators are assigned to your equipment model. For more information, see Adding Indicator Groups
and Indicators [page 273].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 147
● The equipment model is published. For more information, see Publishing a Model [page 143].

Context

To get insights about the expected behavior of your equipment of an equipment model in the future, you can
forecast indicator values for a certain time period in the future by configuring indicator forecasting. This helps
you to recognize any potential issues with your equipment early, for example, breakdowns and proactively
maintaining your equipment.

 Note

Consider the following:

● You can only configure indicator forecasting for indicators, which have the Continuous category.
● Once you have configured indicator forecasting, the configuration cannot be deleted, you can only
deactivate it. This is also the case if the indicators are not assigned to equipment any more or the
equipment model and indicators are deleted.
● When you create new indicator forecasting configurations, the current configuration is overwritten by
the new configuration.

The indicator values are forecasted based on historical indicator time series data within a defined time range.
This data is aggregated within the time range in a certain aggregate interval. The aggregate interval is
determined automatically. The aggregated data is then used to calculate averages. Each average is calculated
based on the aggregated data within the time interval, for example, 2 minutes and then divided by this time
interval. The collection of these averages is then used as input for a linear regression algorithm to calculate the
indicator values. For more information about the linear regression algorithm, see Simple Linear Regression .
The forecasted indicator values are then displayed in the indicator chart.

 Example

Rose, a maintenance planner, wants to get insights about the operating hours of her equipment and wants
to see the future behavior of the operating hours. She forecasts the indicator values. In the indicator chart,
she views the forecasted operating hours values for the next two weeks and she sees that the operating
hours will decrease and may reach a threshold in the next days, which can lead to a potential breakdown. To
prevent the breakdown from occurring, she can then perform follow-up tasks based on her analysis.

Procedure

1. Open the Models application.

2. From the Models screen, select the equipment model for which you want to forecast indicators.

The model page is displayed.

3. Choose INDICATORS.

The list with all configured indicators for the equipment model is displayed.
4. From the list, select the indicator for which you want to forecast indicator values.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

148 PUBLIC Master Data
 5. Choose Configure Indicator.

 Note

If the button is not enabled, create a new revision of the model by choosing Manage and then New
Revision . For more information about creating revisions, see Updating a Model [page 142].

The dialog box for the indicator is displayed.

6. In the dialog box, choose Forecasting.
7. Fill in the following fields:

Activate Indicator Forecasting Activate this checkbox to forecast indicator values. You
can later also deactivate already created configuration.

Data Range

Data from within the last Define the time range of the historical time series data
that you want to use for forecasting.

Reset Option

Reset on Notifications Activate this checkbox to include failure modes of notifica-

tions in the calculation.

If you activate this checkbox, your time range is shortened

based on notifications that are assigned to a failure mode.
This means that once a notification with a malfunction
end date was collected within the time range, only the
data after the end date is used for the calculation.

 Example
You have defined 10 days as a time range for the indi­
cator forecasting. On the 8th day, a notification was
collected indicating an end of failure. This means that
only the data from the last 2 days is used for the fore­
casting because only within this time the equipment
is up and the 8 days before the equipment was down
due to a breakdown and this data is useless.

Failure Mode Select the failure mode for which the assigned notifica-
tions should be included in the calculation.

8. Choose OK.

Results

The indicator forecasting is configured, and the indicator values are forecasted.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 149
Next Steps

You can now view the forecasted indicator values for a specific piece of equipment of the equipment model in
the indicator chart. For more information, see Features in Indicator Chart [page 51].

5.3 Functional Locations

A functional location represents the area at which a piece of equipment can be installed. Functional location
represents a place in which a maintenance task has to be performed.Structuring the maintenance hierarchy of
assets is very much necessary for the organization. Functional locations are created in hierarchical structures
and thus allow a functional or process-oriented structuring of your systems.

Location is used to represent actual geo-physical locations. Every location that is not associated with any
functionality can be represented using a lightweight object - Locations [page 165]. For example, India, EMEA,
and so on.

Functional location is an area where equipment and other functional locations can be installed. It is helpful to
understand the history of what happened there and the ability to capture functional requirements or impose
any specific restrictions.

For example, compressor station in located at building ABC where one can install 2 motors and this station
should operate at the given temperature. Here there is functional requirement and also mentions only 2 motors
can be installed. If one of the motors breakdown and gets replaced, then functional location will still be same
and helps us to understand what happened there, what is the maintenance cost, and so on.

 Note

You can assign a model to the functional location if you have already created models of type For Functional
Locations using the Models app.

5.3.1 Creating a Functional Location

You create a functional location based on an existing model, and add additional information such as operator,
functional location information, and assign equipment or systems relevant to the functional location.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles FLOC_DELETE or FLOC_EDIT assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

150 PUBLIC Master Data
Context

You use the Functional Location application to:

● Create a functional location for your own operations purposes

● Create a functional location for another customer
For simplicity purpose, we describe the procedure to create a functional location for your own operations.

Step # Description

1 Open the Functional Locations application.

2 Choose New.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 151
Step # Description

3 In the New Functional Location dialog box:

1. You can optionally assign a model for the funnctional location. Select the model in the Model ID.
In the Model ID dropdown, select an existing model from which you want to inherit the properties
for the functional location.

 Note
Only those models of type For Functional Location will be displayed in the drop-down list.

If SAP Predictive Asset Insights is available, once the model template is selected the <IoT Sync>
field is enabled. This field enables you to replicate the selected object in SAP Internet of Things for
the Cloud Foundry environment and maintain connection between these systems. You can choose
a <Yes> or <No>. By default, the sync is always set to <Yes>. In this case, you also need to select a
Gateway.

 Note
For more information, see https://help.sap.com/viewer/
067e3d8253654398996ec49271b7441a/latest/en-US/
ac5129f13f6c43eb99025ebdd079f83b.html.

2. In the Functional Location ID field, enter a unique name for a functional location.
3. In the Description field, enter a short description for a functional location.
4. In the Functional Location Template field, select an existing functional location template from which
you want to inherit the properties for the functional location.
5. In the Product Relevance, you can select the relevant products in which you intend to use this func­
tional location:
○ Asset Network
○ Strategy and Performance Management
○ Predictive Maintenance
6. In the Long Description field, enter a long description for a functional location, if necessary.
7. In the Operator field, enter an operator for the functional location. Your company is selected as de­
fault value.
8. In the UID field, enter the unique ID that could be used to identify the functional location in any
system.

 Note
○ UID must be in the following format: <Unique company identifier>/<Model-ID>/<Serial
No>.

9. Choose Save to create a functional location.

4 Add values/infomation to the attributes of the underlying templates in the functional location informa­
tion, business partner information, sales organization data, or installation location. Choose Edit to add
values. Refer to Adding Data in the Information Section [page 154]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

152 PUBLIC Master Data
 Step # Description

5 Add structure components, you can add equipment, systems,and other functional locations as compo­
nents. If the Single Installation field under Functional Location Information is set to YES, you can assign
only one equipment. If it is set to NO, then you can assign multiple equipment and systems to the func­
tional location.

Choose Edit and assign the components:

1. To add equipment/system/functional location, choose Assign Equipment/System/Functional

Location
2. From the Select Component dialog box, select the appropriate component.
3. Choose Add.
4. Choose Save

8 You can view and configure the list of indicators inherited from the model template under Indicators.

You can add/remove an indicator to the favorites list using the star icon in the <My Favorites>.

For numeric and numeric flexible datatypes, <Reset>, <Normal>, <Max>, and <Min> fields are availa­
ble while definition the threshold. You can also define threshold value range for these datatypes (only
threshold value not range is available for other data types). The Reset button is functional only for these
two datatypes and will delete all the existing values and insert the reset value wherever applicable.

 Note
● You can set upto a maximum of 10 thresholds. In the case of indicators of data type Boolean,
the maximum number of thresholds selected must be 2 with values True and False. By default,
its set to 0. Anything else can lead to inconsistency.
● You can personalize the indicator filters and columns in the Indicator section. When you logon
again the same filters and columns are displayed.
● You can select a maximum of 4 Primary Thresholds. The primary threshold is mainly used in
the indicator chart of SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
● Values of indicator are displayed based on Display UoM that is maintained at the template
level.

The values defined at the model level are considered.

You can maintain a manual entries for the indicators by selecting an indicator and choosing New Manual

Entry. You can edit or delete these manual entries by selecting the indicator and choosing Manage

Manual Entry Edit or Manage Manual Entry Delete .

 Note
If URL is provided by the source application (using API), then the value in Context column will be a
hyperlink. Click on the hyperlink to open the underlying URL in a new tab.

11 To publish a functional location, choose Publish.

System publishes the functional location and creates a first revision of the functional location.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 153
Step # Description

12 To create revisions of a functional location and to switch between the published and revision states, see
the steps provided in the procedure Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions and Published
State [page 315].

5.3.1.1 Adding Data in the Information Section

Context

You can add data in the Information section.

Procedure

1. To view the model-related information, select INFORMATION Model Information

2. To add values to the attributes of the underlying templates, choose INFORMATION Data Sheet and
perform the following steps:
a. Choose Edit and enter values for the attributes as defined by the underlying templates.

You can select the values if codelist are defined for the attributes. You can do multiple selections for
datatypes of type String and Date.
b. You can reorder the attribute groups using Reorder Groups.
c. If you have not assigned any functional location template while creating the functional location, you
can add it later using Add Template. You can add or remove multiple functional location templates.
d. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .
e. Choose Save.

3. To add functional location information, select the INFORMATION Functional Location Information tab
and perform the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and enter the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Functional Location Tag Number Specify the tag number issued by your organization.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

154 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Technical Identification Number Enter the Technical Identification Number for the func­
tional location.

Long Description Enter a description for the functional location.

UID Enter unique identifier.

Build Date Specify the date of manufacture issued by the manufac­

turer.

Single Installation If the Single Installation field is set to YES, you can as­
sign only one equipment as component under
Structure. If it is set to NO, then you can assign multiple
equipment to the functional location.

4. To add business partner information, select the INFORMATION Business Partners tab and perform
the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and enter the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Source Business Partner Role Update the source business partner role, if necessary.

Operator Select the operator.

Service Providers Select the name of the service provider.

Regulators/Authority Select the official who certifies if the functional location.

Insurers Select the name of the insurer .

Suppliers/Dealers Select the name of the dealer .

5. To add Sales Organization Data, select INFORMATION Sales Organization Data tab and perform the
following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and select inputs for the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Sales Organization Enter the sales organization details.

Distribution Channel Enter the distribution channel.

Division Enter the division.

b. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 155
6. To add installation location information, select INFORMATION Installation Location tab and perform
the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and enter the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Object Address Enter an address of the functional location and any ad­
ditional information.

Contact Person Enter the contact person details for the location.

Geospatial Data Specify the latitude, longitude coordinates of the instal­

led location.

 Note
Optionally you can specify the geo coordinates us­
ing the visual map.

b. Choose Save.

5.3.1.2 Adding Structure & Parts

Context

You can add, view, edit, or delete functional location components, and visual parts assigned to the functional
location.

You can also view the functional location hierarchy using the button.

● Adding and removing other functional location .

When functtional location is added or removed, the structure is adjusted likewise.
● You can change the order of functional location subcomponents in the structure.
● You can link equipment to an existing functional location hierarchy. You can do this by selecting a functional
location and equipment relationship. The status of the assignment to a functional location is saved with a
future or past date. This is used for calculating the due date status.

Procedure

1. To add functional location components, navigate to STRUCTURE AND PARTS Structure Edit and
perform the following tasks:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

156 PUBLIC Master Data
 a. To add equipment, choose Assign Equipment
b. From the Select Component dialog box, select the appropriate component.

You can also filter the equipment based on Source.

c. Choose Add.
d. To add functional locations, choose Assign Functional Locations
e. From the Select Functional Locations dialog box, select the appropriate functional locations.
f. Choose OK.
g. Choose Save.

You can manually arrange the functional location components in the hierarchy by selecting the component

in the Edit mode and using the , , , buttons.

 Note

These buttons will be displayed only after you select a component. The same heirarchy will also reflect

when you use the .

2. To view Visual Parts for a functional location, upload a relevant 3D visual file in the DOCUMENTATION
DOCUMENTS section and view them under STRUCTURE AND PARTS Visual Parts .

Shopping cart enabled on VE file for mapped visual parts.

The viewer search is extended to search for part name, description, manufacturer part number, and EAM
number. You can select search result and display it in the viewer window.

5.3.1.3 Adding Information in the Documentation Section

Context

Procedure

1. To add, or assign, or edit an existing document to the functional location, choose the Documentation
Documents tab, and perform the following tasks:

In the Documents section, choose Add menu to upload a new document, and perform the following steps.

a. Choose Add Assign to assign an existing document.

b. Choose Add Add Image to add an image.
1. In the Add Image pop-up, browse for a file.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 157
 2. In the Additional Information section:
○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
c. Choose Add Add Document to add a document.
1. In the Add Document popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
d. Choose Add Add Link to add a document link.
1. In the Add Link popup, provide a URL link to the document along with a Display Name.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

158 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

○ You cannot upload private domains such as .corp as links.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
e. You can add a new version of a document by selecting the document from the list and choose Add
Add New Version .
1. In the Add New Version popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section, enter a Description for the document. You can also enter a
long description, if necessary.
3. Choose Upload.

2. To add instructions to the functional location, go to DOCUMENTATION INSTRUCTIONS and perform

the following tasks:
a. Choose Assign.
b. From the Select Instructions dialog box, select the appropriate instruction.
c. Choose OK.

You can select the instructions from the list and choose Remove to unassign the instructions.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 159
5.3.1.4 Adding Information in the Maintenance & Service
Section

Context

In the Maintenance & Service section, you can:

Procedure

1. View Notifications

Use Add Evidence to assign/add improvement requests.

You can view a list of completed, planned and pending notifications for the functional location.

 Note

You can also create notifications using the New button. You can also create new notifications using
Manage New Notifications .

2. View the Work Orders assigned to the functional location.

You can view a list of completed, planned and pending work orders for the functional location.

5.3.1.5 Timeline

Context

Procedure

To view changes on the fields, template, models, components, header information, document assignment/
unassignment, and business partner information, choose the Timeline tab.
○ Maintain comments or tags for a timeline event.
If a comment is owned by your organization, you can delete it. You can also see the person's name if the
user belongs to your organization, otherwise the company name is displayed as the creator of the
comment.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

160 PUBLIC Master Data
 ○ Old and new images are shown on the <Timeline> if image relevant fields have been updated in the
Model and the Equipment.
○ Field names are displayed in the logon language with English as default language in the <Timeline>.

5.3.2 Updating Indicator Values

You can use this process to add new manual entries and update the existing indicator values.

Procedure

1. Select an indicator from the list under Indicators.

2. Choose New Manual Entry. Enter the value and select the date and time in the Indicator Value dialog box.
Choose OK.

 Note

Values of indicator are displayed based on Display UoM that is maintained at the template level.

3. To edit the manual entry, select it and choose Manage Manual Entry Edit .

4. To delete the manual entry, select it and choose Manage Manual Entry Delete .

5.3.3 Viewing and Updating a Functional Location

You can update information such as data sheet, functional location information, installation location, structure,
documents and notifications that relate to an existing functional location.

Prerequisites

● To view a functional location, your user ID has the roles FLOC_READ assigned.
● To update an item of equipment, your user ID has the roles FLOC_DELETE or FLOC_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Functional Locations app.

2. You can perform the following tasks by selecting one or more functional locations from the list:

○ Publish

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 161
3. Search for a functional location that you want to update using the search filters.
4. Select the functional location from the search results.
5. You can perform the following actions using the Manage button in the functional location:
○ New Revision (Displayed in case the functional location is published.)
○ Delete
○ Edit Header (Displayed for functional location in In Revision or Unpublished state.)
○ Add Model (Displayed if you have not assigned any model when creating the functional location.)
○ Update Model (In case you want to update the model thats already assigned to the functional location.
Option displayed only if the functional location is in In Revision or Unpublished state.)
○ Remove Model (In case you want to remove the model thats already assigned to the functional
location. Option displayed only if the functional location is in In Revision or Unpublished state.)

6. If you choose a functional location that is in a published state, choose Manage New Revision from
the Functional Location screen to edit or update the data.
7. If you have assigned a model to the functional location, then you can view and navigate to the model
assigned to the functional location by choosing the link <Model ID> under INFORMATION Model
Information
○ You can view the Model Information section for a functional location only if it is assigned to a model. In
case you have not assigned a model when creating the functional location, choose Manage Add
Model to view this section.

8. To update additional attributes related to the functional location, select tab INFORMATION Data
Sheet and perform these substeps.
a. Choose Edit.
b. You can reorder the attribute groups using Order and Visibility.
c. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .
d. Choose Save.
9. To update information about the functional location like tag number, UID, and so on, select tab
INFORMATION Functional Location Information and perform the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit in the Functional Location Information section.
b. Choose Save.

10. To update business partner information, select tab INFORMATION Business Partners .
a. Choose Edit in the Business Partners section.
b. Choose Save.

11. To update sales organization information, select tab INFORMATION Sales Organization Data .
a. Choose Edit in the Sales Organization Data section.
b. Choose Save.

12. To update installation information, select tab INFORMATION Installation Information and perform
the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit in the Installation section.
b. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

162 PUBLIC Master Data
 13. To edit the component assignemnets, choose the Structure & Parts tab.

1. To edit the functional location components, choose Structure Edit .

You can assign equipment or other functional locations as components. For more information, refer to
Adding Structure & Parts [page 156].
Choose Save.
14. To assign documents, choose the DOCUMENTS tab.
For more information on adding documents, refer to Adding Information in the Documentation Section
[page 157].
15. You can update the indicator values in the Indicators tab:
a. View the indicators related to the functional location in the Indicators section.
To define, model, and edit additional properties of the indicators and their thresholds, select an
indicator and choose Configure.

You can also view the aggregated indicator value and trend for the indicators in this section.
16. You can perform the following activities in the MAINTENANCE & SERVICE tab:
a. View notifications related to the functional location in the Notifications section.

Use Add Evidence to assign/add improvement requests. You can also create notifications using the
New button.
b. View work orders related to the functional location in the Work Orders section.
17. Choose Publish to publish the updated functional location.

5.3.4 Viewing Alerts of Functional Location

Visualize all the alerts related to the top functional location and the relevant hierarchy.

Prerequisites

● View only alerts for the functional location for which you are authorized.
● You need to have Edit authorization to perform action on alerts.

Context

Using this option, it is also possible to sort and filter the alerts and columns that should display on the screen.
Click the respective icons to perform these actions. Click an alert to view the same on the indicator chart. This
chart displays the alert in a time-based line chart together with contributing sensor or score values.

You can view the following alert details: status, type, severity, code, code description, source and indicator.

 Note

By default, the default variant displays. It is possible to override the default variant. On navigating from this
page or relogging, the user selected variant persists.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 163
Click the Set to In Process and Set to Completed button to change the status of alerts. The change in status do
not result in change in processor. To change the processor, click the Set Processor button. The sequence of
status is from New → In Process → Completed and from New → Completed. The change in alert status do not
change the processor. And, click Set Processor to change the processor.

 Note

Only users with the role, AlertProcessor can change the alert status.

The role AlertProcessorAdmin can set or change the processor and change the alert status.

5.3.5 Viewing Time Series Data (Indicator Chart) of a

Functional Location

This analysis tool enables you to visualize data across one or more indicators for one hierarchy. By default, the
indicators selected as favorite for a user displays on the chart.

Prerequisites

The scope pdms.AppAccess is required.

Context

The analysis tool, indicator chart enables you to visualize time series data across one or more indicators for a
functional location hierarchy. You can also view the alerts and threshold related to a particular functional
location.

By default, the first variant displays. You can override the existing variant by selecting from the dropdown. On
navigating from this page or relogging, the user selected variant persists.

● You can compare time series data of multiple functional locations.

 Note

You can use the Select Indicators option to select or deselect the indicators.

Procedure

1. Open the Functional Location application

2. From the Functional Location List screen, use the search filters to select functional location.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

164 PUBLIC Master Data
 3. In the Monitoring tab, select Indicator Chart to view the chart.

5.4 Locations

A location corresponds to the geo-spatial location where an equipment is installed.

Using the Locations application, you can create a location and assign it to your item of equipment. This
assignment is made based on the functionality of the items of equipment.

A location is based on a template and allows users to add values to the definitions used in the underlying
template.

A location can be in any of the following states:

● Unpublished
● In Revision
● Published

For more information, see State Transitions [page 314]

You can perform the following operations using the Locations app:

● Create a Location and add location information and location attributes.

For more information, see Creating a Location [page 166].
● View details of an existing location and update an existing location.
For more information, see Updating a Location [page 171].
● Delete a location to clean up the data that is not required to be on the network.
For more information, see Deleting a Location [page 172].
● View the <Completeness> status. This is calculated based on values in header,< Location
Information>, and <Installation Location> section
● Create <Extensions> for a location.
A new tab <Extensions> is displayed. This provides the custom specific information that you created
● View the list of child locations under STRUCTURE Locations

 Note

You can remove a child location from a parent location and assign it to a different location.

Assign child locations to existing locations from the Structure section.

● Add or remove inherited address.
● RFID is enabled in Lookup application for devices that support RFID.
If the <Prefix> and <Suffix> are defined in the Bar Code Configurations under Application Settings
General Application Settings , then RFID feature can be used to scan the RFID tag.
● View an analytics dashboard for a location. For more information see Viewing a Dashboard on Object Pages
[page 76].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 165
5.4.1 Creating a Location

You use this procedure to create a location where an item of equipment is installed, and add location-specific
attributes to the location.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the role FUNCTIONAL_LOCATION_EDIT assigned to it.

● You have already created a location template from the Templates application.
For more information, see Creating a Location Template [page 298]

Procedure

1. Launch the Locations application.

2. From the Locations landing page, choose New.
3. In the Create New Location dialog box, enter the location ID, address, description, template, and parent
details.

 Note

<Parent> And address is optional.

Field Description

Name Enter a unique name for the functional unit.

Short and Long Description Provide a description denoting the functional nature of the
unit.

SAP ERP/ S/4HANA Sync Enable the switch in case of external system relevance. By
default, the switch is disabled.

In case the switch is enabled, an additional field SAP ERP/

S/4HANA External System is displayed. You can select the
SAP ERP/ S/4HANA system from the list.

Template Select a location template if you want the functional unit

to inherit the location template attributes.

 Note
You can inherit subclass information from location
template.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

166 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Subclass Select a subclass. You can classify a location based on

class or subclass.

It enables you to perform location object classification

through location template inheritance or manual assign­
ment.

 Note
You can change the subclass by using Manage
Change Subclass .

Parent Choose the organization name.

Street/Number Provide the location details.

Postal Code/City Enter the postal code or city.

Country Enter country name.

State/Region Specify state/region.

 Note

○ The <Address> field autopopulates by inheriting the address from the functional unit or
organization. You can retain the same address or modify as necessary.
○ In the Template dropdown, choose the location template you have created. For more information,
see Creating a Location Template [page 298].

4. To update additional attributes related to a location, select INFORMATION Data Sheet tab and
perform these substeps.
a. Choose Edit.
b. You can assign templates using Add Template.
c. You can select the assigned templates and choose Remove Template to remove the template.
d. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .
e. Choose Save.

5. In the Locations object page, navigate to INFORMATION Location Information and choose Edit.
a. In the Location Information field autopopulates by inheriting the address from the section, enter details
as necessary.

In the <Designed Operating State> dropdown, specify the operational state of the location.

You can also specify the <Criticality> and <Safety Risk> for the location.
b. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 167
6. To update the installation information about the location, choose INFORMATION INSTALLATION
LOCATION and choose Edit.
a. In the Installation Location section, enter details as necessary.

You can enter the relevant <Object Address>, <Contact Person>, and <Geospatial Data>.

In the Geospatial Data section, specify the latitude and longitude coordinates of the location.
b. Choose Save.

7. To add the location to a group, go to INFORMATION GROUPS Add .

○ You can choose to add the location to an existing group using Add Existing . You can view the list
of groups to which the location is added.
○ You can choose to add the location to a new group using Add New . Fill in the required details to
create a new group.
○

8. To assign a piece of equipment to the functional location, choose STRUCTURE Equipment Assign .
a. From the Select Equipment dialog box, select the equipment. You can also inherit the address of the
location to the equipment. Choose OK.

9. To assign a location to the functional location, choose STRUCTURE Locations Assign .

a. From the Select Locations dialog box, select the location. Choose OK.

10. To add, or assign, or edit an existing document to the location, choose the Documentation
Documents tab, and perform the following tasks:

In the Documents section, choose Add menu to upload a new document, and perform the following steps.

a. Choose Add Add Image to add an image

1. In the Add Image pop-up, browse for a file.
2. In the Additional Information section:
○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
b. Choose Add Add Document to add a document.
1. In the Add Document popup browse for a file.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

168 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
c. Choose Add Add Link to add a document link.
1. In the Add Link popup, provide a URL link to the document along with a Display Name.

 Note

○ You cannot upload private domains such as .corp as links.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 169
 You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
d. You can add a new version of a document by selecting the document from the list and choose Add
Add New Version .
1. In the Add New Version popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section, enter a Description for the document. You can also enter a
long description, if necessary.
3. Choose Upload.
11. In the Documents section, from the Add menu choose Assign to upload an existing document and perform
the following steps:
a. In the Select Documents dialog box, search for an appropriate file.
b. From the Documents search results list, select a document.
c. Choose OK.

You can also use Remove and Download to remove or download any of the documents assigned to the
model.

12. To add instructions to the location, choose DOCUMENTATION Instructions Assign and perform
the following tasks:
a. From the Select Instructions dialog box, select the appropriate instruction.
b. Choose OK.

13. To add Failure Modes to the location, choose DOCUMENTATION Failure Modes Assign and perform
the following tasks:
a. From the Select Failure Modes dialog box, select the appropriate failure modes.
b. Choose OK.

If you have write access to the location even though you do not have write access to the failure mode, you
can edit the failure mode instance page of the location.

When you copy a failure mode and Save & Publish it:
○ A new failure mode is created with the same causes and instructions from the source failure mode
○ The newly created failure mode is directly assigned to the object
○ The new failure mode is in published state
○ You navigate to the new failure mode instance page that includes all the copied failure mode instances:
effects, causes, instructions, and detection method
○ The new failure mode appears in the failure mode section list

You can now flag inherited failure modes to not relevant using the Not Relevant button. This excludes the
failure modes from any assessments relevant to the location.

In the failure mode instance page, you can Add Effect Details like:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

170 PUBLIC Master Data
 ○ Local Effect Description: describes the direct effect on the equipment or the how it affects the
equipment it is part of.
○ Higher-Level Effect Description: describes how is the system affected the equipment is part of.
○ End Effect Description: describes the ultimate effect that the failure has on safety and/or the
environment (if any) and any impact on production or operational capability.
○ Potential Worst-Case Effect Description: specifies what would happen in case no measures would be
taken to anticipate, prevent, or detect the failure.

14. You can view the list of functions assigned to the location under DOCUMENTATION Functions .
a. Choose Assign.
b. Select a function.
c. Choose OK.

You can select a function and choose Remove to unassign a function.

For more information, refer to Functions [page 175].

15. To publish the location, choose Publish.

Results

You have created a location and published it.

● You can view the list of child locations under Structure Locations
● You can view notifications and work orders, which are associated with the location under Maintenance and
Service. Notifications and work orders can be uploaded from an external system using available public
APIs.
○ View the Maintenance Plans associated with the location.
You can view the maintenance plans based on the following categories as well:
○ Single Cycle
○ Multiple Counter
○ Strategy
○ View Task Lists associated with the location.

5.4.2 Updating a Location

You use this procedure to update information such as location information, installation location, and
documents that relate to an existing location.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role FUNCTIONAL_LOCATION_EDIT assigned to it.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 171
Procedure

1. Launch the Locations application.

2. Search the location you want to update using search filters.
3. Select the location from the search results.

4. If you choose a location that is in status Published, choose Manage New Revision from the Locations
object page.
5. Edit the Location Information section, Installation Location section and the Documents section as
necessary.
For more information about field descriptions in each section, see Creating a Location [page 166].
6. Choose Save.
7. Choose Publish.

5.4.3 Deleting a Location

You use this procedure to delete a location that you do not want to have on the network.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the role FUNCTIONAL_LOCATION_EDIT assigned to it.

● You have created a location and the location is in any of the following states:
○ Unpublished
○ Published
○ In Revision

Procedure

1. Launch the Locations application.

2. Using search filters, search for the location you want to delete.
3. Select the relevant location.
4. Choose Delete.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

172 PUBLIC Master Data
5.4.4 Viewing Work Orders of a Location

You can use this procedure to view a list of work orders related to a location.

Prerequisites

To view a location, your user ID has the roles FUNCTIONAL_LOCATION_READ assigned to it.

Context

You can view the following work orders details: work order ID, order short description, order status, order type,
order priority, order long description, start date, end date, actual duration, or planned duration.

Click a notification ID to view more details of the same in the object page. An indicator chart displays with the
notification details. You can view the start and end date of notifications. If these dates are not available, the
current date of notification is plotted on the chart, with the measurement point time series data.

 Note

In case of work orders that do not have an assigned equipment, then the indicator chart will not work.

For more information about indicator chart, refer Viewing Time Series Data (Indicator Chart) of an Equipment
[page 122].

You can perform the following actions:

● Sort the work orders by - Ascending, Descending, Type, Priority, Start Date, or End Date.
● Group work orders by- Ascending, Descending, Type, or Priority.
● Filter work orders by - Type or Priority.

You can have more than one service provider for a location. Multiple business partners can have the same role.

 Note

If the order status is <TECO> or closed, then the actual duration is displayed, otherwise the planned
duration is displayed.

Procedure

1. Open the Locations application.

2. From the Location screen, select a location for which you want to view work orders.
3. To view information related to work orders, go to MAINTENANCE & SERVICE→ Work Orders section.

You can view the list of work orders associated with the location. Select and open a work order to view
more details of work order.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 173
5.4.5 Viewing Notifications of Location

You use this procedure to visualize all the notifications associated with alocation.

Prerequisites

You must have the roles FUNCTIONAL_LOCATION_READ assigned to your user ID in the SAP BTP account.

Context

Using this option, it is also possible to sort, filter, group notifications, and create new notifications. Click the
respective icons to perform these actions. Depending on the action performed on these notifications, the
progress statuses - completed, planned, and pending displays against each notification. It is also possible to
create an improvement request or edit an improvement request using the Add Evidence button. Also, create a
notification using the <New> option.

Click a work order ID to view more details of the same in the object page. A indicator chart displays with the
work order details. You can view the start and end date of work orders. If these dates are not available, the
current date of work order is plotted on the chart, with the measurement point time series data.

 Note

In case of work orders that do not have an assigned equipment, then the indicator chart will not work.

For more information about indicator chart, refer Viewing Time Series Data (Indicator Chart) of an Equipment
[page 122].

To view the details of notification, click the respective notification ID. The progress of notifications is as below:

● Completed - All notifications with status Completed or Closed.

● Planned - All notifications that have start date equal or greater than the current date.
● Pending - All notifications that have end date greater than current date or all notifications that have the
start date lesser than the current date.

Procedure

1. Open the Locations application.

2. From the Location list screen, select a location for which you want to view notifications.
3. In the MAINTENANCE & SERVICE tab, select Notifications.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

174 PUBLIC Master Data
Results

You can view all the notifications related to the location.

5.5 Functions

Functions are used to define how the assigned objects are intended to operate. You can assign functions to
equipment, models, locations and systems.

You can currently use this feature in the Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) assessment.

Generally, in asset central foundation, it takes you to the list page. .

 Note

● Functions once saved are published.

5.5.1 Creating and Editing Functions

You can use this procedure to create a function.

Context

Procedure

1. Open the Functions app.

2. Choose New.
3. Enter the following details in the New Function dialog box:

Field Description

Short Description (*) Enter a short description for the function.

Long Description Enter a long description for the function, if necessary.

Type (*) Select the type for the function from the list.

These are the categories that the functions have an im­

pact on.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 175
 Field Description

Type Description Enter a collective description for the type, if necessary.

4. Choose Save.
5. Once saved, the function is listed in the list page.

There is no status for functions, once saved the function is directly published.
6. Choose the function from the list, the Basic Information section lists all the details that you have entered
while creating a function.

You can choose to edit the information using Edit.

7. In the Documents section, you can use Add to add any relevant document.

You can use Remove to remove any existing document and download the documents using Download.
8. In the Assignments section, you can assign equipment, models, locations, or systems to the function.

5.5.2 Deleting Functions

You can use this procedure to delete a function.

Procedure

1. Open the Functions app.

2. Select the functions to be deleted from the list.
3. Choose Delete.

5.6 Failure Modes

A failure mode is a probable failure that could occur to piece of equipment. In case SAP Asset Intelligence
Network is available, the manufacturer shares the failure modes with the operator; else the operator has to
upload or enter the failure modes on their own. The failure mode keeps the operator informed about possible
failures and helps them to handle the failure modes efficiently.

A failure mode is always associated with a subclass and may have more than one category.

The following types of failure modes can occur to any of the following business objects associated with a piece
of equipment (equipment, models, spare parts, locations, groups):

● Design function is not obtained

● Specified function lost or outside accepted operational limit
● Non-Critical failures

You can now view the Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, and Safety (RAMS) figures for the failure modes.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

176 PUBLIC Master Data
5.6.1 Managing Failure Modes

You can perform various operations; such as creating a failure mode, viewing a failure mode, updating a failure
mode, deleting a failure mode, and assigning models, pieces of equipment, spare parts, groups, and locations
to a failure mode.

Context

You use the Failure Modes application to perform the following operations:

● Creating a Failure Mode [page 177]

● Viewing and Publishing a Failure Mode [page 181]
● Updating a Failure Mode [page 182]
● Deleting a Failure Mode [page 183]
● Copying a Failure Mode [page 183]
● Assigning Failure Modes to Business Objects [page 184]
● View the causes associated with a failure mode
● View the top words and top notifications with work orders for a failure mode and model. For more
information, see Using Failure Mode Analytics in the Failure Modes Application.

You can change the following assignments in failure modes:

● Model assigned to the failure mode

● Equipment assigned to the failure mode
● Location assigned to the failure mode
● Spare part assigned to the failure mode
● Group assigned to the failure mode

 Note

A failure mode can be in any status when you assign a business object to it.

5.6.1.1 Creating a Failure Mode

You use this procedure to create a failure mode and assign business objects such as models, items of
equipment, spare parts, groups, and locations to the failure mode.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles FAILURE_MODE_DELETE or FAILURE_MODE_EDIT assigned to it.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 177
Procedure

1. Open the Failure Modes app.

2. From the Failure Mode List window, choose New.
3. In the Failure Modes dialog box, perform the following tasks:
a. Enter the following details as described in the table :

Field Description

Description (*) Enter a short description for the failure mode.

Long description Enter a short description for the failure mode.

Subclass Select a subclass for the failure mode.

Category (*) Select one or more categories relevant for the failure
mode.

 Note
By default, Others is selected.

Type (*) Select the type of failure mode. The following list pro­
vides the descriptions for each type of failure mode:
○ 1 - Designed function is not obtained
○ 2 - Specified function lost or outside accepted op­
erational limit
○ 3 - Non critical failures

 Note
As a default, 3 - Non Critical failures

is selected.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

178 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Detection Method Select a detection method to support detectability. You

can select from thr following list:
○ Periodic maintenance
○ Functional testing
○ Inspection
○ Periodic condition monitoring
○ Continuous condition monitoring
○ Production interference
○ Casual observation
○ Corrective maintenance
○ On demand
○ Other

 Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

4. Choose Save to create the failure mode.

5. To add the RAMS figures, follow these steps:
a. In the RAMS Figures section, choose Edit.
b. Select a Failure Pattern.
c. Enter the KPI values for mean time to failure, mean time to repair, and mean time between failures.
d. Save your entries.
6. To assign a model, follow these steps:

a. In the ASSIGNMENTS Models section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Model dialog box, select the relevant equipment.
c. Choose Assign.
7. To assign a piece of equipment, follow these steps:

a. In the ASSIGNMENTS Equipment section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Equipment dialog box, select the relevant equipment.
c. Choose Assign.
8. To assign a location, follow these steps:

a. In the ASSIGNMENTS Locations section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Location dialog box, select the relevant location.
c. Choose Assign.

 Note

You can only assign a maximum of 50 locations to a failure mode.

9. To assign a spare part, follow these steps:

a. In the ASSIGNMENTS Spare Parts section, choose Assign.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 179
 b. From the Select Spare Parts dialog box, select the relevant spare part.
c. Choose Assign.
10. To assign a group, follow these steps:

a. In the ASSIGNMENTS Groups section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Group dialog box, select the relevant group.
c. Choose Assign.
11. To assign a system, follow these steps:

a. In the ASSIGNMENTS Systems section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select System dialog box, select the relevant system.
c. Choose Assign.
12. To add causes, follow these steps:
a. In the CAUSES section, choose Add.

You can choose New to add new causes or Assign to add existing causes.
b. From the Select Causes dialog box, select the relevant cause or create a new cause using the Create
Cause dialog box.
c. Choose Assign.
13. To add instructions, follow these steps:

a. In the INSTRUCTIONS Assign .

b. From the Select Instructions dialog box, select the relevant instruction.
c. Choose OK.
14. To publish the failure mode, choose Publish.
15. To create a revision of a failure mode or to work with the last published failure mode, or last revision of
failure mode, see section, choose Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions and Published
State [page 315].

Results

The failure mode is published.

When you copy a failure mode and Save & Publish it:

● A new failure mode is created with the same causes and instructions from the source failure mode
● The newly created failure mode is directly assigned to the object
● The new failure mode is in published state
● You navigate to the new failure mode instance page that includes all the copied failure mode instances:
effects, causes, instructions, and detection method
● The new failure mode appears in the failure mode list

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

180 PUBLIC Master Data
5.6.1.2 Viewing and Publishing a Failure Mode

You can view a failure mode to verify whether the information contained in a failure mode is appropriate.

Prerequisites

● To publish a failure mode, your user ID has the roles FAILURE_MODE_DELETE or FAILURE_MODE_EDIT
assigned to it.
● To view a failure mode, your user ID has the role FAILURE_MODE_READ assigned to it.

Context

If you have assigned a business object to a failure mode, you can navigate to the business object details and
work on the business object.

Procedure

1. Open the Failure Modes application.

2. In the Failure Mode List window, use the filters to search for an appropriate failure mode.
3. Choose a failure mode from the search list and double-click to view details.
4. On the Failure Mode screen, choose the Assignments tab to view the details of all the business objects
assigned to the failure mode. On the Assignments tab:
a. Choose Models to view the models assigned to the failure mode.

For more information about working with models, see Models [page 131].
b. Choose Equipment to view the pieces of equipment assigned to the failure mode.

For more information about working with equipment, see Equipment [page 95].
c. Choose Locations to view the locations assigned to the failure mode.

For more information about working with locations, see Locations [page 165].
d. Choose Spare Parts to view the spare parts assigned to the failure mode.

For more information about working with spare parts, see Spare Parts [page 189].
e. Choose Groups to view the group assigned to the failure mode.

For more information about working with groups, see Groups [page 199].
5. On the Failure Mode screen, choose the Causes tab to view all the possible causes related to the failure
mode.

Choose Add to add a new cause to the failure mode.

6. Choose Publish to publish the failure mode.

If you want to view details of the relevant business object, double-click it.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 181
5.6.1.3 Updating a Failure Mode

You can delete or update existing information within a failure mode or add missing information to a failure
mode.

Prerequisites

● You have identified the failure mode that you want to update.
● To update a failure mode, your user ID has the roles FAILURE_MODE_DELETE or FAILURE_MODE_EDIT
assigned to it.

Context

You can add possible causes or create new causes for a failure mode.

Procedure

1. Open the Failure Modes app.

2. In the Failure Modes app, search for an appropriate failure mode using the filters.
3. From the search results list in the Failure Modes section, select an appropriate failure mode.
4. Double-click the failure mode to view details.
5. If you have opened a failure mode that has been published, choose Manage->New Revision.
6. To update all the relevant business objects assigned to a failure mode, select the different sections on the
ASSIGNMENTS tab.

For more information, see Creating a Failure Mode [page 177].

7. To add a new cause, select the CAUSES tab.

For more information, see Creating a Failure Mode [page 177].

8. To publish the failure mode, choose Publish.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

182 PUBLIC Master Data
5.6.1.4 Deleting a Failure Mode

You can delete a failure mode that you no longer want to have on the network.

Prerequisites

To delete a failure mode, your user ID has the role FAILURE_MODE_DELETE assigned to it.

Procedure

1. Open the Failure Modes application.

2. In the Failure Mode List screen, search for a failure mode.
3. Choose a failure mode from the search list.

You can select more than one failure mode for deletion.
4. On the Failure Mode List screen, choose Delete.

5.6.1.5 Copying a Failure Mode

You can copy a failure mode to create a new failure mode similar to the existing failure mode.

Prerequisites

To copy a failure mode, your user ID has the role FAILURE_MODE_DELETE and FAILURE_MODE_EDIT
assigned to it.

Procedure

1. Open the Failure Modes application.

2. In the Failure Mode List screen, search for a failure mode.
3. Choose a failure mode from the search list.
4. In the Failure Mode List screen, choose Copy.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 183
5.6.1.6 Assigning Failure Modes to Business Objects

You can use this procedure to assign a business object to a failure mode.

Prerequisites

● You have identified the business object that you want to assign.
● Your user ID has the roles FAILURE_MODE_DELETE or FAILURE_MODE_EDIT assigned to it.

Context

You can assign a failure mode to the following objects:

● Models
● Equipment
● Locations
● Spare Parts
● Groups
● Systems
● Instructions

 Note

● You can only assign a maximum of 50 locations to a failure mode.

● All the equipment belonging to a group or model will also inherit the failure modes assigned to that
model or group.
● All the locations belonging to a group will also inherit the failure modes from that group.

For simplicity's sake, we will describe the procedure for assigning a failure mode to a model.

Procedure

1. Open the Failure Modes application.

2. In the Failure Mode List screen, use the filters to search for an appropriate failure mode.
3. In the Failure Mode screen, go to ASSIGNMENTS-> Models section.
4. Choose Assign.

You can select one or more models from the list and choose Assign.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

184 PUBLIC Master Data
5.7 Fingerprints

Fingerprint is defined as a collection of snapshot of indicator chart derived from a set of indicators and
metadata (type, data & time, description, equipment state, documents) for a specific time period. It describes
the reference state of a single piece of equipment that can be used for further process steps, for example,
equipment documentation.

Fingerprints help operators and manufacturers to define normal, reference, or failure states for equipment.
They can use these states at a later point in time to detect deviations/distances/trends from the normal
behavior and plan actions to get the equipment back to the normal state.

5.7.1 Creating a Fingerprint

You can use this procedure to create a fingerprint.

Prerequisites

You must have the authorized role FINGERPRINT_DELETE or FINGERPRINT_EDIT.

Procedure

1. From the equipment app:

a. On the launchpad, choose Equipment application.
b. Choose equipment from the list.
c. Go to Documentation Fingerprints .
d. Choose New.

Enter the <Fingerprint Name> and <Short Description> in the Create New Fingerprint dialog
box.
e. Go to SNAPSHOTS.
f. Click New.
g. Go to Select Indicators. Select the indicators that you want to record the fingerprint for.
h. Choose Capture.

You can adjust the capture screen to select a specific period in the indicator chart.
i. Choose OK and provide the snapshot description.
j. Choose Save.
k. You can also provide any relevant comments in the Comments section.
2. From Fingerprints app:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 185
 a. On the launchpad, choose Fingerprints application.
b. Choose fingerprint from the list.
c. Go to SNAPSHOTS.
d. Click New.
e. Go to Select Indicators. Select the indicators that you want to record the fingerprint for.
f. Choose Capture.

You can adjust the capture screen to select a specific period in the indicator chart.
g. Choose OK and provide the snapshot description.
h. Choose Save.
i. You can also provide any relevant comments in the Comments section.

Results

You have created a fingerprint for a piece of equipment.

 Note

● You can capture multiple snapshots with different indicator set and time-periods in a fingerprint.
● Once you have created a snapshot, you cannot edit them.

5.7.2 Viewing a Fingerprint

You can use this procedure to view a fingerprint.

Prerequisites

You must have the authorized role FINGERPRINT_READ, FINGERPRINT_DELETE, or FINGERPRINT_EDIT.

Procedure

1. From the equipment app:

a. On the launchpad, choose Equipment application.
b. Choose equipment from the list.
c. Go to Documentation Fingerprints .
d. Click on a fingerprint from the list.
2. From Fingerprints app:
a. On the launchpad, choose Fingerprints application.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

186 PUBLIC Master Data
 b. Click on a fingerprint from the list.

Results

You can view the snapshot and perform basic functions like sort, filter on the snapshot. Any changes on the
fingerprint will be recorded in the Timeline section.

5.7.3 Editing a Fingerprint

You can use this procedure to edit a fingerprint.

Prerequisites

You must have the authorized role FINGERPRINT_DELETE or FINGERPRINT_EDIT.

Procedure

1. From the equipment app:

a. On the launchpad, choose Equipment application.
b. Choose equipment from the list.
c. Go to Documentation Fingerprints .
d. Click on a fingerprint from the list.
e. Choose Edit.
f. You can change the status of a fingerprint from Created to Approved.
g. You can also post any relevant comments in the Comments section.
h. You can create a new snapshot or delete an existing one from the list.
i. Choose Save.
2. From Fingerprints app:
a. On the launchpad, choose Fingerprints application.
b. Choose fingerprint from the list.
c. Choose Edit.
d. You can change the status of a fingerprint from Created to Approved.
e. You can also post any relevant comments in the Comments section.
f. You can create a new snapshot or delete an existing one from the list.
g. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 187
Results

 Note

Once the status is set to Approved, you can no longer edit the fingerprint. However, you can still post
relevant comments.

You can use the Edit Header to edit the header information.

5.7.4 Deleting a Fingerprint

You can use this procedure to delete a fingerprint.

Prerequisites

You must have the authorized role FINGERPRINT_DELETE.

Procedure

1. From the equipment app:

a. On the launchpad, choose Equipment application.
b. Choose equipment from the list.
c. Go to Documentation Fingerprints .
d. Click on a fingerprint from the list.
e. Choose Delete.

A confirmation message is displayed.

f. Choose OK.
2. From Fingerprints app:
a. On the launchpad, choose Fingerprints application.
b. Choose fingerprint from the list.
c. Choose Delete.

A confirmation message is displayed.

d. Choose OK.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

188 PUBLIC Master Data
5.8 Spare Parts
Spare parts are components that are kept in your inventory as spare. Typically, these components are not fitted
into your item of equipment, but can be fitted into the item of equipment when needed.

With SAP Predictive Asset Insights, you can create and maintain a record of these spare parts. Also, if these
spare parts are fitted into the physical item of equipment, you can assign these spart parts to the
corresponding model on the network.

In SAP Predictive Asset Insights, you can record the spare part's manufacturing information, dimensions,
quantity, shelf life, to name a few. A spare part inherits attributes from a subclass. You can assign a spare part
to a model.

 Note

After the spare part is assigned to a model, we refer to the spare part as "Part".

Using the Spare Parts application, you can:

● Create spare parts (see Creating Spare Parts [page 190])

● Delete spare parts (see Deleting Spare Parts [page 193])

5.8.1 Managing Spare Parts

You can perform various operations on a spare part such as creating spare parts, viewing spare parts, and
deleting spare parts

Context

You can use the Spare Parts application to perform the following operations:

● Creating Spare Parts [page 190]

● Deleting Spare Parts [page 193]
● Assign new spare parts or maintain existing spare parts for an equipment using the Edit and Remove
buttons.
● Assign more than one spare part template to a spare part. You can also remove the templates that have
already been assigned and assign more templates.
● View and maintain the attributes and values for a spare part.
● Assign or remove documents for a spare part.
● Dispalys the break down instructions details such as <Expected Duration>, <Number of Steps>,
<Criticality>, <Activity>, <Primary Document>, and <Long Description>.
● View an analytics dashboard for a spare part. For more information see Viewing a Dashboard on Object
Pages [page 76].

 Note

Spare parts can only be optionally assigned to one sub-class.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 189
5.8.1.1 Creating Spare Parts

You perform this procedure to maintain manufacturing information, technical data, and assignment
information pertaining to spare parts.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles PART_DELETE or PART_EDIT assigned.

● You have identified the subclass for creating the spare part.

Procedure

1. Launch the Spare Parts application.

2. To create a single spare part, navigate to New Single Spare Part . To create spare parts by mass
upload, follow these substeps:

a. Navigate to New Mass Upload of Spare Parts .

b. From the Mass Upload of Spare Parts dialog box, download the template.
c. Fill in the necessary details and upload the template.

 Note

The CSV file must be in UTF-8 format in order to consider all the special characters.

3. In the New dialog box, enter the following details:

Field Description

Spare Part ID (*) Provide a unique name

Subclass Choose the appropriate subclass from the dropdown

Template Select a spare part template

Short (*) and Long Description Provide a description for the spare part

Unit of Measure (*) Choose the appropriate unit of measure

Phase Choose if the spare part is in Planned or Released phase

Manufacturer (*) Choose the name of the manufacturer of the spare part

Manufacturer Part Number (*) Provide the manufacturer part number

4. Choose Save.
5. In the Spare Parts details screen, to add the unit of measure and long description perform the following
steps:
a. Go to the INFORMATION section and choose Edit.
b. Select the unit of measure from Unit of Measure.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

190 PUBLIC Master Data
 c. Choose Save.
6. In the Spare Parts details screen, to update manufacturer information perform the following steps:

a. Go to the INFORMATION Part Number section and choose Edit.

b. Enter the details.
c. Choose Save.
7. In the Spare Parts details screen, to update availability and procurement information perform the following
steps:

a. Go to the INFORMATION Availability and Procurement section and choose Edit.

b. Enter the required details like delivery time, manufacturer stock level, shelf life, quality, contract, and
standard. You can also specify if the spare part is hazardous or is 3D printable.
You can view the date when the manufacturer stock level information was last updated.
c. Choose Save.
8. In the Spare Parts Details screen, to maintain information about dimensions of the spare part, perform the
following steps:
a. Go to the DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT DATA section and choose Edit.
b. Provide the appropriate dimensions for size, length, width, height, and weight.
a. Choose Save.
9. In the Spare Parts Details screen, to maintain attributes pertaining to the spare part, perform the following
steps:

a. Go to the INFORMATION Data Sheet section and choose Edit.

b. Choose Add Templates. The attributes are derived from the selected templates. You can also edit or
remove templates.
c. You can select a template and choose Remove Template to remove the template.
d. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .
e. Choose Save.
In the ASSIGNMENTS section, you can view the details of models, equipment, locations, or instructions
that are assigned to the spare part.
○ By assigning models to the spare part, the model owner can provide specific information about Default
Delivery Quantity and Advised Stock Quantityof the spare part.
○ Instructions are for the operator about the spare part use.
10. In the Spare Parts Details screen, to add the spare part to a group perform the following steps:
a. Go to INFORMATION section.
b. Choose Add and select if you want to add a spare part to a new group or to an existing group. Similarly,
you can remove a spare part from a group by using Remove.
c. Choose Save.
11. In the Spare Parts Details screen, to view or assign spare part successor information about, perform the
following steps:

a. Go to the INFORMATION Life Cycle Information Successor Spare Part section and choose
Assign.
b. Select one or more spare parts in the Assign Successor dialog box.
c. Choose Assign.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 191
 d. You can edit the spare part successor information by choosing Edit on the selected spare part in the
Successor Spare Partsection.
e. Enter the date until when the spare part can be ordered in the <Valid From> of the Edit Successor
Information dialog box.
f. Choose Save.
12. In the DOCUMENTS section, you can view the list of documents assigned to the spare part. You can also
add, remove, or download a document from the list.

When uploading a new document, you can:

○ Upload a document without a duplicate check using the Upload button.
○ Run a duplicate check and if no duplicates, only then upload a document using the Check and Upload
button.
13. In the ASSIGNMENTS section, you can view all the business objects to which the spare part is assigned.
14. In the FAILURE MODES section, you see details of failure modes assigned to the spare part. You can also
assign a failure mode to the spare part using Assign.

If you have write access to the spare part even though you do not have write access to the failure mode,
you can edit the failure mode instance page of the spare part.

When you copy a failure mode and Save & Publish it:
○ A new failure mode is created with the same causes and instructions from the source failure mode
○ The newly created failure mode is directly assigned to the object
○ The new failure mode is in published state
○ You navigate to the new failure mode instance page that includes all the copied failure mode instances:
effects, causes, instructions, and detection method
○ The new failure mode appears in the failure mode section list

In the failure mode instance page, you can Add Effect Details like:
○ Local Effect Description: describes the direct effect on the equipment or the how it affects the
equipment it is part of.
○ Higher-Level Effect Description: describes how is the system affected the equipment is part of.
○ End Effect Description: describes the ultimate effect that the failure has on safety and/or the
environment (if any) and any impact on production or operational capability.
○ Potential Worst-Case Effect Description: specifies what would happen in case no measures would be
taken to anticipate, prevent, or detect the failure.

Results

You have created a spare part.

If you have integration with SAP Hybris Commerce, then you can also view the Add to Cart icon on the page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

192 PUBLIC Master Data
5.8.1.2 Deleting Spare Parts

You perform this activity when you want to remove a spare part from the network.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role PART_DELETE assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Spare Parts application.

2. Search for the spare part you want to delete.
3. Select the spare part from the search results.
4. Choose Delete.

5.8.1.3 Uploading of Spare parts from Visual Design

Stream Document

Context

To get familiar with SAP 3D Visual Enterprise Author tool. Please refer https://help.sap.com/viewer/
8e4c65bb3a6c4ef6b56dc27d1d95cde6/9.0.0.4/en-US

To maintain spare part metadata according to the relevant product standards, please go through following
steps:

Procedure

1. Open SAP 3D Visual Enterprise Author.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 193
2. Open Metadata panel, refer to https://help.sap.com/viewer/67c291fba1bd10148bea8dce7b0caa3e/
9.0.0.4/en-US/a46817d5f0874720bff566b9c7e68990.html

3. Export the current metadata of VDS Viewer to maintain spare parts metadata according to product
standards. Refer to https://help.sap.com/viewer/67c291fba1bd10148bea8dce7b0caa3e/9.0.0.4/en-US/
0fd8ec37c0574419bb7a7487f5f47741.html

 Note

Before exporting select all the spare parts of the VDS to see all the metadata with respect to each node
by moving to Display panel and pressing CTRL+A .

4. Open excel and try to open the file, which you have just exported as .txt file.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

194 PUBLIC Master Data
 On opening .txt file in excel following should be marked:
a. Choose the Delimited file type that best describes your data and click Next.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 195
 b. Set the Tab as the delimiters your data contains.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

196 PUBLIC Master Data
 c. Set the data format of each column to Text.

5. Please add following columns in the excel:

Column Name Description

0 These are the unique Locator ID for each spare part of the
VDS. This is already provided as part of the VE document.

VE Name This is the Name of the spare part and is already provided
as part of the VE document.

AIN / Manufacturer It describes the manufacturer of the spare part and will
also play vital role in mapping these spare part to any AIN
object.

AIN / ManufacturerDescription This describes any additional description about the Manu­
facturer of the spare part.

AIN / ManufacturerPartID It describe the Part ID given by the manufacturer to the

spare part. This will also play a vital role in mapping these
to any AIN object.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 197
 Column Name Description

AIN / EANNumber It describes the standard bar code symbology and num­
bering system used in global trade to identify a specific
spare part in VDS.

AIN / PartName It describes any other part name given to the spare part

AIN / Quantity It describes how many of these spare parts are used in a
certain VDS.

AIN / UOM It describes what will be the unit of measure for this spare
part.

AIN / ShortDescription_XX It describes the short description for spare parts. Here XX
can be any valid language code.

Example: en, de

AIN / LongDescription_XX It describes the long description for spare parts. Here XX
can be any valid language code.

Example: en, de

6. Import the excel created with the product-specific data to the same VDS. Refer to https://help.sap.com/
viewer/67c291fba1bd10148bea8dce7b0caa3e/9.0.0.4/en-US/
3569c3003f0f443da3f702a2c25268ee.html

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

198 PUBLIC Master Data
 To validate if your metadata is successfully added to the VDS, click Select Metadata Keys To Show on
Metadata menu panel and select the new columns and click OK.

5.9 Groups

You can group together different business objects for multiple purposes.

A group can be any of the following types:

● Criticality Assessment
Allowed object types: Equipment, Locations
● Fleet
Allowed object types: Equipment
● FMEA (Failure Mode Effect Analysis)
Allowed object types: Equipment, Locations
● Training
Allowed object types: Equipment, Models, Instructions, Locations, Spare Parts, Templates, Documents,
Announcements
● Handover and Commissioning
Allowed object types: Equipment, Models, Instructions, Locations, Spare Parts, Templates, Documents,
Announcements
● Maintenance Planner
Allowed object types: Equipment, Locations, Notifications, Work Orders, Work Order steps
● Organization
Allowed object types: Equipment, Models, Locations
● Project
Allowed object types: Equipment, Models, Instructions, Locations, Spare Parts, Templates, Documents,
Announcements
● Spare Parts Kit
Allowed object types: Spare Parts
● Variant
Allowed object types: Models, Spare Parts

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 199
● Work Center
Allowed object types: Equipment, Locations, Notifications, Work Orders, Work Order steps

A group moves from one state to another during its process of creation and maintenance. The different states
that a group goes through are listed here:

● Unpublished
● Published
● In Revision

5.9.1 Managing Groups

You can perform various operations on a group such as creating, viewing, updating, and deleting a group. You
can also assign equipment, models, instructions, locations, spare parts, templates, documents, and
announcements to a group.

Context

The following group types are available:

● Risk and Criticality

● Fleet
● FMEA
● Training
● Handover and Commissioning
● Maintenance Planner
● Organization
● Project
● Spare Parts Kit
● Variant
● Work Center

You can perform the following operations using the Groups application:

● Creating a Group [page 201]

● Viewing and Publishing a Group [page 202]
● Updating a Group [page 203]
● Deleting a Group [page 204]
● Copying a Group [page 205]
● Assigning Business Objects to a Group [page 205]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

200 PUBLIC Master Data
5.9.1.1 Creating a Group

You use this procedure to create a group and assign business objects such as equipment, models, instructions,
locations, spare parts, templates, documents, and announcements to the groups.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles GROUP_DELETE or GROUP_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Groups app.

2. From the type of group from the card view, choose New.
3. In the Create Group dialog box, perform the following tasks:
a. Enter the following details as described in the table:

Field Description

Short description(*) Enter a short description for the group.

Long description Enter a long description for the group.

Allowed Member Types(*) Lists the type of business objects that can be assigned
to the group type.

 Note

Mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

4. Choose Ok to create the group.

5. To assign a model, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Models section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Models dialog box, select the relevant model.
c. Choose Assign.
6. To assign a piece of equipment, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Equipment section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Equipment dialog box, select the relevant equipment.
c. Choose Assign.
7. To assign a location, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Locations section, choose Assign.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 201
 b. From the Select Locations dialog box, select the relevant location.
c. Choose Assign.
8. To assign a spare part, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Spare Parts section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Spare Parts dialog box, select the relevant spare part.
c. Choose Assign.
9. To assign a template, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Templates section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Templates dialog box, select the relevant templates.
c. Choose Assign.
10. To assign an instruction, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Instructions section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Instructions dialog box, select the relevant instructions.
c. Choose Assign.
11. To assign documents, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Documents section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Documents dialog box, select the relevant documents.
c. Choose Assign.
12. To assign announcements, follow these steps:

a. In the Members Announcements section, choose Assign.

b. From the Select Announcements dialog box, select the relevant announcements.
c. Choose Assign.
13. To assign failure modes to a group, follow these steps:
a. In the Failure Modes section, choose Assign.
b. From the Select Failure Modes dialog box, select the relevant failure modes.
c. Choose Assign.
14. To publish the group, choose Publish.

To create a revision of a group or to work with the last published group, or last revision of group, see
Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions and Published State [page 315].

5.9.1.2 Viewing and Publishing a Group

You can view a group to verify whether the information contained in a group is appropriate.

Prerequisites

● To publish a group, your user ID has the roles GROUP_DELETE or GROUP_EDIT assigned.
● To view a group, your user ID has the role GROUP_READ assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

202 PUBLIC Master Data
Context

If you have assigned a business object to a group, you can navigate to the business object details and work on
the business object.

Procedure

1. Open the Groups application.

2. In the Groups window, use the filters to search for an appropriate group.

To publish one or more unpublished groups, select the groups from the list and choose Publish.
3. Choose a group from the search list and double-click to view details.
4. In the Group screen, choose the Group Information tab to view the details that are specific to the group.
5. In the Group screen, choose the Members tab to view the business objects assigned to the group.
6. In the Group screen, choose the Analytics tab to view the graphical representation of equipment assigned
to the group based on population and age.
7. View the failure modes assigned to a group under Failure Modes.

 Note

Relevant for Risk and Criticality and FMEA group types.

8. In the Group screen, choose the Timeline tab to view the relevant changes made on the group.

5.9.1.3 Updating a Group

You can correct the information within a group, or add any missing information to a group.

Prerequisites

● You have identified the group that you want to update.

● To update a group, your user ID has the roles GROUP_DELETE or GROUP_EDIT assigned.

Context

You can update a group to change any of the following:

● Properties of a group such as – group type, group ID, created by, or allowed object types.
● Business objects assigned to the group.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 203
Procedure

1. Open the Groups app.

2. In the Groups app, search for an appropriate group using the filters.
3. From the search results list in the Groups section, select an appropriate group.
4. Double-click the selected group to view details.
5. If you have opened the group that has been published, in the Group window, choose Manage->New
Revision.
6. To update all relevant details to a group, select the GROUP INFORMATION section.

For more information, see Creating a Group [page 201].

7. To update business objects assigned to a group, select the OBJECT section.

For more information, see Creating a Group [page 201].

8. To save the group, choose Save.
9. To publish the group, choose .

5.9.1.4 Deleting a Group

You can delete a group that you no longer want to have on the network.

Prerequisites

To delete a group, your user ID has the role GROUP_DELETE assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Groups application.

2. In the Groups List screen, search for a group.
3. Choose a group from the search list.

You can select more than one group for deletion.

4. In the Group screen, choose Delete.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

204 PUBLIC Master Data
5.9.1.5 Copying a Group

You can copy a group to create a new group similar to an existing group.

Prerequisites

To copy a group, your user ID has the role GROUP_DELETE and GROUP_EDIT assigned to it.

Procedure

1. Open the Groups application.

2. In the Groups List screen, search for a group.
3. Choose a group from the search list.
4. In the Groups List screen, choose .

5.9.1.6 Assigning Business Objects to a Group

You can use this procedure to assign business objects, such as equipment, models, instructions, locations,
spare parts, templates, documents, and announcements to a group.

Prerequisites

● You have created a group to which you want to assign a business object.
● You have created a business object that you want to assign to the group.
● To copy a group, your user ID has the role GROUP_DELETE and GROUP_EDIT assigned.

Context

You can assign failure modes to different business objects.

Procedure

1. Open the Groups application.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 205
2. In the Groups List screen, use the filters to search for an appropriate group.
3. Select a group and in the Group screen, go to Members section, depending on the business object that you
want to assign, choose Assign in the relevant section.
4. In the selection window, use the search filters to find an appropriate business object.
5. Select the appropriate business objects and choose Assign.

5.10 Systems

A system is defined as a set of interrelated equipment or subsystems that regularly interact or are
interdependent. In a defined context, they are considered whole and separated from their environment serving
a common purpose. For example, control system, transmission system, brake system, and so on.

You can define a system based on a system model and assign system template to it.

● Information
You can view the following information in this section:
○ Data Sheet
○ Model Information
○ Installation Information
○ Installation Location
○ Lifecycle Information
● Structure
You can view a list of subsystems and equipment associated with the system.
● Documentation
You can view the documents and instructions assigned to a system.

5.10.1 Managing Systems

You can create, view, update, and delete a system. You can share a system using the Authorizations app.

Context

You can perform the following operations on the system data using the Systems app:

● Create a system and assign additional information such as installation information, location information,
and attach documents and instructions to it.
● Assign or remove equipment or subsystems.
● Assign, update or remove spare parts.
● Add and remove documents or instructions.
● Publish a system.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

206 PUBLIC Master Data
 ● Delete a system.

5.10.1.1 Creating a System

You use this procedure to create a system based on an existing system model, and add additional information
such as system installation information, and related equipment and subsystems to the system. You can also
assign documents and instructions relevant to the system.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles SYSTEM_DELETE or SYSTEM_EDIT assigned.

Context

You use the Systems application to:

● Create a system for your own operations purposes.

● Create a system for another customer.

For simplicity purpose, we describe the procedure to create a system for your own operations.

Procedure

1. Open the Systems application.

2. Choose New.
3. In the New System dialog box, enter the following details:
a. In the <Model ID> dropdown, select an existing system model from which you want to inherit the
properties for the system.

You can now create a system without assigning a model to it. You can also remove a model assigned to
a system by using Manage Remove Model .
b. In the <System ID> field, enter a unique name for a system.
c. In the <Short Description> field, enter a short description for the system.
d. In the <System Templates> dropdown, choose the system template you have created.

For more information about creating an equipment template, see Creating a System Template [page
301].
e. In the <Long Description> field, enter a long description for the system.
f. In the <Operator> field, select an operator for the equipment. Your company is selected as default
value.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 207
 g. In the <Phase> field, select:
○ An Operation status if a physical system exists.
○ Planned if a physical system does not exist, or you have chosen to update the physical system
details later.
h. Choose Save to create a single system.

4. To update additional attributes related to a system, select INFORMATION Data Sheet tab and
perform these substeps.
a. Choose Edit.
b. You can add a template using Add Template.
c. You can select a template and choose Remove Template to remove the template.
d. You can display the alternate unit of measure using Show Alternate UoM.

You can set the default unit of measurement system in the Unit of Measure Variant under User
Account(icon on the left corner of the launchpad) Settings Unit of Measure .
e. Choose Save.

5. To add installation information, select the INFORMATION Installation Information tab and perform
the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit and enter the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

Source Business Partner Role Update the source business partner role, if required.

Build Date Specify the date of manufacture issued by the manufac­

turer.

Dealer Select the name of the dealer for the system.

Service Provider Select the name of the service provider for the system.

Regulators/Authority Select the official who certifies if the system is installed

or assembled correctly.

Insurers Select the name of the insurer for the system.

Long Description Enter a description for the system.

To assign a tag, choose Add/Remove Tags and enter your tags. You can use tags to help you logically
categorize activities, information, or reminders about your system.

6. To add system components, navigate to STRUCTURE Structure tab and perform the following tasks:
a. To add systems:
1. Go to Systems tab.
2. Choose Assign Systems .
3. Select the systems in the Select Systems dialog box.
4. Choose OK.
b. To add equipment:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

208 PUBLIC Master Data
 1. Go to Equipment tab.
2. Choose Assign Equipment .
3. Select the equipment in the Select Equipment dialog box.
4. Choose OK.

You can reorder the system components by using the ordering buttons on the structure in the edit
mode.
1. In the Structure section, choose Edit.
2. Select a system or equipment from the list.
3. Choose Move to Top, Move Up, Move Down, or Move to Bottom to reorder.

7. To view the system topology, navigate to STRUCTURE AND PARTS Topology . For more information,
refer to Viewing System Topology [page 215].

8. To add system spare parts, navigate to STRUCTURE AND PARTS Spare Parts Assign and perform
the following tasks:
a. From the Assign Spare Parts dialog box, select the appropriate spare parts.
b. Choose Provide Quantity to specify the quantity of each spare part. You can also enter a comment if
necessary.
c. Choose Assign.

The spare parts are by default inherited from the model assigned to the system. You can also directly
assign, or maintain existing spare parts for system using the Edit and Remove buttons. Similarly, you can
view the associated documents when a spare part is being shared.

 Note

If you have integration with SAP Commerce Cloud, then you can also view the Add to Cart button for
each spare part. Currently, you can only add one spare part for each order request.

9. To add instructions to the system, go to DOCUMENTATION Instructions and perform the following
tasks:
a. Choose Assign.
b. From the Select Instructions dialog box, select the appropriate instruction.
c. Choose OK.

10. To add, or assign, or edit an existing document to the system, choose the Documentation
Documents tab, and perform the following tasks:

In the Documents section, choose Add menu to upload a new document, and perform the following steps.

a. Choose Add Add Image to add an image

1. In the Add Image pop-up, browse for a file.
2. In the Additional Information section:
○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 209
  Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
b. Choose Add Add Document to add a document.
1. In the Add Document popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
c. Choose Add Add Link to add a document link.
1. In the Add Link popup, provide a URL link to the document along with a Display Name.

 Note

○ You cannot upload private domains such as .corp as links.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

210 PUBLIC Master Data
 2. In the Additional Information section:
○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a
Phase, if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there
are no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
3. Choose Upload.
You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If
duplicate files exist, you will then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then
can Continue Uploading the New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use
Selected File option to upload it.
d. You can add a new version of a document by selecting the document from the list and choose Add
Add New Version .
1. In the Add New Version popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign
the same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files
with “.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

2. In the Additional Information section, enter a Description for the document. You can also enter a
long description, if necessary.
3. Choose Upload.
11. In the Documents section, from the Add menu choose Assign to upload an existing document and perform
the following steps:
a. In the Select Documents dialog box, search for an appropriate file.
b. From the Documents search results list, select a document.
c. Choose OK.

You can also use Remove and Download to remove or download any of the documents assigned to the
system.

12. You can assign, copy, or remove failure modes relevant to the system in the DOCUMENTATION Failure
Modes section.
a. To assign failure modes:
1. Choose Assign.
2. Select the failure modes from the Select Failure Modes dialog box.
3. Choose OK.
b. To copy a failure mode, select the failure mode from the list and choose Copy.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 211
 A confirmation message is displayed. Choose Copy.
c. To remove failure modes that are assigned to the system, select the failure modes and choose Remove.

A confirmation message is displayed. Choose OK.

If you have write access to the system even though you do not have write access to the failure mode, you
can edit the failure mode instance page of the system.

When you copy a failure mode and Save & Publish it:
○ A new failure mode is created with the same causes and instructions from the source failure mode
○ The newly created failure mode is directly assigned to the object
○ The new failure mode is in published state
○ You navigate to the new failure mode instance page that includes all the copied failure mode instances:
effects, causes, instructions, and detection method
○ The new failure mode appears in the failure mode section list

You can view the failure mode instance which is directly assigned (at the same time), you can now view
different object icons in the <From> field of the failure mode section if the failure mode is inherited or
assigned directly to the system.

In the failure mode instance page:

○ You can add new effects using Add New or assign existing effects using Add Assign in the
Effects section. For each effect, you can Add Effect Details like:
○ Local Effect Description: describes the direct effect on the system or the how it affects the
equipment it is part of.
○ Higher-Level Effect Description: describes how is the system affected the equipment is part of.
○ End Effect Description: describes the ultimate effect that the failure has on safety and/or the
environment (if any) and any impact on production or operational capability.
○ Potential Worst-Case Effect Description: specifies what would happen in case no measures would
be taken to anticipate, prevent, or detect the failure.
○ You can add new causes using Add New or assign existing causes using Add Assign in the
Causes section. You can assign a Low Level Failure Mode to the new causes that you create.
○ You can assign existing spare parts to the failure mode instance using Assign in the Spare Parts
section.
You can select the assigned spare parts from the list and choose Remove to unassign them.
Spare parts that can be assigned to the failure mode instance are displayed in the assign dialog box.
Spare parts already assigned to the failure mode are filtered out from the list.
○ You can assign existing instructions to the failure mode instance using Instructions Assign .
Once you have assigned instructions, you can assign causes for the selected the instructions using
Manage Cause.
You can also select instructions from the list and unassign them using Remove.
○ Under Analytics, you can view the failure mode analytics for failure modes that are inherited from the
model.
like:

13. You can view the list of functions assigned to the system under DOCUMENTATION Functions .
a. Choose Assign.
b. Select a function.
c. Choose OK.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

212 PUBLIC Master Data
 You can select a function and choose Remove to unassign a function.

 Note

You cannot remove functions that are inherited from the model. Only functions assigned to the system
instance can be removed.

For more information, refer to Functions [page 175].

14. To publish a system, choose Publish.

The system is published and a first revision of the system is created.

15. To create revisions of a system and to switch between the published and revision states, see the steps
provided in the procedure Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions and Published State [page
315].

5.10.1.2 Viewing and Updating a System

You use this procedure to view and update information such as installation information, instructions, and
documents that are related to a system.

Prerequisites

● To view a system, your user ID has the roles SYSTEM_READ assigned.

● To update a system, your user ID has the roles SYSTEM_DELETE or SYSTEM_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Systems application.

2. Search for a system that you want to update using the search filters.
3. Select the system from the search results.

4. If you choose a system that is in a published state, choose Manage New Revision from the System
object page.

5. To update attributes such as installation information, select INFORMATION Installation Information

tab and perform the following tasks:
a. Choose Edit in the Installation Information section.
b. Enter the required details.
c. Choose Save.
6. To add or remove systems (subsystems) or equipment to a system, go to Structure tab.
7. To assign documents and instructions, choose the DOCUMENTATION tab.

a. To add a document, choose DOCUMENTATION Documents and perform the following tasks:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 213
 1. Choose Add New to add a new document to the system.
2. Choose Add Assign to assign an existing document to the equipment.
3. To remove a document, select the document or documents from the list and choose Remove.
b. To assign existing planned maintenance instructions, or troubleshooting and breakdown instructions
to the system, or to remove the instructions related to the system, choose DOCUMENTATION
Instructions tab and perform the following tasks:
1. To assign an instruction, choose Assign.
2. To remove an instruction, choose Remove.
8. View the modifications made on the system data in the Timeline tab.

You can view the update statistics based on:

○ Updates By Type
○ Time Range
○ Updates by Partner
○ Updates on model or system data

You can view any changes in the sharing activities in the timeline section. You can also selecta time period
to view only the changes during that timeframe using the Filter By dialog box.

You can also choose to view all the changes or only changes made on the associated model or system data
using the Filter By dialog box. By default, it shows changes on system data only in the timeline.
9. View the system toplogy under the Topology section. You can also save a topology for future reference.
10. Choose Publish to publish the updated system.

5.10.1.3 Publishing a system

Prerequisites

● To update a system, your user ID has the roles SYSTEM_DELETE or SYSTEM_EDIT assigned.
● You have created systems in any of the following states:
○ Unpublished
○ Published
○ In Revision

Context

You can view the list of systems using the Systems app and perform a mass publish when you have to publish
many systems.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

214 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. Open the Systems application.

2. Search for systems that are either in unpublished, or in revision state.
3. Select one or more systems from the search results.
4. Choose Publish.

5.10.1.4 Deleting a System

You can delete a system that you do not want to have on the network.

Prerequisites

● To update a system, your user ID has the roles SYSTEM_DELETE or SYSTEM_EDIT assigned.
● You have created systems in any of the following states:
○ Unpublished
○ Published
○ In Revision

Procedure

1. Open the Systems application.

2. Search for systems.
3. Select one or more systems from the search results.
4. Choose Delete.

5.10.1.5 Viewing System Topology

The system topology displays the network of equipment and subsystems, and how these are connected within
this specific system.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 215
Example:

EQ1 to EQ10 are part of a system called Bottling Machine and are displayed in the topology according to their
connections.

The topology feature allows you to:

● View how your digital assets are connected.

● Drilldown to individual equipment or subssytem to get detailed information on the equipment or
susbsystem itself as well as how interfaces and ports are connected.
● Visually identify newly added equipment, removed equipment and – in general – equipment where there
was a discrepancy when comparing the reference structure and the actual structure.

Prerequisites:

● You have created a system.

● You must have the SYSTEM_EDIT or SYSTEM_DELETE roles assigned to configure and manage the
topology.
● You must have – at least – the SYSTEM_READ role assigned to view the topology, and – at least – the
EQUIPMENT_READ role assigned to view the Equipment Details, the Connection Details as well as to
navigate to the Equipment object page.

Procedure

1. Use the delivered System APIs (/systems(systemId)/topologyConfiguration, and /systems(systemId)/

topologyConnections to initially post data to the topology of a system.
For more details, see the Systems API under API Tutorial for SAP Asset Intelligence Network
documentation .
1. First use the /systems(systemId)/topologyConfiguration API to load the interface and port
information for your pieces of equipment.
2. Then use the /systems(systemId)/topologyConnections API to create the connections between the
configured interfaces and ports of your loaded pieces of equipment.

 Note

○ Ports communicated in the configuration API call are considered active, any ports that were
defined in a previous configuration API call, but have removed ports in a subsequent
configuration API call are considered inactive.
Example:
configuration API call 1 communicates: Interface 1 – Port 1 and Port 2 (i.e. Port 1 and Port 2 are
considered active);

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

216 PUBLIC Master Data
 configuration API call 2 communicates: Interface 1 – Port 1 (i.e. Port 1 is considered active, and
Port 2 is now considered inactive)

2. Go to the Systems app and open the system into which you loaded the topology data.
3. Select the Topology tab to view the topology after initial load.
1. View the Connection Details by clicking on a connection line between 2 pieces of equipment.
This will show you:
○ the Equipment ID and Equipment Short Description
○ the interface and port information for each of the connected pieces of equipment for the selected
connection
2. Open the detailed information in the side panel by clicking on an equipment in the topology.
This will show you:
○ the Equipment ID and Equipment Short Description
○ Equipment Status
○ Manufacturer
○ Path information of parent objects of the Equipment
○ List of all interfaces and all (that is, connected as well as disconnected) ports for each interface for
the selected equipment.

 Note

By clicking on the Equipment links in the side panel you open the Equipment Details quick view
where you can get additional information for the selected equipment.

You can also navigate to the Equipment object page from quick view (via Display Equipment
Details).

4. Save Initial Reference Structure.

Click Save as Reference to save the actual loaded structure as reference structure, that is, this saved
topology structure will be considered as planned structure until you save a new reference structure.
5. Comparison of Reference Structure with Actual Structure.
The next time you upload the actual data via the /topologyConfiguration and actual /topologyConnection
APIs, this actual structure will be compared to the reference (= planned) structure and changes will be
visualized in the topology display.
As general information, you will see either Actual is same as planned (if there was no change to the
network since the last upload) or Actual is different from planned (if there was a change to the network
since the last upload).
For the latter, you will get additional information on the changes directly in the topology visualization:
○ All new equipment (= equipment that is not in the planned/reference topology, but in the actual
topology) and their connections are displayed in green.
○ All removed equipment (= equipment that is in the planned/reference topology, but not in the actual
topology) are displayed in red.
6. Save new Reference Structure.
Click Save as Reference to save the actual structure as new reference structure.

You can save a planned topology for future reference using the Save as Reference button. The API always refer
to the actual topology. The APIs always compare an actual topology with a planned/reference topology that
was saved as reference and display the differences between the two topologies. The following legends are used
to depict the differences:

● All the new equipment and their networks are displayed in green.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 217
● All the equipment in the planned/reference topology that are removed in the actual are displayed in red.

5.11 Documents

You use the Documents application to perform the following operations:

● View all the documents that are used by your organization in your product.
● Upload new documents and assign the document to business objects such as models, items of equipment,
announcements, requests, locations, spare parts, and instructions (see Uploading a Document [page 219]
and Assigning Documents to Business Objects [page 229])
● Edit attributes of multiple documents centrally so that the changes apply to all associated business objects
(see Editing Document Attributes [page 225])
● Delete documents that are not required on the network (see Deleting a Document [page 230])
● Upload a link as document and assign the document to business objects such as models, items of
equipment, announcements, requests, locations, spare parts, and instructions.
Documents with links allow reference to documents in external DMS and other document systems.
● Add the documents to different groups.
● Search for a document based on origin, phase category, file type, and so on.
● Download the documents using the Download option. You can also opt to download all the versions of a
document.
● You can view the number of available versions in the Version field on the list page. If there are more than
one version of the file in the same or different languages, you can view and download these versions by
choosing the version number. It will open a dialog box with the file details.
● Improved SAP ERP synchronization of documents:
○ Mapping document content to DIRs considering the version and language assignments.
○ Synchronizing various changes, including versioning between the DIRs and document files in asset
central foundation.

 Note

You must have configured a prefix for the object ID of your organization to perform above operations on the
documents. For more information, refer to Configuring the Prefix for the Object ID of your Organization
[page 436].

Updating Language Files

● Overwrite any language file of a document record for business partner with write permission.
● Delete any language files even if uploaded by another business partner, except for the last remaining
language file of the document record. The last remaining language file for a document record can only be
deleted by the owner of the overall document record.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

218 PUBLIC Master Data
Supported Document Size

You can upload a document up to 25 MB. To upload a document of a higher size, configure using the
Application Settings app. For more details, see Configuring Document Upload Size [page 437]

5.11.1 Uploading a Document

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles DOCUMENT_DELETE or DOCUMENT_EDIT assigned.

● The document you want to upload is among the supported document formats and the configured file size.
For more details, see Documents [page 218]

Procedure

1. Open the Documents application.

2. Choose Add.

You can add an image, document, or link.

3. Choose Add Add Image to add an image

a. In the Add Image pop-up, browse for a file.
b. In the Additional Information section:
○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a Phase,
if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there are
no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
c. Choose Upload.

You can also run a duplicate check and if no duplicates, only then upload a document using the Check
and Upload button.

4. Choose Add Add Document to add a document.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 219
 a. In the Add Document popup browse for a file.

 Note

○ Maximum upload file size for a document is 2 GB.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign the
same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files with
“.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

b. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a Phase,
if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there are
no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
c. Choose Upload.

You can also run a duplicate check and if no duplicates, only then upload a document using the Check
and Upload button.

5. Choose Add Add Link to add a document link.

a. In the Add Link popup, provide a URL link to the document along with a Display Name.

 Note

○ You cannot upload private domains such as .corp as links.

○ Different files with different MIME types can be uploaded for a document. You can assign the
same or different languages for each file. For example, a document can now have files with
“.doc”, “.pdf”, “.txt” extensions.

b. In the Additional Information section:

○ Assign a Main Category to classify the document.
You can also assign additional categories in the More Categories field. You can also assign a Phase,
if necessary.
○ Select the type of sensitive data available in the document from the Data Sensitivity list.

 Note

This selection is only one of the metadata information for the document. Currently, there are
no other actions performed based on the different value selected for this field.

○ Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the documents.
○ Enter a description. You can also enter a long description, if necessary.
○ Select the confidentiality of the document if it’s not shared with everyone.
c. Choose Upload.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

220 PUBLIC Master Data
 You can also run a duplicate check and if no duplicates, only then upload a document using the Check
and Upload button.
6. Choose Upload.

Results

The following table lists the MIME types and the MIME groups.

MIME Groups

File Extension MIME Type MIME Group

.txt text/plain Text Document

.jpg image/jpeg Image

.jpeg image/jpeg Image

.jpe image/jpeg Image

.png image/png Image

.bmp image/jpeg Image

.dib image/jpeg Image

.bmp image/x-windows-bmp Image

.tif image/jpeg Image

.tiff image/jpeg Image

.jfif image/jpeg Image

.gif image/gif Image

.doc application/msword Word Document

.docx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- Word Document

cedocument.wordprocessingml.docu­
ment

.docm application/vnd.ms-word.docu­ Word Document

ment.macroenabled.12

.dotx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- Word Document

cedocument.wordprocessingml.tem­
plate

.dotm application/vnd.ms-word.tem­ Word Document

plate.macroEnabled.12

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 221
File Extension MIME Type MIME Group

.rtf application/rtf Word Document

.pdf application/pdf PDF

.pptx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- PowerPoint

cedocument.presentationml.presenta­
tion

.pptm application/vnd.ms-powerpoint.pre­ PowerPoint

sentation.macroEnabled.12

.ppt application/vnd.ms-powerpoint PowerPoint

.odp application/vnd.oasis.opendocu­ Open Document

ment.presentation

.ods application/vnd.oasis.opendocu­ Open Document

ment.spreadsheet

.odt application/vnd.oasis.opendocu­ Open Document

ment.text

.xps application/vnd.ms-xpsdocument XPS

.vds application/octet-stream VDS

.dif video/x-dv DIF

.prn application/octet-stream PRN

.dib application/octet-stream Image

.csv text/csv SpreadSheet

.slk application/sylk SpreadSheet

.xlsb application/vnd.ms-excel.sheet.bi­ SpreadSheet

nary.macroenabled.12

.xlsm application/vnd.ms-excel.sheet.macro­ SpreadSheet

enabled.12

.xltx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- SpreadSheet

cedocument.spreadsheetml.template

.xls application/vnd.ms-excel SpreadSheet

.xltm application/vnd.ms-excel.tem­ SpreadSheet

plate.macroEnabled.12

.xlsx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- SpreadSheet

cedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

222 PUBLIC Master Data
 File Extension MIME Type MIME Group

.html application/html HTML

.xsl application/xml HTML

.xdp application/vnd.adobe.xdp+xml HTML

.htm application/html HTML

.avi video/avi Video

.mp4 video/mp4 Video

.mov video/quicktime Video

.wmv video/x-ms-asf Video

.wav audio/wav Audio

.mp3 audio/mpeg3 Audio

.aml application/AML XML

.url application/octet-stream XML

.xml application/xml XML

.dwg application/acad CAD

.dxf application/dxf CAD

.sat application/sat CAD

.stp application/step CAD

.bag application/octet-stream Augmented Reality

.h4 application/x-hdf Augmented Reality

.h5 application/x-hdf5 Augmented Reality

.he5 application/octet-stream Augmented Reality

.hdf4 application/x-hdf Augmented Reality

.hdf5 application/x-hdf5 Augmented Reality

.hdf application/x-hdf Augmented Reality

.msz application/octet-stream Augmented Reality

.fbx application/octet-stream Augmented Reality

ELINK application/xml Link

.out application / x-out Data Exchange File

.mon Data Exchange File

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 223
File Extension MIME Type MIME Group

.aas application/json Data Exchange File

.zip application/zip Archive

.tar application/x-tar Archive

.tgz application/x-gzip Archive

.deb application/vnd.debian.binary-package Archive

.aasx application/octet-stream Archive

.amlx application/octet-stream XML

5.11.2 Maintaining Different Language Versions of a

Document

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles DOCUMENT_DELETE or DOCUMENT_EDIT assigned.

● The document you want to upload is among the supported document formats and the configured file size.
For more details, see Documents [page 218]

Procedure

1. Open the Documents application.

2. Select the desired document for which you want to maintain a different language version.
3. Choose Edit.
4. In the Files section, choose Add in the Add File pop-up.
5. In the Add File pop-up, browse for a file.
6. Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the document.
7. Enter a description.
8. Choose Upload.

When uploading a new document, you can upload the document directly without checking for duplicate
documents in the system.

You can use Check and Upload to check if there are any duplicates that exist in the system. If duplicate files
exist, you’ll then view the files in the Similar Files Detected dialog box. You then can Continue Uploading the
New File or you can select a file from the duplicate file list and Use Selected File option to upload it.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

224 PUBLIC Master Data
Results

You can select an existing language file and use Add New Version to create a new version of the
document.

You can view the number of available versions in the Version field on the list page. If there are more than one
version of the file in the same or different languages, you can view and download these versions by choosing
the version number. It will open a dialog box with the file details.

5.11.3 Editing Document Attributes

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles DOCUMENT_DELETE or DOCUMENT_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Documents application.

2. Search for the document that you want to assign to a business object.
3. Select one or more documents from the search results.
4. Choose Edit.
5. In the Edit Documents pop-up, add or update the phase and category attributes for a document.
6. You can manage the files associated with the document under the Files section.

○ To add new files, choose Add Add File . For more information, see Maintaining Different
Language Versions of a Document [page 224].
○ To add new description, select a file from the list, choose Add Add Description . You can add
language, description, long description. Choose Add.
○ To add a new version, select a file from the list, choose Add Add New Version . You can add a file,
description, long description. Choose Upload.
○ To edit a file, select a file from the list, choose Edit. You can add a file, description, long description.
Choose Upload.
○ To delete a file, select a file from the list, choose Delete. For more information, see Deleting a
Document [page 230].
○ To delete a file description, select a file from the list, choose Delete Delete Description . A
confirmation message is displayed, choose OK.
○ To download a file, select a file from the list, choose Download. You can also download all the versions
of the file using Download Download All Versions .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 225
7. Choose Save.

5.11.4 Updating a Document

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles DOCUMENT_DELETE or DOCUMENT_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Documents application.

2. Search for a document that you want to assign to a business object.
3. Select the document from the search results.
4. To replace an existing file upload a new file in the File section.
5. To update the attributes, update the phase and category attributes in the File Information section
6. Choose Save.

The following table lists the MIME types and the MIME groups.

MIME Groups

File Extension MIME Type MIME Group

.txt text/plain Text Document

.jpg image/jpeg Image

.jpeg image/jpeg Image

.jpe image/jpeg Image

.jfif image/jpeg Image

.jpg image/jpeg Image

.doc application/msword Word Document

.pdf application/pdf PDF

.png image/png Image

.bmp image/bmp Image

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

226 PUBLIC Master Data
 File Extension MIME Type MIME Group

.dib image/bmp Image

.bmp image/x-windows-bmp Image

.gif image/gif GIF

.tif image/tiff Image

.tiff image/tiff Image

.bmp image/x-ms-bmp Image

.ppt application/mspowerpoint PowerPoint

.ppt application/powerpoint PowerPoint

.docx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- Word Document

cedocument.wordprocessingml.docu­
ment

.docm application/vnd.ms-word.docu­ Word Document

ment.macroenabled.12

.dotx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- Word Document

cedocument.wordprocessingml.tem­
plate

.odt application/vnd.oasis.opendocu­ Open Document

ment.text

.rtf application/msword Word Document

.xps application/vnd.ms-xpsdocument XPS

.pptx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- PowerPoint

cedocument.presentationml.presen­
tation

.vds application/octet-stream VDS

.dif application/octet-stream DIF

.prn application/octet-stream PRN

.bag application/octet-stream Augmented Reality

.hdf5 application/octet-stream Augmented Reality

.fbx application/octet-stream Augmented Reality

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 227
 File Extension MIME Type MIME Group

.dib application/octet-stream Image

.csv application/vnd.ms-excel SpreadSheet

.slk application/vnd.ms-excel SpreadSheet

.xlsb application/vnd.ms-excel.sheet.bi­ SpreadSheet

nary.macroenabled.12

.xlsm application/vnd.ms-excel.sheet.mac­ SpreadSheet

roenabled.12

.xltx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- SpreadSheet

cedocument.spreadsheetml.template

.ods application/vnd.oasis.opendocu­ SpreadSheet

ment.spreadsheet

.xls application/excel SpreadSheet

.xlsx application/vnd.openxmlformats-offi- SpreadSheet

cedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet

.html text/html HTML

.htm text/html HTML

.avi video/avi Video

.mp4 video/mp4 Video

.dif video/dv DIF

.dif video/x-dv DIF

.wav audio/wav Audio

.mp3 audio/mpeg3 Audio

.mp3 audio/mp3 Audio

.xml text/xml XML

.deb

.tar

.tgz

.msz

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

228 PUBLIC Master Data
5.11.5 Assigning Documents to Business Objects

Prerequisites

● You have the identified the business object that you want to assign to and the business object is in either an
Unpublished state, or in In Revision state.
● Your user ID has the roles DOCUMENT_DELETE or DOCUMENT_EDIT assigned.

Context

You can assign a document to the following objects:

● Models
● Announcements
● Equipment
● Instruction steps
● Locations
● Improvement cases
● Spare Parts
● Systems
● Functional Locations

 Note

You can assign multiple documents to a spare part using this application. The where used list of a
document displays the assigned spare part.

Procedure

1. Open the Documents application.

2. Search for a document that you want to assign to a business object.

For this activity, we are assigning the document to Models.

3. Select one or more documents from the search results.

4. To assign the document to a model, choose Assign Models .

5. In the Assign Models pop-up, select one or more models.
6. Choose Assign.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 229
5.11.6 Deleting a Document

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role DOCUMENT_DELETE assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Documents application.

2. Search for a document that you want to delete.
3. Select one or more documents from the search results.
4. Choose Delete.

 Note

○ When you choose to delete a document, the system deletes the document from the SAP Predictive
Asset Insights permanently.
○ When you choose to delete a document that is assigned to an improvement case, the document
gets deleted from the improvement case without a warning.

5.11.7 Creating Hotspots

A hotspot is an area on the visual image that is of more interest. A hotspot allows you to view detailed
information of a model component in a pictorial way. You can assign additional information to a hotspot such
as model, equipment, and instruction to which users can navigate to. A published object can be tagged to a
hotspot, allowing you to tag supported objects without the need to create a new revision for the object. You can
assign hotspots to models, equipment, instruction steps, documents, locations, spare parts, and szstems and
include relevant specifications.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles DOCUMENT_DELETE, or DOCUMENT_EDIT assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

230 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. Open the image.

System opens the file in the image viewer.

 Note

You can also select multiple images while editing. All the images you have selected queue up in the
image viewer for editing.

2. Choose Maintain Hotspot.

3. Choose Create from the toolbar.
4. Click on the area of the image where you want to create a hotspot, drag and drop the pointer to a next point
in the image. Click and continue the previous pointers until you have covered a hotspot area on the image.
Finally, end the hotspot area with a double click.
5. In the Create Hotspot pop-up, fill in:
a. Name, description and color under Basic info
b. Assign the model, equipment, step or document under Assignment Info as necessary.
6. Choose Save.

System adds the image file that has the hotspots to the Document section of the above mentioned objects.

 Note

If you want to unassign the image files that has the hotspots from the Document section of these
objects, you must remove the hotspot attributes.

5.11.8 Guided Procedures

5.11.8.1 Adding a New Document

Procedure

1. Choose the Documents application to commence the process.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 231
2. Choose Add New to add a new document.

 Note

The document you are about to add might already exist in your organization’s library. Use the search to
sweep for similar documents first.

3. Two different sources for adding a new document are provided. You can either browse for a file or provide a
URL link to the document along with a display name.

 Note

○ The name of the uploaded file will be displayed as the file name in Asset central.
○ You cannot upload private domains such as .corp as links.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

232 PUBLIC Master Data
 4. Provide additional information to specify the added document.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 233
5. Assign one of the VDI 2770 categories that your document corresponds to the best, to classify the

document.
6. You can assign a phase if desired. Assigning a phase specifies the document and helps other users to find

relevant documents.
7. If you want the document to be confidential, you can tick the checkbox. With classifying the document as
confidential, the document will stay within your application and will not be shared with other business
partners at any time.

 Note

○ If you are a premium account holder, all the private documents uploaded by your invitees can be
accessed by you. Your invitees cannot have private documents without your knowledge.
○ Confidentiality set by your invitee for a particular document applies to the you as well.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

234 PUBLIC Master Data
 8. Select a language from the dropdown that corresponds to the document. Your browser language is set as
default.

 Note

To add a new language version, you need to navigate back to the document list.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 235
9. Enter a description (compulsory) and a long description if desired.

10. Choose upload.

5.11.8.2 Assigning Documents to Business Objects

Context

We will take you through the process of assigning documents to business objects. You can assign documents to
the following objects:

● Models
● Announcements
● Equipment
● Instruction steps

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

236 PUBLIC Master Data
 ● Locations
● Improvement cases
● Spare Parts
● Systems

In this tour we will assign documents to equipments.

Procedure

1. Choose the Documents application to commence the process.

2. Search for one or more documents you want to assign to an equipment.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 237
3. Select one or more desired documents from the search result you want to assign by ticking the check
boxes.

4. To assign the selected documents to an Equipment, choose <Assign> and <Equipment> from the list of
all business objects.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

238 PUBLIC Master Data
 5. In the Select Equipment pop-up, select one or more Equipments you want to assign the documents to by
ticking the appropriate check boxes.

6. Choose <Assign> to complete the process.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 239
5.11.8.3 Maintaining Different Language Versions of a
Document

Context

We will take you through the process of maintaining different language versions of an already existing
document.

Procedure

1. Choose the Documents application to commence the process.

2. Select the desired document you want to maintain a different language version for by ticking the check

box.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

240 PUBLIC Master Data
 3. Choose Add New Language Version .

4. In the pop-up a list of all existing language versions is displayed. Choose <Add> to add a new language file.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 241
5. In the New Document pop-up, browse for the desired file.

6. Select the language from the dropdown that corresponds to the document.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

242 PUBLIC Master Data
 7. Enter a description (mandatory) and a long description if desired.

8. Choose Upload.

5.12 Announcements

An announcement is an information record that can communicate between the various business partners that
have a relationship with a Model or an Equipment. For example: an existing instruction has been updated, or

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 243
spare parts of an item of an equipment has been updated. In addition, annoucements can be used within a
single company or between companies.

An announcement can be any of the following types:

● Availability: An announcement to communicate about the availability or non-availability of an item of

equipment or location.
● Instruction Change: An announcement to communicate that an instruction has changed. For example, a
manufacturer can notify operators that an improvement to an instruction has been performed.
● Service Bulletin: An announcement (typically from the manufacturer) to communicate information that
may require a change in the installation or usage of an equipment.
● Recall: An announcement (typically from the manufacturer) to request the operator to return equipment
related to certain models due to the discovery of safety issues to prevent the risk of legal action.
● New Policy: An announcement to communicate the new policy of usage for certain models.
● New Model: An announcement on the news of a new model. For example, a manufacturer can notify
operators that a new model is available.
● Document Change: An announcement when the document related to a model has changed.
● Spare Parts Change: An announcement when the spare parts have changed. For example, a manufacturer
can notify operators that there is change in the spare parts of the equipment.
● Model Information Change: An announcement when the information related to the model specification or
maintenance has changed.
● New Firmware: An announcement to communicate that a new firmware version is available for a model.

An announcement moves from one state to another during its process of creation and maintenance. The
different states that an announcement goes through are listed below:

● Unpublished
● Published
● In Revision

For more information, see State Transitions [page 314] .

5.12.1 Managing Announcements

You can perform various operations on an announcement such as creating an announcement, viewing an
announcement, updating an announcement, deleting an announcement, and assigning documents, models,
items of equipment and locations (of type Availability) to an announcement.

Context

You use the Announcements application to work with an announcement. You can perform the following
operations using the Announcements application:

● Create an announcement (see, Creating an Announcement [page 245])

● View and publish an announcement (see, Viewing and Publishing an Announcement [page 248])
● Update an announcement (see, Updating an Announcement [page 249])

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

244 PUBLIC Master Data
 ● Delete an announcement (see, Deleting an Announcement [page 250])
● Assign business objects to an announcement (see, Assigning a Model to an Announcement [page 251])
● Display report cards on the header and view the count of <Equipment Impacted> and <Customers
Impacted>.
● Maintain serial number ranges and build date ranges for announcement types <Service Bulletin> and
<Recall>. You can add serialization ranges on the service bulletin or recall by:
○ Enabling <Serialization Ranges> (in announcement header)
○ Maintaining the serialization ranges (serial numbers, batch date) and also comments in the<
Serialization Ranges> section on announcement
● Add announcement to a group.

5.12.1.1 Creating an Announcement

You use this procedure to create an announcement and assign entities such as documents, instructions, and
models to an announcement.

Prerequisites

● If you want to assign a new or an existing document, you have identified the file that you want to attach.
● Your user ID has the roles ANNOUNCEMENT_DELETE or ANNOUNCEMENT_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Announcements app.

2. From the Announcements window, choose New.
3. In the New Announcement pop-up, perform the following tasks:
a. In the Information section, enter details as described in the table below:

Field Description

Name Enter a unique name for the announcement.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 245
 Field Description

Type Select an announcement type. The following list pro­

vides the descriptions for each of the types of an­
nouncements:
○ Availability
○ Instruction Change
○ Service Bulletin
○ Recall
○ New Policy
○ New Firmware
○ New Model
○ Document Change
○ Spare Parts Change
○ Model Information Change

Priority Select a priority of the announcement

Description Enter a description for the announcement

4. For an announcement of type Availability, you must assign an equipment or location. To assign an item of
equipment, follow these steps:
a. In the Equipment section, choose Assign.
b. From the Select Equipment pop-up, select the relevant equipment.
c. Choose Assign.

 Note

You now have the Fully Available for the announcement type Availability. You can now announce if a
piece of equipment is available or not available.

5. To assign a location, follow these steps:

a. In the Locations section, choose Assign.
b. From the Select Location pop-up, select the relevant location.
c. Choose Assign.
6. For an announcement of type Instruction Change you must assign an instruction. To assign an instruction
follow the tasks:
a. In the Assign Instructions pop-up, search for an appropriate instruction using the filters Instruction
Type and Activity.
b. From the Instructions search list, select an instruction.
c. Choose OK.

 Note

To unassign an instruction that is assigned to the announcement, select an appropriate instruction

from the instructions list in the New Announcement screen, and choose Unassign.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

246 PUBLIC Master Data
 7. In the Documents section, you can add a new document or assign an existing document. To add a new
document, choose Add New and perform the following tasks:
a. In the Add Document pop-up, enter values for the fields as described in the table below:

Field Description

File Name Browse for a file name that you want to upload.

Phase/Category Select a phase and category corresponding to the

phase that the document is relevant to in the lifecycle of
an item of equipment. Category is mandatory, whereas
Phase is optional.

Language Select the language of the document you want to add.

Description Enter an announcement description

b. Choose Upload.

 Note

To unassign a document, select an appropriate document from list choose Remove.

8. In the Documents section, if you want assign an existing document, choose Add Assign and perform
the following tasks:
a. In the Assign Documentspop-up, search for an appropriate document using the filters Phase, or
Category.
b. From the search results list, select an appropriate document.
c. Choose OK.
9. To add a hotspot to image file, see Creating Hotspots [page 230].
10. In the Models section, to assign a model to the announcement choose Assign and perform the following
tasks:
a. In the Assign Models pop-up, search for an announcement using the filters Class Name, Subclass
Name, Manufacturer, or Source.
b. From the search results list, select a model.
c. Choose OK.
11. To save the announcement, choose Save.
12. To publish the announcement, choose Save and Publish.
13. To create a revisions of an announcement, or to work with the last published or last revision
announcement, see Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions and Published State [page 315].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 247
5.12.1.2 Viewing and Publishing an Announcement

You can view an announcement to verify if the information contained in an announcement is appropriate or not.

Prerequisites

● To publish an announcement, your user ID has the roles ANNOUNCEMENT_DELETE or ANNOUNCEMENT_EDIT

assigned.
● To view an announcement, your user ID has the role ANNOUNCEMENT_READ assigned.

Context

When you create many announcements using public APIs provided by SAP AIN, you can view these
announcements using the Announcements app and perform a mass publish of such announcements. In
addition, if you have assigned a model to an announcement, or an instruction to an announcement, you can
navigate to the model details or the instruction details and work with a model or an instruction.

The following procedure applies to all types of announcements (Instruction change, Service Bulletin, RecallNew
Policy, New Model, Document Change, Spare Parts Change, Model Information Change, New Firmware,
Availability). For simplicity, we only describe the Instruction Change procedure.

Procedure

1. Open the Announcements application.

2. In the Announcements window, search for an appropriate announcement using the filters - Announcement
Type, Status, Read Status, Change On Date and Priority.

 Note

To publish one or more unpublished announcements that are created either using APIs, or using the
Announcements application, select the announcements from the list and choose Publish.

3. Choose an announcement from the search list and select View Details.
4. In the Announcement screen, choose the Information tab to view the details that are specific to the
announcement. These details can include Name, Type, Priority, and Description.
5. In the Announcement screen, choose the Instructions tab to view the instructions assigned to the
announcement.

For more information on working with instructions, see Instructions [page 251].
6. In the Announcement screen, choose the Documents tab to view the relevant documentation available for
an announcement.

You can also view the confidentiality of the assigned documents.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

248 PUBLIC Master Data
 7. In the Announcement screen, choose the Assignments tab to view the models to which the
announcements are relevant.

If you want to view details of a model, select the model and choose View Details.

For more information on working with models, see Models [page 131].

5.12.1.3 Updating an Announcement

You update an announcement to correct the information within an announcement, or add any missing
information.

Prerequisites

● You have identified the announcement that you want to update.

● To update an announcement, your user ID has the roles ANNOUNCEMENT_DELETE, or
ANNOUNCEMENT_EDIT assigned.

Context

You can update an announcement to change any of the following:

● Properties of an announcement such as - type of an announcement, name of an announcement, or priority

of an announcement.
● Model assigned to an announcement
● Instruction assigned to an announcement
● Document assigned to an announcement
● Add the numbers of affected models and related serial number ranges or build date ranges to certain
announcement type

Procedure

1. Open the Announcements app.

2. In the Announcements app, search for an appropriate announcement using the filters – Announcement
Type, Priority, Statusor statuses, as such, Read Status, and Changed On and Source.
3. From the search results list in the Announcements section, select an appropriate announcement.
4. Choose View Details.
5. If you have opened the announcement that is published, in the Announcement window, choose New
Revision.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 249
6. To update all relevant details to an announcement, select the INFORMATION section.

For more information, see Creating an Announcement [page 245] .

7. To update an instruction assigned to an announcement, select the INSTRUCTIONS section.

For more information, see Creating an Announcement [page 245].

8. To add a new document, select DOCUMENTS section.

For more information, see Creating an Announcement [page 245].

9. To update any models assigned to the announcement, select the ASSIGNMENTS section.

For more information, see Creating an Announcement [page 245].

10. To save the announcement, choose Save.
11. To publish the announcement, choose Save and Publish.

5.12.1.4 Deleting an Announcement

You can delete an announcement that you no longer want to have on the network. For simplicity, we only
describe the procedure to delete an instruction change announcement.

Prerequisites

To delete an announcement, your user ID has the role ANNOUNCEMENT_DELETE assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Announcements application.

2. In the Announcements screen, search for an announcement.
3. Choose an announcement from the search list and select View Details.
4. In the Announcement screen, choose Delete.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

250 PUBLIC Master Data
5.12.1.5 Assigning a Model to an Announcement

You use this procedure to assign a model to an announcement.

Prerequisites

● You must have created an announcement, to which you want to assign a model. (see Creating an
Announcement [page 245].)
● You must have created a model that you want to assign to the announcement. (see Creating a Model [page
133])
● Your user ID has the roles ANNOUNCEMENT_DELETE or ANNOUNCEMENT_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Announcements application.

2. In the Announcements screen, search for an appropriate announcement using the filters – Announcement
Type, Priority, or Status.
3. In the Announcements screen, select a model using the check box and choose Assign Models.
4. In the Assign Models, search for an appropriate model using the search filters – Class Name, Subclass
Name, Source and Manufacturer.
5. From the search list, select an appropriate model using the check box and choose Assign.

5.13 Instructions

An instruction is a set of steps that help the user to carry out a specific task. The instructions help the operator
to maintain the equipment better. The following instruction types are available:

● Planned maintenance instruction: An instruction that has information about a task that the operator has
to perform at regular intervals. However, these are not mandatory instructions and the operator can
choose to apply them based on local conditions such as climatic conditions.
● Breakdown instruction: An instruction that has information about a task that the operator has to perform
when dealing with unplanned situations such as an item of equipment fails to open on demand, or an item
of equipment fails to operate due to an internal leak.
● Installation instruction: An instruction that provides information while installing an equipment.
● Operations instruction: An instruction that provides information on how to use an equipment.
● Disposal instruction: An instruction that provides information on how to dispose of an equipment.

In addition, you can use the following key information to define an instruction:

● Activity type: Defines the primary context where the instruction is applicable.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 251
● Failure mode: Defines the effect by which a failure is observed on a failed item.
● Frequency: Defines the interval at which you must execute the instruction.
● Document: Unstructured document attached to an instruction that is relevant to a specific phase of an
item of equipment.
● Safety rule: Specifies the recommended guidance from the manufacturer for executing the instructions
safely.
● Model: Specifies an abstract representation from the manufacturer that defines all maintenance
information related to a new or existing product.
● Precondition: Specifies an activity that needs to be completed before executing the instruction.
● Step: Specifies a single instruction.
● Post check: Specifies an activity that needs to be completed after executing the instruction.

An instruction moves from one state to another during its process of creation and maintenance. The different
states that an instruction goes through are listed below:

● Unpublished
● Published
● In Revision

For more information, see State Transitions [page 314].

 Note

Multiple languages are supported for instruction texts and safety rule comments so that users can read this
information in their preferred language.

5.13.1 Managing Instructions

You can perform various operations on an instruction such as creating an instruction, viewing an instruction,
updating an instruction, deleting an instruction, and assigning models to an instruction.

Context

You use the Instructions app to work with an instruction.You can perform the following tasks:

Procedure

1. Create an instruction (see Creating an Instruction [page 253]).

2. Create an instruction by reusing an existing instruction (see Creating an Instruction by Reusing an Existing
Instruction [page 258]).
3. Update an existing instruction (see Updating and Publishing an Instruction [page 260])
4. Viewing an instruction (see Viewing an Instruction [page 259])

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

252 PUBLIC Master Data
 5. Deleting an instruction (see Deleting an Instruction [page 261])
6. Assign models to an instruction (see Assigning a Model to an Instruction [page 262])

5.13.1.1 Creating an Instruction

Using the Instructions application you can create five types of instructions - planned maintenance, breakdown,
installation, operations, and disposal. You can also specify useful key information such as activity type, failure
mode, frequency, document, safety rule, preconditions, steps, and post checks for an instruction.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles INSTRUCTION_DELETE or INSTRUCTION _EDIT assigned.

● You have identified the subclass that you want to use for your instruction.

 Note

You must use the same subclass as the model uses to which you assign the instruction.

● If you want to assign a model to an instruction, you must ensure that models already exist in SAP
Predictive Asset Insights.

Context

For simplicity, we only describe the planned maintenance instruction and a breakdown instruction procedure.
In addition, you can assign a model to the instruction so that the operator using the model can use the
instruction information for equipment maintenance.

Procedure

1. Open the Instructions app.

2. On the Instructions screen, choose New.
3. In the New Instruction pop-up, perform the following tasks:
a. In the Instruction Type field, choosePlanned Maintenance to create a planned maintenance
instruction, a Breakdown instruction to create an unplanned instruction, a Disposal, an
Installation, or an Operations intrsution type.
b. In the Subclass field, enter a subclass to which you want to assign an instruction. This is an optional
field.

 Note

Use the same subclass as the model uses to which you assign the instruction.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 253
 c. Choose OK.
4. In the Planned Maintenance Instruction screen, perform the following tasks:
a. In the Header section, enter the following information:

Field Description

Short Description Enter the short description for the instruction.

Expected Duration Enter the total time required to execute the instruction
and also the unit of time.

Criticality Specify the importance of the instruction.

b. In the Information section, enter the following information:

Field Description

Activity(*) Select an activity type.

Failure Mode Category(*) For a breakdown instruction, select an appropriate value

from the drop down. The list below describes what each
failure mode means

○ Fail to function: equipment does not function.

○ Fail to open: equipment does not open.
○ Fail to close: equipment does not close,
○ Operation delay: equipment operation is delayed..
○ Output is high: output of the equipment is high.
○ Output is low: output of the equipment is low.

Long Description(*) Enter a description for the instruction.

Frequency For a planned maintenance instruction, enter the recur­

ring time interval at which the instruction must be exe­
cuted. In the adjacent drop-down, specify the unit of
time

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

254 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Primary Document An unstructured document that provides more informa­

tion about the instruction.

To add a new document, follow the steps below:

1. Choose New.
2. In the Add Document dialog box, browse for a file
name.
3. In the Phase drop down, specify a phase.
4. In the Category drop down, choose a category that
corresponds to a phase.
5. In the Description field, enter a description.
6. Choose Upload.

To assign an existing document, follow the steps below:

1. In the Assign Documents to Instruction window,
search for a document using the filters Phase, or
Category.
2. Select a document from the search results list.
3. Choose Assign.

To view the list of supported MIME types, see the Sup­

ported MIME Types table under the Documents docu­
mentation.

3D Visual Add either a new 3D visual file, or assign an existing 3D

visual file. You can refer to the steps mentioned for the
Primary Document to upload a new 3D visual file, or to
assign an existing 3D visual file.

 Note
System captures a snapshot of the 3D visual file to
use it as a preview image for the instruction.

Relevant to Warranty Specify if the instruction is relevant for warranty.

 Note

Mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

5. On the Safety Rules screen area, choose Add to add a new safety rule and perform the following tasks:
a. In the Safety Rules dialog box, select a safety rule and choose OK.

For example, if you want the user to wear safety boots while performing the step in the instruction,
choose Safety boots must be worn.

 Note

You can maintain safety rule comments in multiple languages.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 255
6. In the Models screen area, choose Assign to assign an existing model to the instruction and perform the
following tasks:
a. In the Select Models dialog box, search for an appropriate model using the search filters Class or
Manufacturer.
b. From the Models search list, select an appropriate model.
c. Choose Assign.

 Note

To unassign a model to the instruction, select the model in the Models section and choose
Unassign.

7. In the Equipment screen area, to assign an equipment, choose Assign and perform the following tasks:
a. In the Select Equipment, select the appropriate equipment.
b. Choose Assign.
8. In the Functional Locations screen area, to assign a functional location, choose Assign and perform the
following tasks:
a. In the Select Functional Locations, select the appropriate functional location.
b. Choose Assign.
9. In the Preconditions screen area, choose Add to add an activity that must be performed before executing
the instruction.
10. In the Steps screen area, to add individual instructions to the overall instruction, choose Add.
11. In the Post Checks screen area, to add an activity that needs to be performed after the instruction
execution, choose Add and enter values in the Post Checks field.
12. Save the instruction, or Save and Publish the instruction.
13. To add the instruction to a group, go to the instruction detail page and navigate to GROUPS → Add.
14. To create a new revision, and to switch between published and revision states, see Creating Revisions and
Switching Between Revisions and Published State [page 315].

5.13.1.2 Adding Steps to an Instruction

You use this procedure to add a set of steps to an instruction. Each steps consists of information such as
documents, 3D visual file, or spare parts that help the operator during the maintenance of an item of
equipment.

Prerequisites

● If you want to add spare parts information to an instruction, you must have uploaded 3D visual files into
SAP Predictive Asset Insights for a model, a piece of equipment, an instruction, or an announcement.
● Your user ID has the roles INSTRUCTION_DELETE or INSTRUCTION _EDIT assigned.

● You have created an instruction. For more details see Creating an Instruction [page 253]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

256 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. Launch the Instructions application.

2. From the Instructions list page, open the instruction in question.
3. In the Instructions object page, scroll down to the Step section and perform the following tasks:
a. In the Step header section, enter the following details:

Field Description

Step Name Enter a step name.

Step Description Enter a step description.

3D Visual / Image Upload either an image file, or a 3D visual.

b. In the Information section, enter the following details:

Field Description

People Required Enter the number of people required to completed the

step.

Expected Work Enter the total time required to complete the step.

Tools Enter the list of tools required to execute the step.

 Note
You must press the enter button after you enter a
tool.

Roles Specify a role.

Risk Category Specify the risk category

Risk Description Enter a risk description.

c. In the Parts section, to add new parts choose Add and perform the following tasks:
1. Choose the drop-down for Material.
2. In the Select Parts pop-up, select an appropriate spare part that is relevant to the instruction and
choose OK.
3. In the Quantity field, enter the quantity for the spare part.
d. In the Documents section, to add a new document choose Add and perform the following tasks:
1. In the Add Document screen, browse for a file name in the File Name field.
2. In the Phase drop down, choose a phase in the lifecycle of the item of equipment.
3. In the Category drop down, choose a category that corresponds to a phase.
4. In the Description field, enter a description for the document.
5. Choose Upload.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 257
 e. In the Documents screen area, to assign an existing document choose Assign and perform the
following tasks:
1. In the Assign Documents to Step screen, search for an appropriate document using the filters.
2. Select an appropriate document from the search results list.
3. Choose Assign.

 Note

To remove a document that is assigned to a step, select the assigned document from the list in the
Documents screen area, and choose Remove.

4. Choose Save.
5. Choose Save and Publish to publish the updated instruction.

5.13.1.3 Creating an Instruction by Reusing an Existing

Instruction

You use this procedure to create an instruction by reusing an existing instruction. For simplicity the procedure
below describes the planned maintenance instruction.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles INSTRUCTION_DELETE or INSTRUCTION _EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Instructions app.

2. In the Instructions screen, search for an appropriate instruction using the filters Instruction Type, Activity,
Status, or Model Name.
3. Select an instruction from the search results list.
4. Select Copy.

System creates a new instruction reusing the characteristics of the underlying instruction.
5. In the Header section, you must update name of the instruction as instruction names must be unique.

You must update other fields as appropriate.

6. To add additional information to the newly created instruction, see Creating an Instruction [page 253].
7. To save the instruction, choose Save.
8. To publish the instruction, choose Save and Publish.

The app displays a dialog box to check if you want to create an announcement for the instruction. In the
Create Announcement pop-up, choose yes and then OK.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

258 PUBLIC Master Data
 For more information, see Creating an Announcement [page 245].

5.13.1.4 Viewing an Instruction

You can view an instruction to verify if the information contained in an instruction is appropriate or not.

Prerequisites

● To publish an instruction, your user ID has the roles INSTRUCTION_DELETE or INSTRUCTION _EDIT
assigned.
● To view an instruction, your user ID either belongs to the group ORG_DATA_READ, or has the roles
INSTRUCTION_READ assigned.

Context

When you have more instructions created using public APIs provided by SAP Predictive Asset Insights, you can
view these instructions using the Instructions app and perform a mass publish of such instructions.

In addition, if you have assigned a model to an instruction, or an announcement to an instruction you can
navigate to the model details, or the announcement details and work with a model or an announcement.

The following procedure applies to all types of instructions (Planned Maintenance, Breakdown, Installation,
Operations, or Disposal). For simplicity, we only describe the planned instruction procedure.

Procedure

1. Open the Instructions app.

2. In the Instructions screen, search for an instruction using the filters – Instruction Type, Activity, Status, or
Model Name.

 Note

To publish one or more unpublished instructions created either using APIs, or using the Instructions
app, select multiple instructions from the list and choose Publish.

3. Choose an instruction from the search list and select View Details.
4. In the Planned Maintenance Instruction screen, choose the Information tab to view the details that are
specific to the instruction. These details can include activity type, failure mode, frequency, documents,
preconditions, steps, and post checks.
5. Choose the Safety Rules tab for any information about safety measures to follow.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 259
 6. Choose the Tools and Spare Parts tab for information pertaining to spare parts during maintenance.
7. Choose the Roles tab for information regarding number of people, expected duration and the person's
roles while carrying out the activity.
8. Choose the Models tab to view the models assigned to the instruction. If you want to view details of a
model, double-click on the selected the model.
9. Choose the Equipment tab to view the equipments assigned to the instruction. If you want to view details of
a equipment, double-click on the selected the equipment.
10. Choose the Functional Locations tab to view the functional locations assigned to the instruction. If you
want to view details of a functional location, double-click on the selected the functional location.
11. Choose the Announcements tab to view the announcements assigned to the instruction. If you want to
view details of an announcement, double-click on the selected the announcement.
12. Choose Groups tab to view the list of groups to which the instruction is assigned.
13. Choose Failure Modes tab to view the list of failure modes to which the instruction is assigned.
14. Choose the Preconditions tab to view the recommended guidance to be followed before executing an
instruction.
15. Choose the Steps tab to view the instruction steps.
16. Choose the Post Checks tab to view the recommended guidance to be followed after executing an
instruction.

5.13.1.5 Updating and Publishing an Instruction

You can update a planned maintenance instruction or a troubleshooting and breakdown instruction.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles INSTRUCTION_DELETE or INSTRUCTION _EDIT assigned.

Context

The following procedure applies to all types of instructions. For simplicity, we only describe the planned
instruction procedure.

Procedure

1. Open the Instructions app.

2. In the Instructions screen, search for an appropriate instruction.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

260 PUBLIC Master Data
 3. Choose an instruction from the search list and select View Details.
4. If the instruction is already published, choose New Revision in the Planned Maintenance Instruction window.
5. To update any of the sections of an instruction, see Creating an Instruction [page 253]
6. Choose Save.
7. To publish the instruction, choose Save and Publish.

The app displays a pop-up to check if you want to create an announcement for the instruction. In the
Create Announcement pop-up, choose Yes and then OK.

 Note

For more information about creating a revision for an instruction and switching between a revision and
a published version, see Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions and Published State
[page 315]

5.13.1.6 Deleting an Instruction

You can delete an instruction that you no longer want to have on the network. For simplicity, we only describe
the procedure to delete planned instruction.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role INSTRUCTION_DELETE assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Instructions app.

2. In the Instructions screen, search for an instruction.
3. Choose an instruction from the search list and select View Details.
4. 4. In the <Instruction Type> Instruction screen, choose Delete.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 261
5.13.1.7 Assigning a Model to an Instruction

You can assign a model to an instruction so that the operator can use the instruction information for the items
of equipment that are based on the model.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles INSTRUCTION_DELETE or INSTRUCTION _EDIT assigned.

● You have identified the instruction to which you want to assign a model (see Creating an Instruction [page
253])
● You have ensured that the instruction in question is in Unpublished or In Revision states.
● You have identified a model that you want to assign to the instruction (see Creating a Model [page 133]).

Context

The following procedure applies to all types of instructions. For simplicity, we only describe the planned
instruction procedure.

Procedure

1. Open the Instructions app.

2. In the Instructions screen, search for an instruction using the filters –Instruction Type, Activity, Status, or
Model Name.
3. In the Instructions screen, select a model and choose Assign Models.
4. In the Assign Models to InstructionClass, or pop-up, search for a model using the search filters
Manufacturer.
5. From the search results list, select a model using the check box and choose Assign.

5.14 Templates

A template is an object created by SAP Predictive Asset Insights organization (for example, manufacturer,
operator, or service provider) to maintain metadata, that is, attributes and attribute groups, related to a model,
equipment, location, system, or spare part. A template inherits metadata from its parent objects, for example,
parent subclass templates or other parent templates, and can have additional attribute groups and attributes.

Example:

A model template inherits the structure from a parent model template, a parent subclass template, other
related parent subclasses, and the parent class.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

262 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

Classes and subclasses are provided by SAP Predictive Asset Insights or classification standard providers.
The classification structure as well as assigned attributes and attribute groups are based on a classification
industry standard. Classes and Subclasses can be reused, but not edited.

Classes and subclasses for the following industry standards are predelivered:

● ISO 14224
● ISO 15926
● ISO 15380

If you want to add classes and subclasses of your own, please raise an incident with Asset Networks
operations to set your account as content provider.

 Note

You can create hierarchies of template from an existing template.

A template in SAP Predictive Asset Insights is identified by a unique name and is composed of attribute groups
and attributes. An attribute group is a logical grouping of related attributes of the equipment, model and
location, and an attribute is a qualifier to define the equipment.

Example for a classification structure and the relationship to model and equipment

The following example explains how classification objects delivered by SAP Predictive Asset Insights,
classification objects that can be created by customers, and type and instance information also created by
customers relate.

1. Class – delivered by SAP Predictive Asset Insights based on an industry standard or by a classification
standard provider – can be considered the top-node of the classification used in SAP Predictive Asset
Insights.
A class does not have a parent object, but can have multiple subclasses as child objects.
2. Subclasses – also delivered by SAP Predictive Asset Insights based on an industry standard or by a
classification standard provider – are the child objects of a class. It is possible to model multiple

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 263
 subclasses under the top-level subclass. Each child subclass will inherit attributes or attribute groups from
its parent objects, that is, class and subclasses.
In the example:
○ Subclass 1 (Power transformer) would inherit from Class (Transformer)
○ Subclass 2 (Dry-type transformer) would inherit from Subclass 1 (Power transformer) and Class
(Transformer)
3. Model Templates – created by manufacturers – can be child objects of a subclass, or be used without a
parent object. It is possible to have multiple model templates under the top-level model template. Each
child model template will inherit attribute or attribute groups from its parent objects, that is, class and
subclasses and model templates.
When creating a model, you do this with reference to a model template.
In the example:
○ Model Template 1 (SDT) would inherit from Subclass 2 (Dry-type transformer), Subclass 1 (Power
transformer), and Class (Transformer)
○ Model Template 2 (SDT-100x) would inherit from Model Template 1 (SDT), Subclass 2 (Dry-type
transformer), Subclass 1 (Power transformer), and Class (Transformer)
○ Model would be created with reference to Model Template 2 (SDT-100x), and therefore the Model
would have all attributes or attribute groups coming from the model template itself as well as the ones
inherited.
4. Equipment Templates – created by operators – are used to provide equipment-specific attributes or
attribute groups. You can use equipment templates as only reference for an equipment or in combination
with the templates coming via a model.

 Note

Similar to the model template it is possible to have multiple equipment templates under the top-level
equipment template. Each child equipment template will inherit attribute or attribute groups from its
parent object, that is, equipment templates.

In the example:
○ Equipment was created in reference to Model, and therefore this equipment would have all
attributes /attribute groups associated with the model, that is, inherit from Model Template 2
(SDT-100x), Model Template 1 (SDT), Subclass 2 (Dry-type transformer), Subclass 1 (Power
transformer), and Class (Transformer)
○ Since Equipment was also created in reference to Equipment Template, this equipment would
additionally have all attributes or attribute groups associated with the equipment template.

5.14.1 Managing Templates

You use the Templates app to work with a template. The templates are grouped as cards by <Template> types,
<Attribute Groups>, and <Attributes>. This provides easier visualization of the template hierarchy. You
can drill down the template hierarchy using the navigation on the cards.

You can perform the following operations using the Templates app:

● Create a model template to define the attributes and attribute groups related to a model. For more
information, see Creating a Model Template [page 290].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

264 PUBLIC Master Data
 ● Create an equipment template to include equipment-specific attributes and attribute groups.
For more information, see Creating an Equipment Template [page 294].
● Create a system template to include system-specific attributes and attribute groups. For more information,
see Creating a System Template [page 301].
● Create a spare part template to include spare part-specific attributes and attribute groups. For more
information, see Creating a Spare Part Template [page 300]
● Create a functional location template to include functional location-specific attributes and attribute
groups. For more information, see Creating a Functional Location Template [page 303]
● View details of a template and update the existing template with new information, or update the incorrect
information. For more information, see Viewing and Updating a Template [page 306].
● View <External IDs> for attribute groups, attributes, and causes.
● If more than one language is maintained for a template, <Available Language> field is displayed in all
the templates.
● You can view the objects that the templates are using in under Dependencies. When you choose this button
you can view the list of different objects the template is used in and the objects are segregated in different
tabs.

 Note

Dependencies display latest 50 objects created using this template for each of the different business
objects.

● You ncan view the external ERP system name in the header information for templates, attributes and
attribute groups.

5.14.1.1 Adding, Updating, and Deleting Code Lists

You can create code lists to be used in string, numeric, and date data types.

Context

You can create, update, or delete code lists using the following procedure.

Procedure

1. Select Code Lists.

2. Choose New Code List to create a new code list. Perform the following tasks:

a. In the New Code List Code List Details window, enter the values for the fields as described in the
table:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 265
 Field Description

ID(*) Enter an ID for the code list.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the code list once
it has been created.

Description(*) Enter an appropriate short description that describes

the code list.

 Note
You should always have a code description in a code
list before assigning the indicator to a piece of
equipment. There is no possibility to update the
code description later once it is been used for an In­
dicator. In case the code description is not pro­
vided, it will be empty and user will not be able to
update it later.

Long Description Enter an appropriate long description that describes the

code list.

Data Type (*) Select the data type from the list:
○ Date
○ String
○ Numeric
○ Numeric Flexible

Values (*) Enter the values for the code list using +.

 Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

b. You can add industry standards by choosing Add Industry Standard under New Code List Industry
Standards .
c. Choose OK.

3. To edit a code list, select the code list from the Code List Details page. Choose Edit from the code list object
page.
4. You can delete a code list by:

○ selecting the code lists from the Code List Details page and choosing Delete.
○ choosing Delete form the code list object page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

266 PUBLIC Master Data
5.14.1.2 Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes

You perform this procedure to add attributes and attribute groups either directly on a template object or from
the Attribute Groups tab or Attributes card.

Context

Using this procedure, you can add attribute groups/attributes directly on a template object.

 Note

You can use this approach for the creation of attribute groups or attributes on a template object.

SAP Operations can now deliver attribute groups & attributes that can be commonly reused:

● Global attribute groups & attributes are displayed in the attribute group/attribute lists with Source = SAP
● Global attribute groups & attributes can be reused, but not edited

Procedure

1. Select a template and choose Add Attribute Groups . In the Add Attribute Groups window, to add new
attribute group, select New and perform the following tasks:
a. In the New Attribute Group window, enter the values for the fields as described in the following table:

Field Description

ID(*) Enter an ID for the attribute group.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You can’t change the ID of the attribute group
once it has been created.

Short Description(*) Enter an appropriate short description that describes

the attribute group.

Long Description Enter an appropriate long description that describes the

attribute group.

Industry Standards Add the relevant industry standards.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 267
  Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

b. Choose OK.
c. You can add the attributes and also the industry standards by selecting the attribute group and
choosing the Edit button.

2. In the Add Attribute Groups window, to edit an existing attribute group, search for an existing attribute
group, and perform the following tasks:
a. From the search results, select an appropriate attribute group.
b. Choose OK.
3. To save the attribute group, choose Save in the <Name of the Attribute Group> section.

 Note

Each time you save the attribute group of a template, system updates the template automatically. You
don’t have to save the template explicitly.

4. To remove the attribute group, choose Remove in the <Name of the Attribute Group> section.

 Note

Each time you remove an attribute group from a template, system updates the template automatically.

5. To add attributes to the attribute group, perform the following tasks:

a. In the <Name of the Attribute Group> section, choose Edit to add attributes to the attribute group.
b. To add a new attribute, in the <Name of the Attribute Group> Attributes Add perform the
following tasks:

1. In the Add Attributes pop-up, to add new attribute, select New.

2. In the New Attribute window, enter values for the fields as described in the following table:

Field Description

ID(*) Enter a name for the attribute.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You can’t change the ID of the attribute
group once it has been created.

Short Description(*) Enter a short description.

Long Description Enter a long description.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

268 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Data Type(*) Select any of the following options:

○ boolean: select boolean if you want the data
type to support boolean values such as true or
false.
○ string: select string if you want the data type
to support alpha numeric values. You can now
also define string data type as hyperlink.

 Note
If you want the string data type to be lan­
guage-dependent, under the Attribute Con­
ditions section, choose Yes from the Lan­
guage Dependency radio button.

○ date: select date if you want the data type to

support a date value. If you select a code list for
the data type, then you can also maintain the at­
tribute conditions like Allow Additional Values
and Multi Select to allow additional dates and
multiple date selections to be maintained with
the code for the codelist values.
○ numeric: select numeric if you want the data
type to support a numeric value. You can now
also have numeric as relational operators.

 Note
You can create code lists for Numeric data
type and assign the code list to attributes
based on data type, scale, and precision
match.

For a numeric data type, you can define ad­

ditional properties. To do so, in the Attribute
Conditions section, enter values for the
fields as described:

○ If you select a code list for the data

type, then you can also maintain the at­
tribute conditions like Allow Additional
Values and Multi Select to allow addi­
tional dates and multiple date selec­
tions to be maintained with the code for
the codelist values.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 269
 Field Description

 Note
You cannot use the Multi Select op­
tion in combination with any of
other attribute conditions like
Threshold, Dependent Dimension,
and Relational Operator. However,
Multi Select can be used with
Dimension attribute condition.

○ Dimension: Select an appropriate di­

mension from the drop-down.
○ Threshold: If the dimension has a suita­
ble threshold that you want to use when
entering attribute values, select an ap­
propriate value from the drop-down.
○ Dependent Dimension: If you want to
use an additional dimension dependent
on the dimension you selected before,
choose yes for the Create Dependent
Dimension and select the dependent di­
mension from the drop-down for Entry
field At.

 Note
Numeric attributes can also be cre­
ated without dimension and with­
out an associated unit of measure.

○ Relational Operator: Check this setting if

you want to be able to maintain values
with relational operators (for example,
<, <=, >=, >). For example, Number of
gears: <= 5.

○ enum(deprecated): as announced in the previ­

ous releases, enum data type was deprecated
and can’t be maintained (= created/edited) via
the UI anymore.

 Note
Business objects that are using attributes of
data type enum can still be read/displayed
on the UI.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

270 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Use code lists now instead. For more informa­

tion, see Adding, Updating, and Deleting Code
Lists [page 265].

 Note
enum data type is currently still usable via
API, but API use will also be deprecated and
won’t be available from the next release.

○ picture: select picture if you want to maintain

images with an attribute.
○ Currency: select currency if you want to main­
tain currency values
○ numeric flexible: select numeric flexible
if you want the data type to support decimal
value.

 Note
You can create code lists for Numeric Flexi­
ble data type and assign the code list to at­
tributes based on data type, scale, and pre­
cision match.

Numeric Flexible attributes support a range

of (15,10).

For a numeric flexible data type, you can de­

fine additional properties. To do so, in the
Attribute Conditions section, enter values for
the fields as described:

○ If you select a code list for the data

type, then you can also maintain the at­
tribute conditions like Allow Additional
Values and Multi Select to allow addi­
tional dates and multiple date selec­
tions to be maintained with the code for
the codelist values.

 Note
You cannot use the Multi Select op­
tion in combination with any of
other attribute conditions like
Threshold, Dependent Dimension,

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 271
 Field Description

and Relational Operator. However,

Multi Select can be used with
Dimension attribute condition.

○ Dimension: Select an appropriate di­

mension from the drop-down.
○ Threshold: If the dimension has a suita­
ble threshold that you want to use when
entering attribute values, select an ap­
propriate value from the drop-down.
○ Dependent Dimension: If you want to
use an additional dimension dependent
on the dimension you selected before,
choose yes for the Create Dependent
Dimension and select the dependent di­
mension from the drop-down for Entry
field At.
○ Total Length of the Number: Enter the
total length of the number including
decimals.

 Note
Total length of the number must be
greater than zero.

○ Decimal Places Allowed: Enter the num­

ber of decimal places allowed for the
number.

 Note
○ The allowed number of deci­
mal places can’t be greater
than the total length of the
number.
○ Decimal places can’t be less
than zero.

 Note
○ To accommodate attributes that are al­
ready shared, the difference between
new and old value of decimal places
must not be greater than difference be­

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

272 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

tween new and old value of total length

of the number.
○ Data type Integer is covered by the
newly introduced data type Numeric
Flexible if the Decimal Places
Allowed is equal to 0.
○ If you edit an attribute and change the
data type of the attribute, the existing
values of the attribute maintained in the
previous data type are lost. You have to
enter new values in the expected format
of the newly set data type.

Priority(*) Specify if using the new attribute is Recommended,

Mandatory, or Optional.

3. To add an industry standard, choose Add Industry Standard.

4. From the Industry Standards dropdown, choose your relevant industry standard.
5. Specify a standard ID.
6. Choose OK.

c. To assign an existing attribute, choose <Name of the Attribute Group> Attributes Add . In the
Add Attributes pop-up, to use an existing attribute from SAP Predictive Asset Insights, search for an
existing attribute using the Search text box and perform the following tasks:
a. From the search results list, select an appropriate attribute.
b. Choose OK.

5.14.1.3 Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators

You perform this procedure to add indicators and indicator groups either directly on a template object or from
the Indicator Groups or Indicators card.

Prerequisites

You must have the TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT role.

Context

Using this procedure, you can add indicator groups or indicators directly on a template object.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 273
  Note

You can use this approach for the creation of indicator groups or indicators on a template object.

SAP Operations can now deliver indicator groups and indicators that can be commonly reused:

● Global indicator groups & indicators are displayed in the indicator group or indicator lists with Source =
SAP
● Global indicator groups & indicators can be reused, but not edited.

Procedure

1. Select the template and choose Add Indicator Groups . In the Add Indicator Groups window, to add
new Indicator group, select New and perform the following tasks:
a. In the New Indicator Group window, enter the values for the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

ID(*) Enter an ID for the indicator group.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the indicator
group once it has been created.

Short Description(*) Enter an appropriate short description that describes

the indicator group.

Long Description Enter an appropriate long description that describes the

indicator group.

 Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

b. Choose OK.
c. You can add the attributes by selecting the attribute group and choosing the Edit button.

2. In the Add Indicator Group option from the template object window, to use an existing indicator group,
search for an existing indicator group, and perform the following tasks:
a. From the search results, select an appropriate indicator group.
b. Choose OK.
3. To save the indicator group, choose Save in the relevant indicator group section.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

274 PUBLIC Master Data
  Note

Each time you save the indicator group of a template, system updates the template automatically. You
do not have to save the template explicitly.

4. To remove the indicator group, choose Remove in the relevant indicator group section.

 Note

Each time you remove an indicator group from a template, system updates the template automatically.

5. To add indicators to the indicator group, perform the following tasks:

a. In the selected indicator group section, choose Edit to add indicators to the indicator group.
b. In the indicator group window, go to Indicators tab and choose Add and perform the following tasks:

1. In the Add Indicators dialog box, to add new indicator, select New.
2. In the New Indicator window, enter values for the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

ID(*) Enter a name for the indicator.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the indicator
group once it has been created.

Description(*) Enter a short description.

Long Description Enter a long description.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 275
 Field Description

Data Type(*) Select any of the following options:

○ Date: select date if you want the data type to
support a date value.

 Note
○ Indicator Type: select the indicator type.
It can measured, calculated, and as­
sessed.
○ Code List: Assign code list for the indi­
cator.

○ Boolean: select boolean if you want the data

type to support boolean values. Indicator Type:
select the indicator type. It can measured, calcu­
lated, and assessed.
○ String: select string if you want the data type
to support alpha numeric values.

 Note
○ Indicator Type: select the indicator type.
It can measured, calculated, and as­
sessed.
○ Code List: Assign code list for the indi­
cator.

○ Numeric: select numeric if you want the data

type to support a numeric value. You can now
also have numeric as relational operators.

 Note
○ Dimension: Select an appropriate di­
mension from the dropdown.
○ Default Unit of Measure: Select an ap­
propriate Unit of Measure (UoM) as de­
fault from the dropdown.
○ Expected Behaviour(*): Specify if the
expected behaviour of the new indicator
is Increasing, Decreasing, Unknown, or
None.
○ Indicator Type: select the indicator type.
It can measured, calculated, and as­
sessed.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

276 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

○ Color: You can specify if you want a spe­

cific color for the indicator. You can se­
lect a color value from the palette.
○ Indicator Category: Define the indicator
category:
○ Continuous
○ Level
○ Discrete
○ Code List: Assign code list for the indi­
cator.

○ Numeric Flexible: select numeric flexible

if you want the data type to support decimal
value. Numeric Flexible supports a range of
(15,10).

 Note
For a numeric flexible data type you can de­
fine additional properties.

○ Dimension: Select an appropriate di­

mension from the dropdown.
○ Default Unit of Measure: Select an ap­
propriate Unit of Measure (UoM) as de­
fault from the dropdown.
○ Expected Behaviour(*): Specify if the
expected behaviour of the new indicator
is Increasing, Decreasing, Unknown, or
None.
○ Indicator Type: select the indicator type.
It can measured, calculated, and as­
sessed.
○ Color: You can specify if you want a spe­
cific color for the indicator. You can se­
lect a color value from the palette.
○ Indicator Category: Define the indicator
category:
○ Continuous
○ Level
○ Discrete
○ Total Length of the Number: Enter the
total length of the number including
decimals.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 277
 Field Description

 Note
Total length of the number should
be greater than zero.

○ Decimal Places Allowed: Enter the num­

ber of decimal places allowed for the
number.

 Note
○ The allowed number of deci­
mal places cannot be greater
than the total length of the
number.
○ Decimal places cannot be less
than zero.

○ Code List: Assign code list for the indi­

cator.

 Note
○ To accommodate attributes that are al­
ready shared, the difference between
new and old value of decimal places
must not be greater than difference be­
tween new and old value of total length
of the number.
○ Data type Integer is covered by the
newly introduced data type Numeric
Flexible if the Decimal Places
Allowed is equal to 0.

Indicator Type Define if the indicator is of type:

○ Measured
Quantitative indicators that help you to monitor
whether you are doing what you planned (out­
puts) but do not give us an idea of the effect that
is brought about by these outputs.
○ Calculated
Indicators derived using algorithms or some kind
of calculation.
○ Assessed
Indicators that can be used in assessments.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

278 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Global Select if the indicator is a global indicator or not.

 Note

○ Aggregation Concept: Aggregation concept is only applicable if the values for the
indicators are derived from multiple applications or the same application through different
methods.
○ Minimum: Minimum of the values is displayed
○ Maximum: Maximum of the values is displayed
○ Average: Average of the values is displayed
○ Sum: Sum of the values is displayed
○ Last Available Value: latest value is displayed
○ Expected Behaviour: Is only relevant for suggesting the color codes for threshold values.
For the number of thresholds available for the indicator, the relevant color codes are
defined by default. You can also customize the color codes for the thresholds.
For suggested colors in case of <Expected Behaviour> as Increasing, refer to the
below diagram:

For suggested colors in case of <Expected Behaviour> as Decreasing, refer to the

above diagram by reversing the colors

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 279
 For suggested colors in case of <Expected Behaviour> as None or Unknown:

○ Code Lists: You can specify a list of predefined values for the attribute or indicator
datatype. You can create codelists using the Codelist feature, see Adding, Updating, and
Deleting Code Lists [page 265].
○ Color: This color is used in the indicator chart (SAP Predictive Asset Insights specific
feature). You can define a color for each indicator and the relevant lines in the indicator
chart will be of that color.
○ Indicator Category: This is used in the indicator chart (SAP Predictive Asset Insights
specific feature). According to the category selected the way the indicator values are
plotted in indicator chart differs.
○ Flow: These variables are visible as continuous variations on the chart. Flow is line
graph, the indicator values in the indicator chart are connected by line.
○ Level: These variables remain unchanged until a new value exists, that is, level
variables are not interpolated linearly between indicators, but a step function is used
(the last value is repeated until a new value exists). An example of a level variable is
stock inventory. It is displayed similar to a step chart.
○ Discrete: Displays the state of the equipment as a horizontal bar on top of the chart.

3. Choose OK.

6. In the Add Indicators dialog box, to use an existing indicator from SAP Predictive Asset Insights, search for
an existing indicator using the Search text box and perform the following tasks:
a. From the search results list, select an appropriate indicator.
b. Choose OK.

Results

1. Go to the relevant app Equipment or Models. You have created the indicators. To instantiate the indicators:
2. Select a piece of equipment or a model from the list.
3. Choose Indicators under the Monitoring tab.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

280 PUBLIC Master Data
 4. Select the indicator that you want to instantiate and choose Configure.
You can define the indicator type, default unit of measure, indicator category, indicator space, and
threshold values for the indicator.
5. Choose Confirm.

5.14.1.3.1 Global Indicators

A set of most common and widely accepted indicator are available as predefined indicators.

Preshipped indicators with a suggested definition as Templates are available. The Indicators are available to all
the business objects based on the template selection.

● All global indicators are published/available in all accounts regardless of if you have the license for SAP
Asset Intelligence Network, SAP Asset Strategy and Performance Management, or SAP Predictive Asset
Insights.
● Global indicator groups & indicators are displayed in the indicator group or indicator lists with Source =
SAP
● Global indicator groups & indicators can be reused, but not edited.

The following list of global indicators are available:

Expected Behav­
ID Description Long Description Data Type Dimension iour

HEALTH_SCORE Health score Reflects the asset numeric No dimension decreasing

condition based on
historical perform­
ance, generally
ranges from 0 to
100.

RELA­ Relative health Comparison of the numeric Proportion decreasing

TIVE_HEALTH_SC score health score be­
ORE tween two groups
of assets.

RUL Remaining useful Remaining time to numeric Time decreasing

life the end of life, dis­
posal, or next
maintenance ac­
tivity of an asset.

POF Probability of fail­ Probability that an numeric No dimension increasing

ure asset fails at a par­
ticular point in
time; this is de­
fined as a unit of
time.

RELATIVE_POF Relative probability Comparison of numeric Proportion increasing

of failure probability of a fail­
ure occurrence be­
tween two groups
of assets.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 281
 Expected Behav­
ID Description Long Description Data Type Dimension iour

MTTF Mean time to fail­ Expected time be­ numeric Time decreasing
ure fore the asset fails.

MTTR Mean time to re­ Expected time to numeric Time increasing

pair repair a failed as­
set.

MTBF Mean time be­ Expected duration numeric Time decreasing

tween failures of the operating
time between fail­
ures of an asset.

RISK Risk Likelihood of a numeric No dimension increasing

specific event hap­
pening that may
expose an asset to
damage or failure.

RELATIVE_RISK Relative risk Comparison be­ numeric Proportion increasing

tween two groups
of assets of the
risk of an event
happening.

RPN Risk priority num­ Calculation to sort numeric No dimension increasing

ber the risk from high­
est to lowest; this
is the product of
severity, occur­
rence, and the abil­
ity to be detected.

CRITICALITY Criticality Importance rating string No dimension None

of an asset from a
maintenance and
monitoring per­
spective.

Connection Status Connection Status Connection Status string No Dimension None

with the Physical
Asset.

 Note
The connec­
tion status
only works if
you are using
SAP-managed
data persis­
tence and
streaming.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

282 PUBLIC Master Data
5.14.1.4 Nested Structures

Nested structures is a data model that can comprise of child attributes, indicators, or nested structures.

You can use nested structures to:

● Support complex data modeling of assets by introducing multiple cardinality with name association.

You can assign the nested structures to model or equipment templates. The equipment or models created
using these templates will inherit the nested structures similar to attributes and indicators.

5.14.1.4.1 Creating, Editing, and Deleting Nested Structures

You can create nested structures for attributes and indicators.

Procedure

1. Select Nested Structures.

2. Choose New to create a new nested structure. Perform the following tasks:
a. In the New Nested Structure window, enter the values for the fields as described in the table:

Field Description

ID(*) Enter an ID for the nested structure.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the code list once
it has been created.

Description(*) Enter an appropriate short description that describes

the nested structure.

 Note
You should always have a code description in a code
list before assigning the indicator to a piece of
equipment. There is no possibility to update the
code description later once it is been used for an In­
dicator. In case the code description is not pro­
vided, it will be empty and user will not be able to
update it later.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 283
 Field Description

Long Description Enter an appropriate long description that describes the

nested structure.

 Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

b. Choose Save.

3. To edit a nested structure, select the nested structure from the Nested Structure details page, choose Edit
from the nested structure object page.

In the Structure section, you can add attributes, indicators, and nested structures. Use the icon to
assign child nested structure, attribute or indicator. In the Assign dialog box, choose New <Attribute/
Indicator/Nested Structure> to add new attribute, indicator, or nested strutcure to the parent structure
hierarchy.

If you are adding a child nested structure, then the subsequent hierarchy for the same will be enabled and
you can assign existing attribute, indicator, or nested strutcures to the hierarchy.

 Note

○ You cannot assign the parent nested structure as the child structure in the nested structure
hierarchy under Structure. It will return an error message.
○ You can add a maximum of 10 levels in the hierarchy after which you cannot add more levels.

You can add multiple instances of same nested structure node (could be a child nested structure or
Attribute or Indicator) by using the New Instance button and associate semantic meaning with each
instance by providing the Named Association Text to each instance of the added child node. The Named
Association Text is autopopulated with the attribute/indicator/nested structure name suffixed with:
○ Attribute: _AT. For example Carcolour_AT.
○ Indicator:_IND. For example Carcolour_IND.
○ Nested Structures:_NS. For example Carcolour_NS.

 Tip

For example, if you add an attribute named 'WheelPressure' 4 times inside a nested structure called
'WheelStructure', then while adding the WheelPressure attribute, you can provide an additional
semantic meaning to each instance of that attribute such as 'WheelPressure_FrontRight',
'WheelPressure_FrontLeft', 'WheelPressure_BackRight', 'WheelPressure_BackLeft'.

4. You can delete a nested structure by:

○ selecting the nested structure from the Nested Structure list page and choosing Delete.
○ choosing Delete from the nested structure object page.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

284 PUBLIC Master Data
5.14.1.5 Adding Alert Types

You perform the following procedure to add alert types directly on a template object page. The alert type
definition allows you to define the alerts that are based on equipment error codes or based on certain
computation on the data for example by applying Rules on the data. The definition can also define associations
with an indicator and possible failure modes. The association with failure mode data allows you to identify
associations like instructions.

Prerequisites

● To update a template, your user ID must have the scopes TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT
assigned.
● To view a template, your user ID has the scope TEMPLATE_READ assigned.
● You have identified the template that you want to update.

Context

In the Template Explorerwindow, to add new alert type, select the New button and perform the following tasks:

Procedure

1. In the Template Explorer window, enter the values for the fields as described in the following table:

Field Description

Alert Type ID Define a unique alphanumeric ID for the alert type.

 Note
1. No spaces allowed in the ID.
2. Only the following characters are supported:
○ Uppercase and lowercase alphabets a
through z and A through Z.
○ Numeric digits 0 through 9
○ Punctuation marks underscore (_), hyphen
(-), colon (:), and full-stop (.)
○ Maximum number of characters allowed is
29

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 285
 Field Description

You cannot change the ID of the alert type once cre­

ated.

Category Select an alert category from the dropdown list:

○ Environment
○ Health
○ Equipment
○ Operation
○ Process
○ Safety
○ Other

Description Enter an appropriate description that describes the alert

type.

 Note
Maximum number of characters allowed is 255.

Severity Select the severity of the alert type:

○ Information (1)
○ Warning (2)
○ Error (3)

Indicator Assign indicator to the alert type by selecting from the list.

Origin This allows you to differentiate between the alert type that
is defined for the alert arising from a machine or rule.

Select from the dropdown:

○ Machine: On selecting, you can enter an error code
(this is optional)
○ Rule: Value should be used for the alert type defined
for rules.

Error Code Enter an error code. This field is available only if you select
Machine as origin.

 Note
Maximum number of characters allowed is 32.

Failure Modes Assign failure modes to the alert type by selecting from
the list.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

286 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

 Note
Multiple failure codes can be assigned to an alert type.

2. Choose Save.

 Note

You cannot create same alert type with the same ID.

An alert type will get external ID only after it is assigned to a model, equipment is created out of that model
and the equipment is published.

If corresponding external ID is not populated, SAP Internet of Things replication of alert type has failed. In
such a scenario, republish an equipment.

Results

In the Alert Type window, the newly created alert type displays. You can search and sort, group by alert types,
filter, and export details in an excel.

Editing Alert Type

Using the Edit option, you can edit an existing alert type or newly creating alert type. For this, click the alert type
you want to edit.

You can:

● Edit the Alert Type Detailsunder Information and Settings. Under the Settings, you can manage settings like
deduplication, allowing updates, auto close, and so on. The Allow Updates flag is available only if the
Deduplication field is enabled. You can enable the allow updates flag to decidethe update strategy based on
the updates received. For example, in case you have subscribed to SAP Predictive Assets Insights, you may
have machine alarms generated alerts, so you can use this flag to decide the update startegy based on the
incoming updates from the alarm.

You can also reassign failure modes to the alert types. To view the instructions assigned with the failure mode,
click the number visible within the <Instructions> column.

 Note

● Alert type cannot be deleted if assigned to an alert type group. Unassign from alert type group to delete
an alert type.
● Shared indicators are not available to be used for creating a new alert type.
● Shared alert types will also be displayed in the list page. Shared alert types are read-only, you cannot
edit/delete them. You can only edit the description of the alert type.
● Alert types must be explicitly shared along with relevant failure mode, indicator group, and indicator
while sharing a model. Also, such shared alert types can be used in rules. Shared alert types can be
added to another alert type group but you cannot edit a shared alert type group.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 287
 ● Multiple languages are now supported for alert types.
● Alert type contains the auto close option. If you enable this option, alerts associated with the alert type
is automatically set as complete as soon as the related notification status is set as complete.

● For Alert Type modification changes are not synchronized immediately to reuse alert.
● For equipment that has alert type associated, you can view the modified alert type only after the alert
type is Published.

Related Information

Failure Modes [page 176]

Viewing and Editing Indicators [page 126]

5.14.1.5.1 Deduplication

Deduplication option allows the user not to create duplicate alerts for an existing alert type and equipment ID.
Duplicate alerts are created or generated once the stipulated deduplication period is over or the status of
existing alert of that alert type is marked as completed.

During the deduplication period, in a scenario where a new alert instance of an existing not completed alert is
generated, the count will increase, and a new alert is not generated. The timestamp of last occurrence of alert
is visible.

When creating a new alert type, the deduplication switch is on with the default period of 30 days. If you create
an alert with this alert type and same equipment ID, first alert is generated. If you create a second alert within
30 days, a new alert will not be generated. Only the count of first alert increases.

For more information, refer Alerts [page 22]

5.14.1.6 Adding Alert Type Groups

You perform the following procedure to add alert type groups directly on a template object page. Alert type
group is a grouping of alert types and can be assigned to a model.

Prerequisites

● To update a template, your user ID has the scope TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.
● To view a template, your user ID either belongs to the group ORG_DATA_READ role template
AssetCoreReader; or has the scope TEMPLATE_READ assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

288 PUBLIC Master Data
Context

In the Template Explorer window, to add new alert type group select the New Alert Type Group button and
perform the following tasks:

Procedure

1. In the Template Explorer window, enter the values for the fields as described in the following table:

Field Description

ID Enter an ID for the alert type group.

 Note
○ No spaces allowed in the ID.
○ Only the following characters are supported:
○ Uppercase and lowercase alphabets a
through z and A through Z.
○ Numeric digits 0 through 9.
○ Punctuation marks underscore (_), hyphen
(-), colon (:), and full-stop (.).
○ Maximum number of characters allowed is
32
.

You cannot change the ID of the alert type once created.

Description Enter an appropriate description that describes the alert

type group.

 Note
Maximum number of characters allowed is 255.

Long Description Enter a details description, if any, for the alert type group.

 Note
The maximum number of characters allowed is 5,000.

2. Choose Save.

 Note

You cannot create the same alert type group with the same ID.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 289
Results

In the Alert Type Group window, the newly created alert type group displays. You can search and sort, group by
alert type group, filter, and export details in an excel.

Editing Alert Type Group

Click the respective alert type group to edit details. You can also assign new alert types to the selected alert
type group using the Assign option in the Edit mode. You can also edit the details of assigned alert type. For
this, select the alert type within the Alert Types list and click Edit.

It is also possible to create alert type from the Assign Alert Type dialog box.

 Note

● You cannot delete alert type group if assigned to a model.

● Now, the shared alert type can be assigned to a alert type group. But shared alert type cannot be edited
● You cannot add alert types to alert type group if assigned to a model.

Related Information

Failure Modes [page 176]

Instructions [page 251]

5.14.1.7 Creating a Model Template

You use this procedure to create a model template that helps you to define the attributes and attribute groups
related to a model.

Prerequisites

● You have identified the subclass template provided by SAP Predictive Asset Insights, or a model template
created within your organization or shared by a different organization, from which you can create the
template.

 Note

A model template can also be created without a parent object (subclass/another model template), in
this case the model template acts as a top node.

● Your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

290 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. Launch the Templates app.

2. On the Templates window, navigate into Model Templates card and choose New and perform the following
substeps:
a. In the New Model Template popup, enter values for the fields as described in the following table:

Field Description

Template ID(*) Enter a unique ID for the model template.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the Template
ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the template once
it has been created.

Short Description(*) Enter a short description.

Long Description Enter a long description

Data Modeling With ○ Nested Structures: You can use this option to cre­
ate complex data modeling and include nested
structures in the template.
○ Indictaor Group/Attribute Group: You can use this
option if you want to include just indicator groups
or attribute groups in the template.

By default, the Indicator Group/Attribute Group is se­

lected.

Parent Subclass/Model Template Select a subclass template, or another model template

as parent template.

 Note
You can create a model template without a parent
template.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 291
 Field Description

Industry Standards Add an industry standard.

 Note
○ This field is scope-specific.
○ Template objects can have only one industry
standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a tem­
plate object, you can change or delete it.

 Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

b. Choose OK.

System creates a model template.

3. To edit the description of the template, choose Edit Description in the template header and perform the
following tasks:
a. In the Edit <Name of the Model Template> popup, enter suitable description in the Description text
box.
b. Choose Save.
4. Depending on the type of data modeling selected when creating the template, you can have the following
options:
○ If you select Nested Structures, you can view the Nested Structures tab.
To add child attributes, indicators or nested structures:
1. You can choose Add and select the attributes, indicators, and nested structures from the Assign
dialog box.
2. Choose Continue.
3. The Named Association Text is auto-populated with the attribute/indicator/nested structure name
suffixed with:
○ Attribute: _AT. For example Carcolour_AT.
○ Indicator:_IND. For example Carcolour_IND.
○ Nested Structures:_NA. For example Carcolour_NA.
You can add multiple instances of same nested structure node (could be a nested structure or
Attribute or Indicator) by using the Add Instance button and associate semantic meaning with
each instance by providing the Named Association Text to each instance of the added child node.
You can also choose an instance and remove it using Remove Instance button.

 Note

The Named Association Text can be the same for attributes/indicators/nested structures with
different parent hierarchy. For example, if you have 2 child nested structures NS1 and NS2
assigned. You have assigned the attribute AT1 to both NS1 and NS2 and another attribute AT2

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

292 PUBLIC Master Data
 to NS1 only. Now NS1-> AT1 and NS2-> AT1 can have the same Named Association Text like
AT1_AT.

 Tip

For example, if you add an attribute named 'WheelPressure' 4 times inside a nested structure
called 'WheelStructure', then while adding the WheelPressure attribute, you can provide an
additional semantic meaning to each instance of that attribute such as
'WheelPressure_FrontRight', 'WheelPressure_FrontLeft', 'WheelPressure_BackRight',
'WheelPressure_BackLeft'.

4. Choose Assignin the Assign dialog box.

If you want to remove a nested structure, you can select the attribute, indicator, and nested structure
assigned to the template and choose Remove.

 Note

○ If you select Indictator Group/Attribute Group, you can view the Attribute Groups and Indicator Groups
tab:
○ To add attribute groups and attributes to a template, choose Add Attribute Groups from the
template header.
For more information, see Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes [page 267].

 Note

Each time you save the attribute group of a template, system updates the template
automatically. You do not have to save the template explicitly.

○ To add indicator groups and indicators to a template, choose Add Indicator Groups from the
template header.
For more information, see Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273].

 Note

○ Each time you save the indicator group of a template, system updates the template
automatically. You do not have to save the template explicitly.
○ If you have maintained dimesions for indicators, then you can set the Display UoM apart
from the Default UoM that is defined for the indicator. The Display UoM is consumed to
display the indicator value in the relevant object page.

 Note

The display Unit of Measure is reset to default, when you edit the definition of
indicator/indicator group.

5. To add an industry standard to the template, perform the following tasks:

a. Go to the Industry Standard section on the template and choose Add Industry Standard.
b. In the Industry Standard popup, select the industry standard you want to assign to the template object.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 293
  Note

Optionally, you can enter a standard ID or code as defined in an industry standard. You can only
assign one industry standard for an object.

You can also directly add an industry standard to an attribute.

 Note

○ Template objects can have only one industry standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a template object, you can change or delete it.

a. To add to an existing attribute, select the attribute and choose Edit Attribute.
b. In the Edit Attribute popup, choose Industry Standards Add Industry Standard .
c. To add to a new attribute, choose Add Attribute New Attribute and enter all attribute-relevant
information.
d. In the Industry Standards section, and Add Industry Standard .
e. In the Industry Standards popup, select an industry standard and enter an industry Standard ID.
f. Choose OK.

Results

● You can update the model template with new attribute groups and attributes.
For more information, see Viewing and Updating a Template [page 306].
● You can create a model using the model template.
For more information, see Creating a Model [page 133].
● You can add the template to a group using the Group button. For more information, see Groups [page 199].
● You can reorder the attribute groups/ indicator groups using the Reorder button on the details screen.
● You can delete a template using the Delete button on the details page or multiple templates using the same
button on the list page.

5.14.1.8 Creating an Equipment Template

You use this procedure to create an equipment template that helps you to define the equipment-specific
attributes and attribute groups related to an item of equipment. This template allows you to create new
attributes and attribute groups that need not be inherited from a class, subclass or a model template.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

294 PUBLIC Master Data
Procedure

1. Launch the Templates application.

2. On the Templates object page, choose New Equipment Template and proceed as follows:
a. In the New Equipment Template pop-up, enter values for the fields as described in the table below:

Field Description

ID(*) Enter a unique ID for the equipment template.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the template once
it has been created.

Short(*) and Long Description Enter a template description.

Data Modeling With ○ Nested Structures: You can use this option to cre­
ate complex data modeling and include nested
structures in the template.
○ Indictaor Group/Attribute Group: You can use this
option if you want to include just indicator groups
or attribute groups in the template.

By default, the Indicator Group/Attribute Group is se­

lected.

Subclass/Equipment Template Select a subclass template, or another equipment tem­

plate as parent template.

 Note
You can also create an equipment template without
a parent template.

Industry Standards Add an industry standard.

 Note
○ This field is scope-specific.
○ Template objects can have only one industry
standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a tem­
plate object, you can change or delete it.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 295
  Note

All the mandatory fields are marked as (*) in the table.

b. Choose OK.

The system creates an equipment template.

3. To edit the description of the template, choose Edit Description in the template header and proceed as
follows:
a. In the Edit pop-up, enter a suitable description in the Description text box.
b. Choose Save.
4. Depending on the type of data modeling selected when creating the template, you can have the following
options:
○ If you select Nested Structures, you can view the Nested Structures tab.
To add child attributes, indicators and nested structures:
1. You can choose Add and select the attributes, indicators, and nested structures from the Assign
dialog box.
2. Choose Continue.
3. The Named Association Text is auto-populated (only for the first instance) with the attribute/
indicator/nested structure name suffixed with:
○ Attribute: _AT. For example Carcolour_AT.
○ Indicator:_IND. For example Carcolour_IND.
○ Nested Structures:_NS. For example Carcolour_NS.
You can add multiple instances of same nested structure node (could be a another nested
structure or Attribute or Indicator) by using the Add Instance button and associate semantic
meaning with each instance by providing the Named Association Text to each instance of the
added child node. You can also choose an instance and remove it using Remove Instance button.

 Note

The Named Association Text can be the same for attributes/indicators/nested structures with
different parent hierarchy. For example, if you have 2 child nested structures NS1 and NS2
assigned. You have assigned the attribute AT1 to both NS1 and NS2 and another attribute AT2
to NS1 only. Now NS1-> AT1 and NS2-> AT1 can have the same Named Association Text like
AT1_AT.

 Tip

For example, if you add an attribute named 'WheelPressure' 4 times inside a nested structure
called 'WheelStructure', then while adding the WheelPressure attribute, you can provide an
additional semantic meaning to each instance of that attribute such as
'WheelPressure_FrontRight', 'WheelPressure_FrontLeft', 'WheelPressure_BackRight',
'WheelPressure_BackLeft'.

4. Choose Assignin the Assign dialog box.

If you want to remove a nested structure, you can select the attribute, indicator, and nested structure
assigned to the template and choose Remove.
○ If you select Indictator Group/Attribute Group, you can view the Attribute Groups and Indicator Groups
tab:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

296 PUBLIC Master Data
 ○ To add attribute groups and attributes to a template, choose Add Attribute Groups from the
template header.
For more information, see Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes [page 267].

 Note

○ Each time you save the attribute group of a template, system updates the template
automatically. You do not have to save the template explicitly.
○ Multi-level inheritance is supported, that is:
○ you can create equipment templates under another equipment template
○ you can create an equipment template with reference to a subclass

○ To add indicator groups and indicators to a template, choose Add Indicator Groups from the
template header.
For more information, see Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273].

 Note

○ Each time you save the indicator group of a template, system updates the template
automatically. You do not have to save the template explicitly.
○ If you have maintained dimesions for indicators, then you can set the Display UoM apart
from the Default UoM that is defined for the indicator. The Display UoM is consumed to
display the indicator value in the relevant object page.

 Note

The display Unit of Measure is reset to default, when you edit the definition of
indicator/indicator group.

5. To add an industry standard to the template, perform the following tasks:

a. Go to the Industry Standard section on the template and choose Add Industry Standard.
b. In the Industry Standard popup, select the industry standard you want to assign to the template object.

 Note

Optionally, you can enter a standard ID or code as defined in an industry standard. You can only
assign one industry standard for an object.

You can also directly add an industry standard to an attribute.

 Note

○ Template objects can have only one industry standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a template object, you can change or delete it.

a. To add to an existing attribute, select the attribute and choose Edit Attribute.
b. In the Edit Attribute popup, choose Industry Standards Add Industry Standard .
c. To add to a new attribute, choose Add Attribute New Attribute and enter all attribute-relevant
information.
d. In the Industry Standards section, and Add Industry Standard .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 297
 e. In the Industry Standards popup, select an industry standard and enter an industry Standard ID.
f. Choose OK.

Results

● You can update the equipment template with new attribute groups and attributes.
For more information, see Viewing and Updating a Template [page 306].
● You can create equipment using the equipment template.
For more information, see Creating a Piece of Equipment [page 97].
● You can add the template to a group using the Group button. For more information, see Groups [page 199].
● You can reorder the attribute groups using the Reorder button on the details screen.

5.14.1.9 Creating a Location Template

You use this procedure to create a location template that helps you to define the location-specific attributes
and attribute groups related to a location.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Launch the Templates application.

2. On the Templates object page, choose New Location Template and proceed as follows:
a. In the New Location Template pop-up, enter values for the fields as described in the table below:

Field Description

Template ID(*) Enter a unique ID for the location template.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the template once
it has been created.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

298 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Short(*) and Long Description Enter a template description.

Parent Subclass/Location Template Select a subclass template, or another location tem­

plate as parent template.

 Note
You can also create a location template without a
parent template.

Industry Standards Add an industry standard.

 Note
○ This field is scope-specific.
○ Template objects can have only one industry
standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a tem­
plate object, you can change or delete it.

b. Choose OK.

The system creates a location template.

3. To edit the description of the template, choose Edit Description in the template header and proceed as
follows:
a. In the Edit pop-up, enter a suitable description in the Description text box.
b. Choose Save.
4. To add attribute groups and attributes to a template, choose Add Attribute Group from the template
header.

For more information, see Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes [page 267].

 Note

○ Multi-level inheritance is supported, that is:

○ you can create location templates under another location template
○ you can create a location template with reference to a subclass
○ Each time you save the attribute group of a template, system updates the template automatically.
You do not have to save the template explicitly.

Next Steps

You use the location template while creating a location from the Locations application.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 299
5.14.1.10 Creating a Spare Part Template

You use this procedure to create a spare part template that helps you to maintain manufacturing information,
technical data, and assignment information pertaining to spare parts.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Launch the Templates application.

2. On the Templates object page, choose New Spare Part Template and proceed as follows:
a. In the New Spare Part Template dialog box, enter values for the fields as described in the table below:

Field Description

Template ID(*) Enter the template ID.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the template once
it has been created.

Short Description(*) Enter a short description.

Long Description Enter a long description.

Parent Subclass/Spare Part Template Select a subclass template, or another spare part tem­
plate as parent template.

 Note
You can also create a spare part template without a
parent template.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

300 PUBLIC Master Data
 Field Description

Industry Standards Add an industry standard.

 Note
○ This field is scope-specific.
○ Template objects can have only one industry
standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a tem­
plate object, you can change or delete it.

b. Choose OK.

The system creates a spare part template.

 Note

Multilevel inheritance is supported, that is:

○ you can create a spare part template under another spare part template
○ you can create a spare part template with reference to a subclass

3. To edit the description of the template, choose Edit Description in the template header and proceed as
follows:
a. In the Edit dialog box, enter a suitable description in the Description text box.
b. Choose Save.
4. To add attribute groups and attributes to a template, choose Add Attribute Group from the template
header.

For more information, see Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes [page 267]

5.14.1.11 Creating a System Template

You use this procedure to create a system template that helps you to maintain system information, attribute
groups, industry standards, and groups assignment information pertaining to system.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 301
Procedure

1. Launch the Templates application.

2. Choose System Templates New System Template and proceed as follows:

a. In the New System Template dialog box, enter values for the fields as described in the table below:

Field Description

Template ID(*) Enter the template ID.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the template once
it has been created.

Short Description(*) Enter a short description.

Long Description Enter a long description.

Parent Subclass/System Template Select a subclass or another system template as the pa­
rent template.

 Note
You can also create a system template without a pa­
rent template.

Industry Standards Add an industry standard.

 Note
○ This field is scope-specific.
○ Template objects can have only one industry
standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a tem­
plate object, you can change or delete it.

b. Choose OK.

The system creates a system template.

 Note

Multi-level inheritance is supported, that is:

○ you can create a system template under another system template
○ you can create a system template with reference to a subclass

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

302 PUBLIC Master Data
 3. To edit the description of the template, choose Edit Description in the selected template header and
proceed as follows:
a. In the Edit dialog box, enter a suitable description in the Description text box.
b. Choose Save.
4. To add attributes to the system template, choose Add Attribute Groups in the object page header and
proceed as follows:
a. In the Add Attribute Groups dialog box, select existing attribute groups from the list or add new
attribute group using New Attribute Group.
b. Choose OK.

5.14.1.12 Creating a Functional Location Template

You use this procedure to create a functional location template that helps you to maintain system information,
attribute groups, industry standards, and groups assignment information pertaining to system.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Launch the Templates application.

2. Choose Functional Locations Templates New and proceed as follows:

a. In the New Functional Location Template dialog box, enter values for the fields as described in the table
below:

Field Description

Template ID(*) Enter the template ID.

 Note
○ There are no spaces allowed in the ID.
○ You cannot change the ID of the template once
it has been created.

Short Description(*) Enter a short description.

Long Description Enter a long description.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 303
 Field Description

Parent Functional Location Template Select another system template as the parent template.

 Note
You can also create a functional location template
without a parent template.

Industry Standards Add an industry standard.

 Note
○ This field is scope-specific.
○ Template objects can have only one industry
standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a tem­
plate object, you can change or delete it.

b. Choose OK.

The system creates a functional location template.

 Note

Multi-level inheritance is supported, that is:

○ you can create a functional location template under another functional location template

3. To edit the description of the template, choose Edit Description in the selected template header and
proceed as follows:
a. In the Edit dialog box, enter a suitable description in the Description text box.
b. Choose Save.

4. To add attributes to the template, choose Add Add Attribute Groups in the object page header and
proceed as follows:
a. In the Add Attribute Groups dialog box, select existing attribute groups from the list or add new
attribute group using New .

For more information, see Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes [page 267].

 Note

○ Each time you save the attribute group of a template, system updates the template
automatically. You do not have to save the template explicitly.

b. Choose OK.

5. To add indicator groups and indicators to a template, choose Add Indicator Groups from the
template header.
a. In the Add Indicator Groups dialog box, select existing indicator groups from the list or add new
indicator group using New .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

304 PUBLIC Master Data
 For more information, see Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273].

 Note

○ Each time you save the indicator group of a template, system updates the template
automatically. You do not have to save the template explicitly.
○ If you have maintained dimesions for indicators, then you can set the Display UoM apart from
the Default UoM that is defined for the indicator. The Display UoM is consumed to display the
indicator value in the relevant object page.

 Note

The display Unit of Measure is reset to default, when you edit the definition of indicator/
indicator group.

b. Choose OK.
6. To add an industry standard to the template, perform the following tasks:
a. Go to the Industry Standard section on the template and choose Add Industry Standard.
b. In the Industry Standard popup, select the industry standard you want to assign to the template object.

 Note

Optionally, you can enter a standard ID or code as defined in an industry standard. You can only
assign one industry standard for an object.

You can also directly add an industry standard to an attribute.

 Note

○ Template objects can have only one industry standard assigned to them. They can also have
no industry standards assignments.
○ If an industry standard is assigned to a template object, you can change or delete it.

a. To add to an existing attribute, select the attribute and choose Edit Attribute.
b. In the Edit Attribute popup, choose Industry Standards Add Industry Standard .
c. To add to a new attribute, choose Add Attribute New Attribute and enter all attribute-relevant
information.
d. In the Industry Standards section, and Add Industry Standard .
e. In the Industry Standards popup, select an industry standard and enter an industry Standard ID.
f. Choose OK.

Results

● You can update the functional location template with new attribute groups and attributes.
For more information, see Viewing and Updating a Template [page 306].
● You can create a model using the model template.
For more information, see Creating a Model [page 133].
● You can add the template to a group using the Group button. For more information, see Groups [page 199].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 305
● You can reorder the attribute groups/ indicator groups using the Reorder button on the details screen.
● You can delete a template using the Delete button on the details page or multiple templates using the same
button on the list page.

5.14.1.13 Viewing and Updating a Template

Prerequisites

● To update a template, your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.
● To view a template, your user ID has the role TEMPLATE_READ assigned.
● You have identified the template that you want to update.

Procedure

1. Open the Templates app.

2. Search for a template that already exists using the search filter.
3. Select the template from the search results.

 Note

The search result displays the number of templates by the template types.

4. Choose a template type to view more details of the templates displayed in the search results.
5. Choose a template.

The template details are displayed in a flexible column layout and as a side-by-side view of the selected
template in the list view or card view, and the template details in the template object page.

 Note

The quick view (small and medium detailed view) only provides limited editing options. In the full
screen view you have the full editing functionalities.

System displays the attribute groups, and attributes of the template.

6. Choose Edit Description to update the short and long description of the template.
7. To update the description of the attribute group, choose Edit in the <Name of the Attribute Group> section
and perform the following tasks:
a. Under the <Name of the attribute group> section, in the Short Description and Long Descriptionfield,
update the descriptions of the attribute group.
b. Choose Save.
8. To update the attributes of the attribute group, in the <Name of the attribute group> section, choose Edit
Attribute and perform the following tasks:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

306 PUBLIC Master Data
 a. In the <Name of the attribute> pop up, update the fields of Attribute Details section.

For more information, see Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes [page 267]

 Note

○ You cannot update the attributes that have been inherited from a class, subclass, or another
model template.
○ You cannot update the attributes that have been used in creating any child objects such as
models, items of equipment or locations.

b. Choose OK.
9. To remove the attributes of the attribute group, in the <Name of the attribute group> section, choose
Remove Attribute and perform the following tasks:
a. In the Warning pop-up, choose OK if you are sure that you want to remove the attribute to the attribute
group.
b. Choose Save.

 Note

○ You cannot remove attribute groups and attribute that have been inherited either from a class
template, subclass, template, or a model template.

10. To add new attribute groups and attributes to the template, choose Add Attribute Group from the template
header.

More information, see Adding Attribute Groups and Attributes [page 267].

 Note

Each time you save the attribute group of a template, system updates the template automatically.

Results

You have created a template that you can update with additional attribute groups or attributes.

5.15 Rules

Use

You use the Rules application to manage and create rules so that the service technician is notified about
possible alerts. You can set up rules for a model or equipment with this application. These rules, based on the

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 307
scheduled timestamp and triggered events, will evaluate the conditions and trigger alerts of the selected alert
type.

You can perform additional actions such as sending emails with rule execution status to the selected users.

It is also possible to view a list of existing and newly created rules. In addition, edit and delete a rule and view
rules for models and equipment.

Procedure

1. Define alert type. Navigate to Templates Alert Types New . The origin should be Rules.

 Note

You can also define the deduplication configuration to reduce the duplication of similar alerts. For more
information, refer Adding Alert Types [page 285].

2. Define alert type groups for an alert type created. For more information, refer Adding Alert Type Groups
[page 288].
3. Assign the alert type group to the model that will assign all the alert types to the model. These are available
for equipment derived from model. For more information on assigning, refer Assigning Alert Type Groups
to a Model [page 144].
4. Create a rule for model or equipment by defining rule. You can create scheduled based rules or trigger-
based rules using the Rules list page. The scheduled rules are triggered at defined frequency and trigger-
based rules are executed based on the trigger created by the equipment alarms. For more information,
refer Creating Rules [page 309].
5. You can view the rules defined for the model or equipment using the Rules list page. In case of equipment,
you can also view the rules defined at model level and inherited to equipment. For more information, refer
Rule Management [page 312].
6. You can also navigate to the Rules list page to view all the rules created against a model or equipment.

 Note

In case you have also subscribed to SAP Asset Intelligence Network, the shared alert types can be
synchronized and used while defining rules.

Related Information

Rule Management [page 312]

Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273]
Troubleshooting

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

308 PUBLIC Master Data
5.15.1 Creating Rules

Use the New button to add a new rule.

Prerequisites

You must have the authorized role RULES_READ, RULES_DELETE, and RULES_EDIT.

Context

When a specified event occurs, for example, engine temperature exceeding a threshold, and the rule's
conditions are met, an alert is triggered. Also possible to send emails (optional).

Procedure

1. On the launchpad, click the Rules application.

2. Click New.
3. Enter a rule name and a long description (optional) for the rule.
4. Select a model or equipment.

 Note

○ All the published equipment and equipment in revision status with associated model are available
in the list.
○ Rules will only run for equipment from the same organization. Shared equipment/shared model of
equipment is not supported.

5. Choose Save
6. You are navigated to the rules object page. You can edit the long description, if necessary.
Rule Details
7. Within When, if the user wants to schedule events, use Schedule Event within the Event Type option to set
up an event to check for the rule conditions at a specified time interval.

 Note

The rule is executed based on Central European Time zone and not based on users time zone.

8. Within When, if the user wants to configure machine-generated alerts, use the Triggered Event within the
Event Type option to create a rule. The rule is configured for a triggered event based on the selected alert
type and is executed when a machine generated alert of the selected alert type occurs for the selected
model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 309
  Note

○ Only alert type with origin as Equipment are listed for the triggered events. The same alert type is
automatically populated as a default alert type in the Then option. You can change the alert type in
the Then option, if necessary.
○ In a scenario where trigger-based rule exists for the alert type that is valid for an equipment, the
rule is triggered instead of an alert creation. The condition in this rule is evaluated to create an
alert.

Set up Rule Conditions

9. Within If, use the Add Condition option to choose values to represent the conditions that trigger an alert or
you can directly enter the conditions into input field.

Optionally choose an aggregator, indicator, or attribute for the rule:

○ If you choose aggregator, first create an aggregator by defining the values for aggregator function,
indicator, and timeframe. The newly created aggregator defines an aggregated value for the selected
indicator within a timeframe. On selecting the newly created aggregator, you can either specify a
constant value from the predefined range of thresholds assigned to the indicator within the aggregator.
The supported aggregators are count, first, last, minimum, maximum, some, average, and standard
deviation.
For more information on indicators, refer Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273].
○ If you choose indicator, you can either specify a constant value or select a threshold from the
predefined range of thresholds assigned to the indicator.

 Note

Constant value will be numeric.

○ If the duration or the time stamp of the data captured differs for different indicators used to define a
condition, chances are that the results obtained are not as expected. To obtain desired results,
aggregation must be used on the respective indicator so that the value obtained for the bigger duration
can be used if data values are low.

 Example

The machine running status is captured every hour and its vibration is captured every minute. To
use the running status in a condition, define an hourly aggregation to return the last value so that
the last value captured is used to evaluate the rule.

○ Equipment or model used in a rule must have minimum one indicator assigned to it to execute the rule.
○ If you choose attribute, you can specify a constant value.

 Note

○ Add aggregators, indicators, and attributes as required, modifying the operators (AND, OR)
between them to define the condition.
○ Rules will run for numeric, numeric flexible, string, and boolean type indicator only. For a condition
<Indicator of type string or boolean> equal <constant> constant value should be in quotes ("" -
double quotes). For a condition <Indicator of type numeric or numeric flexible> equal <constant>
constant value should not have any quotes.
○ Supported values for boolean type Indicators or Attributes are "True" and "False".
○ Threshold comparisons for aggregates are not supported in conditions.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

310 PUBLIC Master Data
Add Action
10. Choose an alert type. When the rule execution status is success, an alert of the selected alert type is
created.
11. Within Then, perform the following optional steps:
○ Send e-mail to the selected users. For this, click Send Email within the Add Action option. Multiple
users can be selected at the same time.
The listed users are business users defined using the Application Settings application. For more
information, refer Application Settings [page 430]
○ When creating a rule, you can use Add Action Notification to create a corresponding notification
and also define the type of notification and priority of the notification.

 Note

○ The notification description is obtained from the description provided for the alert types. This
description will appear truncated if the alert type description exceeds 40 characters.
○ The notification description is always in English. However, the Alert Type description is used to
create the Notification description. For example, if Alert Type description is in English, the
notification description uses the alert type English description. If the Alert Type Description is
not present in English, then the system selects a random language description.
○ E-mail generated from Rules displays the violated indicators.

○ The following fields are supported for notification created by Rules:

○ Notification Type
○ Description
○ Notification Start Date
○ Notification Type
○ Priority
○ Status
○ Equipment ID
○ Alert Type
○ The following fields are not supported for notification created by Rules.
○ Operator
○ Location
○ Malfunction Start Date
12. Select Status to activate or deactivate the rule.
13. Choose Save. The rule is added to the rule table.

 Note

The rules assigned at the model will not be activated for the equipment initially. To activate, you can
use the Rules page by clicking data within the <Total Pieces of Equipment> column. From the
popup, select and activate rule for equipment created from the model.

Results

Viewing Rules for Equipment or Model

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 311
You can view the list of the rules created for model or equipment using the Rules application. The following
details are visible in the Rules page.

● List of rules created for model or equipment (in case of equipment, it is only rules created against them)

 Note

○ View rules for an equipment (created for an equipment or inherited from model) within the
Equipment tab. Select the equipment to view all the rules defined for an equipment.
○ Rules are grouped according to equipment.
○ Change the status of only rules created for an equipment.
○ Activate or deactivate rules inherited from model.

● Search option
● Sort, filter and group rules using Settings option
● Number of activated equipment.
Last execution time and status of rules. Statuses are Not executed, Execution Failed, Executed (for All),
and Executed (for Few).
● Execution logs for failed rules.

 Note

If the rule execution is successful, execution details are not available.

Editing or Deleting Rule for Model

You can edit and delete the existing rule by clicking the Rule name on the Rules List page.

 Note

Changes made within this page will be visible after saving or deleting the details.

5.15.2 Rule Management

● Enabling and Disabling Rules for Model

You decide the status of a rule for a model while creating a rule. The status can be activate or deactivate.
In a rule list page, you can change the rule status corresponding to a model by activating or deactivating it.

 Note

By default, all the rules created against a model are executed automatically as rules are deactivated for
the equipment. You must activate the rules for the equipment to execute it.

● Activating or Deactivating Rule for Equipment

In the rule list page, you can change the status of the rule corresponding to equipment by clicking on the
link within the <Number of Activated Equipment> column.

 Note

By default, all the rules created at the model level are in inactivated state (deactivated) at the
equipment level.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

312 PUBLIC Master Data
 Using the Activate Rules Dialog dialog box, it is possible to activate or deactivate rule status corresponding
to the equipment.
● Execution Logs
In the rule list page, you can click the Last executed Status to view the rule execution logs. in the Execution
Logs dialog box, enter the date range for which you want to display the logs. Click Go.
All the failure logs are displayed in the table with the following details:
○ Time Stamp
○ Execution Status
○ Message
Message for Execution logs can be of following type:
○ Rule for Equipment: If the rule fails for the equipment, execution log for that equipment ID is displayed.
○ Rule for Model:
○ If it fails at rule level: The log displays the reason for rule failure.
○ If it fails at individual equipment level: The log displays the reason for individual equipment.

 Note

● No overlap between ingested data and the period considered for rule execution. This can cause due to
delayed data ingestion like rule executed every 2 min and data ingestion delayed more than 2 mins.
● Rule Aggregation only considers the data points from the aggregation period. For example, Rules
executed every 24 hours (1 day), using aggregation on bearing temperature on every hour, then the rule
engine will only consider data for last one hour and first 23-hour data gets ignored.
● IoT Sync for equipment has to be enabled for rules to trigger alerts (Alert type sync).
● Triggered events are only for machine alarms and not for normal time series data.

5.16 Equipment Search

You can search for an equipment using Internal ID.

Additionally, you can filter based on:

● Equipment header fields

● Equipment attribute values

 Note

● This application is only available on SAP BTP, Cloud Foundry environment (Amazon Web Services
(AWS) and Azure).
● If you update model header data, this will not reflect in the equipment unless you make an update on
the equipment data.
● Search on attribute values from location, which are assigned to the equipment are not supported. You
can search equipment based on the model attributes. You can also search equipment based on
attribute codelist values.
● Filter on attributes of type picture, enum, attributes with codelists of type date, numeric, and numeric
flexible having multiselect option and along with unit of measure are not supported.
● Multilanguage string attribute won't be displayed as per your logon language.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 313
 ● Search on attributes with a unit of measure is only supported with the actual value maintained. The
automatic value conversion to your preferred metric even when the value is maintained in a different
metric is not supported. For example, if you have saved 10 Kilograms as a value and try to search for 22
Pounds, you won't get the results, even though the value is the same in different metrics.
● The search results are 'near real-time', there might be a slight delay between when the changes are
made and when they are available in the search results.
● Partial text search on string attributes is not supported.
● Sorting by attribute values is not supported in the Azure cloud.
● You can search by business partners ( sold to party, ship to party , bill to party, and suppliers/ dealers).
● You can create equipment using the New button.
● You can select multiple equipment from the list and add them to a group using the Group button.
● You can also publish the selected equipment using the Publish button from the search page.
● You can view the parent equipment as a link in the Parent field. You can also sort based on this field.
● You can use Add Fields to display additional fields in the equipment list view.
● If you do not find the recently updated/created equipment in the equipment search list, a message is
displayed to check the equipment in an alternate equipment list.

5.17 State Transitions

A business object such as a model, or an equipment undergoes state transitions during its creation and
maintenance in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

The following diagram illustrates these state transitions:

Business objects such as models and items of equipment move to an unpublished state as soon as you create
either a new model or a new item of equipment. You do not have to save these business objects explicitly.
However, business entities such as instructions and announcements move to unpublished state on explicit
save. When you further publish these business objects or business entities they move to a published state.

When the business object or entity is in its published state, and you select new revision the business object or
business entity moves from published state to the in revision state. You can toggle between published state and
the in revision states by choosing the View Last Published option, and View Last Revision on the UI.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

314 PUBLIC Master Data
You can create further versions of the business object or a business entity from the in revision state by
choosing to publish the business object.

5.18 Creating Revisions and Switching Between Revisions

and Published State

You can create revisions of a business object such as a model, piece of equipment, functional location, system
and so on. Additionally, you can create revisions for business entities such as an instruction, or an
announcement.

Procedure

1. To create a new revision of the business object or the business entity, open the business object or the
business entity in the published state and choose the link New Revision.

System creates the next higher revision than the published state of the business object or the business
entity.
2. To switch from in revision to the last published state of the business object or the business entity, open the
business object or the business entity in the revision state and choose the link View Last Published.
3. If multiple revisions for the business object or the business entity exists and you want to switch from last
published to the last in revision state of the business object or the business entity, open the business
object or the business entity in its published state, choose View Last Revision.

Irrespective of the number of published models and the number of revisions that exist for a business object
or a business entity, SAP Predictive Asset Insights allows you to switch between the last published state or
the last revision of the business object or the business entity.

5.19 Export to Excel

This feature enables you to export the data to an excel for offline reference.

This feature is available on the all the object list pages.

For easier understanding, the document refers to the exporting equipment data to an excel.

1. Choose the Equipment app.

You can view the equipment list page.
2. Choose Export to Excel
There is a predefined set of columns that will be exported to the excel.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Master Data PUBLIC 315
Result

The data is exported to an excel as .xls file.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

316 PUBLIC Master Data
6 Machine Learning Engine

The tiles under Machine Learning Engine on the SAP Fiori launchpad support you in data science tasks.

Overview of Machine Learning Engine

Tile Use

Health Indicator Data Set Configuration [page 317] Configure data sets that you can use as input data when
training and scoring models for equipment health indicators.

Health Indicator Model Management [page 324] Configure models for equipment health indicators, and train
and score them.

Failure Mode Analytics Model Management [page 379] Configure models for failure mode analytics, and train and
score them.

Failure Mode Analytics Validation [page 396] Perform validation tasks to improve failure mode analytics.

Leading Indicators Model Management [page 399] Configure models for leading indicators, and train them.

Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management Create model configurations for failure curve analytics, and
[page 405] train and score them.

6.1 Configuring Data Sets for Equipment Health Indicators

This topic describes how to configure data sets for models used for equipment health indicators.

Prerequisites

The role DataScienceUser or the two roles DataScienceRead and DataScienceWrite are assigned to
your user.

 Note

If the required role or roles are not assigned to your user, you cannot see the application on the launchpad.
Contact your Identity Management Administrator if the role or roles have not been assigned to your user
yet.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 317
Context

You need to configure data sets that you can then use as training input and scoring input for your models for
equipment health indicators.

 Note

Once you have configured a data set and you use this data set in a model, you cannot delete the data set as
long as it is in use.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Health Indicator Data
Set Configuration application.
2. To configure a data set, you can choose between the following options:

○ Configure a new data set based on an existing configuration: Select the base data set and choose
Copy. The new data set contains all settings of the base data set.

○ Configure a new data from scratch: Choose .

The New Data Set Configuration screen is displayed.

3. Fill in all required fields. For more information, see Fields for Configuring a Data Set [page 321].
4. Add features to the data set by choosing Add:

A feature is a combination of a certain indicator group with indicators, an aggregation function, and an
aggregation period. Each feature together with a specified range represents a new column in the data set.

 Note

The maximum number of features that you can add to the data set is limited. This limit is determined
by the way the features are calculated. For more information, see Calculation of Features [page 322].

a. Select the indicators.

Select the indicators that you want to include in the data set such as pressure, temperature, or
humidity. Each indicator belongs to an indicator group.

 Note

Consider the following:

○ Only indicators that have the data type Numeric or NumericFlexible are displayed for the
selection.
○ If the same indicators and indicator groups are displayed multiple times, they belong to
different model templates. For more information about model templates, see Templates [page
262].
○ The included indicator values are within the retention period. The retention period is
maintained for the SAP Internet of Things store and can have a maximum range of 5 years. For
more information, see Create Retention Period for Time Series Data Store.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

318 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 b. Select the aggregation functions.

Select the aggregation functions that need to be executed on the indicators over the aggregation
period. The aggregation functions are provided by SAP Internet of Things. You can choose from the
following functions:

○ COUNT
○ FIRST
○ LAST
○ MIN (minimum)
○ MAX (maximum)
○ SUM
○ AVG (average)
○ STDDEV (standard deviation)
c. Define the aggregation period values:
○ For the aggregation period, enter the time frame within which indicator data are aggregated. The
aggregation period is a multiple of the step size.
○ For the period offset, define how much the aggregation period is moved in the past from a certain
timestamp.

 Example

You set the aggregation period to 2 Days and the period offset to 4 Days. Your timestamp is
October 22nd, 2017 at 1:30 p.m. This means that the aggregation of indicator data begins on the
16th of October at 1:30 p.m. and ends on the 18th of October at 1:30 p.m. (4 days before the
timestamp and 2 days of aggregation).

If you want to use default values for the aggregation period and period offset, activate the Use Default
Values checkbox. The default value of the aggregation period is the value of the step size. The default
value of the period offset is 0, which means that the aggregation period is not moved at all.
d. Specify a range.
With a range, you can exclude values for the aggregation by selecting a minimum and a maximum
value. For all values outside this range, the selected NULL value strategy is applied.

If you want to aggregate all data, activate the No Limits checkbox.

e. Choose OK.

 Note

If you choose Apply, your features are added and the dialog box remains open so that you can
select further features. Once you have selected further features and you choose Apply, the already
added features are ignored and only the new features are added to the feature table.

5. (Only relevant if you decided to include labels in your data set): Configure the label for the data set:
a. Define the lead time.

With the lead time, you define a buffer before the prediction window to react to a failure that might
occur during the prediction window.
b. Specify the prediction window.

With the prediction window, you define the length of the time frame within which a failure can occur in
the future. The prediction window begins when the lead time ends and is a multiple of the step size.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 319
  Example

If you enter 1 Day with 0 as the lead time, the data of the next 24 hours will be looked at. During this
time frame, you can expect a failure.

c. Add notifications or alerts to the data set by choosing Add.

○ For notifications, you can choose from all notifications that are related to your equipment. By
default, all values are selected. If filter values exist, you can also filter the notifications by selecting
a specific status, priority or the header level failure mode (failure mode ID) to which the
notification is assigned.

 Note

Only notifications with a valid malfunction start date are later collected during the model
training and scoring.

○ For alerts, you can choose from alert types that are defined in the Templates application. For more
information, see Adding Alert Types [page 285].

 Note

To use an alert type in a data set, the alert type first needs to be added to an alert type group,
and then the alert type group needs to be assigned to the respective equipment model that is
used in the data set. For more information, see Adding Alert Type Groups and Assigning Alert
Type Groups to a Model.

6. Save your configuration.

Results

Your data set is configured and added to the Data Set Configurations pane.

If you have configured multiple data sets and you want to get information about a specific data set, select the
data set from the Data Set Configurations pane and use the URL of the selected data set to directly link to this
data set.

Related Information

Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

320 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
6.1.1 Fields for Configuring a Data Set

Field Mandatory Description

Name x Enter a name for the data set configura-

tion.

Description - Enter a description for the data set con­

figuration.

Equipment Model x Select the equipment model that you

want to use as basis for the data set.
You can choose from all available equip­
ment models.

Step Size - Select the interval within which indica­

tor data are aggregated for the training
and the scoring. You can choose among
step sizes from 2 Minutes to 1 Year.

Null Values Strategy - Define how to handle missing values in

the data set. You can choose from the
following options:

● Ignore: Ignore NULL values and

leave them as NULL values. You can
use this option for the algorithms
TEC, AFP, and IQR as those algo­
rithms can handle NULL values.
● Replace: Replace NULL values with
different values. The default value
is 0. You can use this option for all
algorithms.
● Remove: Remove rows with NULL
values from the data set. You can
use this option for all algorithms.

For more information about all algo­

rithms, see Algorithms for Equipment
Health Indicators [page 332].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 321
Field Mandatory Description

Labels - Define whether you want to include la­

bels in your data set to predict upcom­
ing failures. A label indicates a failure or
no failure for each row in the data set.
You can choose from the following op­
tions:

● None: No labels are included in the

data set.
● Alerts: Include alerts as failures in
the data set.
● Notifications: Include notifications
as failures in the data set.

 Note
You need to use labeling for the fol­
lowing algorithms of the learner
type CLASSIFICATION:

● Logistic Regression (LOR)

● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
● Automatic Failure Prediction
(AFP)

For more information about these

algorithms, see Algorithms for
Equipment Health Indicators [page
332].

6.1.2 Calculation of Features

Depending on how many features you want to add to a data set, it is important to know how the maximum
number of features is calculated. This topic provides you with an overview of how features are calculated
including examples.

Calculation

The maximum number of features is based on the bucket size per added feature. The bucket size is calculated
by the aggregation period divided by the step size. For the maximum number of features, all bucket sizes are
aggregated over all added features. The allowed maximum sum is 2100.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

322 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Overall, the following calculation applies:

Maximum number of features = (Sum of bucket sizes (aggregation period/step size) over all added
features) < = 2100

This means, depending on the bucket size, you can add more or less features. If you have a bucket size of 1, you
can add 2100 features to the data set. If you have a greater bucket size, you can add less features to the data
set. A bucket size of 2100 only allows you to add one feature to the data set.

Examples

The following examples show you some feature calculations based on different bucket sizes:

Bucket Size = 1

 Example

You have added 200 features with a bucket size of 1 as follows:

Aggregation Pe­ Feature Calcula­ Allowed / Not Al­

riod Step Size Bucket Size Added Features tion lowed

2 Minutes 2 Minutes (2/2) = 1 200 (1x200) = 200 Allowed

 Example

You have added 500 features with a bucket size of 1 as follows:

Aggregation Pe­ Feature Calcula­ Allowed / Not Al­

riod Step Size Bucket Size Added Features tion lowed

1 Day 1 Day (1/1) = 1 500 (1x500) = 500 Allowed

Bucket Size = 1 and > 1

 Example

You have added 650 features with a bucket size of 1 and greater than 1 as follows:

Aggregation Pe­ Feature Calcula­ Allowed / Not Al­

riod Step Size Bucket Size Added Features tion lowed

18 Hours 1 Hour (18/1) = 18 25 (18x25+1x200) = Allowed

650
1 Hour 1 Hour (1/1)= 1 200

Bucket Size > 1

 Example

You have added 800 features with a bucket size greater than 1 as follows:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 323
 Aggregation Pe­ Feature Calcula­ Allowed / Not Al­
riod Step Size Bucket Size Added Features tion lowed

4 Hours 1 Hour (4/1) = 4 200 (4x200) = 800 Allowed

 Example

You have added 200 features with a bucket size greater than 1 as follows:

Aggregation Pe­ Feature Calcula­ Allowed / Not Al­

riod Step Size Bucket Size Added Features tion lowed

4 Hours 1 Hour (4/1) = 4 200 (4x200+200x10) Not allowed

= 2400
200 Hours 1 Hour (200/1) = 200 10

6.2 Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators

This topic describes how to manage models for equipment health indicators.

Prerequisites

The role DataScienceUser or the two roles DataScienceUser and DataScienceRead are assigned to your
user.

 Note

If the required role or roles are not assigned to your user, you cannot see the application on the launchpad.
Contact your Identity Management Administrator if the role or roles have not been assigned to your user
yet.

Context

To calculate the health status and predict failures for your equipment, you need to configure, train, and score
models in the Health Indicator Model Management application.

Procedure

1. To train and score a model, you first need to configure a model. For more information, see Configuring a
Model [page 325].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

324 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 2. Once you have configured a model, you can train it. For more information, see Training a Model [page 370].
3. Once you have trained a model, you can use the latest trained model to score data. For more information,
see Scoring a Model [page 376].

6.2.1 Configuring a Model

This topic describes how to configure models for equipment health indicators.

Prerequisites

At least one data set has been configured in the Health Indicator Data Set Configuration application.

Context

To train and score a model, you first need to configure a model.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Health Indicator Model
Management application.
2. To configure a model, you can choose between the following options:

○ Configure a new model based on an existing model: Select the base model and choose Copy. The
new model contains all settings of the base model.

○ Configure a new model from scratch: Choose .

The New Model screen is displayed.

3. Fill in all required fields in the General Information and Algorithm sections. For more information, see Fields
for Configuring a Model [page 326].
4. Save your model.

Results

Your model is configured and added to the Models pane.

If you have configured multiple models and you want to get information about a specific model, select the
model from the Models pane and use the URL of the selected model to directly link to this model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 325
Related Information

Training a Model [page 370]

6.2.1.1 Fields for Configuring a Model

General Information

Field Mandatory Description

Model Name x Enter a name for the model.

Description - Enter a description for the model.

Tags - Add tags to the model that you can

later use to filter and organize your
models.

To add a tag, enter a value for the tag

and press ENTER .

 Note
You can use the following charac­
ters:

● Uppercase or lowercase letters

from a to z
● Numbers
● Hyphens
● Underscores

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

326 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Field Mandatory Description

Training Input x Select the data set that you want to use
to train the model. You can choose from
all configured data sets.

To view details about the selected data

set, choose . The data set with its

details is then displayed in the Health
Indicator Data Set Configuration appli­
cation in a new tab.

Below the selected data set, the equip­

ment model for the data set including
all related equipment is displayed. You
can filter the equipment by choosing

. To delete filters, you can delete

each filter individually or delete all fil-

ters together by choosing .

Scoring Input x Select the data set that you want to use
to score the model. You can use the pre­
selected data set from the training in­
put or select a different data set and
choose from all configured data sets.

 Note
The data set is only preselected
when you configure a new model,
not when you edit or copy a model.

To view details about the selected data

set, choose . The data set with its

details is then displayed in the Health
Indicator Data Set Configuration appli­
cation in a new tab.

Below the selected data set, the equip­

ment model for the data set including
all related equipment is displayed. You
can filter the equipment by choosing

. To delete filters, you can delete

each filter individually or delete all fil-

ters together by choosing .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 327
Field Mandatory Description

Independent Variables x Select the variables that you want to

use as the column names for the model
input. The independent variables are
derived from the selected indicators
and aggregation functions of the config-
ured data set.

You can select each independent varia­

ble individually or select all available in­
dependent variables together by choos­
ing . To clear the selection, choose

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

328 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Algorithm

Field Mandatory Description

Algorithm Name x Select the algorithm that you want to

use to train and score the model. You
can choose from the following prede­
fined algorithms:

● Earth Mover’s Distance (EMD)

Distance-based failure analysis us­
ing Earth Mover’s Distance
● Logistic Regression (LOR)
Logistic Regression for Failure Pre­
diction
● One Class Support Vector Machine
(SVM)
One-Class Support Vector Machine
for anomaly detection
● Multivariate Autoregression (MAR)
Anomaly detection using Multivari­
ate Autoregression
● Principal Component Analysis
(PCA)
Anomaly detection with Principal
Component Analysis
● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
Failure prediction using Tree En­
semble Classifier
● Interquartile Range (IQR)
Anomaly detection using Inter­
quartile Range
● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
Failure prediction using Automatic
Failure Prediction
● Automatic Anomaly Detection
(AAD)
Anomaly detection using Auto­
matic Anomaly Detection

For more information about the algo­

rithms, see Algorithms for Equipment
Health Indicators [page 332].

Namespace x Displays the namespace of the selected

algorithm in which the model is created.
The namespace for all predefined algo­
rithms is com.sap.iot.mle.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 329
Field Mandatory Description

Learner Type x Displays the type of the selected algo­

rithm. Depending on the algorithm you
have selected, one of the following
learner types is displayed:

● CLASSIFICATION
This learner type is used to predict
a category, for example, to classify
between good and defective.
Dependent variable: Mandatory
● REGRESSION
This learner type is used to predict
a value, for example, a health
score.
Dependent variable: Mandatory
● SURVIVAL
This learner type is used to predict
the expected length of time until a
certain event, such as the break­
down of a piece of equipment, will
happen.
Dependent variable: Mandatory
● RULES
This learner type is used to include
rules in the machine learning proc­
ess.
Dependent variable: Not allowed
● UNSUPERVISED
This learner type is used to organ­
ize data or to describe its struc­
ture.
Dependent variable: Not allowed
● OTHER
Dependent variable: Optional

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

330 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Field Mandatory Description

Dependent Variable - Select the variable or attribute that you

want to train and score on. The depend­
ent variables are derived from the se­
lected indicators and aggregation func­
tions of the configured data set.

 Note
Depending on the algorithm that
you have selected, this field is dis­
played or hidden.

 Note
The dependent variable must differ
from the independent variables.

<Algorithm> Parameters - Displays the parameters of the selected

algorithm with their default values. For
more information about the parameters
of each algorithm, see Algorithm-Spe­
cific Parameters [page 350].

You can use the predefined values of

the parameters or overwrite the values.
To define a new value, enter the value
and press ENTER .

 Note
If you have selected the algorithms
Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
or Automatic Anomaly Detection
(AAD), no parameters are dis­
played. These algorithms find the
most suitable parameters and val­
ues for the provided data set in the
background.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 331
Field Mandatory Description

Output Mappings x Displays the outputs of the selected al­

gorithm. For more information about
the outputs of each algorithm, see Al­
gorithm-Specific Outputs [page 366].

Select an indicator for an output. Each

indicator belongs to an indicator group.

 Note
Consider the following:

● You need to select an indicator

for at least one output.
● Only indicators that meet all
the following requirements are
displayed for the selection:
○ The indicators have the
data type Numeric.
○ The indicator and the out­
put have the same dimen­
sion or the output has the
dimension ANY.

6.2.1.2 Algorithms for Equipment Health Indicators

Anomaly Detection with Principal Component Analysis

Use Case

Before you explore the details of anomaly detection with principal component analysis (PCA), you should first
know when to use this algorithm. A typical use case would be the following:

 Example

A railway operator uses sensors in locomotives. Four motors each have four temperature sensors. If the
motors are working correctly, all 16 sensors send data about a synchronous increase or decrease of
temperature. PCA notes when this behavior changes. You would use this algorithm to monitor this behavior
and to detect if sensors send temperature data that differ from other sensors, which might indicate that a
motor is damaged and needs to be maintained.

For more information, see Anomaly Detection with Principal Component Analysis (PCA) [page 336].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

332 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Distance-Based Failure Analysis Using Earth Mover’s Distance

Use Case

Before you explore the details of distance-based failure analysis using earth mover’s distance (EMD) as known
in computer science,(also known as the Wasserstein metric in mathematics), you should first know when to
use this algorithm. A typical use case would be the following:

 Example

An airplane contains electric devices that have batteries inside. These electric devices are equipped with at
least two sensors that send data. Sensor A sends data about measurements of electric current, sensor B
sends data about voltage measurements. An electric device could also have a sensor C that sends data
about temperature measurements. The data sent by the three sensors not only depends on the electric
device itself, but also on other factors that affect the electric device and its batteries. These factors could
be the weather conditions at heights of several kilometers, how often the device is used in the cockpit,
under which conditions the pilot uses the device, and so on. It is therefore normal that data sent from the
three sensors might vary around a certain mean score. The data from each sensor can be visualized in a
one-dimensional histogram. For multidimensional visualizations, scatterplots are used. This visualization is
like a fingerprint of each battery in the airplane. To compare the sensor data of different batteries without
looking at and comparing each visualization, a distance measure for probability distributions is needed.
One of these measures is the Wasserstein metric, or EMD. It can be used to measure deviation from a
known good reference fingerprint of a battery, or to measure differences between several batteries of the
same type, for example.

For more information, see Distance-Based Failure Analysis Using Earth Mover’s Distance (EMD) [page 338].

Anomaly Detection Using Multivariate Autoregression

Use Case

The algorithm for multivariate autoregression (MAR) can detect dependencies between different kinds of
sensors even if the influence of one sensor by another one is delayed over time.

 Example

An example might be the changes in the outflow temperature of a system, which after a while is also
reflected in the inflow temperature of a downstream system. MAR can handle different kinds of sensor
values, and autonomously ranks their influence on each other. The algorithm can therefore handle noisy or
random signals.

MAR produces good results if abnormal behavior is detected for systems with various different kinds of
sensors that (partly) depend on and influence each other.

For more information, see Anomaly Detection Using Multivariate Autoregression (MAR) [page 340].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 333
Failure Prediction Using Tree Ensemble Classifier

Use Case
The TEC algorithm can be used whenever the following applies:

● The goal is to predict failure of a system under investigation.

● Historical sensor data or feature records for the system or a similarly behaving system are available.
● Feature records include labels for each record whether or not the record corresponds to a failing system.

 Example

For a rotating engine, sensors measure vibrations at different positions of the housing. A frequency analysis
of these vibrations has been performed and, as a result, an SAP HANA fusion view (only valid for on-
premise edition) has been created. This fusion view contains several calculated columns per sensor that
express the strength of certain characteristic frequencies of the equipment within the vibrations. From an
algorithm point of view, these columns represent the features. In this setting, the TEC algorithm can be
used to learn to distinguish unhealthy from healthy vibration patterns from historical labeled data. That is
data that includes one additional column specifying whether the system was healthy or not at the time in
the past when the vibrations were observed. The model created by TEC can then be applied to detect
engine problems early on.

For more information, see Failure Prediction Using Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC) [page 342].

One Class Support Vector Machine (SVM) for Anomaly Detection

Use Case
Before you explore the details of SVM, you should first know when to use this algorithm. A typical use case
would be the following:

 Example

In an aircraft, the turbines’ condition is monitored using sensors measuring values such as temperature
and air flow. Sensor records from flights where the aircraft’s turbines are known to have worked correctly
are used to train One-Class-SVM models for different operating modes such as take-off, landing, or
constant cruise. Using these models, it can be told whether an aircraft turbine of the former type is running
properly, needs repair, or maybe even needs to be replaced.

For more information, see One Class Support Vector Machine (SVM) for Anomaly Detection [page 344].

Logistic Regression for Failure Prediction

Use Case
Logistic regression (LOR) for failure prediction can be used whenever the following applies:

● The goal is to predict failure of a system under investigation.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

334 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 ● Historical sensor data or feature records for the system or a similarly behaving system are available.
● Feature records include labels for each record whether or not the record corresponds to a failing system.

 Example

The job of an ATS box is to capture and burn off (regenerate) the particulate matter (soot) in the engine’s
exhaust gas. When an ATS box is replaced, a primary failed part is identified which may either be the ATS
box itself or an upstream component. In this case, the logistic regression can be used to predict if the
process is still okay or near to failing, and what the main influencers are, that is if the ATS box or some
upstream componentis the problem.

For more information, see Logistic Regression (LOR) for Failure Prediction [page 345].

Anomaly Detection Using Interquartile Range

Use Case

Before you explore the details of anomaly detection using interquartile range (IQR), you should first know when
to use this algorithm. A typical use case would be the following:

 Example

You want to monitor a motor using a sensor measuring its temperature. If the motor is too cold, it is not
operating effienctly and an overheating of the motor should also be avoided. The algorithm automatically
determines thresholds for the normal range of the sensor and can identify issues based on the sensor
being out of range.

For more information, see Anomaly Detection Using Interquartile Range (IQR) [page 347].

Failure Prediction Using Automatic Failure Prediction

Use Case

Failure prediction using automatic failure prediction (AFP) can be used whenever the following applies:

● The goal is to predict failure of a system under investigation.

● Historical sensor data or feature records for the system or a similarly behaving system are available.
● Feature records include labels for each record whether or not the record corresponds to a failing system.

 Example

You monitor a pump within a production process by the use of multiple sensors such as pressure, voltage,
and temperature. By using automatic failure prediction, you create a model that uses data from the
different sensors to predict breakdowns of the pump.

For more information, see Failure Prediction Using Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP) [page 348].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 335
Anomaly Detection Using Automatic Anomaly Detection

Use Case

Before you explore the details of anomaly detection using automatic anomaly detection (AAD), you should first
know when to use this algorithm. A typical use case would be the following:

 Example

You want to monitor a welding robot using multiple sensors measuring its current, voltage, and resistance.
By using the algorithm, an anomaly detection model is created from the sensors. By monitoring the
behavior of the sensors, anomalies are detected that can indicate a potential failure.

For more information, see Anomaly Detection Using Automatic Anomaly Detection (AAD) [page 349].

6.2.1.2.1 Anomaly Detection with Principal Component

Analysis (PCA)

The principal component analysis (PCA) can be used to detect anomalies in mulitvariate sensor data.

What Does the Algorithm Do?

The algorithm basically transforms data readings from an existing coordinate system into a new coordinate
system. This concept is depicted in the following sequence of graphics:

1.

2.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

336 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 3.

The closer data readings are to the center of the new coordinate system, the closer these readings are to an
optimum value.

Model Configuration

To configure a model for anomaly detection with PCA, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

Do not use all observations for model training. Rather, use observations from known equipment with normal
behavior for the model training instead of random observations where possible. A small amount of abnormal
data normally has no effect on the model performance.

This algorithm cannot handle missing values in a data set. If your data set contains such NULL values, you
cannot train and score your model. To train and score your model, you need to remove or replace existing NULL
values by using the NULL value strategy. For more information, see Fields for Configuring a Data Set [page 321].

Model Training

Model training for PCA means calculating the eigenvectors and eigenvalues of the covariance matrix of the
training data.

 Note

The model size depends only on the number of dimensions (that is, the sensors) that go into the model, not
on the number of training examples.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 337
Depending on the individual use case, PCA can be applied to any kind of reading, be it one-second-interval
readings of sensors or aggregated sensor readings.

To train a model for anomaly detection with PCA, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

After a training, a model summary of the trained model is displayed in the Trainings table. For more
information, see Model Summary [page 374].

Model Scoring

Anomaly Score
The anomaly score is calculated using the Mahalanobis distance between a sensor reading and the mean of all
readings, which is the center of the transformed coordinate system.

Smoothing
In some cases, anomaly scores can be high but only for a few seconds. This phenomenon is not usually critical,
and can represent normal behavior (if a machine is started, for example). Smoothing algorithms added to the
anomaly score prevent anomaly alerts caused by sporadic anomalies. The smoothing of algorithms is done
using the running median.

To score a model for anomaly detection with PCA, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

6.2.1.2.2 Distance-Based Failure Analysis Using Earth

Mover’s Distance (EMD)

What Does the Algorithm Do?

To explain what the algorithm does, we can use a figurative example: The algorithm solves a linear optimization
problem, in this case a transportation problem. Suppose you want to transform a sandcastle A into a
sandcastle B. Both sandcastles consist of the same amount of sand. EMD measures how much sand you have
to transport across which distance. The algorithm compares the locations of both sandcastles: Are they
located close to each other, or does the sand have to be transported a long way from sandcastle A to
sandcastle B? The algorithm also compares how the two sandcastles are shaped, for example. If they have a
similar shape, no or little rebuilding work needs to be done. If their shapes differ significantly, considerable
effort is required to rebuild sandcastle A so that it looks like sandcastle B. The conclusion is that the closer and
more similar the sandcastles are, the lower the work effort and transport costs are.

Similar to the example, the histogram of a battery A, for example, is compared to the histogram of a well
functioning battery B. The lower the score calculated with EMD, the more similar the histograms are (battery A
is working like battery B). The higher the score, the more different the histgrams are.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

338 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Model Configuration

To configure a model for distance-based failure analysis using earth mover's distance, use the Health Indicator
Model Management application. For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators
[page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

Before training and scoring, data scientists need to configure a model. In the configuration, they need to
specify the names of one or more columns that contain values by which the data need to be grouped. These
grouping columns are used for scoring. You can define as many grouping columns as required for your
business case. The grouping columns are included in scoring only. In training, the grouping columns are used
to exclude these columns from training.

This algorithm cannot handle missing values in a data set. If your data set contains such NULL values, you
cannot train and score your model. To train and score your model, you need to remove or replace existing NULL
values by using the NULL value strategy. For more information, see Fields for Configuring a Data Set [page 321].

Model Training

To train a model for distance-based failure analysis using earth mover's distance, use the Health Indicator
Model Management application. For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators
[page 324].

After a training, a model summary of the trained model is displayed in the Trainings table. For more
information, see Model Summary [page 374].

Model Scoring

To score a model for distance-based failure analysis using earth mover's distance, use the Health Indicator
Model Management application. For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators
[page 324].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 339
6.2.1.2.3 Anomaly Detection Using Multivariate
Autoregression (MAR)

A multivariate autoregressive model can be used to detect anomalies in a univariate or multivariate series of
sensor data records varying over time.

What Does the Algorithm Do?

Based on the training data, which in this case is a time series of data records, the algorithm trains a model. If
trained on regular data (data without anomalies present), the model is capable of learning the regular behavior
of a system. Based on a window of recently observed data records, the model can then predict the data record
for one time step into the future. Once the actual values for this point in time are available, the model prediction
can be compared to the actual observations. An anomaly score is then assigned based on the distance
between the prediction and the observation. If large deviations appear, this can indicate abnormal behavior of
the underlying system.

The following graphic illustrates the predictive model for one input variable:

 Note

The implemented algorithm computes one multivariate predictive model per input variable, and aggregates
the deviations for the equipment from each model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

340 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Model Configuration

To configure a model for multivariate autoregression, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

This algorithm cannot handle missing values in a data set. If your data set contains such NULL values, you
cannot train and score your model. To train and score your model, you need to remove or replace existing NULL
values by using the NULL value strategy. For more information, see Fields for Configuring a Data Set [page 321].

For a correct training and scoring, the number of records in the provided data time series used for training
needs to be at least window.size +1 per group (typically per piece of equipment).

 Tip

For more robust models and, thus, more reliable anomaly scores, we recommend using a training data size
at least one or two orders of magnitude larger than the window size.

 Tip

We generally recommend creating one distinct model per group of input variables for which a tight,
time-varying dependency can be assumed, rather than modeling a joint model of all input variables.

 Example

An example of a tightly coupled group of input variables could be battery voltage and charging current
for the system of a rechargeable battery.

 Tip

If it is clear from the system context that the sensor dependency is directed (the battery voltage is
influenced by the charging current, but the charging current is typically not directly influenced by
battery voltage), we recommend specifying prediction targets (battery voltage in this example)
manually using the corresponding model-specific parameters.

Model Training

To train an MAR model, the provided data is used to fit one autoregressive multivariate linear model for each
target variable. By default, each provided input variable is also a target variable, but the model-specific
parameter target.columns can be used to select only specific input variables as target variables.

To train a model for multivariate autoregression, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 341
After a training, a model summary of the trained model is displayed in the Trainings table. For more
information, see Model Summary [page 374].

Model Scoring

Scoring is applied to a series of window.size + 1 consecutive records referring to the order of their
timestamps. The first n of these records are used as input for the linear models established during training to
produce predictions for each target of the record number window.size + 1.

Each prediction is compared to the actual values of the first window.size + 1 record. An anomaly score is
derived based on the distance between predictions and observations, and on other influencing factors such as
model uncertainty.

To score a model for multivariate autoregression, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

6.2.1.2.4 Failure Prediction Using Tree Ensemble Classifier

(TEC)

Based on records of sensor data, a tree ensemble model can learn to predict future system failures from past
failures.

What Does the Algorithm Do?

The algorithm trains a boosted decision tree model, which is a series of decision trees, that encodes
characteristics of data records with regards to failure. Based on the values of features of a given data record,
the model is trained in such a way that each tree can decide which set of record groups the given record
belongs to. An appropriate weight is then assigned to each record, indicating evidence for or against the record
belonging to a failing system. The model aggregates the evidence weights of all trees and outputs a probability
of failure. Thus, the model reflects the certainty that the given data record is an indication of a failing system.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

342 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
The following graphic illustrates the tree ensemble model created by the algorithm:

Model Configuration

To configure a model for the tree ensemble classifier, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

This algorithm is a supervised learning method. This means that it requires training data records featuring a
column that indicates for each record whether a record belongs to a regular or a failing system.

Model Training

Model training for TEC means using the provided historical training data to learn the following:

● A series of decision trees, including decision thresholds

● Evidence weights
● An appropriate mapping of weights to probabilities of failure that represents the training data well

Together, these make up the model as referred to in the context of this algorithm.

The aim is to find a model that well represents the data set used for training. Internally, this algorithm splits the
data into a train and test set, using 90% of the data for the training. After a training, quality metrics calculated

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 343
on the test set are displayed in a model summary in the Trainings table. For more information, see Model
Summary [page 374].

The contribution of each feature (independent variable) of a trained model, i.e the feature importance, can be
found in the Log Summary in the Trainings table.

To train a model for the tree ensemble classifier, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Model Scoring

To score a record, the TEC model determines for each decision tree the group that the record belongs to based
on the feature values of this record. Next, the assigned evidence weights of each tree are aggregated for this
record.

 Example

Referring to the graphic above, these weights could be -41.83 (taken from group 1.4 of tree 1), and -99.04
(taken from group 2.2 of tree 2). Which weights of a tree are aggregated depends on the decision result of a
tree.

To score a model for the tree ensemble classifier, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

6.2.1.2.5 One Class Support Vector Machine (SVM) for

Anomaly Detection

What Does the Algorithm Do?

In order to identify anomalous behaviour of equipment, the current sensor values of this particular piece of
equipment are compared with sensor values of a period when the equipment is working correctly. This is done
by training a model using sensor data from when the equipment was working correctly, which is then used to
classify the current sensor values as normal or anomalous accordingly.

An n-dimensional set of data points, considered as normal by the user, is supplied to the algorithm. The
algorithm classifies the data by spatially separating the region containing the set from the rest of the n-
dimensional space. This, in most of the cases, is done by finding a hyperplane in a higher dimensional space,
which is enclosing the data when projecting back to the initial n dimensions. The hyperplane is characterized
by so-called support vectors, lying at the edge of enclosed region of as normal classified data. If a new data
point needs to be classified, the distance between the data point and any of the support vectors is computed.
From this, it can uniquely be told whether the data point lies within the region of normal data, so is a member of
the learned 'normal' class, or is anomalous.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

344 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Model Configuration

To configure a model for this type of anomaly detection, use the Health Indicator Model Management
application. For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

This algorithm cannot handle missing values in a data set. If your data set contains such NULL values, you
cannot train and score your model. To train and score your model, you need to remove or replace existing NULL
values by using the NULL value strategy. For more information, see Fields for Configuring a Data Set [page 321].

Model Training

To train a model for this type of anomaly detection, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

 Note

The Support Vector Machine algorithm is sensitive to the number of rows in training data. The run time of
the training methods exponentially grows with the number of rows of input data. While for a data set with
ten columns and 10k rows training takes about 15 sec, training on a table with ten columns and 100k rows
already takes more than half an hour. On the other hand, SVM has performance advantage in case of
increased number of features, which is columns.

After a training, a model summary of the trained model is displayed in the Trainings table. For more
information, see Model Summary [page 374].

Model Scoring

To score a model for this type of anomaly detection, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

6.2.1.2.6 Logistic Regression (LOR) for Failure Prediction

What Does the Algorithm Do?

This algorithm uses logistic regression to perform supervised binary classification, meaning the algorithm is
able to predict either 0 or 1 corresponding to a healthy or unhealthy state. Logistic regression, similar to Tree

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 345
Ensemble Classification can be used to either predict the likeliness of an failure, or the need for maintenance,
based on historic sensor data as well as information indicating if there was a maintenance or failure, or not.

The algorithm fits a multi-dimensional logistic function to the input data. For this, a label column, specified as
dependent, is required containing only the values 0 and 1. The logistic function gets fitted to these values, using
the predictor values as arguments. In scoring, the value of the fitted function obtained during training is
computed. This value is interpreted as failure probability. Each data with a score larger than the cutoff is
classified as 1, otherwise 0.

Model Configuration

To configure a model using LOR, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For more
information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

This algorithm cannot handle missing values in a data set. If your data set contains such NULL values, you
cannot train and score your model. To train and score your model, you need to remove or replace existing NULL
values by using the NULL value strategy. For more information, see Fields for Configuring a Data Set [page 321].

Model Training

Internally, this algorithm splits the data into a train and test set, using 90% of the data for the training. After a
training, quality metrics calculated on the test set are displayed in a model summary in the Trainings table. For
more information, see Model Summary [page 374].

To train a model using LOR, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For more information, see
Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Model Scoring

To score a model using LOR, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For more information,
see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

346 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
6.2.1.2.7 Anomaly Detection Using Interquartile Range
(IQR)

What Does the Algorithm Do?

This algorithm uses the interquartile range test for determining anomalies on univariate timeseries. During the
training, the normal range is determined for each piece of equipment by using the interquartile range (upper
quartile – lower quartile). The interval between lower quartile – n * inter-quartile range and upper quartile + n *
interquartile range is considered as the normal range. All data points in this range receive scores between 0
and 1. All data points outside that range receive scores greater than 1.

Model Configuration

To configure a model for anomaly detection using IQR, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

Only one independent variable may be used in this algorithm.

Model Training

To train a model for anomaly detection using IQR, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

After a training, a model summary of the trained model is displayed in the Trainings table. For more
information, see Model Summary [page 374].

Model Scoring

To score a model for anomaly detection using IQR, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

 Note

If the trained model is based on a constant value, a deviating value from this constant receives an infinite
value in scoring. In this case, the value is set to MAX_FLOAT.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 347
6.2.1.2.8 Failure Prediction Using Automatic Failure
Prediction (AFP)

Based on records of sensor data, a tree ensemble model can learn to predict future system failures from past
failures.

What Does the Algorithm Do?

This algorithm uses a black box approach to learn a classification model for failure prediction.

Model Configuration

To configure a model for failure prediction using AFP, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

This algorithm is a supervised learning method. This means that it requires training data records featuring a
column that indicates whether each record belongs to a regular or a failing system.

Model Training

Model training for AFP means using the provided historical training data to learn a classification model for
failure prediction.

The aim is to find a model that well represents the data set used for training. Internally, this algorithm splits the
data into a train and test set, using 90% of the data for the training. After a training, quality metrics calculated
on the test set are displayed in a model summary in the Trainings table. The algorithm may also generate
additional features (independent variables) internally based on the training data. After the training, these may
also appear in the model summary. For more information about the model summary, see Model Summary
[page 374].

To train a model for failure prediction using AFP, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Model Scoring

To score a record, the model found in the training is applied to the scoring data.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

348 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
The result contains information on whether the equipment is likely to fail and the probability of failure.

This algorithm may also generate additional features (independent variables) internally based on the scoring
data. After the scoring, these may appear in the log summary.

To score a model for failure prediction using AFP, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

6.2.1.2.9 Anomaly Detection Using Automatic Anomaly

Detection (AAD)

What Does the Algorithm Do?

This algorithm trains and scores multiple anomaly detection models and compares their score distribution to
find the most appropriate unsupervised anomaly detection model. The model that best separates anomalies
from normal behavior is considered the most appropriate unsupervised anomaly detection model.

The following graphic illustrates the difference between an inappropriate and appropriate anomaly detection
model. In the diagram of the inappropriate anomaly detection model, the scores are overlapped and a
separation of anomalies from normal scores is not possible. In the diagram of the appropriate anomaly
detection model, the scores are split and anomalies can be separated from normal data:

Model Configuration

To configure a model for anomaly detection using AAD, use the Health Indicator Model Management
application. For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 349
Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

For the model training, use training data that includes normal data and anomalies. The percentage of the
included anomalies is assumed to be a maximum of 10%.

This algorithm cannot handle missing values in a data set. If your data set contains such NULL values, you
cannot train and score your model. To train and score your model, you need to remove or replace existing NULL
values by using the NULL value strategy. For more information, see Fields for Configuring a Data Set [page 321].

Model Training

To train a model for anomaly detection using AAD, use the Health Indicator Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

After a training, a model summary of the trained model is displayed in the Trainings table. For more
information, see Model Summary [page 374].

Model Scoring

To score a model for anomaly detection using AAD, use the Health Indicator Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324].

6.2.1.3 Algorithm-Specific Parameters

Depending on the algorithm that you have selected, different parameters are displayed. The following sections
provide you with an overview of the parameters with their descriptions and default values, sorted by the
algorithms:

 Note

If you have selected the algorithms Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP) or Automatic Anomaly Detection
(AAD), no parameters are displayed. These algorithms find the most suitable parameters and values for the
provided data set in the background.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

350 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Earth Mover’s Distance (EMD)

Parameter Description

number.of.cores Number of cores to use during scoring

Choosing a number higher than 1 to utilize multi-threaded

implementation is recommended only if you have large
enough data and the performance of your runtime or mem­
ory is critical for your use case:

● Multi-threaded implementation pays off with respect to

training runtime, for example, for data sets of 10,000
rows and 25 columns, or for data sets of 100,000 rows
and 10 columns. Therefore, multi-threaded implementa­
tion can make sense only for similarly sized or larger
training data sets.
● However, while the training runtime decreases signifi-
cantly, the parallel implementation causes slightly in­
creased scoring runtimes. For this reason, parallel im­
plementation is recommended only if you consider the
performance of training jobs, which are asynchronous
tasks, to be performance-critical for your use case, de­
pending also on how ofteperformance of your runtime
or memory is not considered critical, the single-
threaded implementation is recommended
(number.of.cores = 1).

The default value is 1.

bins The number of bins to use in each dimension to generate the

histogram. By default, bins are created such that the mini­
mum and maximum reading of each sensor come to lie at
the center of the lowest or highest bin respectively, and line­
arly equi-spaced bins are created in each dimension.

Positive integer for discretization that is not zero. The default

value is 20.

group.by Column name of data to be excluded in contingency table

computation. It contains the name(s) of the column(s) used
for grouping data. This parameter is mandatory.

The default value is Equipment.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 351
Parameter Description

normalizer.type The type of normalizer that should be applied to the scores

calculated by the algorithm. The default value is quantile. Al­
lowed values are:

● Quantile (default)
Internally calculates an effective threshold value based
on the training data. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● Threshold
Uses the given value. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● None
Does not do any normalization of the values. Only raw
scores are generated.

 Note
For more information about the normalization of scores,
see Normalization of Scores [page 363].

normalizer.value The value used for the normalization. For quantile, a value
between 0 and 1 is valid; for threshold, a value larger than 0.

The default value is 0.99.

alignment.interval The parameter is used by the algorithm to bucket given

timestamps into intervals that are then treated as one group
of data. The value is given in minutes where -0 (default)
means that no alignment is done, and the timestamps are
treated as they are. A value of 1 means, that all timestamps
are bucketed into 1-minute intervals, meaning timestamps of
the same minutes are grouped together. After that, based on
the updated timestamps, the distribution of each timestamp
group is calculated and compared with the distribution of a
normal state of the equipment.

The default value is 0.

 Note
To use this parameter, enter Timestamp as a value in
the group.by parameter in addition to a value in the
alignment.interval parameter. Otherwise, the
scores are not calculated by the
alignment.interval parameter.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

352 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Logistic Regression (LOR)

Parameter Description

cutoff Cutoff for the binary classes. Data with score below is classi­
fied 0, above is classified 1.

The default value is 0.5.

One Class Support Vector Machine (SVM)

Parameter Description

nu This parameter is an upper bound on the fraction of margin

errors and a lower bound of the fraction of support vectors
relative to the total number of training samples. Nu specifies
the fraction of training data to be misclassified during train­
ing. Therefore, you should choose nu equal to the fraction of
data you assume to be anomalous.

The default value is 0.01.

 Note
As nu specifies the fraction of training samples which
you assume to be outliers and, for
normalizer.type, normalizer.value speci­
fies the fraction of training samples which you assume
to be normal, these two values should always add up to
one. If you set nu to 0.01, you are advised to set the
normalizer.value to 0.99 if you use the
normalizer.type quantile.

gamma This parameter controls the influence of individual training

samples, which effects the smoothness of the model. A low
value improves the smoothness and generalizability of the
model. A high value reduces it, but makes the model tighter-
fitted to the training data.

The default value is 0.1.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 353
Parameter Description

number.of.cores Number of cores to use during scoring

Choosing a number higher than 1 to utilize multi-threaded

implementation is recommended only if you have large
enough data and the performance of your runtime or mem­
ory is critical for your use case:

● Multi-threaded implementation pays off with respect to

training runtime, for example, for data sets of 10,000
rows and 25 columns, or for data sets of 100,000 rows
and 10 columns. Therefore, multi-threaded implementa­
tion can make sense only for similarly sized or larger
training data sets.
● However, while the training runtime decreases signifi-
cantly, the parallel implementation causes slightly in­
creased scoring runtimes. For this reason, parallel im­
plementation is recommended only if you consider the
performance of training jobs, which are asynchronous
tasks, to be performance-critical for your use case, de­
pending also on how ofteperformance of your runtime
or memory is not considered critical, the single-
threaded implementation is recommended
(number.of.cores = 1).

The default value is 1.

normalizer.type The type of normalizer that should be applied to the scores

calculated by the algorithm. The default value is quantile. Al­
lowed values are:

● Quantile (default)
Internally calculates an effective threshold value based
on the training data. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● Threshold
Uses the given value. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● None
Does not do any normalization of the values. Only raw
scores are generated.

 Note
For more information about the normalization of scores,
see Normalization of Scores [page 363].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

354 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Parameter Description

normalizer.value The value used for the normalization. For quantile, a value
between 0 and 1 is valid; for threshold, a value larger than 0.

The default value is 0.99.

 Note
As nu specifies the fraction of training samples which
you assume to be outliers and, for
normalizer.type, normalizer.value speci­
fies the fraction of training samples which you assume
to be normal, these two values should always add up to
one. If you set nu to 0.01, you are advised to set the
normalizer.value to 0.99 if you use the
normalizer.type quantile.

Multivariate Autoregression (MAR)

Parameter Description

target.columns Contains the columns for which a linear regression should be

fitted (default: NULL/empty). Depending on the input data, it
is necessary to specify at least one target column if the
window_size parameter is 0.

 Note
You need to enter the exact name of the columns be­
cause this field is case-sensitive.

window.size Contains the number of former observations that are taken

into account to fit a regression. Windowing is only necessary
if each row contains only the observations from one particu­
lar time.

 Note
If windowing is applied, the algorithm uses the data of
the window_size parameter former rows (based on
the timestamp). In order to ensure a proper functional­
ity, an equidistance is recommended.

The default value is 10.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 355
Parameter Description

weight.by.uncertainty If set to TRUE, the deviation between prediction and observa­

tion is discounted by the quality of the underlying model for
this particular target variable. The underlying idea is to incor­
perate the predictive power of the trained regressions. If a
model for one particular target variable does not produce re­
liable predictions, the influence of this particular deviation
should be less than the deviation produced by a more accu­
rate regression.

The default value is TRUE.

smoothing.window.size Determines how to smooth raw scores calculated by the al­

gorithm. The permitted value range is odd numbers greater
than 0.

The default value is 1.

If you enter a number greater than 1, the scores are

smoothed using a running median with a window size given
by the parameter.

normalizer.type The type of normalizer that should be applied to the scores

calculated by the algorithm. The default value is quantile. Al­
lowed values are:

● Quantile (default)
Internally calculates an effective threshold value based
on the training data
● Threshold
Internally calculates an effective threshold value based
on the training data. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● None
Does not do any normalization of the values. Only raw
scores are generated.

 Note
For more information about the normalization of scores,
see Normalization of Scores [page 363].

normalizer.value The value that is used for the normalization. For quantile, a
value between 0 and 1 is valid; for threshold, a value larger
than 0.

The default value is 0.99.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

356 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Principal Component Analysis (PCA)

Parameter Description

group.by Name(s) of the column(s) used for grouping data rows. This
parameter is mandatory.

The default value is Equipment.

sort.by Name(s) of the column(s) used for sorting data rows. This
parameter is mandatory.

The default value is Timestamp.

smoothing.window.size Integer specifying the width of the running median window.

 Note
This value must be an odd number.

Use smoothing.window = 3 for minimal robust smooth­

ing so that isolated outliers are eliminated.

The default value is 1.

window.size Contains the number of former observations that are taken

into account to fit a regression. Windowing is only necessary
if each row contains only the observations from one particu­
lar time.

 Note
If windowing is applied, the algorithm uses the data of
the window_size parameter former rows (based on
the timestamp). In order to ensure a proper functional­
ity, an equidistance is recommended.

The default value is 0.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 357
Parameter Description

normalizer.type The type of normalizer that should be applied to the scores

calculated by the algorithm. The default value is quantile. Al­
lowed values are:

● Quantile (default)
Internally calculates an effective threshold value based
on the training data. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● Threshold
Uses the given value. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● None
Does not do any normalization of the values. Only raw
scores are generated.

 Note
For more information about the normalization of scores,
see Normalization of Scores [page 363].

normalizer.value The value that is used for the normalization. For quantile, a
value between 0 and 1 is valid; for threshold, a value larger
than 0.

The default value is 0.99.

Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)

Parameter Description

number.of.trees Specifies the number of trees in the ensemble model. In­

creasing the number of trees in the model can yield higher
prediction accuracy, but requires higher computational ef­
fort, and there is the risk that the model will be adjusted too
much to the non-characteristic noise of the specific training
data set (known as overfitting). Permitted value range is in­
teger numbers greater than or equal to 1.

The default value is 20.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

358 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Parameter Description

max.tree.depth Controls the maximum depth of each tree in the ensemble

model. Increasing the maximum tree depth allows you to
build more complex trees that are capable of capturing more
complex relations in the data. On the downside, increasing
the maximum tree depth also increases the risk of building
models that are heavily tuned to the particularities of the
given training data set, including those that are not charac­
teristic of the underlying real-world process. It is generally
recommended to increase the amount of training data when
increasing the maximum tree depth (where possible). Per­
mitted value range is integer numbers greater than or
equal to 1.

The default value is 2.

records.subsampling.ratio Defines the share of records (that is,. rows of the training
data) to be used to train each tree of the ensemble model.
The number of records corresponding to the specified share
is chosen randomly (without replacement) from the training
data set. Specifying a value strictly smaller than 1 for this pa­
rameter can increase the robustness of the model (that is, it
is less likely to overfit) if .number.of.trees is set to a suffi-
ciently large value (problem-dependent) at the same time.
On the downside, a smaller value for this parameter may
lead to lower overall model accuracy and confidence, and
may (indirectly) require higher computational effort due to a
need for larger values for .number.of.trees. Also, a relatively
large training data set may be required for subsampling to
be successful. Permitted value range is numbers greater
than 0 and less than or equal to 1. Note that a value of 1 ef­
fectively means that no subsampling is performed.

The default value is 1.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 359
Parameter Description

features.subsampling.ratio Defines the share of features (that is, columns of the training
data) to be used to train each tree of the ensemble model.
The number of columns corresponding to the specified
share is chosen at random (without replacement) from the
given training data set. Similarly to .records.subsampling.ra­
tio, specifying a value strictly smaller than 1 can be used to
increase the robustness of the model, but may come at thea
price: lower accuracy and model confidence, and choosing a
smaller value for .features.subsampling.ratio may reduce the
ability to capture complex relationships in the data success­
fully. It can be helpful, however, to tune this parameter if the
given data set contains highly correlated features (for exam­
ple, variants obtained through feature engineering). The per­
mitted value range is numbers greater than 0 and less than
or equal to 1. Note that a value of 1 effectively means that no
subsampling is performed.

The default value is 1.

max.weight.contrib.per.leaf Defines how much weight each leaf of a tree may contribute
maximally to the ensemble model. Within the algorithm, this
parameter is used as a threshold to cap xgboost's gradient
step in norm (that is, in absolute length). Choosing a smaller
value for this parameter may help deal with unbalanced data
sets (i.e. data sets where the occurrence of one class is only
a fraction of the occurrence of the other class) by preventing
"highly confident" leaves dominating "less confident" leaves
as a result of sheer sample majority. The permitted value
range is numbers greater than or equal to 0. Note that 0
means that no limit is specified on the maximum weight con­
tribution of each leaf, while every strictly positive number
specifies a weight threshold.

The default value is 0.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

360 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Parameter Description

learning.rate Defines the step size of the updates calculated through each
tree on the ensemble learning objective function. In this spe­
cific algorithm, this parameter can be interpreted as the level
of trust the ensemble model gives to each tree before calcu­
lating the next tree on the score residuals of the previously
calculated trees. Choosing a smaller value will mean that ob­
jective functions of subsequently computed trees will look
more alike and, as a consequence, the ensemble model
tends to feature more trees per problem facade (at the cost
of covering fewer facades if the overall number of trees is not
increased). It is generally recommended to increase num­
ber.of.trees when decreasing learning.rate. Reducing this pa­
rameter can be used to increase number.of.trees when de­
creasing learning.rate. Reducing this parameter can be used
to prevent overfitting, but it comes at the price of typically
requiring a higher number.of.trees to achieve comparable
model accuracy and confidence. The permitted value range
is numbers greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1.

The default value is 0.3.

initial.guess.bias Allows you to introduce a bias into the classifier. This param­
eter serves as the inital guess (score) to which the tree mod­
els are iteratively added. Assuming that result scores (of the
ensemble model) smaller than 0.5 are interpreted as pre­
dicting class '0' and scores greater than or equal to 0.5 are a
prediction of class '1', code.initial.guess.bias can be used to
require more tree weight to predict one class compared to
the other, and thus naturally favor one class. Tuning this pa­
rameter may help to find a desirable tradeoff between so-
called "false positives" and "false negatives" among incor­
rectly classified records. Permitted value range is numbers
greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 1. A value
of 0.5 means no bias in either direction.

The default value is 0.5.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 361
Parameter Description

evaluation.metric Controls the evaluation metric for validation. The default

value is error. Allowed values are:

● error (default)
The error rate for the binary classification that is calcu­
lated as #(wrong cases)/#(all cases). For
the predictions, the evaluation regards the instances
with prediction value larger than 0.5 as positive instan­
ces, and the others as negative instances.
● error@t
A different than 0.5 binary classification threshold value
could be specified by providing a numerical value
through "t", where t is a decimal between 0 and 1. A
possible example is "[email protected]".
● auc
Area under the ROC curve.

 Note
For more information about the parameter
evaluation.metric and the ROC curve, see
XGBoost Parameters and ROC curve .

scale.pos.weight Controls the balance of positive and negative weights, for in­
stance if it is desired to weight the positive cases more than
negative ones. This scenario is useful for unbalanced classes
that are typical in predictive maintenance. Any positive real
number can be entered by the user.

The default value is 0. For this value, the ratio of number of

negative instances to the number of positive instances i.e.
#(negative cases) / #(positive cases) will
be used implicitly.

 Note
If it is not desired to weight classes differently, the value
1 should be used.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

362 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Interquartile Range (IQR)

Parameter Description

interquartile.multiplier Factor by which the interquartile range will be multiplied

when determining the normal interval.

The default value is 2.

normalizer.type The type of normalizer that should be applied to the scores

calculated by the algorithm. The default value is quantile. Al­
lowed values are:

● Quantile (default)
Internally calculates an effective threshold value based
on the training data
● Threshold
Internally calculates an effective threshold value based
on the training data. Raw scores and normalized scores
are generated.
● None
Does not do any normalization of the values. Only raw
scores are generated.

 Note
For more information about the normalization of scores,
see Normalization of Scores [page 363].

normalizer.value The value that is used for the normalization. For quantile, a
value between 0 and 1 is valid; for threshold, a value larger
than 0.

The default value is 0.99.

6.2.1.3.1 Normalization of Scores

Normalizing scores enables you to compare scores computed for different equipment using different anomaly
detection algorithms.

Normalization Type: Threshold

You can use the normalization type threshold to score a model if you know the threshold for your data set that
distinguishes normal data from abnormal data.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 363
  Example

You can compare scores that were computed using different algorithms. The following table provides you
with an example of how normalized scores are calculated:

Threshold 1 = 80 Threshold 2 = 450000

Algorithm 1 Algorithm 2

Raw Score Normalized Score Interpreta­ Raw Score Normalized Score Interpreta­
Score tion Score tion

100 (100/80)*100 = 25 % above the 10000 (10000/450000 97.78 % below the

125 threshold = ab­ )*100 = 2.22 threshold = nor­
normal mal

90 (90/80)*100 = 12.5 % above the 400012 (400012/450000 11.11 % below the

112.5 threshold = ab­ )*100 = 88.89 threshold = nor­
normal mal

4 (4/80)*100 = 5 95 % below the 412313 (412313/450000 8.37 % below the

threshold = nor­ )*100 = 91.63 threshold = nor­
mal mal

32 (32/80)*100 = 60 % below the 477212 (477212/450000 6.05 % above the

40 threshold = nor­ )*100 = 106.05 threshold = ab­
mal normal

Without normalizing the raw scores of the algorithms 1 and 2, a comparison of the scores of these two
algorithms would hardly be possible. Using the threshold, which represents a percentage of 100, the
normalized scores are set in relation to this percentage and can therefore be compared across different
anomaly detection algorithms.

Normalization Type: Quantile

You can use the normalization type quantile to train a model if you do not know the threshold for your data set.
However, you know the data set itself very well, and you know that a certain percentage of your raw scores are
outliers.

 Example

You do not have a training set of normal data that is below a certain threshold. You cannot therefore train
your model against a training data set. However, you know that 90 % of your raw scores are normal and
10 % of your raw scores are abnormal. You also know which scores represent normal values and which
values represent abnormal values. What you need to do before you can score your model is to get to a
threshold that distinguishes normal from abnormal scores.Without normalizing the raw scores of the
algorithms 1 and 2, a comparison of the scores of these two algorithms would hardly be possible. Using the
threshold, which represents a percentage of 100, the normalized scores are set in relation to this
percentage and can therefore be compared across different anomaly detection algorithms.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

364 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Outliers = 10 %, which means quantile = 0.9

Raw Score Training Effective Threshold After Training Us­

ing Statistic Function to Calculate the
Normal score 0.04 Empirical Quantile: 0.9

Normal score 0.07

Normal score 0.07

Normal score 0.15

Normal score 0.23

Normal score 0.35

Normal score 0.35

Normal score 0.71

Normal score 0.89

abnormal score 0.95

Afteryour model has been trained with the empirical quantile process, the calculated effective threshold is used
to score your model. The scoring process is then executed as described in the section Normalization Type:
Threshold:

Effective Threshold = 0.9

Raw Score Normalized Score Score Interpretation

0.4 (0.4/0.9)*100 = 44.44 55.56 % below the threshold = normal

1.1 (1.1/0.9)*100 = 122.22 22.22 % above the threshold = abnor­

mal

0.23 (0.23/0.9)*100 = 25.56 74.44 % below the threshold = normal

0.91 (0.91/0.9)*100 = 101.11 1.11 % above the threshold = abnormal

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 365
6.2.1.4 Algorithm-Specific Outputs

Depending on the algorithm that you have selected, different outputs are displayed. The following sections
provide you with an overview of the outputs with their descriptions, data type and dimension, sorted by the
algorithms:

Earth Mover’s Distance (EMD)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Normalized Score Displays the percentage of Numeric None

the score divided by the ef­
fective threshold that is se­
lected in the model specific
parameter (Score/Effective
threshold*100)

Score Displays the anomaly of a Numeric None

data point

With an increasing value, the

anomaly of the data point in­
creases too.

Reading Count The number of readings con­ Numeric None

tributing to score

Logistic Regression (LOR)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Predicted Class For this output, the values 0 Numeric None

or 1 are possible. If the proba­
bility of failure is greater than
the cut-off value, the data
points receive the value 1.
Otherwise the data points re­
ceive the value 0.

Score Displays the probability of Numeric None

failure

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

366 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
One Class Support Vector Machine (SVM)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Normalized Score Displays the percentage of Numeric None

the score divided by the ef­
fective threshold that is se­
lected in the model specific
parameter (Score/Effective
threshold*100)

Score Displays the anomaly of a Numeric None

data point

With an increasing value, the

anomaly of the data point in­
creases too.

Multivariate Autoregression (MAR)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Normalized Score Displays the percentage of Numeric None

the score divided by the ef­
fective threshold that is se­
lected in the model specific
parameter (Score/Effective
threshold*100)

Score Measures the difference be­ Numeric None

tween a data point and a pre­
dicted value

A greater values indicates a

bigger abnormality.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 367
Principal Component Analysis (PCA)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Normalized Score Displays the percentage of Numeric None

the score divided by the ef­
fective threshold that is se­
lected in the model specific
parameter (Score/Effective
threshold*100).

Score Displays the anomaly of a Numeric None

data point

With an increasing value, the

anomaly of the data point in­
creases too.

Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Predicted Class Displays the predicted class Numeric None

of the record

Score Displays the probability of Numeric None

the corresponding record be­
longing to the class that is
encoded as the predicted
class

Interquartile Range (IQR)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Normalized Score Displays the percentage of Numeric None

the score divided by the ef­
fective threshold that is se­
lected in the model specific
parameter (Score/Effective
threshold*100)

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

368 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Output Description Data Type Dimension

Score Displays the anomaly of a Numeric None

data point

With an increasing value, the

anomaly of the data point in­
creases too. The scores are
based on the distance to the
median and the quartiles.

Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Predicted Class Displays the predicted class Numeric None

of the record

Score Displays the probability of a Numeric None

data point belonging to the
predicted class

Automatic Anomaly Detection (AAD)

Output Description Data Type Dimension

Normalized Score Displays the percentage of Numeric None

the score divided by the ef­
fective threshold that is cal­
culated in the model training
(Score/Effective thresh­
old*100)

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 369
6.2.2 Training a Model

This topic describes how to train models for equipment health indicators.

Prerequisites

● At least one model has been configured.

● To download data sets, the role DataScienceDataExporter is assigned to your user.

Context

Once you have configured a model, you can train it.

 Note

After the first successful training of a model, you can only edit the name, description, and tags of the
model.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Health Indicator Model
Management application.
2. To train a model, you can choose between the following options:
○ Set up a regular training for the model. For more information, see Scheduling Regular Training of a
Model [page 371].
○ Set up a manual training for the model. For manual training, proceed as described in the following
steps:
3. From the Models pane, select the model you want to train.
4. Define the time frame of the data that is used for training. You can choose between the following options:

○ Select a date and time in the New Training From and To fields by choosing .
○ Select a time frame by using the training data preview. For more information, see Selecting Training
Data Using Training Data Preview [page 372].
5. Choose Start Training.

The training run starts, showing the status in the Trainings table. The status refreshes every 5 seconds.

Once the training run is completed, you can see detailed information and the training job ID by clicking on
the log entries in the Log Summary column. You can also view a model summary with multiple metrics by

choosing . For more information about the model summary and the metrics, see Model Summary
[page 374].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

370 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
  Note

If the role DataScienceDataExporter is assigned to your user, you can download your configured
data set for the latest successful training of your model by choosing Download Input Data. The
downloaded file includes the independent variables you selected as input for your model within the
defined time frame for the training. The file is available for 30 days after the training and is only for
information purposes.

Results

Your model is trained.

Related Information

Scoring a Model [page 376]

6.2.2.1 Scheduling Regular Training of a Model

This topic describes how to schedule a regular training of models used for equipment health indicators.

Prerequisites

At least one model has been configured.

Context

In the Health Indicator Model Management application, you can configure a schedule, update an existing
schedule, and activate or deactivate a schedule for the periodical execution of training.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori Launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Health Indicator Model
Management application.
2. From the Models pane, select the model you want to train.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 371
3. To configure the training schedule, choose Set Schedule.

The Set Training Schedule dialog box is displayed.

4. Fill in the following fields:

Active Activate or deactive the training schedule for the model.

Start Select the start date and time of the training schedule.

Recurrence Pattern Define whether the training job should run once or fre­
quently at certain intervals.

Data Range Define a limited data set coming in during a certain time
period before the training.

Range of Recurrence Define whether the training schedule should finish at a

certain date and time.

5. Choose OK.

Results

The training schedule is configured.

You can later edit or also deactivate the training schedule if required.

Related Information

Training a Model [page 370]

6.2.2.2 Selecting Training Data Using Training Data Preview

This topic describes how to select training data using the training data preview.

Context

In the Health Indicator Model Management application, you have different options to select a time frame for
training models. One option is to select the time frame by using the training data preview. This preview displays
the available training data for a certain period of time.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

372 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Procedure

1. In the Health Indicator Model Management application, select the model that you want to train from the
Models pane.

The training data preview including a data preview histogram and a data preview slider is displayed under
Training Data Preview.
If the model is already trained, the data preview histogram and the data preview slider is visible by
choosing Show Data Preview and Training Runs.

 Note

The data preview histogram shows an estimated number of all aggregated data of the training input.
The actual available data may differ from the displayed number of data in the chart depending, for
example, on the null strategy you have chosen or which independent variables you have selected.

2. Select a time frame. You can choose between the following options:
○ Click on the data preview slider.
○ Drag the frame to any point on the data preview slider.
○ Pull the left or right side of the frame to any point on the data preview slider.

 Note

Only data within the past year is displayed in the data preview slider. If you want to select a time frame
with an earlier start date, select the time frame by using the New Training From and To fields.

Results

The selected training data is displayed in the data preview histogram in an enlarged view and the New Training
From and To fields are filled.

Related Information

Training a Model [page 370]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 373
6.2.2.3 Model Summary

After each training of a model, you can view a model summary. This model summary contains multiple metrics,
which help you to understand the trained model better and evaluate and compare the quality of different
trained models.

Background Information

When you train a model, metrics containing multiple numeric measurements and diagrams are calculated
automatically. These numeric measurements and diagrams are calculated in different ways:

● Based on all training data. This is typical for for the numeric measurements and diagrams for anomaly
detection, such as score distribution.
● Based on dedicated test data. In this case, a test set, representing 10% of the training data is automatically
split from the data, and is excluded from the training. The numeric measurements and diagrams are
calculated by using the test set to compare the model predictions with the actual outcomes of the test data
after the training. This is typical for the numeric measurements and diagrams for failure prediction, such as
accuracy.
● Based on the learned model. This is typical for the feature importance for failure prediction.

The Metrics of the Model Summary

Depending on the algorithm that you have selected for the model training, a different combination of numeric
measurements and/or diagrams is displayed. The following tables provide you with an overview of the metrics
with their descriptions, and show the algorithms to which they apply:

Numeric Measurements

Metric Description Algorithm

Accuracy This metric displays the overall fraction ● Logistic Regression (LOR)
of the correctly classified data. ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
For this metric, values between 0 and 1
are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect model.

 Note
This metric can be misleading for
highly imbalanced data sets.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

374 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Metric Description Algorithm

Kappa This metric adjusts the accuracy based ● Logistic Regression (LOR)
on the expected accuracy provided by ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
the class distribution. ● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)

For this metric, values between -1 and 1

are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect model.

Matthews Correlation Coefficient This metric takes class imbalance into ● Logistic Regression (LOR)
(MCC) ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
account.
● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
For this metric, values between -1 and 1
are possible. The value 0 refers to a ran­
dom prediction. The value 1 refers to a
perfect prediction.

Sensitivity This metric displays the fraction of cor­ ● Logistic Regression (LOR)
rectly classified positive cases. ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
For this metric, values between 0 and 1
are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect classification of all positive cases.

Specificity This metric displays the fraction of cor­ ● Logistic Regression (LOR)
rectly classified negative cases. ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
For this metric, values between 0 and 1
are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect classification of all negative cases.

Test set size This metric displays the amount of data ● Logistic Regression (LOR)
that was used to calculate the metrics. ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)

Estimated Anomaly Fraction This metric displays the fraction of ab­ Automatic Anomaly Detection (AAD)
normal training data. The abnormal
training data are classified by the Auto­
matic Anomaly Detection (AAD) algo­
rithm.

Diagrams

Metric Description Algorithm

Confusion Matrix This diagram displays the number of ● Logistic Regression (LOR)
correctly and incorrectly classified posi­ ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
tive and negative cases in the test set as
● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
separate tiles. Large numbers on the
green tiles on the diagonal indicate a
good classification. Large numbers on
the red tiles on the off-diagonal indicate
a bad classification.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 375
Metric Description Algorithm

Feature Importance This diagram displays the importance ● Automatic Failure Prediction (AFP)
of each feature for the model in a bar ● Tree Ensemble Classifier (TEC)
chart based on the gain provided by the
feature. The feature with the highest
value is considered to be the most im­
portant feature.

 Note
The feature importance is only dis­
played for the 20 most important
features.

Score Distribution This diagram displays the distribution ● Automatic Anomaly Detection
of the training scores in a histogram. (AAD)
The distribution indicates how well you ● Interquartile Range (IQR)
can separate anomalies from normal
● Support Vector Machines (SVM)
scores. The scores are separated by dif­
● Principal Component Analysis
ferent colors. Green indicates normal
(PCA)
data and red indicates anomalies.
● Multivariate Autoregression (MAR)
● Earth Mover’s Distance (EMD)

6.2.3 Scoring a Model

This topic describes how to score models for equipment health indicators.

Prerequisites

Your model has been trained successfully at least once.

Context

Once you have trained a model, you can score the latest trained model to score data.

 Note

The latest version of a trained model is used for scoring.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

376 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Health Indicator Model
Management application.
2. To score a model, you can choose between the following options:
○ Set up a regular scoring for the model. For more information, see Scheduling Regular Scoring of a
Model [page 378].
○ Set up a manual scoring for the model. For manual scoring, proceed as described in the following
steps:
3. From the Models pane, select the model you want to score.
4. To define the time frame of data that is used for scoring, select a date and time in the Score Data From and
To fields by choosing .
5. Choose Start Scoring.

The scoring run starts, showing the status in the Scorings table. The status refreshes every 5 seconds.

Once the scoring run is completed, you can see detailed information and the scoring job ID by clicking on
the log entries in the Log Summary column.

Results

Your model is scored.

Next Steps

You can now check the scores in the indicator chart by choosing in the Scorings table. From the equipment
list, select a piece of equipment to display the algorithm scores over the scoring time for this piece of
equipment. This provides you with insights about the health and performance of your equipment.

 Example

You have scored a model using the Multivariate Autoregression (MAR) algorithm. From the scores in the
indicator chart, you see that the MAR scores for your pump increased in the last week within the scoring
time frame. This means that the algorithm has detected a probable anomaly and you can expect a failure.

 Note

The following restrictions apply:

● The icon for the indicator chart is only displayed when the scoring run was completed successfully.
● The scores in the indicator chart are only displayed when data for the equipment was collected during
the scoring run. You can view this information in the log entries of the scoring run.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 377
Related Information

Indicator Chart [page 21]

Anomaly Detection Using Multivariate Autoregression (MAR) [page 340]
Managing Models for Equipment Health Indicators [page 324]

6.2.3.1 Scheduling Regular Scoring of a Model

This topic describes how to schedule a regular scoring of models used for equipment health indicators.

Prerequisites

Your model has been trained successfully at least once.

Context

In the Health Indicator Model Management application, you can configure a schedule, update an existing
schedule, and activate or deactivate a schedule for the periodical execution of scoring.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Health Indicator Model
Management application.
2. From the Models pane, select the model you want to score.
3. To configure the scoring schedule, choose Set Schedule.

The Set Scoring Schedule dialog box is displayed.

4. Fill in the following fields:

Active Activate or deactive the scoring schedule for the model.

Start Select the start date and time of the scoring schedule.

Recurrence Pattern Define whether the scoring job should run once or fre­
quently at certain intervals.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

378 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Data Range Define whether the scoring should run on all data coming
in since the last execution (scoring run), or on a limited
data set coming in during a certain time period before the
scoring.

 Note
When you select the option to include all data since
the last execution, consider that only the data since
the last successful execution is taken into account.

Range of Recurrence Define whether the scoring schedule should finish at a

certain date and time.

5. Choose OK.

Results

The scoring schedule is configured.

You can later edit or also deactivate the scoring schedule if required.

Related Information

Scoring a Model [page 376]

6.3 Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics

This topic describes how to manage models for failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

● You have performed the configuration steps before configuring, training, and scoring a failure mode
analytics model. For more information, see Configuring Failure Mode Analytics [page 461].
● The role FMA_MODEL_MANAGER is assigned to your user.

 Note

If the required role is not assigned to your user, you cannot see the application on the launchpad. Contact
your Identity Management Administrator if the role has not been assigned to your user yet.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 379
Context

To get insights and analytics about the patterns of failures for your equipment and equipment models, your
notifications need to be analyzed by configuring, training, and scoring models in the Failure Mode Analytics
Model Management application.

In this process, you first configure and train an unsupervised model and then configure, train, and score a
supervised model. The unsupervised model is the basis for the supervised model. The unsupervised model
identifies the characteristics of notification texts and maps the notification texts to the characteristics found in
standard failure modes. After the training, it suggests the most appropriate failure mode for each notification.

 Tip

You can perform validation tasks to validate and improve the suggestion. For more information, see
Validating Failure Mode Analytics [page 396].

The supervised model learns from this suggestion by performing text classification. This means, it learns the
characteristics of individual failure modes from the mapped notification texts for upcoming notifications during
the training. After the scoring, it maps the most appropriate failure modes to upcoming notifications.

Procedure

1. To train an unsupervised model, you first need to configure it. For more information, see Configuring a
Model [page 380].
2. Once you have configured the unsupervised model, you can train it. For more information, see Training a
Model [page 390].
3. Once you have trained the unsupervised model, you can configure the supervised model. For more
information, see Configuring a Model [page 380].
4. Once you have configured the supervised model, you can train it. For more information, see Training a
Model [page 390].
5. Once you have trained the supervised model, you can use the latest trained model to score data. For more
information, see Scoring a Model [page 393].

6.3.1 Configuring a Model

This topic describes how to configure models for failure mode analytics.

Context

To train and score a model, you first need to configure a model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

380 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
  Note

You start with first configuring a model of unsupervised learner type, and then a model of supervised
learner type.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Failure Mode Analytics
Model Management application.
2. To configure a model, you can choose between the following options:

○ Configure a new model based on an existing model: Select the base model and choose Copy. The
new model contains all settings of the base model.

○ Configure a new model from scratch: Choose .

The New Model screen is displayed.

3. Fill in all required fields in the General Information and Algorithm sections. For more information, see Fields
for Configuring a Model [page 382].
a. To configure an unsupervised model, select the LDA algorithm and select an equipment model.
b. To configure a supervised model, select the TextClassEnsemble algorithm and select the created
unsupervised model as a basis for the supervised model.
4. Save your model.

Results

Your model is configured and added to the Models pane.

Related Information

Training a Model [page 390]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 381
6.3.1.1 Fields for Configuring a Model

General Information

Field Mandatory Description

Name x Enter a name for the model.

 Note
The model name must not contain
whitespaces.

Description - Enter a description for the model.

Algorithm

Field Mandatory Description

Algorithm Name x Select the algorithm that you want to

use to train and score the model. You
can choose from the following algo­
rithms:

● LDA
Unsupervised topic modeling using
Latent Dirichlet Allocation for fail­
ure mode assignment
● TextClassEnsemble
Failure mode analytics with super­
vised TextClassEnsemble

For more information about the algo­

rithms, see Algorithms for Failure Mode
Analytics [page 384].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

382 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Field Mandatory Description

Learner Type x Displays the type of the selected algo­

rithm. Depending on the algorithm you
have selected, one of the following
learner types is displayed:

● UNSUPERVISED
This learner type is displayed if you
have selected the algorithm name
LDA.
● SUPERVISED
This learner type is displayed if you
have selected the algorithm name
TextClassEnsemble.

Equipment Model x Select the equipment model that you

want to use as basis for the model. You
can choose from all equipment models
that were created in the Models applica­
tion.

 Note
This field is visible only when you
create an unsupervised model.

Unsupervised Model x Select the unsupervised model that you

want to use as basis for the supervised
model.

 Note
This field is visible only when you
create a supervised model.

Parameters - Displays the parameters of the selected

algorithm with their default values. For
more information about the parameters
of each algorithm, see Algorithm-Spe­
cific Parameters [page 387].

You can use the predefined parameters

or adjust the parameters by deleting
parameters, adding own parameters, or
overwriting the values of the predefined
parameters.

To define a new value for a parameter,

enter the value and press ENTER .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 383
6.3.1.2 Algorithms for Failure Mode Analytics

Unsupervised Topic Modeling Using Latent Dirichlet Allocation for Failure

Mode Assignment

Use Case
Before you explore the details of this algorithm, you should first know when to use this algorithm. Unsupervised
Topic Modeling applies for the following scenarios:

● The goal is to auto-assign labels to documents, given known behavior of the labels in the form of text.
● A text corpus related to the document that needs label assignment is available.
● A text corpus related to the labels whose underlying topic needs to be inferred needs to be available,
thereby allowing for-auto assignment of the label to the notification based on the mutual topic assignment.

 Example

An example use case is notifications that have rich text data, but are missing failure modes. In this case,
unsupervised topic modeling can be applied to learn latent topics in the notifications. Scoring is then used
on the text corpus related to standard failure modes to infer underlying topics, thereby giving the ability to
assign standard failure mode labels to the topics learned.

For more information, see Unsupervised Topic Modeling Using Latent Dirichlet Allocation for Failure Mode
Assignment [page 385].

Supervised Text Classification Using Ensemble Techniques

Use Case
Before you explore the details of this algorithm, you should first know when to use this algorithm. Supervised
Text Classification applies for the following scenarios:

● The goal is to predict labels/class to text data.

● Text records must include labels.
● Text data representing similar entities/issues must be available.

 Example

An example use case would be auto-assigning failure modes to new notifications on the basis of text
classification model learned on historical data. If notifications that have rich text data, have been assigned
failure modes either using automated techniques using NLP or manually via hand labeling, a text
classification model can be learned. New notifications are auto-assigned failure modes based on the text
classification models learned.

For more information, see Failure Mode Analytics with Supervised TextClassEnsemble [page 386].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

384 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
6.3.1.2.1 Unsupervised Topic Modeling Using Latent
Dirichlet Allocation for Failure Mode Assignment

What Does the Algorithm Do?

This algorithm uses Latent Dirichlet Allocation, which is a generative probabilistic method for modeling a
corpus. Corpus here could be text from notifications. Latent Dirichlet Allocation assigns topics to documents
and generates topic distributions over words given a collection of texts, thus providing a way of automatically
discovering topics those documents contain.

The LDA model is a Bayesian mixture model for discrete data where topics are assumed to be uncorrelated.
LDA assumes that each document can be represented as a probabilistic distribution over latent topics, and that
topic distribution in all documents share a common Dirichlet prior. Each latent topic in the LDA model is also
represented as a probabilistic distribution over words and the word distributions of topics share a common
Dirichlet prior as well.

The algorithm fits a topic model to the input text data. For this, text data that makes up the corpus is specified.
Training a model extracts the latent topics given a set of documents (notification texts).

Likewise, scoring would essentially be to infer underlying topics that explain a specific document based on the
generative process which was used to train the model; basically infer the conditional distribution (posterior) of
the hidden variables given the observed variables.

Model Configuration

To configure a model for failure mode analytics, use the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

The algorithm takes text data as an input. Thus, each row of text must belong to a homogenous set, which
might have several latent categories.

 Example

All failure notification texts that belong to a single equipment model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 385
Model Training

Model training for LDA means using the provided historical training text data to learn a topic model for failure
mode assignment.

The aim is to find a model that well represents the data set used for training. Internally, this algorithm splits the
data into a train and test set, using 90% of the data for the training. After a training, a quality metric calculated
on the test set is displayed in the Log Summary in the Trainings table. For more information, see Model
Summary [page 392].

To train a model for failure mode analytics, use the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

Model Scoring

To score a model for failure mode analytics, use the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

6.3.1.2.2 Failure Mode Analytics with Supervised

TextClassEnsemble

What Does the Algorithm Do?

This algorithm conducts automatic supervised classification on text data using ensemble agreement between
multiple classification algorithms that makes a prediction concerning the label/class given a document. The
train function uses an ensemble of three algorithms: random forest, cart, and knn to generate a consensus on
assigning categories to documents.

Scoring makes predictions from the fitted ensemble model to predict the class (label) of new documents.

Model Configuration

To configure a model for failure mode analytics, use the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application.
For more information, see Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

386 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Data Preparation for Model Training and Scoring

The algorithm takes text records that are classified as an input. Thus, each row is expected to have text data
represented as a document that must have a class or label associated with it.

Model Training

To train a model for failure mode analytics, use the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

Model Scoring

To score a model for failure mode analytics, use the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application. For
more information, see Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

6.3.1.3 Algorithm-Specific Parameters

Depending on the algorithm that you have selected, different parameters are displayed. The following sections
provide you with an overview of the parameters with their descriptions and default values, sorted by the
algorithms:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 387
LDA

Parameter Description

stopwords Collection of stopwords that is excluded from the failure

mode analysis, for example, a model name or user name.

This parameter already includes a list of default stopwords,

which are automatically excluded from the analysis. These
stopwords are not visible as default values on the UI. The
stopwords are language-specific, currently standard English
stopwords are used. You can find multiple English stopwords
lists on the internet.

In addition to the automatically excluded stopwords, you can

also add your own stopwords.

 Note
To enter own stopwords, you can use the following char­
acters:

● Uppercase or lowercase letters from a to z

● Numbers
● Hyphens
● Periods
● Underscores

 Tip
If you already have a list of stopwords and you want to
add them in one move, perform the following steps: ei­
ther use a text editor and put each word on a separate
line separated by paragraphs, or use a spreadsheet ap­
plication and put each word in a column of cells. Then,
use the clipboard function and copy all words, and paste
them into the Values field of the stopwords parameter.

alpha Parameter of the Dirichlet distribution for topics across

documents

The default value is 0.001.

beta Logarithmized parameter of the word distribution for each

topic

The default value is 0.001.

num.top.terms Number of top terms per topic that need to be extracted

The default value is 20.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

388 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Parameter Description

num.topics Number of topics

The default value is 5.

burnin Number of omitted Gibbs iterations at beginning

The default value is 4000.

iter Number of Gibbs iterations

The default value is 2000.

thin Number of omitted in-between Gibbs iterations

The default value is 500.

best If TRUE, only the model with the maximum (posterior) likeli­
hood is returned

The default value is TRUE.

ngram This parameter allows you to focus your analysis based on a

certain number of words using a Document Term Matrix.

You enter a value as the considered number of words. Based

on this entered value, only notifications that contain this
number of words in this sequence are analyzed during the
training and scoring and are later displayed in the failure
mode analytics results.

You can enter values from 1 to 6. The default value is 1.

 Example
You enter the value 2. The Document Term Matrix then
contains two word phrases as its entries for terms. Dur­
ing the training and scoring, only notifications that con­
tain two word phrases, for example, bearing overheating
are analyzed. After the scoring, only results based on
these notifications and the belonging top words are dis­
played in the failure mode analytics results.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 389
TextClassEnsemble

Parameter Description

ngram This parameter allows you to focus your analysis based on a

certain number of words using a Document Term Matrix.

You enter a value as the considered number of words. Based

on this entered value, only notifications that contain this
number of words in this sequence are analyzed during the
training and scoring and are later displayed in the failure
mode analytics results.

You can enter values from 1 to 6. The default value is 1.

 Example
You enter the value 2. The Document Term Matrix then
contains two word phrases as its entries for terms. Dur­
ing the training and scoring, only notifications that con­
tain two word phrases, for example, bearing overheating
are analyzed. After the scoring, only results based on
these notifications and the belonging top words are dis­
played in the failure mode analytics results.

6.3.2 Training a Model

This topic describes how to train models for failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

● At least one failure mode analytics model has been configured.

● The notifications for your equipment meet all of the following requirements:
○ The breakdown attribute of the notification is set to True or the notificationTypeDescription
attribute is set to Breakdown.
○ The notification has a valid malfunction start and end date.
○ The notification has a long description.
If these requirements are not met, the notifications are not collected during the training. For more
information about all these attributes and how to view and create a notification, see Viewing and Creating
Equipment Notifications [page 123] and Notifications.
● The notifications that are later included in the selected training time frame meet the following
requirements:
○ At least two different failure modes are included among all notifications.
○ For optimal results, for each failure mode that is included also at least 10 notifications should exist in
the training time frame.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

390 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Context

Once you have configured a model, you can train it.

 Note

You start with first training a model of unsupervised learner type, and then a model of supervised learner
type.

 Note

After the first successful training of a model, you cannot edit your model configuration any longer or delete
your model. You can only copy the model and adjust the copied model.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Failure Mode Analytics
Model Management application.
2. From the Models pane, select the model you want to train.
3. To define the time frame of data that is used for training, select a date and time in the New Training From
and To fields by choosing .

 Note

For training a supervised model, in addition to the aspects above, select a time frame that is a subset of
the time frame used in the unsupervised model that is referred to in the created supervised model.

4. Choose Start Training.

The training run starts, showing the status in the Trainings table.

5. To refresh the status, choose next to the table.

Once the training run is completed, you can see detailed information, a model summary with multiple
metrics, and the training job ID by clicking on the log entries in the Log Summary column. For more
information about the model summary and the metrics, see Model Summary [page 392].

Results

Your model is trained.

Related Information

Configuring a Model [page 380]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 391
Scoring a Model [page 393]

6.3.2.1 Model Summary

After each training of a model, you can view a model summary. This model summary contains multiple metrics,
which help you to understand the trained model better and evaluate and compare the quality of different
trained models.

Background Information

When you train a model, metrics containing multiple numeric measurements are calculated. These metrics are
calculated based on dedicated test data. This means, a test set, representing 10% of the training data is
automatically split from the data, and is excluded from the training. The numeric measurements are calculated
by using the test set to compare the model predictions with the actual outcomes of the test data after the
training.

The Metrics of the Model Summary

Depending on the algorithm that you have selected for the model training, different numeric measurements are
displayed. The following tables provide you with an overview of the metrics with their descriptions, and show
the algorithm to which they apply:

Metric Description Algorithm

Accuracy This metric displays the overall fraction Supervised Text Classification Using
Ensemble Techniques
of the correctly classified data.

For this metric, values between 0 and 1

are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect model.

 Note
This metric can be misleading for
highly imbalanced data sets.

Kappa This metric adjusts the accuracy based Supervised Text Classification Using
Ensemble Techniques
on the expected accuracy provided by
the class distribution.

For this metric, values between -1 and 1

are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect model.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

392 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Metric Description Algorithm

Recall This metric displays the fraction of cor­ Supervised Text Classification Using
Ensemble Techniques
rectly classified positive cases.

For this metric, values between 0 and 1

are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect classification of all positive cases.

Precision This metric displays the fraction of cor­ Supervised Text Classification Using
Ensemble Techniques
rectly classified negative cases.

For this metric, values between 0 and 1

are possible. The value 1 refers to a per­
fect classification of all negative cases.

F1 Score This metric is a measure that combines Supervised Text Classification Using
precision and recall and is the harmonic Ensemble Techniques
mean between precision and recall.

The value 1 refers to a perfect combina­

tion of precision and recall. The value 0
refers to a bad combination.

Perplexity This metric indicates how well a proba­ Unsupervised Topic Modeling Using La­
tent Dirichlet Allocation
bility model predicts a sample and is
used by the convention in language
modeling.

A low perplexity indicates that the prob­

ability distribution is good at predicting
the sample. The lower the perplexity
score, the better the generalization per­
formance.

6.3.3 Scoring a Model

This topic describes how to score models for failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

Your supervised model has been trained successfully at least once.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 393
Context

Once you have trained a supervised model, you can score the latest trained model to score data.

 Note

The latest version of a model is used for scoring.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Failure Mode Analytics
Model Management application.
2. To score a model, you can choose between the following options:
○ Set up a regular scoring for the model. For more information, see Scheduling Regular Scoring of a
Model [page 395].
○ Set up a manual scoring for the model. For manual scoring, proceed as described in the following
steps:
3. From the Models pane, select the model you want to score.
4. To define the time frame of data that is used for scoring, select a date and time in the Score Data From and
To fields by choosing .
5. Choose Start Scoring.

The scoring run starts, showing the status in the Scorings table.

6. To refresh the status, choose next to the table.

Once the scoring run is completed, you can see detailed information and the scoring job ID by clicking on
the log entries in the Log Summary column.

Results

Your supervised model is scored.

Next Steps

You can now check the scoring results for failure mode analytics as follows:

● On the equipment or model pages. For more information, see Using Failure Mode Analytics on the
Equipment or Model Pages [page 61].
● In the Failure Modes or Failure Mode Analytics applications. For more information, see Using Failure Mode
Analytics in the Failure Modes Application [page 67] and Using the Failure Mode Analytics Application
[page 68].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

394 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Related Information

Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379]

Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]

6.3.3.1 Scheduling Regular Scoring of a Model

This topic describes how to schedule a regular scoring of models used for failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

Your supervised model has been trained successfully at least once.

Context

In the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application, you can configure a schedule, update an existing
schedule, and activate or deactivate a schedule for the periodical execution of scoring.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Failure Mode Analytics
Model Management application.
2. From the Models pane, select the model you want to score.
3. To configure the scoring schedule, choose Set Schedule.

The Set Scoring Schedule dialog box is displayed.

4. Fill in the following fields:

Active Activate or deactive the scoring schedule for the model.

Start Select the start date and time of the scoring schedule.

Recurrence Pattern Define whether the scoring job should run once or fre­
quently at certain intervals.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 395
 Data Range Define whether the scoring should run on all data coming
in since the last scoring run, or on a limited data set com­
ing in during a certain time period before the scoring.

Range of Recurrence Define whether the scoring schedule should finish at a

certain date and time.

5. Choose OK.

Results

The scoring schedule is configured.

You can later edit or also deactivate the scoring schedule if required.

Related Information

Scoring a Model [page 393]

6.4 Validating Failure Mode Analytics

This topic describes how to validate failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

● Your unsupervised model has been trained successfully once at least. For more information, see Managing
Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].
● The role FMA_VALIDATION_EXPERT is assigned to your user.

 Note

If the required role or roles are not assigned to your user, you cannot see the application on the
launchpad. Contact your Identity Management Administrator if the role or roles have not been
assigned to your user yet.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

396 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Context

To improve the accuracy of the text analysis that maps topics with top words from notification texts to the most
appropriate failure modes, we recommend you perform validation tasks.

Validation tasks are generated based on a trained unsupervised model and are displayed on the Failure Mode
Analytics Validation application. For each trained unsupervised model, one validation task is generated. The
validation is assumed to be a one-time activity for each training run.

Once you have performed a validation task, you can apply your validation to the next supervised model training
and scoring run in the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application and check the validation results
for failure mode analytics.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Failure Mode Analytics
Validation application.

The Validation Tasks table is displayed. The table lists all available tasks.
2. To begin a validation task, choose Start.

The Topics and Failure Mode Assignments table is displayed. The table lists all topics with the most relevant
top words for each failure mode.
3. In the table, check if each topic is assigned to the most relevant failure mode based on the top words of the
topic and your own experience. You can see the top words by clicking on a topic.

 Note

Consider the following:

○ The topics are pre-assigned to the most relevant failure modes during the initial training. When a
topic has an equal relevance split between several failure modes, it is assigned to the first mode ID
alphabetically.
○ Each topic is represented by a number. If no relevant failure mode is found for the top words of the
topic during the training, the topic, for example, topic number 2 is not displayed in the list.

4. (Relevant only if there is a more relevant failure mode): Reassign the topic to a different failure mode by
using the failure mode selection dialog.

 Note

If you change the failure mode, the relevance score changes to reflect the new relevance of the topic to
the failure mode.

5. To continue the task, choose Save and Next.

The Notifications table is displayed. The table lists notifications for each failure mode. It displays a
maximum of 10 notifications per failure mode.
6. In the table, check if each notification is assigned to the most relevant failure mode. You can view details of
a notification by clicking the notification link.
7. (Relevant only if there is a more relevant failure mode): Reassign the notification to a different failure
mode by using the failure mode selection dialog.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 397
  Note

If you change the failure mode, the relevance score is replaced with N/A and a new training is required
to generate a new score.

8. To confirm the task, choose Save and Confirm.

9. To complete the task, choose Activate.

 Note

To rework the task, choose Start.

The task is completed and removed from the Validation Tasks table and the Failure Mode Analytics
Validation application.

A new validated model is displayed on the Failure Mode Analytics Model Management application.
10. To apply the validation, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Failure Mode Analytics
Model Management application.
11. Configure a supervised model based on the unsupervised model that you validated, train, and score it. For
more information, see Managing Models for Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

Results

For the chosen equipment model, the validation results are applied.

Next Steps

You can now check the validation results for failure mode analytics as follows:

● On the equipment or model pages. For more information, see Using Failure Mode Analytics on the
Equipment or Model Pages [page 61].
● In the Failure Modes or Failure Mode Analytics applications. For more information, see Using Failure Mode
Analytics in the Failure Modes Application [page 67] and Using the Failure Mode Analytics Application
[page 68].

Related Information

Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

398 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
6.5 Managing Models for Leading Indicators

This topic describes how to manage models for leading indicators.

Prerequisites

The role DataScienceUser or the roles DataScienceRead and DataScienceWrite are assigned to your
user.

 Note

If the required role or roles are not assigned to your user, you cannot see the application on the launchpad.
Contact your Identity Management Administrator if the role or roles have not been assigned to your user
yet.

Context

To view and analyze the leading indicators that have the highest influence on failures for your equipment and
equipment models, you need to determine the leading indicators by configuring and training models in the
Leading Indicators Model Management application.

In this process, you configure a model based on the equipment model and optionally failure mode for which
you later want to view and analyze the leading indicators. You can do this either for a one piece of equipment or
all equipment of the equipment model. You then train the model.

Procedure

1. To train a model, you first need to configure a model. For more information, see Configuring a Model [page
400].
2. Once you have configured a model, you can train it. For more information, see Training a Model [page 403].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 399
6.5.1 Configuring a Model

This topic describes how to configure models for leading indicators.

Context

To train a model, you first need to configure a model.

 Note

Once you have configured a model, you can only edit the name and the description of the model. If you
delete a configured model, the used data set of the model is deleted if the data set is not used in other
models.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Leading Indicators
Model Management application.
2. To configure a model, you can choose between the following options:

○ Configure a new model based on an existing model: Select the base configuration and choose Copy.
The new configuration contains all settings of the copied configuration.

○ Create a new model from scratch: Choose .

The New Model screen is displayed.

3. Fill in all required fields in the General Information section. For more information, see Fields for Configuring
a Model [page 401].
4. Save your model.

Results

Your model is configured and added to the Models pane.

Related Information

Training a Model [page 403]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

400 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
6.5.1.1 Fields for Configuring a Model

Field Mandatory Description

Name x Enter a name for the model.

Description - Enter a description for the model.

Data Set - Select the data set that you want to use
to train the model. You can choose be­
tween the following options:

● Generate a data set for the training

input
Select this option when you ha­
ven't configured a data set yet as a
training input.
● Select an existing data set for the
training input
Select this option when you have
already configured a data set as
training input.

 Note
The included indicator values are
within the retention period. The re­
tention period is maintained for the
SAP Internet of Things store and
can have a maximum range of 5
years. For more information, see
Create Retention Period for Time
Series Data Store.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 401
Field Mandatory Description

Equipment Model x Select the equipment model that you

want to use as a basis for the data set.
You can choose from all equipment
models that were created in the Models
application.

 Note
This field is visible only when you
have selected the option to gener­
ate a data set.

 Note
If you want to include a specific fail­
ure mode, select a failure mode in
the field below. If you don't want to
select a specific failure mode and
determine the leading indicators
for all failures that occurred in the
past, choose Generate Data Set to
generate the data set. The gener­
ated data set is then displayed in
the Training Input field.

Failure Mode - Select the failure mode that you want to

use as a basis for the data set. You can
choose from all failure modes that are
assigned to the selected equipment
model.

 Note
This field is visible only when you
have selected the option to gener­
ate a data set.

 Note
Once you have selected a failure
mode, choose Generate Data Set to
generate the data set. The gener­
ated data set is then displayed in
the Training Input field.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

402 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 Field Mandatory Description

Training Input x Depending on the option that you have

choosen for the Data Set field, either
the training input is displayed or you se­
lect the training data set:

● When you have selected the option

to generate a data set, the data set
is displayed in this field. You can re­
view the generated data set by
clicking the training input link.
● When you have selected the option
to select a data set, you select here
the data set that you want to use to
train the model. You can choose
from all configured data sets in the
Health Indicator Data Set
Configuration application.
To view details about the selected

data set, choose . The data set

with its details is then displayed in
the Health Indicator Data Set
Configuration application in a new
tab.

6.5.2 Training a Model

This topic describes how to train models for leading indicators.

Prerequisites

At least one model has been configured.

Context

Once you have configured a model, you can train it.

For more information about the algorithm that is used for the model training, see Decision Tree .

 Note

Once you have trained a model and you delete the trained model, the used data set of the model is deleted
in case the data set is not used in other models and the leading indicators with their conditions on the

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 403
 models and equipment page are deleted. If you have created a rule for one condition, this rule is not
deleted, and you need to delete it manually.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Machine Learning Engine group and open the Leading Indicators
Model Management application.
2. From the Models pane, select the model that you want to train.
3. To define the time frame of data that is used for training, select a date and time in the New Training From
and To fields by choosing .
4. Choose Start Training.

The training run starts, showing the status in the Trainings table.

5. To refresh the status, choose next to the table.

Once the training run is completed, you can see detailed information and the training job ID by clicking on
the log entries in the Log Summary column.

Results

Your model is trained.

Next Steps

You can now view and analyze the leading indicators as follows:

● On the equipment page for one piece of the equipment of the equipment model. For more information, see
Viewing and Analyzing Leading Indicators for Equipment [page 127].
● On the models page for all your equipment of the equipment model. For more information, see Viewing and
Analyzing Leading Indicators for a Model [page 146].

Related Information

Managing Models for Leading Indicators [page 399]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

404 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
6.6 Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration
Management

Overview of Failure Curve Analytics

Failure curve analytics lets you view the age at which your equipment may fail within an age range and the
likeliness of the failure by using a failure curve with different insights. This helps you detect potential failure
risks early and plan actions to prevent failures.

The failure curve with the different insights is calculated per failure mode for a group of equipment (fleet group)
with similar operating conditions. You can view the failure curve and the insights for each piece of equipment of
the group. The insights include the following:

● The current age of the piece of equipment in calendar days

● The probability of failure (PoF) or conditional probability of failure for the current age. The probability of
failure is the chance that the equipment will fail based on the failures that occurred in the past. The
conditional probability of failure is the chance the equipment will fail by a specific future age given that is
not failed until the current age.
● The upper and lower confidence interval for the PoF
● The predicted failure date for the current age of piece of equipment
● The time to failure in days (remaining useful live) for the current age of the piece of equipment based on
the predicted failure date

You can view the PoF and the confidence interval for any age within the age range.

The following graphic shows an example of a failure curve with the insights:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 405
  Example

Rose, a reliability engineer, spots a problematic piece of equipment, pump-0054. She lets the system
calculate the failure curve and reviews the failure curve for the failure mode OHE (Overheating). On the
failure curve, she sees that the piece of equipment has a current age of 43 days and that the probability of
failure for this age is 80%. Above the failure curve, she sees that the predicted time to failure is less than 15
days. To prevent the failure from occurring, she creates a maintainance request to get the pump repaired.

Failure Curve Analytics and Machine Learning

For calculating the failure curve and the insights, machine learning is used. In that process, model
configurations are trained and scored using a Weibull distribution algorithm. The model configuration contains
different input data that is used by the algorithm to produce outputs (results). You can have multiple model
configurations with similar or different input data.

Input Data for Model Configuration Training and Scoring

The input data is separated into configuration parameters and data sets.

Configuration Parameters
First, you enter the configuration parameters of the model configuration. Besides the ID and the description of
the model configuration, you select the following parameters:

● Fleet Group: The fleet group defines the group of equipment. You can either use an existing fleet group or
create a new group and select the equipment using the fleet builder. The fleet builder includes searching
and filtering. Besides basic filters, for example, the model, you can also add and define additional attributes
as filter. The additional attributes include, for example, the data type.
● Age for the Conditional Probability of Failure: This age is used for calculating the conditional probability of
failure. For example, you enter 100 days as the age and your equipment has a current age of 50 days, then
the conditional probability of failure is calculated for the age of 100 days given that the equipment has not
failed until the age of 50 days. If you leave the field empty, then the probability of failure is calculated.
● Whether the Installation Date is Maintained and Reliable: If your installation dates are maintained and
reliable, they are used to calculate the age of the equipment at its first failure. If your installation dates are
not maintained or reliable, the first malfunction end date is used to calculate the age of the equipment at
its next failure. For equipment that has failed or been replaced, the date of the replacement is used as the
installation date and the age is set to 0.
● Whether the Equipment is Repairable: If your equipment is repairable, it is restored to a "like-new" condition
and set to the age of 0 once it has been repaired. This age is then used to calculate the age of the
equipment at its next failure. If your equipment is not repairable, the installation dates are used to calculate
the age of the equipment at its failure.

Data Sets
Based on the selection, the system collects the notifications and failure modes for the fleet group that you can
adapt according to your needs:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

406 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 ● Notification Date Range: The notification date range is suggested by the system. The start date is either the
equipment installation date or the malfunction start date of the oldest created notification if the installation
date is not maintained. The end date is always the current date. The range includes all breakdown
notifications of the equipment. You can keep the suggested date range or edit it. You can also add
additional ranges or delete added date ranges. If you define additional ranges, the breakdown notifications
of all ranges are used.

 Note

If a breakdown notification has no failure mode assigned, the notification will only be used by the
algorithm to calculate the time the equipment was down and is otherwise not taken into account.

● Failure Modes: The failure modes are collected from the equipment or the equipment models they belong
to. For each failure mode, the number of breakdown notifications is displayed. You can keep the failure
modes or remove failure modes and add them back. With the failure modes, you can filter the breakdown
notifications so that the results are only calculated for certain failure modes. To get meaningful results, you
should select at least one failure mode.

 Note

The algorithm will only use the failure modes for which breakdown notifications exist.

● Equipment: The equipment is used from the selected fleet group or a new fleet group. You can keep the
selection of equipment or add equipment using the fleet builder and remove equipment.

Model Configuration Training and Scoring

The training and scoring happen successively in one go.

During the training of the model configuration, the Weibull distribution algorithm uses the breakdown
notifications and failure modes together with the information of the first installation date and equipment
repairability to calculate the uptime and downtime of the fleet group. For more information about what is an
uptime and downtime, see the related information link below. The uptimes and downtimes are then used to
produce a Weibull model. The Weibull model includes the shape and scale of the failure curve for the fleet
group.

During the scoring of the model configuration, the algorithm uses the output of the training to calculate the
probability of failure and the other insights, for example, the predicted failure date. With this, the calculation of
the final curve and the insights is complete for the fleet group and the failure modes.
The following graphic illustrates how the input data is used during the training and scoring and what outputs
are produced:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 407
For a successful calculation, the training and scoring need to be completed successfully. The training and
scoring can be repeated at any time. The failure curve always shows the insights for the latest successful
training and scoring. For each training and scoring, the training happens once, and the scoring is repeated
every day by default to produce the latest insights. You can also edit the scoring date range and the recurrence
or turn the reccurence off.

 Note

If you edit the reccurence or turn it off, the insights on the failure curve are not updated by default anymore
on a daily basis.

You can also edit the input data of the model configuration after the training and scoring again. In this case, you
need to repeat the training and scoring of the model configuration so that the failure curve and the insights are
updated.

Model Configuration Statuses

A model configuration can be in any of the following main statuses:

● Inactive: The model configuration has been created, but not yet trained and scored.
● Review: The model configuration has been created and trained successfully at least once, but not yet
scored.
● Active: The model configuration has been trained and scored successfully at least once.

Besides the main statuses, a model configuration can also be in any of the following statuses:

● Collecting Data: The model configuration has been created and the system is collecting the equipment
together with the failure modes and notifications of the equipment.
● Collection Failed: The collection of the failure modes failed because of a technical error. In this case, you
should delete the model configuration and create a new one again. If the issue persists, you need to create
a support ticket.
● Pending: A training or scoring run for the model configuration is in progress.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

408 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Model Configuration Deletion

You can delete a model configuration as long as no training has been started for the model configuration or the
model configuration has not been trained successfully. After the first successful training, you can only copy the
model configuration.

Related Tasks

Managing Model Configurations [page 409]

Related Information

Calculation of Mean Time KPIs [page 63]

6.6.1 Managing Model Configurations

This topic provides you with an overview of all steps for managing model configurations for failure curve
analytics.

Prerequisites

The role FailureCurveAnalyticsUser or the two roles FailureCurveAnalyticsTrainAndScore and

FailureCurveAnalyticsDelete are assigned to your user.

Procedure

1. Create a model configuration. For more information, see Creating a Model Configuration [page 410].

 Remember

If you need to delete the model configuration, consider that you can only delete the model
configuration as long as no training has been started for the model configuration or the model
configuration has not been trained successfully. For more information, see Deleting a Model
Configuration [page 417].

2. Train and score the model configuration. For more information, see Training and Scoring a Model
Configuration [page 413].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 409
Results

The workflow has been completed and the results for failure curve analytics are calculated.

You can always repeat the training and scoring to produce latest results. You can also edit the model
configuration after the scoring again and retrain and rescore the model configuration. For more information
about editing a model configuration, see Editing a Model Configuration [page 415] .

Next Steps

You can now view the failure curve with the different insights for your equipment. For more information, see
Viewing a Failure Curve for Equipment [page 130].

Related Information

Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management [page 405]

6.6.1.1 Creating a Model Configuration

This topic explains how to create a model configuration.

Prerequisites

● You have created failure modes and assigned the failure modes to the relevant equipment or equipment
models that you want to use for failure curve analytics. For more information, see Creating a Failure Mode
[page 177] and Assigning Failure Modes to Business Objects [page 184].
● The notifications for your equipment meet all of the following requirements:
○ The breakdown attribute of the notification is set to True or the notificationTypeDescription
attribute is set to Breakdown.
○ The notification has a valid malfunction start and end date.
○ The notifications have a failure mode assigned.
For more information about all these attributes and how to view and create a notification, see Viewing and
Creating Equipment Notifications [page 123] and Notifications.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

410 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management application.

The Model Configurations screen is displayed. The screen lists all created model configurations with further
information, for example, the status.
2. To create a model configuration, choose between the following options:
○ Create a new configuration based on an existing configuration: Select an existing configuration and
choose Copy. The new model configuration contains all settings of the base configuration.
○ Create a new configuration from scratch: Choose New.

The New Configuration or Copy Configuration dialog box is displayed.

3. In the dialog box, fill in the following fields:

Model Configuration ID Enter the ID for the model configuration.

 Note
You can use the following characters:
○ Uppercase and lowercase letters from a to z
○ Numbers from 0 to 9
○ Most of the special characters
○ Spaces in combination with the other characters

Description Enter a description for the model configuration. You can

enter a description with a maximum number of 256
characters.

Fleet Group Select the group of equipment (fleet group). You can
choose from the following options:

○ Select an existing fleet group by choosing . You

can choose from all fleet groups that have been
created in the Groups application.
○ Create a new fleet group by choosing New and then
select the equipment of the group using the fleet
builder. The new group is then also stored in the
Groups application.

 Note
Consider the following:
○ When you create a new group, do not
include equipment that was sold or shared
before the 2011 release. Otherwise, the
creation of the group may not work.
○ We recommend to only include equipment
used in similar operating conditions.

Age for Conditional Probability of Failure Enter an age for the conditional probability or leave the
field empty.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 411
  Note
If you enter an age, ensure that the age is higher than
the current age of the equipment.

Installation Date is Maintained and Reliable Select whether the installation date for the group of
equipment is maintained or not.

Equipment is Repairable Select whether the group of equipment is repairable or

not.

 Note
If you have non-repairable equipment and a piece of
equipment has been replaced by a new one, ensure
that you add the new piece of equipment to the fleet
group.

4. Choose Save.
The model configuration is created and you are forwarded to the details screen of the configuration where
you can refine the data sets to complete the model configuration.

5. On the details screen, choose Input Data Sets Notification Data Ranges to view the notification date
ranges:
a. To edit the suggested date range, select the range and choose Edit.
b. To define an additional date range, choose Add, select the date and time and save it.
c. To remove a date range, select the range and choose Delete.

6. To view the failure modes, choose Input Data Sets Failure Modes :

All failure modes of the equipment or equipment models are displayed in the list. That means you can only
add a failure mode after you have excluded that failure mode.

 Note

It can take a short while to collect all failure modes. During this time, the failure modes table will be
empty and the respective status for the collection is displayed. Once all failure modes are collected, the
status changes again and the failure modes are displayed in the table. For more information about the
statuses, see Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management [page 405].

a. To exclude failure modes from the analysis, select the failure mode or modes and choose Remove.
b. To include additional failure modes in the analysis, choose Add and select the desired failure mode or
modes.

7. To view the equipment of the fleet group, choose Input Data Sets Equipment :

 Note

Consider the following:

○ You can only edit the equipment of the fleet group if the group is in Revision mode.
○ If you edit the equipment of the fleet group, the failure mode list is not updated immediately. The
list is updated once you start the training and scoring for the model configuration.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

412 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
 ○ If you edit the equipment of the fleet group, the equipment count on the Model Configurations
screen will be updated after 15 minutes.

a. To include additional equipment in the analysis, choose Add and select the desired equipment. You can
choose any equipment.
b. To exclude equipment from the analysis, select the equipment and choose Remove.

Results

The creation of the model configuration is complete.

Per default, all created model configurations are sorted in descending order by the latest training date. You can
sort the model configurations in a different way or search for created model configuration. To sort the model

configurations, choose (Sort). You can later reset the sorting again to the default criteria. To search for a
model configuration, enter the first characters of the name in the search field.

Related Information

Training and Scoring a Model Configuration [page 413]

6.6.1.2 Training and Scoring a Model Configuration

This topic explains how to train and score a model configuration.

Prerequisites

You have created or edited a model configuration.

Procedure

1. (Only relevant if the details screen of the model configuration is not displayed yet): Navigate to the
details screen:
a. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management
application.
b. Choose the model configuration that you want to train and score.

The details screen of the model configuration is displayed.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 413
2. On the details screen, choose Train and Score.

The training run starts showing the status In Progress at the top of the screen, and the logs for the training
run are being created. The status and the logs refresh every 5 seconds.
3. To view the logs and further details, choose Trainings.

 Tip

If you just want to view the status without further details and the logs, you can also go back to the
Model Configurations screen and choose (Refresh). Every time you choose the button, the status
and all other data are refreshed, except for the equipment count.

The logs are displayed in the Last Training Run Logs table. For more information about logs, see Logs [page
415].

Further details, for example, the date range are displayed in the Training Runs table.

Once the training run has finished, the status changes to (Completed) or (Failed).

If the training run has failed, you need to analyze the logs and then start the training and scoring again. If

the training run has been completed, the scoring run automatically starts showing the status (In
Progress) and the logs for the scoring run are being created. The status and the logs refresh every 5
seconds.
4. To view the logs and further details, choose Scorings.

The logs are displayed in the Last Scoring Run Logs table. For more information about logs, see Logs [page
415].

Further details, for example, the date range are displayed in the Scoring Runs table.

Once the scoring run has finished, the status changes to (Completed) or (Failed).

If the scoring run has failed, you need to analyze the logs and then start the training and scoring again.

Results

The model configuration is trained and scored. The scoring repeats based on the recurrence.

You can later edit the scoring date range or the recurrence by choosing Scorings and then Edit under Scoring
Date Range. To turn the recurrence off, set the value of the recurrence to 0.

If you have multiple training and scoring runs for your model configuration and you want to view the logs or
details about a specific run, choose the respective run in the Training Run or Scoring Run tables.

Related Information

Managing Model Configurations [page 409]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

414 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
6.6.1.2.1 Logs

During a training or scoring run, different log entries are created. The log entries are always displayed for the
currently running training or scoring run or the last training or scoring run.

Log Entry

A log entry provides you with information about the steps that are executed during a training and scoring run
and whether a step has been completed successfully or not.

Types of Log Entries

Depending on whether a step has been completed succesfully or not, different types are displayed:

● Information
This type is displayed if a step has been completed successfully, for example, all data has been collected
and processed successfully.
● Warning
This type is displayed if a step has been completed with an exception, for example, if some data has been
excluded or if the conditional probability could not be calculated for all equipment.
● Error
This type is displayed if a step has failed, for example, if the data could not be collected. If an error is
displayed, the training or scoring run fails.

Corellation ID For Support

The correllation ID is displayed for any type and can be used to create a support ticket, for example, for errors
where further clarification is required.

6.6.1.3 Editing a Model Configuration

This topic explains how to edit a model configuration.

Prerequisites

You have created a model configuration or trained and scored the model configuration.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 415
Procedure

1. (Only relevant if the application is not open yet): On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Failure Curve
Analytics Model Configuration Management application.

The Configurations screen is displayed.

2. On the Configurations screen, select the model configuration that you want to edit.

The details screen of the model configuration is displayed.

3. To edit the configuration parameters, choose Edit Header:
a. In the Edit Configuration dialog box, edit the fields.
b. Choose Save.

4. To edit the notification date range, choose Input Data Sets Notification Data Ranges :
a. To edit the suggested date range, select the range and choose Edit.
b. To define an additional date range, choose Add, select the date and time and save it.
c. To remove a date range, select the range and choose Delete.

5. To edit the failure modes, choose Input Data Sets Failure Modes :

All failure modes of the equipment or equipment models are displayed in the list. That means you can only
add a failure mode after you have excluded that failure mode.

 Note

It can take a short while to collect all failure modes. During this time, the failure modes table will be
empty and the respective status for the collection is displayed. Once all failure modes are collected, the
status changes again and the failure modes are displayed in the table. For more information about the
statuses, see Failure Curve Analytics Model Configuration Management [page 405].

a. To exclude failure modes from the analysis, select the failure mode or modes and choose Remove.
b. To include additional failure modes in the analysis, choose Add and select the desired failure mode or
modes.

6. To edit the equipment of the fleet group, choose Input Data Sets Equipment :

 Note

Consider the following:

○ You can only edit the equipment of the fleet group if the group is in Revision mode.
○ If you edit the equipment of the fleet group, the failure mode list is not updated immediately. The
list is updated once you start the training and scoring for the model configuration.
○ If you edit the equipment of the fleet group, the equipment count on the Model Configurations
screen will be updated after 15 minutes.

a. To include additional equipment in the analysis, choose Add and select the desired equipment. You can
choose any equipment.
b. To exclude equipment from the analysis, select the equipment and choose Remove.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

416 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
Results

The model configuration is edited.

Related Information

Training and Scoring a Model Configuration [page 413]

6.6.1.4 Deleting a Model Configuration

This topic explains how to delete a model configuration.

Prerequisites

You have created a model configuration.

 Remember

You can only delete the model configuration as long as no training has been started for the model
configuration or the model configuration has not been trained successfully.

Procedure

1. To delete a model configuration, you can choose between the following options:

○ Delete a single model configuration directly on the details screen: Choose Delete and confirm the
displayed dialog box.
○ Delete a single or multiple model configurations on the Model Configurations screen: Proceed as
described in the steps below:
2. (Only relevant if the application is not open yet): On the SAP Fiori launchpad, open the Failure Curve
Analytics Model Configuration Management application.

The Configurations screen is displayed.

3. On the Configurations screen, select the model configuration or multiple configurations that you want to
delete.
4. Choose Delete and confirm the displayed dialog box.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Machine Learning Engine PUBLIC 417
Results

The model configuration or multiple model configurations are deleted.

Related Information

Managing Model Configurations [page 409]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

418 PUBLIC Machine Learning Engine
7 Administration

The tiles under Administration on the SAP Fiori launchpad give you access to the various administration
functions.

Overview of Administration Functions

Tile Use

Company Profile [page 419] Create/display a company profile. You can add locations of
your organization, subsidiaries and specify industry IDs.

Application Settings [page 430] Execute configuration tasks for roles and users and config-
ure the Explorer and analysis tools.

User Authorizations [page 438] Define a more granular user authorizations to access SAP
Predictive Asset Insights.

Data Protection and Privacy (DPP) [page 446] View details regarding your personal data like e-mail ad­
dress, first name, last name, and user ID and the objects that
you have created or modified.

7.1 Managing Company Profile

As an organization administrator, you can edit your organization’s company profile, add locations of your
organization, add subsidiaries and maintain Industry IDs of your organization in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
You can search for organizations using the industry member names. You can also create locations, contact
persons and industry ID's for a subsidiary.

Prerequisites

Your organization and the users of your organization are successfully registered with SAP Predictive Asset
Insights and you have received the necessary information to logon to the SAP Predictive Asset Insights and use
the applications of SAP Predictive Asset Insights .

Context

You use the Company Profile application to work with the company profile of your organization.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 419
7.1.1 Adding Location Details of your Organization

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE, COMPANYPROFILE_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose Locations.
3. Choose New Location.
4. In the New Location popup, enter the Location Details and Contact Person Details.
1. For Location Details, enter the values for the fields as described in the table below:

Field Description

Location Name (*) Enter the name of your location.

Street/Number Enter the street and house number information for your
location.

Postal Code/City Enter the postal code and city information for your loca­
tion.

Country Enter the country information for your location.

Phone Number Enter the phone number for your location.

2. For Contact Person Details, enter the values for the fields as described in the table below:

 Note

If you want to use the primary contact person details of your base location, select the checkbox
Reuse Primary Contact Person Details.

Field Description

Title Enter the title of your contact person

First Name Enter the first name of your contact person

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

420 PUBLIC Administration
 Field Description

Last Name Enter the last name of your contact person

Phone Number Enter the phone number of your contact person

Email Address Enter the Email address of your contact person

 Note

The information you enter for your contact person will be visible for other companies when they are
viewing your company profile.

Therefore, make sure that your contact person is aware of this system behavior, and you only enter a
contact person whose tasks include to represent your company location to external business partners.

If you change a contact person, the previously entered contact person data gets overwritten with the
new contact person information and cannot be restored.

5. Choose Save.

7.1.2 Updating Location Details of your Organization

Prerequisites

● You have at least one location of your organization in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
● Your user ID has the roles COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE, COMPANYPROFILE_EDIT assigned.
For more information, see Roles.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose Locations and select the location you want to edit.
3. Choose Edit.
4. In the Edit Location pop-up, update the Location Details and Contact Person Details.
5. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 421
7.1.3 Deleting Location Details of your Organization

Prerequisites

● You have at least one location of your organization in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
● Your user ID has the role COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE assigned.
For more information, see Roles.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose Locations and select the location you want to delete.
3. Choose Delete.

○ To delete multiple locations, perform these steps:

1. Choose the List View icon.
2. Select all the locations you wish to delete.
3. Choose Delete.
4. Choose OK on the warning message.

7.1.4 Creating Subsidiary Details

You perform this procedure to add your subsidiary company details to the network.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE, COMPANYPROFILE_EDIT and DOCUMENT_EDIT or

DOCUMENT_DELETE assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose Subsidiaries.
3. Choose New .

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

422 PUBLIC Administration
 4. In the New Subsidiary popup, add the following details:
1. For Subsidiary Details enter the values for the fields as described in the table below:

Field Description

Company Name(*) Name of the subsidiary company

Subsidiary Logo Browse the subsidiary logo and upload

Company Short Name Enter a short name for the subsidiary

Roles (*) Choose the roles from the dropdown

Th following roles are available:

○ Bill-To Party
○ Insurer
○ Manufacturer
○ Operator
○ Regulator/Authority
○ Retailer
○ Service Provider
○ Ship-To Party
○ Software Partner/Content Partner
○ Sold-To Party
○ Supplier / Dealer

Mnemonics Enter informal names (for example, obsolete company

names, abbreviations or potential wrong spellings) of
the subsidiary company that may be used for search.

Street/Number Enter the street and house number information for the
subsidiary

Postal Code Enter the postal code information for the subsidiary

City Enter the city information for the subsidiary

Country Enter the country information for the subsidiary

Phone Number Enter the phone number of the subsidiary

Web Site (*) Enter the URL of the subsidiary Web site

Acquired Subsidiary Specify if your organization has acquired the subsidiary.

 Note
Yes/No is a toggle button. If Yes, specify the date
you acquired the subsidiary company.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 423
 Field Description

Contact Person Details Enter the contact person title, first name, last name,
phone number, and e-mail address

2. For Contact Person Details enter the values for the fields as described in the table below:

 Note

The information you enter for subsidiary contact person will be visible for other companies when
they are viewing the subsidiary information in your company profile.

Therefore, make sure that your subsidiary organization is aware of this, and you only enter a
subsidiary contact person whose tasks include to represent the subsidiary externally.

If you change a subsidiary contact person, the previously entered subsidiary contact person data
gets overwritten with the new subsidiary contact person information and cannot be restored.

Field Desccription

Title Enter the title of the subsidiary contact person

First Name Enter the first name of the subsidiary contact person

Last Name Enter the last name of the subsidiary contact person

Phone Number Enter the phone number of the subsidiary contact per­
son

Email Address Enter the Email address of the subsidiary contact per­
son

5. Choose Save.

Results

The subsidiary company, as a separate entity, cannot create or access business objects in the network.

 Note

You can also create locations and industry IDs for subsidiaries. To do so, open the subsidiary and choose
Locations or Industry IDs to maintain the respective information.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

424 PUBLIC Administration
7.1.5 Viewing Company Profile

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE, COMPANYPROFILE_READ, or COMPANYPROFILE_EDIT

assigned.

For more information, see Roles.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose Locations to view the locations of an organization.
3. Choose Subsidiaries to view the list of all the subsidiary companies or acquired companies of an
organization.

Choose Industry IDs to view or search for member IDs or member name as SAP Asset Intelligence Network
account has in a specific industry group.

7.1.6 Recording Industry ID Information

You perform this activity to maintain the unique reference number (for example, a vendor ID, a manufacturer
ID) your company has with a standard organization that issues such unique IDs.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE, COMPANYPROFILE_EDIT assigned.

For more information, see Roles.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose the Industry IDs tab.
3. Choose New.
4. In the New window, under the Industry ID Detail, fill in Industry Group, Member ID and Member Name.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 425
5. Choose .

7.1.7 Maintaining External Organizations

This procedure allows you to maintain the external organizations along with external IDs.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE, COMPANYPROFILE_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose External Organizations.
3. Choose New.

Enter the external organization details like company name, logo, address, roles, country, phone number,
website, and so on.
4. Choose Save.

Results

You can maintain the external IDs for each of these external organizations by selecting the organization and
choosing External IDs. You can add, edit, or delete external IDs here.

 Note

● Only you can view your external organizations. No other organizations can see External Organizations
tab when they visit my company profile.
● Premium as well as invitee accounts can now create external organizations within their account. These
external organizations are only visible to the account holder.
● On business object lists and business object details, you can view the name of external organizations
that do not belong to your organization, but you cannot navigate to the details of such a foreign
external organization.
● You can now create more than one external organizations with the same name for a given premium or
invitee in SAP Asset Intelligence Network.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

426 PUBLIC Administration
7.1.8 Editing Company Profile

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role COMPANYPROFILE_DELETE, COMPANYPROFILE_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Open the Company Profile application.

2. Choose Edit to edit your Company Details and your Primary Contact Person Details

a. In the Edit Company Profile Company Details dialog box, enter the values for the fields as
described in the table below:

Field Description

Company Name (*) Enter your company name.

Web Site (*) Enter the URL of your company Web site

Company Logo Browse for and upload the logo of your company.

 Note
The logo will be displayed on the Company Profile,
on the Company Details, as well as on list views/
grid views that show company information.

Background Image Upload a background image for your company.

Company Short Name Enter your company short name

 Note
This short name will be displayed in list/grid views
(for example, in Business Partner app), and value
helps (for example, Manufacturer/Operator/Serv­
ice Provider value helps) if it is mainatined.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 427
 Field Description

Roles (*) Select additional roles for your company from the drop­
down.

 Note
The selected roles will indicate to your business
partners in which roles you participate in SAP
Predictive Asset Insights .

The role selection here also adds your company

name to the respective value helps.

Mnemonics Enter informal names (e.g. obsolete company names,

abbreviations or potential wrong spellings) for your
company that other business partners may search for.

Example:

In Company Profile you entered SAP SE as company

name. Some of your business partner may still know
your company as SAP AG. If you enter SAP AG in the
mnemonic field, business partners in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights who still search by SAP AG will find you
under the official company name SAP SE.

Street/Number Enter the street and house number information for your
company.

Postal Code/City Enter the postal code and city information for your com­
pany

Country Enter the country information for your company

State/Region Enter the state and region information for your com­
pany

Phone Number Enter the phone number for your company.

b. In the Edit Company Profile Primary Contact Person Details dialog box, enter the values for the
fields as described in the table below:

 Note

The information you enter for your primary contact person will be visible for other companies when
they are viewing your company profile.

Therefore, make sure that your primary contact person is aware of this system behavior, and you
only enter a primary contact person whose tasks include to represent your company to external
business partners.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

428 PUBLIC Administration
 If you change a contact person, the previously entered contact person data gets overwritten with
the new contact person information and cannot be restored.

Field Description

Title Enter the title of your primary contact person

First Name Enter the first name of your primary contact person

Last Name Enter the last name of your primary contact person

Phone Number Enter the phone number of your primary contact per­
son

Email Address Enter the Email address of your primary contact person

3. Choose Save.

7.2 Configuring the Document Category

To ensure complete documentation for assets such as models, or equipment, an SAP administrator configures
the significance of a document category at the subclass level. As an organization admin, you can set the
preference of the document category at the subclass level.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles TEMPLATE_DELETE or TEMPLATE_EDIT assigned.

For more information, see Roles.
● You have identified the subclass for which you want to configure the documents.

Context

The preference set by the organization administrator overrides the preference set by the SAP administrator for
the document category.

Procedure

1. Open the Templates application.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 429
2. Search for a subclass template.
3. Select a subclass template from the search results.
4. In the Template screen, select the DOCUMENT CATEGORIES tab.
5. In the DOCUMENT CATEGORIES section, choose Edit and update the category configuration for model and
category configuration for equipment as appropriate.
6. Choose Save.

7.3 Application Settings

You must be an organization administrator to perform the activities using Application Settings.

You can perform the following tasks with this application:

● Users
○ Create user information (see Creating User Details [page 432]).
○ Update user information (see Updating User Details [page 435]).
○ Delete user information (see Deleting User Details [page 435]).
○ Granting Access to Invitee Users in
● External Systems
● Object Types
The object types are used for external systems integration.
To support external object ID mapping, you are provided with a capability to add custom object type, in
case a relevant object type is missing in the standard list using Application Settings Object type
Add .
You can use it later for corresponding External ID mapping in Company Profile app.
● You can add new object types using the Add button.

 Note

You will not be able to add a new object type, if the name of object type that you create is the same as
an existing SAP delivered object type. Before you create your own object, please use the External ID API
to check the SAP delivered object types.

● General Application Settings

○ Configure document size limit: Use this functionality to set the maximum document size limit. This
setting determines the allowed maximum upload size of your documents from the Documents
application. For more information, see Configuring Document Upload Size [page 437]
○ Configure Prefix: Configuring the Prefix for the Object ID of your Organization [page 436].
Objects created in the will have IDs generated for them. You have to define the prefix in the Application
Settings app. For example, for instruction the ID can be I. ABCD.1, where <ABCD> is the prefix defined
by you. Another example for ID for a document can be D.ABCD.1.

 Note

Only premium account holders can maintain prefix. The prefix is valid for its invitees as well. Prefix
maintenance section is made noneditable for the invitee administrators.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

430 PUBLIC Administration
 ○ Maintain customer-specific list of object types. In the reusable dialog to maintain external IDs, you can
optionally select the previously maintained object types to create multiple <External IDs for a
system>.
○ In the section Organizational Configurations you can:
○ Enable User Authorization, and Spare Parts Obsolescence.
○ Define the Retention Period for the deleted users after which the users will be permanently deleted
from the system.
For more details also refer to Deletion of Personal Data in the Security Information for SAP Asset
Intelligence Network.
You can set a the maximum limit of retention period as follows:
○ Years: maximum of 2 years
○ Months: maximum of 24 months
○ Weeks: maximum of 104 weeks
○ Days: maximum of 730 days
○ Define retention period for off-boarding objects.
As a Premium account, you can set a retention period for your business objects. This retention
period will be applied after the offboarding of an organization to all not shared business objects,
which may still be available in the offboarded organization’s account.

 Note

Retention period for business objects is set by the Premium account only, that is, the
maintained period is also applied to the Premium’s Invitees’ business objects.

You can set a the maximum limit of retention period as follows:

○ Years: maximum of 2 years
○ Months: maximum of 24 months
○ Weeks: maximum of 104 weeks
○ Days: maximum of 730 days
○ Define the Default Scope (in case your organization is working with multiple scopes).
○ Under General Application Settings Bar Code Configurations , you can define the <Prefix> and
<Suffix>. You can then use the RFID feature in the Lookup application in devices that support RFID
reader.
○ You can define Personal Dashboard app as the entry point for your invitee accounts by enabling
Personal Dashboard as Landing Page under General Application Settings Invitee Configuration .
○ If you have the admin role AC_CUSTOMER_ADMIN, you can view a new section General Application
Settings General Application Settings Tenant Data Deletion . You can select the equipment and/or
locations and choose Delete. The unshared objects as per the selection will be deleted from the tenant.

 Note

○ This feature is applicable only for dev and test tenants and not for production.
○ Tenant data deletion of equipment will not delete equipment data that is synced to IoT
services.

● Object Page Configurations

○ You can maintain the default configuration settings for the equipment, model, and system object page
under Object Page Configurations. Choose Edit to change the default settings.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 431
  Note

Object page configuration will not be the same for all the users. As each user can override it as a
personalization with the Confgure Sections in the relevant object page, in which case that is given
preference. You can reset the deafult settings configured in the Object Page Configurations for the
user by choosing Configure Sections Reset to Default in the relevant object pages. Please
note that this setting has to be done by individual users and cannot be set by an administrator.

● Extensions
● Header Status
○ You can maintain 2 default indicator names in the header information of all the equipment in your
organization using the Header Status section.
● Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration
○ Configure the Explorer and analysis tools (see Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]).

7.3.1 Configuration Tasks

As an organization admin, you perform several configuration tasks.

The following list provides the list of tasks that an administrator performs:

● Assign roles to the users of your organization .

● Configure the Application Settings (see Application Settings [page 430]).
● Configure documents at subclass level (see Configuring the Document Category [page 429]).
● User Management
○ Creating User Details [page 432]
○ Updating User Details [page 435]
○ Deleting User Details [page 435]

7.3.1.1 Creating User Details

As an administrator you can add the details of the users of your organization to SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Prerequisites

● Preliminary steps in other applications:

○ In the Administration console for Identity Authentication, the user groups required for your SAP
Intelligent Asset Management scenario have already been created. Users have been created and
assigned to one or more user groups.
○ In SAP BTP Cockpit, the role collections for your SAP Intelligent Asset Management scenario have
already been created. The role collections you created before have been mapped to the user groups
you created before.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

432 PUBLIC Administration
  Note

By mapping the role collections with the user groups, you ensure that the users you assign to a user
group have the respective set of role templates assigned that allow them to perform their intended
actions in SAP Intelligent Asset Management.

For more information on the trust configuration, refer to the process steps described in Configuring Trust
Configuration.
● Your user ID has the role CONFIGURATION_DELETE, CONFIGURATION_EDIT assigned. For more
information, see Roles and Role Collections.

Procedure

1. Log on to SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

2. Open the Application Settings application.

3. Navigate to Users Add .

a. Choose Add Single User to add a single user only.

Enter the user ID, first and last name, email address and organization name.

 Note

The user IDs you assign depends on the SAP Identity Authorization Service (IAS) configuration
within your subaccount. The NameID format used for SAML authorization decides whether the
user ID has to be the email address or the user ID available in SAP IAS.

b. Choose Mass Upload Users to add at multiple users.

a. Download the CSV template.
b. Enter the user ID, first and last name, email address and organization name in the template.

 Note

Email address is optional.

 Note

The user IDs you assign depends on the Identity Provider configuration within your
subaccount. The NameID format used for SAML authorization decides whether the user ID has
to be the email address or the user ID available in SAP IAS.

c. Upload the CSV template with the user information.

4. Choose Save.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 433
Example

You want to add a new user - Jane Doe - as Administrator with additional DPP tasks for your own organization
My Org.

● Preliminary steps in other applications:

○ In the Administration console for Identity Authentication
○ (Under Users & Authorizations User Groups )
You’ve created a user group MY_ORG_ADMINS_DPP.
○ In SAP BTP Cockpit
○ (Under Security Role Collections ).
You’ve created a role collection MY_ORG_ADMINS_DPP. This role collection contains the
following role templates: AC_ORG_DATA_EXPERT; AIN_ORG_DATA_EXPERT; DPP_AUTH.

 Note

You can flexibly define your role collections based on the delivered role templates for your
subscribed applications.

○ (Under Security Trust Configuration <your default identity provider> Role Collection
Mappings ). You’ve mapped your role collection with your user group:
○ Role Collection: MY_ORG_ADMINS_DPP
○ Attribute: Groups
○ Operator: equals
○ Value: MY_ORG_ADMINS_DPP
○ In the Administration console for Identity Authentication
○ (Under Users & Authorizations Users )
You’ve created a user for Jane Doe (for example, [email protected]).
You’ve assigned the user group = MY_ORG_ADMINS_DPP to Jane Doe’s user.
● In SAP Intelligent Asset Management
○ Choose Application Settings Users Add Add Single User .
Enter the relevant information for Jane Doe:
○ First Name: Jane
○ Last Name: Doe
○ Organization Name: <select your own organization> (for example, My Org)
○ User ID: <select the User ID in the format expected by your identity provider configuration> (for
example, [email protected])
○ Email Address: [email protected]
Result: Jane Doe can access the SAP IAM applications for her company (= My Org) and do her tasks
based on the role collection assigned to her user.

Related Information

https://help.sap.com/viewer/d89bac86aa294f75afdc40dca457dd7b/latest/en-US/
1dea2469d10a4788bb28d91a6b92828a.html

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

434 PUBLIC Administration
7.3.1.2 Updating User Details

If your organization possesses a premium account, as an administrator you can update the details of the users
of your organization and your supplier organization in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Prerequisites

● Your user ID has the roles CONFIGURATION_DELETE or CONIFIGURATION_EDIT assigned.

● The users that you create have been assigned predefined roles to access and perform appropriate actions
using applications .

Procedure

1. Open the Application Settings application.

2. Choose Users.
3. Choose More on a user tile, and choose Edit.
4. In the Edit User pop-up, update the user details.
5. Choose Save.

7.3.1.3 Deleting User Details

You perform this procedure to remove the user from SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the role CONFIGURATION_DELETE assigned.

For more information, see Roles.

Procedure

1. Open the Application Settings application.

2. Choose Users My Users Users.

3. Select the user you want to delete.
4. Choose Delete.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 435
5. Choose OK on the warning message.
6. Open your BTP account.

7. Navigate to the Security Authorizations tab.

8. Choose the respective role and unassign the user ID from the role.

7.3.1.4 Configuring the Prefix for the Object ID of your

Organization

You perform this activity to configure the Instruction ID, Document ID, Announcement ID, Notification ID, and
Work Order ID for your organization. Setting a prefix from the Application Settings app determines the object ID
while you are creating an instruction, document, announcement, notification, and work order from the
respective applications for your organization.

Prerequisites

Your user ID is configured to the group ORG_ADMIN or ORG_DATA_EXPERT.

Procedure

1. Launch the Application Settings application.

2. Choose the General Application Settings tab.
3. In the Prefix for Objects created field, input a prefix of 4 characters.
4. Click Save.

 Note

○ This is a one-time activity and you cannot modify or delete the prefix at a later point in time.
○ Only premium account holders can maintain prefix. The prefix is valid for its invitees as well. Prefix
maintenance section is made non-editable for the invitee administrators.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

436 PUBLIC Administration
7.3.1.5 Configuring Document Upload Size

You perform this activity using the Application Settings application to set the document size limit for upload.
This setting determines the document upload size in Documents application.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has role CONFIGURATION_DELETE or CONFIGURATION_EDIT assigned.

Procedure

1. Launch the Application Settings application.

2. Choose the General Application Settings tab.
3. Choose Edit.
4. Enter the upload size of your choice.
5. Choose OK.

7.3.1.6 Configuring Default Indicators in the Header Status

You perform this activity to display default indicators in the header status of a piece of equipment. You can
maintain 2 default indicator names in the header information of all the equipment in your organization.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has role CONFIGURATION_EDIT assigned.

Context

You can have exceptions for the default header status based on the subclass used by a piece of equipment. You
can define a different set of indicators to be displayed for a listed subclass instead of the default using the Class
Configurations.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 437
Procedure

1. Launch the Application Settings application.

2. Choose the Equipment under Header Status tab.
3. Choose Edit.
4. Configure the 2 default status by selecting from the dropdown menu.
5. As an optional step, you can maintain the statuses to be displayed for different subclass under Class
Configurations.

You can add, edit, or remove the entries.

6. Choose Save.

 Note

The indicators are visible in the header information of a piece of equipment only if the indicators are
assigned to the equipment and values are defined for the indicators.

7.4 User Authorizations

For SAP BTP, Cloud Foundry Environment

You use this feature to define a more granular access to SAP Predictive Asset Insights business objects for
users within your organization.

You can use the User Authorization app to:

● Create an organizational hierarchy.

● Assign the following to a node in the organizational hierarchy:
○ Role Collections
○ Business Objects
○ Groups
● Edit the organization hierarchy and its assigned objects.
● Delete a node from the organizational hierarchy.

Role collections get assigned to one or more nodes in the organization hierarchy. Users who are part of a user
group that is mapped to a role collection (which is assigned to a node in the organizational hierarchy) have
access to:

● The business objects and groups assigned to the relevant node in the hierarchy.
● The business objects and groups assigned to the sub-nodes of a relevant parent node in the organizational
hierarchy.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

438 PUBLIC Administration
  Note

● The administrator of your organization must be assigned to the root node or parent organizational level
in your organizational hierarchy to have access to all the business objects in your organization.
● The level of authorization for each user is defined under <Privilege>.
● If a role collection is assigned to multiple nodes in the organizational hierarchy, then the privilege
maintained on the highest level is by default inherited to the sub-nodes. If required you can also edit an
inherited privilege on a sub-node.

Prerequisites
The following objects and object relationships have been configured in SAP Identity Services and SAP BTP
cockpit:

● In SAP Identity Sevices:

○ User groups created
○ Users assigned to user groups

 Note

Users can also be added to user groups at a later point in time.

● In SAP BTP cockpit:

○ Role Collections created
○ Mapping of User groups to Role Collections done

 Note

All these set-up steps are not specific to User Authorization but should already have been done
during the setting up of roles and onboarding of users to your account.

For more details on these steps, refer to https://help.sap.com/ under Security Guide User
Onboarding Setting up Roles and Onboarding Users .

Process Overview
● Enable User authorization in Application Settings General Application Settings Organizational
Configurations .
● Create an organizational hierarchy for your organization in User Authorization app.

 Note

Currently, you can have only one organizational hierarchy for your organization.

● Assign role collections to the nodes in your organizational hierarchy in User Authorization app.
● Assign business objects to the nodes in your organizational hierarchy in User Authorization app. You can
directly assign business objects to the nodes in your organizational hierarchy in User Authorization app,
create a group in Groups app and assign business objects to this group, and then assign the group to a
node in your organizational hierarchy in User Authorization app.

Example
Company B wants to provide a more granular access to business objects for their internal users, so that their
users can only access business objects that are assigned to their area of responsibility. In the example:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 439
● Equipment 2 is to be visible for users assigned to Germany
● Equipment 3 is to be visible for users assigned to Germany - North
● Equipment 3 and 4 are to be visible for users assigned to Germany - South
● Equipment 5 is to be visible for users assigned to Switzerland
● Equipment 6 are to be visible for users assigned to Switzerland - North
● Equipment 7 are to be visible for users assigned to Switzerland - South
● Equipment 1 is to be visible for all areas

 Note

The following example is based on a simple country or region structure, but you can flexibly model other
structural elements as well according to your needs.

1. Authorized user at Company B enables user authorization in Application Settings General Application
Settings Organizational Configurations .
2. Authorized user at Company B creates an organizational hierarchy in User Authorization app:
1. Create root node Company B.
2. Create child node Company B Germany .
3. Create 2 child nodes Company B Germany Germany North and Company B Germany
Germany South
4. Create a second child node under the root node Company B Switzerland .
5. Create 2 child nodes Company B Switzerland Switzerland North and Company B
Switzerland Switzerland South
3. Authorized user at Company B assigns role collections to the respective nodes in the organizational
hierarchy:
1. Assign an admin role collection (= role collection to which your admin user group is assigned) to the
root node Company B and provide respective privileges, which the user is to have on the business
objects
Users assigned to the user group which is mapped to the role collection that is assigned to the root
node can access all of the business objects assigned to the child nodes with the maintained privilege.

 Note

It is recommended to add at least one admin user as well as substitutes to the admin user group
assigned to the root node to ensure that there is always at least one user in the organization who
has full access to all objects.

2. Assign other role collections to the respective nodes in the organizational structure and provide
respective privileges the users in the associated user group are to have on the business objects.
Role collections can be assigned to one or more nodes in the organizational structure. If a role
collection is assigned to a node, which has further child nodes, the users in the associated user group
can access the business objects assigned to the current node as well as all of the child nodes with the
maintained privilege.
Result: Authorized user of Company B created their organizational hierarchy and assigned role collections.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

440 PUBLIC Administration
 4. Authorized user at Company B assigns equipment to the relevant nodes in the organizational hierarchy in
User Authorization app.
1. Assign Equipment 1, 2, 5, and 8 to node Company B Germany .
2. Assign Equipment 6 and 7 to node Company B Germany Germany South .
3. Assign Equipment 3, 4, and 8 to node Company B Switzerland .
Result:
Authorized user of Company B assigned all relevant business objects to the relevant nodes in the
organizational hierarchy.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 441
  Note

Once a business object was assigned to a node in the organizational hierarchy, this business object is only
visible to the users assigned to the user groups which are mapped to one or more role collections that are
assigned to the respective node in the organizational hierarchy.

Business objects that are not assigned to the organizational hierarchy, are still accessible to everyone in the
organization.

Example:Equipment 2 was assigned to hierarchy node Company B Germany, so only users who belong to a
user group that is mapped to the role collections assigned to hierarchy node Company B Germany and have
either EQUIPMENT_READ or EQUIPMENT_EDIT or EQUIPMENT_DELETE privileges can now view, edit, or
delete this equipment.

Equipment 10 was not/neither directly assigned to a node in the authorization hierarchy nor belongs to any
group which is assigned to a node in the authorization hierarchy, so all users of Company B with
EQUIPMENT_READ or EQUIPMENT_EDIT or EQUIPMENT_DELETE privileges can view, edit, or delete this
equipment.

7.4.1 Creating Organizational Hierarchy

You perform this activity to define a new organizational hierarchy for your organization.

Prerequisites

Your user ID has the roles USER_AUTH_DELETE, or USER_AUTH_EDIT assigned.

For more information, see Roles.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

442 PUBLIC Administration
Procedure

Creating Single Organizational Unit

1. Open the User Authorization app.

2. Choose New Single Organizational Unit .

3. In the New Organizational Unit dialog box, provide the appropriate organizational unit name, short and
long descriptions.
4. Choose OK.
Creating Multiple Organizational Units
5. Open the User Authorization app.

6. Choose New Multiple Organizational Units .

7. In the Multiple Organizational Units dialog box, download the CSV template.
8. Enter the organizational unit name, short and long descriptions, row ID and parent row ID name in the
template.

 Note

○ Root organization is an organization that does not have any parent organization unit. It is
mandatory for every organization to have parent organization except for root organizations.
○ You can have only one root organization.
○ You cannot maintain duplicate organization entries

9. Upload the CSV template with the organizational information.

 Note

Upload CSV can only be used if there is no organizational units created or maintained in the
organization structure.

10. Choose Upload.

Results

System creates a node or multiple nodes in the organizational hierarchy to which you can add users, business
objects, and groups.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 443
7.4.2 Assigning Business Objects

Context

You perform this activity to assign the relevant business objects to the selected node in the organizational
hierarchy.

Procedure

1. Open the User Authorizations app.

2. Select a node in the organizational hierarchy.
3. Select the relevant business object like model, locations in the Business Objects section in the object page
of the selected node. For example, you have selected Models.
4. Choose Assign in the Models section.
5. Select the relevant models in the Select Models window. Choose Select.

Select the dependent objects that you want to assign. You can share the following business objects:
○ Models
○ Equipment
○ Functional Locations
○ Announcements
○ Templates
○ Documents
○ Instructions
○ Locations
○ Spare Parts
○ Systems
○ Failure Modes
You can only assign published failure modes to the selected node in the organizational hierarchy.
○ Attributes
○ Attribute Groups
○ Indicators
○ Indicator Groups
○ Code Lists
○ Work Orders

 Note

By default, all the dependents are selected.

6. Choose Assign to save the changes.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

444 PUBLIC Administration
7.4.3 Assigning Groups

You perform this activity to assign the relevant groups to the selected node in the organizational hierarchy.

Prerequisites

You have created one or more groups in the Groups app. You have assigned the business objects that you want
to use for user authorization to these groups.

Procedure

1. Open the User Authorizations app.

2. Select a node in the organizational hierarchy.
3. Choose Assign in the Groups tab in the object page of the selected node.
4. Select the relevant groups in the Select Groups window. Choose Select.

Select the dependent objects that you want to assign.

 Note

By default, all the dependents are selected.

5. Choose Assign to save the changes.

7.4.4 Deleting an Organizational Unit

Context

You perform this activity to delete an existing node from the organizational hierarchy.

Procedure

1. Open the User Authorizations app.

2. Select the node from the organizational hierarchy that you want to delete.
3. Choose Delete in the object page of the selected node

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 445
4. Choose OK on the confirmation message dialog box.

7.4.5 Assigning Role Collections

Context

 Note

This topic is only relevant for SAP BTP, Cloud Foundry environment.

You perform this activity to add role collections to the selected node in the organizational hierarchy.

 Note

All the assigned role collections have authorizations to access all the business objects and groups
associated with the node in the organizational hierarchy at this level and all the subnodes of this level.

Procedure

1. Open the User Authorization app.

2. Select a node in the organizational hierarchy.
3. Select Edit in the Role Collections section of the organizational hierarchy object page.
4. Choose Assign.
5. Select the relevant role collections in the Select Role Collections window.
6. Choose Add.
7. Define the level of authorization for each role collections in the Privilege field.

By default, the role collections have read access.

8. Choose Save.

7.5 Data Protection and Privacy (DPP)

Data protection is associated with numerous legal requirements and privacy concerns. In addition to
compliance with general data privacy regulation, it is necessary to consider compliance with industry-specific
legislation in different countries. SAP provides specific features and functions to support compliance with
regards to relevant legal requirements, including data protection.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

446 PUBLIC Administration
SAP does not give any advice on whether these features and functions are the best method to support
company, industry, regional, or country-specific requirements. Furthermore, this information does not give any
advice or recommendation in regards to additional features that would be required in particular IT
environments; decisions related to data protection must be made on a case-by-case basis, under consideration
of the given system landscape and the applicable legal requirements.

Introduction

The Data Protection and Privacy (DPP) application can be used by data subjects and data admins. As a data
subject, you can view your own personal data stored in SAP Predictive Asset Insights. A data admin can view
and delete one's own personal data and personal data of any other data subject.

Related Information

Information Report [page 447]

7.5.1 Information Report

The DPP application supports you to be compliant with the Information Report section of Data Privacy and
Protection.

You can view details regarding your personal data like e-mail address, first name, last name, and user ID and
the objects that you have created or modified.

If you have an admin role, then you can view the list of users, their personal data, and the list of objects that
each user has created or modified. If the user is a functional location or company profile contact person, then
you can view their personal data as well as relevant address details.

In SAP Predictive Asset Insights, a user can view the personal data whereas a user with the admin role can
delete or remove own personal data or personal data of any other data subject.

Related Information

Data Protection and Privacy (DPP) [page 446]

7.6 Mass API Dashboard

You can view a list of jobs triggered for the mass API. The details of the successful and failed request is also
displayed.

You can view a list of successful and failed status for a request.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 447
You can further view the request and response for successful status. For failed status an error is displayed and
you can view the request and error response.

7.7 Equipment Technical Sync Dashboard

You can use this feature to check the current or intermediate status of all equipment that is in the process of
being synchronized with SAP Internet of Things.

By default, the logs display the synchronization status of a piece of equipment for the last one hour. The
various synchronization statuses are as below:

● SYNC IN PROGRESS: This status appears when the events are being processed.
● SYNC FAILURE: This status appears for a failed synchronization.
● SYNC COMPLETED: This status appears after the synchronization completes successfully.

7.8 Manage Workflows

SAP Workflow Service lets you build, run, and manage workflows, from simple approvals to end-to-end
processes that span across organizations and apps. With an inbox app and custom-built UIs, you involve end
users into business processes for decision making and data entry. The service comes with web-based tools for
workflow modeling, APIs for consumption in custom apps, monitoring tools, and Fiori-based apps for end-user
access. You can use JavaScript to embed custom business logic.

The asset central foundation app only provides event-based integration with workflows that are modeled using
the SAP Workflow service.

Integration of Workflows with Asset Central Foundation

Based on the action that has to be performed in asset central foundation, the relevant events are triggered. For
example, upon publishing a piece of equipment, a workflow can be created for further actions or assessments.
We can configure SAP Workflow Service in asset central foundation based on the following events:

● Equipment:
○ Create
○ Publish
○ Delete
○ Share
● Models:
○ Create
○ Publish

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

448 PUBLIC Administration
 ○ Delete
○ Share
● Locations:
○ Create
○ Publish
○ Delete

Configuring a Workflow

Prerequisite:
You must have a separate subscription to SAP Workflow to model workflows and use the asset central
foundation workflow application. Refer to SAP Workflow Service .

You can configure theSAP Workflow Service for the asset central foundation by following the steps explained in
this topic:

1. Customer workflow subscription

Go to customer account space and service market place and subscribe to workflow. For more information,
see Prepare to Create Workflows in SAP BTP .
2. Create workflow instance
You can create workflow instance by going inside workflow service and new instance. Once you create an
instance, you get client id and secret by which can be used in a destination creation that communicates to
asset central foundation.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 449
  Note

The workflow instance used to create the destination must include the WORKFLOW_DEFINITION_GET
and WORKFLOW_INSTANCE_START roles. See sample code:

 Sample Code

{"authorities": ["WORKFLOW_DEFINITION_GET","WORKFLOW_INSTANCE_START"]}

The workflow_rest_url, clientid, clientsecret, and url are used to configure the destination.
3. Create workflow destination
○ Go to subaccount and create new destination with <name>_workflow.
○ It is of basic authentication and user, password is client id secret we got in previous step.
○ An additional property content-endpoint also needs to be added. The value for the field would be
workflow_rest_url (from step 2)

These are the only configurations required for asset central foundation to access the workflow service.

Configuring Workflow Applications for SAP Intelligent Asset Management Fiori launchpad

Optionally, you can configure the Monitor Workflow apps in the SAP Fiori launchpad. For more information, see
Create Workflow and My Inbox Tiles on SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Creating Custom Fiori Launchpad

1. Download the relevant FLP content. Refer to the 'Upgrade Custom FLP Content' in the Update Guide.
2. You can use Create Workflow and My Inbox Tiles on SAP Fiori Launchpad to integrate the workflow
applications in the relevant asset central foundation fiori launchpad that you have downloaded.
3. You have to add a configuration code for workflows apps in CommonDataModel.json under the portal
portal-site file of the relevant product content that you have downloaded.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

450 PUBLIC Administration
 Here is a sample code for configuring te workflow apps:

How to Use Workflow in Asset Central Foundation

Use
To automate the process of triggering a workflow (directly from asset central foundation), you can configure
asset central events like publish, delete to initiate the workflow. The workflow is initiated when the event is
performed. The workflow can be modeled to meet various business scenarios.

1. Go to Manage Workflows application.

2. Select New.
3. In the New Workflow Mapping, select the <Event Type>. Select the <Workflow> for the event type.

 Note

Only the workflows that are available in the subaccount where you have configured the destination will
be displayed here.

4. Choose Save.

Context Data For a Workflow

You receive a JSON object as a context data to be used in a workflow. The format is similar to the sample code:

 Sample Code

{
"id": "1eccfbd1-057f-4aa6-8ba4-ec63deba7ae1",
"source": "com.sap.dsc.ac.equipment",
"specversion": "1.0-rc1",
"type": "header.update",
"datacontenttype": "application/json",
"time": "1576125244",
"objectid": "C030AA04F27446E2A8710D399A614534",
"objectownerid": "D1080120A941602F16006F0265F15AD4",
"correlationid": "2a6dab34-58d5-48d7-8345-58421d9fa75a",

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 451
 "triggeredorgid": "D1080120A941602F16006F026yty15AD4"
}

Field Description

id unique id for the message

source the relevant business object that the workflow is initiated for
like, equipment, model, and so on.

specversion Event cloud version

type specifies the event type

datacontenttype json

time time at which the event is created

objectid specifies the id of the object for which the workflow is initi­
ated

objectownerid the business partner id to which the object belongs

correlationid used for asset central foundation log

triggeredorgid the business partner who is performing the action

● id:
● source

Result
Wherever the event is performed, the relevant workflow is triggered.

Related Information

https://help.sap.com/viewer/product/WORKFLOW_SERVICE/Cloud/en-US
https://developers.sap.com/group.cp-workflow-cf.html
https://help.sap.com/viewer/e157c391253b4ecd93647bf232d18a83/Cloud/en-US/
60ae81179050478caa4212fad4ba50f2.html

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

452 PUBLIC Administration
7.8.1 Creating Sample App and Trigger from Asset Central
Foundation

This topic describes the steps to create a sample app and trigger from asset central foundation.

Sample Scenario:

1. Create a workflow application using SAP Web IDE Full-Stack. For more information, see Enablе the
Workflow Editor in SAP Web IDE.

1. When a piece of equipment is published, a review workflow is initiated to a configured user.

2. The reviewer can add their comment and Accept or Reject the workflow.
3. If the reviewer accepts the workflow, it ends the workflow. If they reject it, then a follow-up task is
issued for the user who last changed the published equipment.
4. To access the public APIs in asset central foundation, a destination has to be created. For example,
GetToken is the destination created.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 453
 Destination is of type oAuth2 and client id and secret is from asset-central broker token.

2. Add event to asset central foundation.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

454 PUBLIC Administration
 Open asset central foundation SAP Fiori launchpad and go to Administration. Select and add workflow
against the event.

Once the mapping is complete, the event action triggers the workflow, that user can see in its workflow
SAP Fiori launchpad bound to application. The URL of workflow SAP Fiori launchpad is basically the
endpoint of app router URL, which is used while developing workflow app.
3. Launch workflow SAP Fiori launchpad.
You can go to the cockpit or cloud foundry app to view SAP Fiori launchpad app router URL.

4. Publish equipment.
As per the previous configurations, any publish of equipment triggers asset workflow. Based on the API
call, it fetches the data and displays in the inbox to be approved or rejected based on data.
Based on your requirement, you can add any custom logic to the workflow.

Optionally, you can configure the Monitor Workflow apps in the SAP Fiori launchpad. For more information, see
Create Workflow and My Inbox Tiles on SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Administration PUBLIC 455
8 Configuring SAP Predictive Asset
Insights

Context

To configure SAP Predictive Asset Insights, it is recommended to follow the configuration order described in
this chapter.

Procedure

1. Configure the application settings. For more infromation, see Application Settings [page 430]
2. Configure equipment modeling capabilities. For more information, see Equipment Modelling.
3. Create and publish your required equipment. For more information, see Creating a Piece of Equipment
[page 97] and Important Information When Creating Equipment in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
4. Create alert types for alerts. For more information, see Adding Alert Types [page 285].
5. For the alert type created using step 4, the alerts can be created.
6. Configure data sets and manage models for equipment health indicators.. For more information, see
Configuring Data Sets for Equipment Health Indicators [page 317] and Managing Models for Equipment
Health Indicators [page 324].
7. Configure failure mode analytics. For more information, see Configuring Failure Mode Analytics [page 461].
8. Manage model configurations for failure curve analytics. For more information, see Failure Curve Analytics
Model Configuration Management [page 405].
9. Manage models for leading indicators. For more information, see Managing Models for Leading Indicators
[page 399].
10. Configure the Explorer and analysis tool variants. For more information, see Explorer and Analysis Tools
Configuration [page 489].
11. Perform all required configuration steps to enable the creation of analytics dashboards in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights. For more information, see Enabling Analytics Dashboards [page 468].

8.1 Equipment Modelling

The procedure to model equipment is as follows:

1. Create indicator groups and indicators (Optional)

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

456 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 2. Create attribute groups and attributes (Optional)
3. Create alert types and Create alert type groups
4. Create model template
○ Assign attribute groups to model template
○ Assign indicator groups to model template
5. Create model from model template
6. Assign alert type group to model (Optional)
7. Create a piece of equipment

 Note

● While creating an equipment, the IoT sync button should be set to Yes,by default.
● Once the equipment is published, one external ID is created. The external ID is only created if you are
using SAP-managed data persistence and streaming.

Related Information

Configuring External Systems

8.1.1 SAP Internet of Things Synchronization

Once a piece of equipment is created and published in SAP Predictive Asset Insights, it is synchronized and
objects are created in SAP Internet of Things.

In order that the synchronization works, you need to set up SAP Internet of Things as an external system. For
more information, see Configuring External Systems. If you are an existing customers with an SAP Internet of
Things license, you need to perform additional steps prior to the configuration of the external system. For more
information, see Setting Up SAP Cloud Platform Internet of Things.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 457
The following graphic displays the synchronization flow:

Important Information for the Synchronization

While the publishing to SAP Internet of Things, the following points need to be considered:

● Only equipment with model in asset central foundation is synchronized with SAP Internet of Things. This
means that lean equipment will not be synchronized with SAP Internet of Things.
● The equipment create API should have the following properties for the scenarios given below:
○ Both IoT services 4.0 and PdMS sync enabled
○ objectsSync: [{externalSys: "HCP IoT 4.0", status: true}, {externalSys: "PdMS", status: true}]
○ gateWayID: "2"
○ Both IoT services 4.0 and PdMS sync disabled
○ objectsSync: [{externalSys: "HCP IoT 4.0", status: false}, {externalSys: "PdMS", status: false}]
○ gateWayID: "2"
○ Only IoT services 4.0 sync is enabled
○ objectsSync: [{externalSys: "HCP IoT 4.0", status: true}]
○ gateWayID: "2"
○ Only PdMS sync is enabled
○ objectsSync: [{externalSys: "HCP IoT 4.0", status: false}, {externalSys: "PdMS", status: true}]
○ gateWayID: null
● For every equipment a device is created. The device will be associated with capabilities corresponding to
indicator groups, the indicators coming from both model templates and equipment templates in SAP
Predictive Asset Insights.
● When you have created a piece of equipment based on a template in SAP Predictive Asset Insights, for
every template a sensor type is created.
● To support update of capabilities with the new properties from asset central foundation, default
capabilities, for example, IG_EDGE_CONFIG and MachineAlarmPST are created inside a sensor type. The

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

458 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 sensor types' default name is DEFFAULT_CAPABILITY_TEMPLATE_DEFAULT. The capabilities and the
sensor type should not be removed.
● For a successful synchronization, each indicator group can have only one indicator of type Date.

 Note

If umlauts or special characters are used in indicators or indicator groups, the indicators and indicator
groups are still considered while the synchronization to SAP Internet of Things, but with the object IDs as
the names. The object IDs have the prefix I_ for indicators and the prefix IG_ for indicator groups.

The following graphic displays the mapping between objects and the corresponding naming conventions for
SAP Predictive Asset Insights:

8.2 Creating Equipment

On the SAP Fiori launchpad under Master Data you can find all the functions you need to create equipment and
its associated data.

To create equipment, you use a model template to create a model and assign the model to the equipment.
These prerequisites are described below. For information about creating equipment, see Creating a Piece of
Equipment .

For more general information about equipment, see Managing Equipment.

 Note

Once you have created your equipment do not forget to publish it.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 459
Prerequisites

● Create a model template. A model template is used to define metadata for a model. It inherits a subclass
template or other model template and has additional attribute groups and attributes. For information
about creating a model template, see Creating a Model Template [page 290]. For more general information
about templates, see Managing Templates [page 264].
● Create a model. A model is an abstract representation from the manufacturer that defines all maintenance
and specification information related to a new or existing product. A physical equipment is an instance of a
model.
A model is based on a model template and allows users to add values to the definitions used in the
underlying template. For information about creating a model see Creating a Model [page 133]. To add
model components, refer to Adding Model Components [page 141]. For more general information, see
Managing Models [page 132].

Related Information

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights [page 456]

8.3 Machine Alarms

Alerts can also be created by alarms raised by machine. The configuration for the machine alarms mapping
details allow the machine to send alerts. In a scenario where validation is required with alarms to raise an alert,
a trigger based rule must be defined.

Procedure

1. Define alert type for error codes: Navigate to Templates → Alert Types → New. The origin should be
Machine. You can also define the deduplication configuration to reduce the duplication of similar alerts. For
more information, refer Adding Alert Types [page 285]
2. Define alert type groups for the alert type created. For more information, refer Adding Alert Type Groups
[page 288]
3. Assign the alert type group to the model, which in turn will assign all alert types to the model and available
for equipment derived from model. For more information, refer Assigning Alert Type Groups to a Model
[page 144]
4. Create configuration file for the equipment, that have configured required to setup a specific connector
instance.
5. You can also define a rule if any other condition need to be checked during alert generation from the
equipment alarm. In such a scenario, you can define a trigger based alarrm using the Rules creation page.
Add a condition that will be validated before creating the alert. For more information, refer Creating Rules
[page 309]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

460 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Related Information

Alerts
Creating Rules [page 309]

8.4 Configuring Failure Mode Analytics

This topic describes how to configure failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

● You have created an equipment model with equipment and assigned the equipment model to the
equipment. For more information, see Creating Equipment [page 459].
● You have created failure modes and assigned the failure modes to the equipment model or the piece of
equipment for which you want to analyze the patterns of failures. For more information, see Creating a
Failure Mode [page 177] and Assigning Failure Modes to Business Objects [page 184].

 Note

Make sure that the failure modes are in the same language as the language that you configure in step 2.

Context

In order to use failure mode analytics, multiple steps are required.

Procedure

1. (Optional): Configure the periodical calculation for the mean time global indicators and define the included
failures. By default, the periodical calculation is enabled for critical failures. For more information, see Mean
Time Indicators Configuration [page 462].
2. Configure the language in which the notifications are later displayed in the failure mode analytics results.
You can choose between different options. For more information, see Notification Language Configuration
[page 464].
3. Configure, train, and score a failure mode analytics model. For more information, see Managing Models for
Failure Mode Analytics [page 379].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 461
  Tip

To improve the accuracy of the text analysis that maps topics with top words from notification texts to
the most appropriate failure modes, we recommend you perform validation tasks. For more
information, see Validating Failure Mode Analytics [page 396].

Related Information

Failure Mode Analytics [page 60]

8.4.1 Mean Time Indicators Configuration

The configuration for the mean time indicators is useful for making better maintenance planning decisions.
With the mean time indicators configuration, the global indicators Mean Time To Repair (MTTR), Mean Time To
Failure (MTTF), and Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) are calculated every month based on historical data
for your equipment model. In addition, you can also define for which failure mode types the mean time global
indicators are calculated. By default, the periodical calculation is enabled for all critical failures. For more
information about the global indicators, see Global Indicators [page 281].

 Note

The mean time indicators configuration is only valid for the global indicators of the equipment model. It is
independent from the mean time KPIs calculation for the failure modes. For more information about the
calculation for the failure modes, see Calculation of Mean Time KPIs [page 63].

For the calculation, all your notifications are collected, extracted, and the failure modes are assigned based on
your machine learning inputs. For each failure mode, the indicator value is then calculated. For the global
indicators values for the equipment model, the calculated indicator values are then aggregated and determined
as follows:

● For MTTF and MTBR, the indicator values are aggregated for the failure modes and the minimum value is
taken as the global indicator value.
● For MTTR, the indicator values are aggregated for the failure modes and the maximum value is taken as the
global indicator value.

If you have defined that you only include certain failure mode types, then only the indicator values for all the
selected types are aggregated.

Once the calculation is complete, you can view the indicator values on the INDICATOR tab on the model object
page. The values are updated after each scoring of your failure mode analytics model. For more information
about the scoring, see step 3 in the topic Configuring Failure Mode Analytics.

For more information about configuring the mean time global indicators, see Configuring the Mean Time
Indicators [page 463].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

462 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Related Information

Configuring Failure Mode Analytics [page 461]

8.4.1.1 Configuring the Mean Time Indicators

This topic describes how to configure the mean time indicators for failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

● You have created and assigned the relevant business objects. For more information, see Configuring Failure
Mode Analytics [page 461] and check the prerequisites.
● You have added and instantiated the global indicators for the desired equipment model or piece of
equipment. For more information, see Adding Indicator Groups and Indicators [page 273].
● The role ConfigUser is assigned to your user.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Administration group and open the Application Settings application.

2. To configure the mean time global indicators, choose (Failure Mode Analytics).

The Failure Mode Analytics configuration screen is displayed.

3. To change the settings for the configuration, choose Edit next to the Mean Time KPI Calculation section.
4. In the section, fill in the following fields:

Enable Calculation By default, the slider is moved to Yes .

 Remember
If you no longer need the periodical calculation, you
can later disable it. The calculation is then disabled
and the latest indicator values on the model object
page are not updated.

Failure Mode Types Select the failure mode types for which the mean time
KPIs are calculated. You can choose from the following
types:
○ Type 1 - Design function is not obtained
○ Type 2 - Specified function lost or outside acceptable
limit

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 463
 ○ Type 3 - Non critical failures

Type 1 and 2 are critical failures. By default, these types

are preselected.

5. Save your configuration.

Results

Your mean time indicators calculation is configured.

You can later edit your configuration. Once you have edited the configuration, you need to repeat the scoring of
your failure mode analytics model as mentioned in step 3 in the topic Configuring Failure Mode Analytics to
apply your changes.

Related Information

Mean Time Indicators Configuration [page 462]

Configuring Failure Mode Analytics [page 461]

8.4.2 Notification Language Configuration

By default, when you run a failure mode analysis, only English is supported for all your notifications and the
notifications are not translated in the failure mode analytics results. With the notification language
configuration, you can define the language in which the notifications are later displayed in the results by doing
the following, regardless of your current system language:

● Select the target language.

● Translate all your notifications to the target language.

 Note

We currently support German as an additional language.

Language Selection

The language selection is useful if all your notifications are in English or all your notifications are in German.
With the language selection, all your notifications for the selected language are collected and extracted based
on your machine learning inputs during the failure mode analysis. Once the analysis is complete, the extracted
notifications are then displayed as the top words and related notifications in the selected language in the failure
mode analytics results.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

464 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
For more information about selecting a language, see Selecting a Notification Language [page 465].

Language Translation

The language translation is useful if your notifications are in multiple languages or are in the same language,
which is not however English or German, for example, Italian. With the language translation, all your
notifications are collected and translated into the configured language. The translation is performed using your
own key from the Google Cloud translation service. The translated notifications are then extracted during the
failure mode analysis based on your machine learning inputs. Once the analysis is complete, the extracted
notifications are displayed as the top words and related notifications in the translated language in the results.

 Caution

Consider the following if you are using the language translation:

The translation feature for failure mode analytics is an optional feature and is based on Bring Your Own
Account (BYOA). That means that you must have a private account with Google for translation services,
and you must have your own Google API key. You alone are responsible for all required contracts with
Google, including important aspects such as privacy data (especially customer data transferred to Google
servers or other third party servers), costs for translation services, and so on.

SAP is under no obligation to provide this feature now or in the future. The feature may be enhanced or
discontinued at any time, without notice.

For more information about configuring the language translation, see Configuring a Notification Language
Translation [page 466].

Related Information

Configuring Failure Mode Analytics [page 461]

8.4.2.1 Selecting a Notification Language

This topic describes how to select the notification language for failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

● You have created and assigned the relevant business objects. For more information, see Configuring Failure
Mode Analytics [page 461] and check the prerequistes.
● (Optional): You have configured the mean time indicators configuration. For more information, see
Configuring the Mean Time Indicators [page 463].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 465
● The role ConfigUser is assigned to your user.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Administration group and open the Application Settings application.

2. To configure the target language, choose (Failure Mode Analytics).

The Failure Mode Analytics configuration screen is displayed.

3. To change the settings for the configuration, choose Edit next to the Language Selection section.
4. In the section, select the language in which the notifications are displayed.
5. Save your selection.

Results

Your language is selected.

You can later also select a different language. Once you have selected a different language, you need to repeat
step 3 in the topic Configuring Failure Mode Analytics to apply your changes.

Related Information

Notification Language Configuration [page 464]

Configuring Failure Mode Analytics [page 461]

8.4.2.2 Configuring a Notification Language Translation

This topic describes how to configure the notification language for failure mode analytics.

Prerequisites

● You have created and assigned the relevant business objects. For more information, seeConfiguring Failure
Mode Analytics [page 461] and check the prerequistes.
● (Optional): You have configured the mean time indicators configuration. For more information, see
Configuring the Mean Time Indicators [page 463].
● The role ConfigUser is assigned to your user.
● You have performed the following steps related to Google:

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

466 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 ○ You have a Google account.
○ You have created a Google API key. For more information, see the relevant google page.

 Caution

Consider the following if you are using the language translation:

The translation feature for failure mode analytics is an optional feature and is based on Bring Your Own
Account (BYOA)

SAP is under no obligation to provide this feature now or in the future. The feature may be enhanced or
discontinued at any time, without notice. . That means that you must have a private account with
Google for translation services, and you must have your own Google API key. You alone are responsible
for all required contracts with Google, including important aspects such as privacy data (especially
customer data transferred to Google servers or other third party servers), costs for translation
services, and so on.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Administration group and open the Application Settings application.

2. To configure the target language, choose (Failure Mode Analytics).

The Failure Mode Analytics configuration screen is displayed.

3. To change the settings for the configuration, choose Edit next to the Language Translation section.
4. In the section, fill in the following fields:

Enable Translation Move the slider to Yes to enable the language translation.

 Remember
If you no longer need the translation, you can later
disable it. However, if you want the translation to take
place, do not disable the language translation before
you have performed all of the steps in the topic
Configuring Failure Mode Analytics. Otherwise, you
receive an error when you manage your failure mode
analytics model in step 3 and your translation is not
applied.

Google Cloud API Key Paste the string from your created Google Cloud API key.

Language Select the language in which the notifications are

translated.

 Note
The selection is displayed under Language Selection.

5. Save your configuration.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 467
Results

Your language translation is configured.

You can later edit your configuration. Once you have edited the configuration, you need to repeat step 3 in the
topic Configuring Failure Mode Analytics to apply your changes.

Related Information

Notification Language Configuration [page 464]

Configuring Failure Mode Analytics [page 461]

8.5 Enabling Analytics Dashboards

The business user can create dashboards against different data sources. For an overview, see Analytics
Dashboards [page 70].

For each type and data source, the technical implementation is different. With this, different requirements need
to be met in order that the business user can view and create the dashboards in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
This topic describes the technical implementation and requirements, and links to the related configuration
procedures.

Custom Live

 Note

The custom live option is only available with Amazon Web Services (AWS).

This option allows you to use "live" data from SAP Predictive Asset Insights in the dashboard together with your
own data. To use this option, you need the following:

● An own SAP HANA database

● A remote connection between your own SAP HANA database and the SAP Predictive Asset Insights
analytics database

 Caution

The connection to the analytics database is only allowed to be used for displaying data in SAP Analytics
Cloud as described in this guide. Any other usage is beyond the scope of this feature and not allowed
nor supported by SAP.

● Virtual tables and cube calculation views in your own SAP HANA database for the required data tables of
the analytics database and other databases

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

468 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 ● A license for SAP Analytics Cloud and active account
● An own story in SAP Analytics Cloud based on an SAP Analytics Cloud model
● A live data connection between SAP Analytics Cloud and SAP Predictive Asset Insights

In your own SAP HANA database, you can combine the data from the SAP Predictive Asset Insights together
with your own data from other databases and perform calculations on this data, and so on. The data from SAP
Predictive Asset Insights is stored in the SAP Predictive Asset Insights analytics database. For more
information about the analytics database and the data, see Analytics Database [page 484].

Custom Offline

This option allows you to copy data from SAP Predictive Asset Insights into the dashboard. To use this option,
you need the following:

● An import data connection between SAP Analytics Cloud and SAP Predictive Asset Insights
● A license for SAP Analytics Cloud and active account
● An own story in SAP Analytics Cloud based on an SAP Analytics Cloud model

As the data source for the model in SAP Analytics Cloud, you use OData Services. The APIs of the OData
services then fetch the data. For an overview of all the APIs, see OData Services for SAP Analytics Cloud.

For creating the model and story in SAP Analytics Cloud, you can choose whether you create your own model
and story or import a package with business content. This package is called SAP Predictive Asset Insights and
contains a sample OData connection, seven sample models, and two sample stories. One story is for the
Analytics Dashboards application and one story is for the equipment page. As data for the models and the
stories, the package contains sample data, which you also overwrite. You can also combine the options, which
means that you can use a sample model and a sample story or use a sample model and create your own story.

Summary and Comparison between the Options

The graphic below displays again the technical implementation of the types and data sources. The table below
the graphic summarizes again the main aspects.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 469
Technical Implementation Visualization

Summary of Main Aspects

Aspect Custom Live Custom Offline

Type of data that can be used ● Master data: Most of the ● Header data of equipment
attributes for equipment (without custom attributes),
(including custom attributes), models, locations, spare parts,
models, locations, installation notifications, and work orders
locations, notifications, and alerts ● Last indicator values
● Time series data: non-numeric
indicators, hourly aggregated data
for numeric indicators, and last
indicator values
● Own data from other databases

Place where data is stored In your own SAP HANA database with a In SAP Analytics Cloud with a copy of
reference to the SAP Predictive Asset the data from SAP Predictive Asset
Insights analytics database Insights

Possibility to use data "live" Yes No, the data gets copied to SAP
Analytics Cloud, but you can schedule
an hourly data replication job.

Need of having a SAP Analytics Cloud Yes Yes

license

Need of having own SAP HANA Yes No

database

Possibility to augment data in SAP Yes Yes

Analytics Cloud

Need of creating models in SAP Yes Yes

Analytics

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

470 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Aspect Custom Live Custom Offline

Need of creating stories in SAP Yes Yes

Analytics Cloud

Related Tasks

Enabling Custom Live Dashboards [page 471]

Enabling Custom Offline Dashboards [page 476]

Related Information

Analytics Dashboards [page 70]

8.5.1 Enabling Custom Live Dashboards

This topic lists all the configuration steps to enable the creation of custom live dashboards in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.

Prerequisites

● You have a license for SAP Analytics Cloud and an active account. For more information, see SAP Analytics
Cloud .
● You are using SAP Predictive Asset Insights on Amazon Web Services (AWS).
● You have your own SAP HANA database with a license that allows you to create virtual tables and
calculation views.

 Note

If you want to use time series data, you also need to create a support ticket and receive a response before
you can start with the procedure. The information that you need to provide for creating the ticket are:

● Component: IOT-PDM-OPS
● Title: Custom Analytics
● Description: Please enable the use of time series data for analytics, per <link of this SAP Help Portal
page>.
● Tenant ID
● Subdomain

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 471
Procedure

Step related to SAP Predictive Asset Insights:

1. Create and/or publish the respective objects in SAP Predictive Asset Insights so that the related data is
initially loaded into the analytics database. For more information about the initial load, see Analytics
Database [page 484].
Steps related to your own SAP HANA database:
2. Make sure that the Master Data Analytics service plan is added to your subaccount in SAP BTP cockpit. For
more information, see the Configure Entitlements and Quotas from Your Subaccount section in Configure
Entitlements and Quotas for Subaccounts.
3. Create credentials for the remote connection (remote data source) in SAP BTP cockpit. For more
information, see Creating Credentials for the Remote Source [page 473].
4. In your own SAP HANA database, create the remote connection (remote data source) to the analytics
database using the created credentials. For more information, see Create an SAP HANA Remote Source.

 Note

For the Extra Adapter Properties field, you need to paste the string encrypt=TRUE;sslTrustStore=
in front of the certficate and put the certificate in quotation marks. The field looks then as follows:
encrypt=TRUE;sslTrustStore="certificate text".

5. In your own SAP HANA database, create virtual tables based on the tables of the analytics database and
save them in the schema of choice. You can also join the virtual tables with other virtual tables of your own
data tables. For more information about the analytics database, see Analytics Database [page 484].

 Note

Every time a new dynamic table is created in the analytics database based on the loaded data and you
want to use the table, you need to create a virtual table for this table and the calculation views as
explained in the next step.

6. In SAP HANA Studio or SAP Web IDE, create cube calculations views based on the virtual tables. For more
information, see Create Graphical Calculation Views.
7. (Only relevant if you want to create geo maps in SAP Analytics Cloud): In SAP HANA Studio, create
location dimension views in the SAP_BOC_SPATIAL package. For more information, see Creating Geo
model from Live HANA Calculation View .
Steps related to SAP Analytics Cloud:
8. Create a live data connection in SAP Analytics Cloud to your own SAP HANA database. For more
information, see Live Data Connection to SAP HANA Using a Direct Connection with Password
Authentication.
9. Create a model in SAP Analytics Cloud based on the live data connection. For more information, see
Creating a Model from a Live Data Connection.
10. Create a story in SAP Analytics Cloud based on the model. For more information, see Creating Your First
Story and Creating a New Story.
11. Assign the BI Content Viewer role with read privileges to the users from SAP Analytics Cloud who want
to view analytics dashboards. For more information, see Assigning Roles to Users.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

472 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
  Tip

The users are already created automatically.

12. Share the story with the users. For more information, see Sharing Stories or Bookmarks.

 Tip

To easily share a story with multiple users, we recommend to create teams and share stories with
teams including different users. For more information about creating teams, see Creating Teams.

Step related to SAP Predictive Asset Insights:

13. (Relevant for dashboards that should be displayed on object pages): Configure the object pages. For
more information, see Configuring Object Pages [page 475].

Results

The creation of custom live dashboards is enabled.

Next Steps

The business user can now create custom live dashboards in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Related Information

Creating an Analytics Dashboard [page 73]

8.5.1.1 Creating Credentials for the Remote Source

This topic explains how to create credentials for the remote source.

Prerequisites

You have made sure that the Master Data Analytics service plan is added to your subaccount in SAP BTP
cockpit. For more information, see the Configure Entitlements and Quotas from Your Subaccount section in
Configure Entitlements and Quotas for Subaccounts.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 473
Procedure

1. Open the SAP BTP cockpit (https://account.hana.ondemand.com/#/home/welcome).

2. Navigate to your subaccount.
3. In the Spaces table, choose your space.

4. In the side menu, choose Services Service Instances .

The Service Instances screen is displayed.

5. Choose Create Instance.

A new dialog box with New Instance as a first screen is displayed.

6. In the dialog box, fill in the following fields:

Service Select Master Data Analytics.

Service Plan Select standard.

Instance Name Enter an instance name, for example, Analytics.

7. Choose Create Instance.

The new instance is created and added to the service instances list.
8. From the list, choose the new instance.

On the right, the list with the service keys is displayed.

9. To create a service key with the credentials, choose (Actions) Create Service Key on the upper
right corner.

The New Service Key dialog box is displayed.

10. In the dialog box, enter a service key name, for example, Analytics Service Key.
11. Choose Create.

The service key is created and added to the list.

12. To view the credentials, select the service key from the list and choose (Actions) View .

A new dialog box with the service key JSON file is displayed. In the 'hana' section of the JSON file, the
following information for the remote source are displayed:
○ Username
○ Password
○ Certificate (for the extra adapter properties)
○ Host
○ Port

Results

The credentials for the remote source are created.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

474 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Related Information

Create an SAP HANA Remote Source

8.5.1.2 Configuring Object Pages

This topic describes how to configure object pages for analytics dashboards in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Prerequisites

● You have shared the story with the users. For more information, see Sharing Stories or Bookmarks.
● One of the following roles is assigned to your user:
○ CONFIGURATION_EDIT
○ CONFIGURATION_DELETE

Context

By default, the tabs and subsections in which the analytics dashboards are displayed are not activated for the
equipment and model pages. In order that the created dashboards are displayed on the tabs and subsections,
you need to configure the settings and activate the tabs and subsections for the object pages.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Administration group and open the Application Settings application.

2. To configure the equipment and model page, choose (Object Page Configurations).

The Object Page Configurations configuration screen is displayed.

3. Expand the sections below Equipment and Model.
4. Activate the checkboxes for Analytics and Dashboard.

Results

The object pages are configured.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 475
Related Information

Enabling Custom Live Dashboards [page 471]

8.5.2 Enabling Custom Offline Dashboards

This topic lists all the configuration steps to enable the creation of custom offline dashboards in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.

Prerequisites

You have a license for SAP Analytics Cloud and an active account. For more information about SAP Analytics
Cloud, see SAP Analytics Cloud .

Procedure

Steps related to SAP Analytics Cloud:

1. Enable your custom identity provider from SAP Predictive Asset Insights in SAP Analytics Cloud to achieve
single sign-on. For more information, see Enabling a Custom SAML Identity Provider.

 Note

Consider the following when you perform this step:

○ For a correct configuration, you also need to configure the trusted origins. To do this, choose
System Administration App Integration in the main menu. In the Trusted Origins section,
choose between the following options:
○ Activate the Allow all origins checkbox.
○ Deactivate the Allow all origins checkbox and add specific trusted origins.
○ If you are using Chrome, ensure that the third-party cookies are enabled in the cookie settings.

2. Define a model in SAP Analytics Cloud. You can choose between the following options:
○ Import the SAP Predictive Asset Insights package with the sample models and the sample data. For
more information, see Importing Business Content and Overwriting Sample Data in SAP Analytics
Cloud [page 478].
○ Create your own model. To create your own model, proceed as follows:
○ Configure a data connection to use data from SAP Predictive Asset Insights. For more information
about configuring a data connection, see Configuring a Data Connection in SAP Analytics Cloud
[page 479].
○ Create a model and import the data. For more information, see Creating a Model in SAP Analytics
Cloud [page 481].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

476 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 3. Set up a data replication schedule in SAP Analytics Cloud to regularly refresh the data. For more
information, see Updating and Scheduling Models.
4. Define a story in SAP Analytics Cloud based on the model. You can choose between the following options:
○ Use one of the sample stories of the SAP Predictive Asset Insights package. To open a sample story,
navigate to the Files screen and open the SAP_Content SAP_PAI_Predictive_Asset_Intelligence
folders.

 Remember

To use a sample story, you need to have imported the package in step 2 and used one of the
sample models.

○ Create your own story. For more information, see Creating Your First Story and Creating a New Story.
5. Assign the BI Content Viewer role with read privileges to the users from SAP Analytics Cloud who want
to view analytics dashboards. For more information, see Assigning Roles to Users.

 Tip

The users are already created automatically.

6. Share the story with the users. For more information, see Sharing Stories or Bookmarks.

 Tip

To easily share a story with multiple users, we recommend to create teams and share stories with
teams including different users. For more information about creating teams, see Creating Teams.

Step related to SAP Predictive Asset Insights:

7. (Relevant for dashboards that should be displayed on object pages): Configure the object pages. For
more information, see Configuring Object Pages [page 483].

Results

The creation of custom offline dashboards is enabled.

Next Steps

The business user can now create custom offline dashboards in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Related Information

Creating an Analytics Dashboard [page 73]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 477
8.5.2.1 Importing Business Content and Overwriting
Sample Data in SAP Analytics Cloud

This topic describes how to import business content and overwrite the sample data in SAP Analytics Cloud.

Prerequisites

You have enabled your custom identity provider from SAP Predictive Asset Insights in SAP Analytics Cloud. For
more information, see Enabling a Custom SAML Identity Provider.

Context

When you use the SAP Predictive Asset Insights package, you have the option to only import the business
content with the included sample data and view this data in a story and analytics dashboard or you can
overwrite the imported sample data with your own data.

 Note

Consider that the usage of the sample data only fully works for the analytics dashboard in the Analytics
Dashboards application. For the analytics dashboard in the equipment page, it shows the dashboard but
without data because the data is filtered by the equipment of the page.

Procedure

1. Open SAP Analytics Cloud.

2. Import the SAP Predictive Asset Insights package into SAP Analytics Cloud using SAP Business Content as
the type of content. For more information, see Importing from the Content Network.

The sample models and stories are imported together with the sample OData connection and the sample
data. If you would only like to use the sample data, you can skip the remaining steps of the procedure. If
you would like to overwrite the data with your own data, proceed with step 3.
3. Navigate to the Connection screen, select the sample OData connection for SAP Predictive Asset Insights
(ID: SAP__PAI_GEN_CONNECTION) and update or fill in the required fields that point to the connection of
your data source. For more information about the fields, see Configuring a Data Connection in SAP
Analytics Cloud [page 479].

4. Choose (Main Menu) Browse Files Public Models and open the model that you want to use.
The model names start with SAP_PAI.
5. For each openend model, perform the following steps:
a. Choose Data Management.
b. Choose the import job.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

478 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 c. Choose Import Settings.
d. Under Import Method, select Clean and replace selected version data.
e. Choose Save.
f. Choose Refresh.
6. (Optional) Set a refresh frequency or set import settings to a different update method, for example,
Update.

Results

The business content is imported and your data is loaded.

Related Information

Updating and Scheduling Models

8.5.2.2 Configuring a Data Connection in SAP Analytics

Cloud

This topic describes how to configure a data connection in SAP Analytics Cloud.

Prerequisites

You have enabled your custom identity provider from SAP Predictive Asset Insights in SAP Analytics Cloud. For
more information, see Enabling a Custom SAML Identity Provider.

Context

Procedure

1. Open SAP Analytics Cloud.

2. Choose (Main Menu) Connection .

The Connections screen is displayed.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 479
3. To add a new connection, choose (Add Connection).

The Select a Datasource dialog box is displayed.

4. Choose Acquire Data OData Services .

The New OData Services Connection dialog box is displayed.

5. Fill in the following fields:

Connection Name Enter a name for the connection.

Description Enter a description for the connection.

Connect to an SAP OData service Activate this checkbox.

Data Service URL Enter the following URL: https://

ac.cfapps.eu10.hana.ondemand.com/ain/
ac.odata.svc/api/v1

Authentication Type Select OAuth 2.0 Client Credentials.

OAuth Client ID Enter the client ID that you received during the
subscription to the asset central foundation.

Secret Enter the client secret that you received during the
subscription to the asset central foundation.

Token URL Enter the following URL with your tenant-subdomain:

https://<tenant-
subdomain>.authentication.eu10.hana.ond
emand.com/oauth/token/

6. Choose Create.

Results

The data connection is configured.

Related Information

Creating a Model in SAP Analytics Cloud [page 481]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

480 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
8.5.2.3 Creating a Model in SAP Analytics Cloud

This topic describes how to create a model in SAP Analytics Cloud.

Prerequisites

You have configured a data connection in SAP Analytics Cloud. For more information, see Configuring a Data
Connection in SAP Analytics Cloud [page 479].

Context

For general information about creating models, Building Your First Model and Creating a New Model.

 Note

Consider the following when you create a model using the following OData APIs:

● Work order, notification, equipment, or model APIs:

In SAP Asset Intelligent Management, you can store a maximum of 5000 characters in the
LongDescription field. In SAP Analytics Cloud, you can only store a maximum of 256 characters.
This can cause an error during the data import of the APIs in SAP Analytics Cloud. To avoid this error,
do the following when you create a model in SAP Analytics Cloud:
1. Create a new calculated column and add the following formula to it:

SUBSTRING ([longDescription],0 ,256)

2. Delete the original column.

Your data is then transformed and stored in the new column, which you can then use in your analytics
dashboard.
● Indicator API:
The data of the Value field can have different equipment indicator data types (Numeric,
NumericFlexible, String, Boolean, and Date). If the field contains non-numeric data, you cannot use the
data in charts because SAP Analytics Cloud prevents you to turn this field into a measure. To turn the
field and use the data in charts, do the following when you create a model in SAP Analytics Cloud:
1. Change type of the Value source column to generic, not a measure.
2. Create a new calculated column called Null and add two double quotes ("") as the formula.
3. Create a new calculated column called Numeric Values and add the following formula to it:

IF([dataType]="numeric" OR [dataType]="numericflexible",
[value],
[Null]
)

This step copies all numeric values into the new field and you can use it in charts.
4. Make the new Numeric Values column the measure.
5. Ensure that the original Value field is a dimension, not a measure.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 481
 6. (Optional) create another new calculated column called Non Numeric Values and add the following
formula to it:

IF([dataType]="numeric" OR [dataType]="numericflexible",
[value],
[Null]
)

● Equipment API:
The longitude and latitude values for the geo coordinates are provided together in the coordinates
source column separated by a comma. In order that SAP Analytics Cloud can use it, you need to split
the values into two columns:
1. Switch to the grid view to open the source data table by choosing .
2. (Optional) duplicate the column to preserve the original column.
3. Select the duplicated column and split the column by creating a transformation. The following

graphic shows an example in the transform bar format:

4. Rename the two splitted columns to Longitude and Latitude.
5. Create a geo source column by using the Geo Enrichment function.

For more information about creating calculated columns, peforming column actions, transformations, and
data types, see Video: Create Calculated Columns and the Improving data quality section in Preparing Data.

Procedure

1. Open SAP Analytics Cloud.

2. Choose (Main Menu) Create Model .

The options for bringing data into a model are displayed.

3. Choose Get data from a datasource OData Services .

On the right side, a pane is displayed.

4. In the Acquire data section of the pane, select OData Services.

The Create Model from OData Services dialog box is displayed.

5. Select the name of the configured data connection.
6. Choose Next.

SAP Analytics Cloud retrieves data from the OData Service. Once the data is received, the New Query for
OData Services dialog box is displayed.
7. In the dialog box, select the object that you want to add and choose Next.

The available attributes for the selected object are displayed.

8. From the Available Data area, drag and the drop the attributes that you want to use to the Selected Data
area.
9. Choose Create.

On the top bar of the application, the query for the object is displayed and loaded.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

482 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 10. Once the query is loaded, choose the query.

The New Model screen is displayed, where you can modify the model before creating it.
11. Choose Create.

Results

The model is created.

Related Information

Updating and Scheduling Models

8.5.2.4 Configuring Object Pages

This topic describes how to configure object pages for analytics dashboards in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Prerequisites

● You have shared the story with the users. For more information, see Sharing Stories or Bookmarks.
● One of the following roles is assigned to your user:
○ CONFIGURATION_EDIT
○ CONFIGURATION_DELETE

Context

By default, the tabs and subsections in which the analytics dashboards are displayed are not activated for the
equipment and model pages. In order that the created dashboards are displayed on the tabs and subsections,
you need to configure the settings and activate the tabs and subsections for the object pages.

Procedure

1. On the SAP Fiori launchpad, go to the Administration group and open the Application Settings application.

2. To configure the equipment and model page, choose (Object Page Configurations).

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 483
 The Object Page Configurations configuration screen is displayed.
3. Expand the sections below Equipment and Model.
4. Activate the checkboxes for Analytics and Dashboard.

Results

The object pages are configured.

Related Information

Enabling Custom Offline Dashboards [page 476]

8.5.3 Analytics Database

The analytics database stores master data and time series data from SAP Predictive Asset Insights. Depending
on the type of data, the data is stored in different tables.

 Note

When you are using the data of the analytics database, you need to consider multiple aspects. For more
information, see Important Information When Using the Analytics Database [page 488].

Master Data and Time Series Data

The master data in the analytics database contains, for example, equipment, models, locations, alerts, and so
on, and custom attributes for equipment and models.

The time series data in the analytics database contains numeric indicators and non-numeric indicators.
Numeric indicators are indicators of the type Numeric, Numeric Flexible, and Boolean where true is set to 1 and
false is set to 0. Non-numeric indicators are indicators of the data type String. The numeric indicators are
stored as aggregated values and the non-numeric indicators are stored as raw data.

The aggregated values are calculated in an hourly interval based on indicator data collected from SAP
Predictive Asset Insights. The aggregated values include the following:

● The highest value of each indicator within an hour (MAX)

● The lowest value of each indicator within an hour (MIN)
● The average value of each indicator within an hour (AVG)
● The total count of values aggregated within an hour (COUNT)
● The sum of values aggregated within an hour (SUM)

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

484 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 ● The latest average value for each indicator. Latest refers to the value that has been calculated last.

Static and Dynamic Tables

The master data and time series data is stored in static and dynamic tables.

The master data and the latest average values of the numeric indicators are stored in static tables. The rest of
the time series data and the custom attributes are stored in dynamic tables. Static tables are included in the
analytics database by default. Dynamic tables are only created in the analytics database if you have indicators,
indicator groups, attributes or attribute groups for equipment and models.

The tables have different naming conventions. For an overview of the tables and their naming conventions, see
the Overview of Tables and Data section below.

Load of Data into the Tables

Initially, the analytics database is empty and only contains the static tables without any data. For the data to
initial load into the static tables and the dynamic tables to create, several objects need to be created and/or
published in SAP Predictive Asset Insights:

● For alerts and notifications, the respective alerts and notifications need to be created in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.
● For models and locations, the respective models and locations need to be published in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.
● For installation locations, the respective locations or equipment need to be published in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.
● For the rest of the master data including the custom attributes, and for the time series data, the respective
equipment need to be published in SAP Predictive Asset Insights. If you want to use time series data, you
need to request the usage via a support ticket before the publishing.

After the initial load of the data, the data gets loaded and updated in the following ways:

● The aggregated values of the numeric indicators are generally loaded and updated within every hour after
each calculation. If indicator data arrives later in SAP Predictive Asset Insights than the usual calculation
window, for example, because of connection issues, then the data from SAP Predictive Asset Insights is
included in the next calculation and the aggregated values will be added to the respective time range to
which they belong to in the analytics database.

 Note

For the latest average values, the values are not added to a respective time range because the table
only includes one row for each indicator where only the latest value is stored and updated.

● The raw data of the non-numeric indicators is loaded and updated every couple of minutes.
● Alerts and notifications are loaded and updated every time an alert or notfication is changed or created in
SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
● Models and locations are loaded and updated every time a model or location is published in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 485
● Installation locations are loaded and updated every time a related location or piece of equipment is
published in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.
● The rest of the master data including the custom attributes are loaded and updated every time a related
piece of equipment is published in SAP Predictive Asset Insights.

Depending on the data that is loaded into the database, the static and dynamic tables are updated in different
ways:

● For the master data, either the data in the existing row of the respective static table is updated, or a new
row for new data is added.
● For the latest average values of the numeric indicators, the value in the respective row of the static table is
updated with the newly calculated value.
● For the rest of the time series data including the custom attributes, either the data in the rows of the
dynamic tables are updated, or new dynamic tables for new data are created. For example, if you create a
new attribute group for a piece of equipment and you republish the piece of equipment, then a new
dynamic table for this attribute group is created.

Overview of Tables and Data

The following table provides you with a summary of the static and dynamic tables that exist in the database
with the included data and how this data is stored in the tables:

Table with Naming Convention Table Type Data Load of Data

com.sap.iam.analytics: Dynamic Numeric indicators as The tables are initially

:AGGREGATES_<INDICATOR aggregated values, grouped created with publishing of a
_GROUP_ID> by the indicator group ID. piece of equipment and then
Each indicator name column the data is generally loaded
has the same data type as and updated after the
the indicator that has been calculation every hour.
created in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights. Each
aggregated value (MAX,
MIN, AVG, COUNT, SUM) of
an indicator is stored in a
seperate column.

 Note
The indicator internal ID
is used for the column
names.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Dynamic Non-numeric indicators as The data is intially loaded

:RAW_<INDICATOR_GROUP_ raw data, grouped by the with the publishing of a piece
ID> indicator group ID. Each of equipment and then
indicator name column has updated every couple of
the same data type as the minutes.
indicator that has been
created in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

486 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Table with Naming Convention Table Type Data Load of Data

 Note
The indicator internal ID
is used for the column
names.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Dynamic Attributes, grouped by the The data is loaded and

:ATTRIBUTES_<ATTRIBUTE attribute group ID. Each updated with the publishing
_GROUP_ID> attribute name column has of a piece of equipment.
the same data type as the
attribute that has been
created in SAP Predictive
Asset Insights.

 Note
The attribute internal ID
is used for the column
names.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static Master data The data is loaded with the

:ALERT creation of an alert and then
updated once the alert is
changed.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static Master data The data is loaded and

:EQUIPMENT updated with the publishing
of a piece of equipment.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static Master data The data is loaded and

:INDICATOR updated with the publishing
of a piece of equipment.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static Master data The data is loaded and

:INSTALLATION_LOCATION updated with the publishing
of a piece of equipment or
location.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static Master data The data is loaded and

:LOCATION updated with the publishing
of a location.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static Master data The data is loaded and

:MODEL updated with the publishing
of a model.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static Master data The data is loaded with the

:NOTIFICATION creation of a notification and
updated once the
notification is changed.

com.sap.iam.analytics: Static The data is initially loaded

Latest average values of the
:LAST_INDICATOR_VALUE with the publishing of a piece
numeric indicators
of equipment and then
updated after the calculation
every hour.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 487
8.5.3.1 Important Information When Using the Analytics
Database

When you are using the data of the analytics database in your own SAP HANA database, you need to consider
several aspects.

 Caution

The connection to the analytics database is only allowed to be used for displaying data in SAP Analytics
Cloud as described in this guide. Any other usage is beyond the scope of this feature and not allowed nor
supported by SAP.

General

● Currently, instance-based authorization capabilities are not supported. That means that every user within
your organization who is authorized to access your company’s dashboards can also view the master data
and time series data for the respective equipment.
● You can only store data up to 10 GB in the database, which is sufficient in most use cases.

Time Series Data

● You can only use time series data that is created after the confirmation of the support ticket. That means
you cannot include time series data from the past in the database.
● We only store the last 180 days of time series data.
● You can only use indicator groups with a maximum number of 249 indicators for SAP Analytics Cloud.
● Since the aggregated values for the numeric indicators are calculated every hour, there is a slight delay
when the aggregated values are available in the database. In general, the aggregated values are available in
the hour after the individual time series reading have been ingested. The aggregated values are calculated
shortly after the hour based on all indicator data that was ingested in the previous hour or since the last
aggregation. In certain cases, it can take up to 2 hours for some indicator data to be included in the
calculation. This can, for example, happen when indicator data has been ingested closely before the
calculation happens or if the indicator data is late arriving data.
● Since the non-numeric indicators are stored as raw data, we recommend to isolate the non-numeric
indicators in separate indicator groups and limit the ingestion of readings. Otherwise, it can happen that if
you ingest a high volume of non-numeric indicators, the analysis in the analytics dashboards slows down.

Master Data

● You can only use master data for analytics that is published after the onboarding. That means after you are
onboarded as an analytics user, you need to republish the respective equipment, models, and locations to

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

488 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 include master data for these objects created before the onboarding. This does not apply to notifications
and alerts, for these objects, you cannot include data created before the onboarding.
● In the asset central foundation, you can translate certain texts into different languages, for example, the
short description of a piece of equipment. In the analytics database, if you have texts in English and
another language, only English is supported. If you have texts only in a language other than English, then
that language will show. This is independent of the language settings.

8.6 Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration

Configuration options for analysis tool variants and the Explorer can be found in a dropdown within Application
Settings.

Prerequisites

The role collection PDMS_CONFIG is assigned to your user.

Accessing the Configuration Dropdown

Go to the SAP Fiori launchpad under Administration Application Settings Explorer and Analysis Tools
Configuration .

Preconfigured Variants

In addition to variants that you configure, we also deliver preconfigured variants. For more information, see
Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Overview of Functions in the Configuration Dropdown

Configuration Entry More Information Type of Configuration

Alerts Fields for Configuring Alerts [page 492] Analysis tool with multiple variants

Equipment Indicators Fields for Configuring Equipment Indi­ Analysis tool with multiple variants
cators [page 494]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 489
Configuration Entry More Information Type of Configuration

Explorer Fields for Configuring the Explorer Application

[page 495]

Explorer Global Filter Fields for Configuring the Explorer Filter with multiple variants
Global Filter [page 496]

Indicator Chart Fields for Configuring the Indicator Analysis tool with multiple variants
Chart [page 497]

Map Fields for Configuring the Map [page Analysis tool with multiple variants
500]

Notifications Fields for Configuring Notifications Analysis tool with multiple variants
[page 507]

Work Orders Fields for Configuring Work Orders Analysis tool with multiple variants
[page 508]

Transformer Health Analytics Fields for Configuring Transformer Analysis tool with one variant
Health Analytics [page 510]

Overview of Functions in the Explorer and Analysis Tool Configuration

Screens

Function Description

Add Configure a new variant.

Save Save a configured variant.

Cancel While configuring a variant, you can cancel the configura-

tion.

Copy Copy an existing variant and adjust the copied variant as you
require.

Delete Delete an existing variant.

Restore Default Restore a preconfigured variant in case you deleted it.

 Note

In the Explorer and transformer health analytics configuration, the following functions do not exist, as the
Explorer and the transformer health analytics analysis tool have only one variant:

● Add
● Copy
● Delete
● Restore Default

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

490 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
  Note

For information on the supported user interface (UI) languages, refer SAP Predictive Asset Insights [page
7]

Related Information

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights [page 456]

8.6.1 Preconfigured Variants

With every release, we deliver preconfigured variants in addition to the variants that you can configure. This
allows a business user to immediately start working with the Explorer.

Overview of the Preconfigured Variants

We deliver the following preconfigured variants:

● A preconfigured variant for each analysis tool including a preconfigured model variant for the indicator
chart

 Note

The transformer health analytics analysis tool has no preconfigured variant.

● A preconfigured variant for the Explorer global filter

● A preconfigured variant for the Explorer

The settings of the preconfigured variants can differ in every release.

Titles of the Preconfigured Variants

Preconfigured Variant Title

Preconfigured variants for the analysis tools and the Ex­ SAP Standard
plorer global filter

Preconfigured model variant for the indicator chart SAP Standard for a Model

Preconfigured variant for the Explorer No title because the Explorer has only one variant

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 491
Working with the Preconfigured Variants

You can work with the preconfigured variants as follows:

Preconfigured Variant for Each Analysis Tool and for the Explorer Global Filter

● You can copy the preconfigured variants for the analysis tools and the preconfigured variants for the
Explorer global filter and then edit the copy.
● If one of the preconfigured variants for the analysis tools or the preconfigured variant for Explorer global
filter is not required, you can delete it. The deleted preconfigured variant is then not available for the
business user in the Explorer.
● If you have deleted one of the preconfigured variants and you need it again, you can restore it.

Preconfigured Variant for the Explorer

You can edit the preconfigured variant for the Explorer by changing the preconfigured settings.

 Note

If you edit the preconfigured variant for the Explorer, we recommend that you note down the preconfigured
settings before changing them so that you can later bring them back if required. Also, if you edit the
preconfigured variant, the edited variant persists in the upcoming release and is not overwritten by the new
delivered preconfigured variant.

Related Information

Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]

8.6.2 Fields for Configuring Alerts

You can define variants of this analysis tool. These variants can then be selected by business users from the
Explorer.

Preconfigured Variant

SAP also delivers a preconfigured variant. For more information about preconfigured variants, see
Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

492 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Columns

In this section you define which columns business users see by default when they choose this variant of the
Alerts analysis tool to add it to the Explorer. You can choose from a predefined list of columns.

Filters

In this section you define the default filter values that are displayed in the list of alerts for the variant.

Sorting

In this section you define which columns are displayed under Sort in the View Settings of the Alerts analysis
tool and whether the column should be sorted in ascending or desending order. The first entry in this list is the
default in the alert list.

Labels and Translations

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when you
select a variant for the analysis tool in the Explorer.

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about the variant.
The description is visible in the Variants pane in the configu-
ration screen.

Related Information

Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]

Alerts [page 22]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 493
8.6.3 Fields for Configuring Equipment Indicators

You can define variants of this analysis tool. These variants can then be selected by business users from the
Explorer.

Preconfigured Variant

SAP also delivers a preconfigured variant. For more information about preconfigured variants, see
Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Column Selection

In this section, you define which columns/fields business users see by default when they choose this variant of
the Equipment Indicators analysis tool in the Explorer. You can choose from a predefined list of columns.

Field Description

Column Name of column. Select master data, attribute, attribute

group, indicator, and indicator group

Column Width Width defined here will be the default column width in the
Equipment Indicators analysis tool. By default, the width is
200 pixels.

Default By default, on selecting this checkbox results in the respec­

tive column displaying in the analysis tool.

Filters

In this section, you define the default filter for the columns. The analysis tool display the contents according to
these filters. The values are

● Contains
● Equal

Sorting

In this section, you define the default sorting of the columns. You can sort the columns in the ascending or
desending order.

Labels and Translations

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when you
select a variant for the analysis tool in the Explorer.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

494 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Field Description

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about the variant.
The description is visible in the Variants pane in the configu-
ration screen.

Related Information

Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]

Equipment Indicators [page 32]

8.6.4 Fields for Configuring the Explorer

Here you configure what your business users will see in the Explorer when they log on for the first time. After
the very first logon, SAP Predictive Asset Insights preserves the order of analysis tools made by business
users in the Explorer.

Preconfigured Variant

The preconfigured variant for the Explorer contains a predefined order of all analysis tools with their
preconfigured variants.

For more information about preconfigured variants, see Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Content

Field Description

Analysis Tool Select the analysis tool that is displayed by default, for ex­
ample, Alerts.

Variant Select the variant of the analysis tool that is displayed by de­
fault, for example, Work Orders - Pump Variant.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 495
Labels and Translations

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Variant Name Enter, for example, a role suitable for this Explorer variant if
required.

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about, for exam­
ple, the role that uses this Explorer variant if required.

8.6.5 Fields for Configuring the Explorer Global Filter

You can define variants including various filters. These variants can then be selected by business users in the
Explorer.

Preconfigured Variant

The preconfigured variant for the Explorer global filter contains no filters so that the analysis tools show data
for all top equipment.

For more information about preconfigured variants, see Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Filters

Field Description

Class Select the underlying class template used while creating the
model/piece of equipment or functional location. The char­
acteristics of a piece of equipment and functional location
can be defined by the underlying class and subclass tem­
plate.

Subclass Select the underlying subclass of a model, a piece of equip­

ment, or functional location. The characteristics of a piece of
equipment and functional location can be defined by the un­
derlying class and subclass template.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

496 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Field Description

Model Select the abstract representation of a piece of equipment

or functional location that holds the specifications defined
for that piece of equipment or functional location.

Location Select the location where your equipment is installed.

Phase Select the phase to which the piece of equipment or func­

tional location relates, for example, planned or sold.

Manufacturer Select the relevant manufacturer linked to the selected

model ID. If a model ID is selected when creating equipment
data, the relevant manufacturer is linked to the equipment.

Operator Select the operator who maintains additional information

specific to a piece of equipment or functional location.

Labels and Translations

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when you
select a variant for the Explorer global filter in the Explorer.

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about the variant.
The description is visible in the Variants pane in the configu-
ration screen.

8.6.6 Fields for Configuring the Indicator Chart

When navigating to the Indicator Chart from Alerts, the indicator chart displays the first variant defined in the
Indicator Chart configuration.

Data Points

In this section, you can define the number of data points per indicators that you want to be displayed in the
chart.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 497
  Note

A maximum of 600 data points in total can be displayed in the indicator chart. This is entered in the Data
Points for Each Indicator on the Chart column. The default number of data points is 240 and can range
between 30 and 600. The more the number of data points, the more the accuracy of chart. But, the
response time may be affected.

Preconfigured Variants

SAP delivers two preconfigured variants. They appear in the variant selection dialog in the indicator chart. They
are:

● SAP Standard: This variant stores default settings for an indicator chart. As an end user of the application,
you can select indicators as favorites in the indicator list. On choosing this variant, the indicators thus
selected appear as default indicators.
● SAP Standard for a Model:This variant stores default settings for an indicator chart. As an administrator
with the required role, you can select indicators as default for a model in the indicator list. On choosing this
variant, the indicators thus selected appear as default indicators.

 Note

The default indicator for a model is set in indicator list for a model and default indicator for equipment
template is set in indicator list for equipment.

For all variants, except SAP Standard for a Model, the user selected favourite indicators are loaded by default.
For more information about preconfigured variants, see Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Time Filters

Only five time filters can be added for a variant

Field Description

Text Key Key of the time interval

Text Label of the time interval that is displayed on the UI of the in­
dicator chart

 Example
48 Hours, Today

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

498 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Field Description

Value Value of the time interval

 Example
48 for a time interval of 48 hours

Unit Unit of the time interval

 Example
hour for a time interval of 48 hours

You can choose among the following values:

● hour
● day
● week
● month
● year

Labels and Translations

Field Description

Lang Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Key / Text Choose the key of the text. Enter the time filter text you
would like to be displayed on the UI.

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when you
select a variant for the analysis tool in the Explorer.

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about the variant.
This description is visible in the Variants pane in the configu-
ration screen.

Related Information

Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]

Features in Indicator Chart [page 51]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 499
8.6.7 Fields for Configuring the Map

You can define variants of this analysis tool. These variants can then be selected by business users in the
Explorer.

Preconfigured Variant

The preconfigured variant for the map includes a sample base map so that business users can immediately
start working with the map. It does not include preconfigured settings related to equipment and functional
locations (for which models to show the technical objects on the map). These settings are customer-specific
and therefore cannot be added to the preconfigured variant.

For more information about preconfigured variants, see Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Map Settings

In the map settings, you configure the initial position and displayed area for the map variant when you open it in
the Explorer.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

500 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Field Description

Zoom Level Enter a value for the initial zoom level. The map variant is
then displayed with this initial zoom level.

 Note
Only enter integer as values.

The zoom level can be 0 or higher. Per default, 0 is entered.

A zoom level of 0 is the outermost zoom level and most far
away from the earth displaying, for example, the whole
world. This zoom level is also referred to as the full map ex­
tent. With each higher zoom level, the map view is closer to
the earth displaying, for example, only some continents or
regions. The maximum zoom level depends on the map pro­
vider.

The following graphic shows a map example with a zoom

level of 0 and 4:

Latitude Enter a value for the initial latitude. The map variant is then
displayed centered on this geographical coordinate.

The latitude defines the north-south position. You can enter

a value from -90 to +90 where -90 is the south pole and +90
is the north pole. 0 reflects the line of the Equator.

Longitude Enter a value for the initial longitude. The map variant is then
displayed centered on this geographical coordinate.

The longitude defines the west-east position. You can enter a

value from -180 to +180 where -180 is the most west position
and + 180 is most east position. 0 reflects the prime meri­
dian.

Layers

In the layers settings, you configure the base layer and overlay layer settings for the map variant.

 Note

You can use any map provider of your choice. Fill in the fields below according to the map provider.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 501
Base Layers
A base layer sets the background of the map variant displaying basic geographical information, for example,
oceans and streets.

 Note

To add a base layer, choose (Add New Tab).

Field Description

Layer Name Enter the name for the base layer. The name is later dis­
played in the overlay dropdown menu in the top right hand
corner of the map variant.

 Note
Enter a name that is unique for each layer.

Layer Type Enter the type for the base layer. The type depends on the
map provider that you want to use.

You can choose from the following types:

● xyz
This type is used for many map providers. It defines the
layer using an URL with the following format /z/x/
y.png. The png is the image for the tile of the map, z
defines the zoom level, and x and y identity the tile. If
you choose this type, make sure you fill in the Layer URL
field.
● esri
One map provider uses a separate type to construct
maps. If you choose this type, make sure you fill in the
Layer Parameters field.

Layer URL (Only relevant if you have entered xyz as the base Enter the URL of the map provider. The URL defines the style
layer type) of the baser layer type.

 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

502 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Field Description

Layer Parameters (Only relevant if you have entered esri as Enter the base map value. The base map value defines the
the base layer type) style of the base layer type. You can choose between differ-
ent values, for example, satellite.

 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Attribution Enter the attribution for the map variant. The attribution is a
string that defines the copyright of the map provider, for ex­
ample, © <map provider>. You can also include an HTML link
that leads to the copyrights of the map provider.

 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Application ID (Only relevant if your map provider provides Paste the application ID for the map provider.
an application ID)
 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Application Code (Only relevant if your map provider pro­ Paste the application code for the map provider.
vides an application code)
 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Subdomains (Only relevant if your map provider is using a Enter the subdomain for the map provider.
subdomain)
 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Map ID (Only relevant if your map provider is using map ver­ Enter the map version that you want to use.
sions)
 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 503
Field Description

Base (Only relevant if your map provider is using base map Enter the base map type for the base layer, for example,
types) traffic.

 Note
Activate the Mandatory checkbox if you have filled in this
field.

Initial Base Layer Select the option for the initial base layer. This field is useful
if you create multiple layers. You can choose between True
and False:

● If you select True for one layer, this base layer is set as
the default layer. This means it is later the first layer in
the overlay dropdown menu in the top right hand corner
of the map variant.
● If you select True for all layers, they are displayed in the
overlay dropdown menu according to the order in which
you created them.
● If you select False for all layers, they are also displayed
in the overlay dropdown menu according to the order in
which you created them.

Hide Logo Activate this checkbox if the logo of the map provider should
not be visible on the map variant.

Overlay Layers
The base layer can be overlaid by the overlay layers to define specific attributes, for example, how the
equipment or functional locations on the map are displayed.

 Note

To add an overlay layer, choose (Add new column), and then select the model or multiple models for
which you want to display the equipment or functional locations on the map variant. For each selected
model, a layer is added.

Field Description

Model ID Displays the ID of the selected model. If required, you can

change the selection again and select a different model.

The model ID is displayed later in the overlay dropdown

menu in the top right-hand corner of the map variant.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

504 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
 Field Description

Model Type Displays the type of the selected model. The following types
are available:

● Equipment
● Functional Locations

Clustering Select the clustering method for the map variant. You can
choose from the following methods:

● Marker: If you select this method, the top equipment

and top functional locations are displayed on the map
individually.
● Cluster: If you select this method, the top equipment
and top functional locations are clustered on the map
according to the zoom level. The further you zoom out
of a map, the wider the radius of a cluster.
○ If many equipment and functional locations are too
close to each other at maximum zoom level when
the cluster is configured, a spider leg will appear to
show all overlapping equipment after clicking the
cluster.
○ Clustering is applied separately for all equipment of
an equipment model and all functional locations of
a functional location model. For example, separate
clusters are build based on the geographic proxim­
ity of model A, and separate clusters are build
based on the proximity of model B.

 Note
Consider the following:
○ Select Cluster for larger sets of equipment and
functional locations. Otherwise, you encounter
performance issues with the map when you
have larger sets.
○ Spider leg only works when you have selected
Cluster as the method.
○ Spider leg only works with clusters at the maxi­
mum zoom level. This means when you add a
new model to the map variant, the initial value
for Remove Cluster at Zoom Level is 0. To en­
sure that spider leg works, you need the same
value as the maximum zoom level possible for
your map provider.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 505
Field Description

Remove Cluster at Zoom Level (Only relevant when you have Define at which zoom level clusters are removed and the top
selected Cluster as the clustering option) equipment and top functional locations are displayed sepa­
rately.

 Note
Enter a value that is one higher than the maximum zoom
level possible for your map provider. Otherwise, spider
leg does not work.

Labels and Translations

 Note

To add a label, choose (Add New Tab).

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when you
select a variant for the analysis tool in the Explorer.

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about the variant.
The description is visible in the Variants pane in the configu-
ration screen.

Related Information

Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

506 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
8.6.8 Fields for Configuring Notifications

You can define variants of this analysis tool. These variants can then be selected by business users from the
Explorer.

Preconfigured Variants

SAP also delivers a preconfigured variant. For more information about preconfigured variants, see
Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Columns

In this section, you define which columns/fields business users see by default when they choose this variant of
the Notifications analysis tool in the Explorer. You can choose from a predefined list of columns.

Filters

In this section, you define the filter field values for the notifications variant.

Sorting

In this section, you define which columns are displayed under Sort in the View Settings of the Notifications
analysis tool and whether the column should be sorted in ascending or descending order.

Table Details

In this section, you configure the Notifications analysis tool for more information about a particular notification.
When you click a notification, you navigate in-place to more information about that notification.

You define the tabs containing this further information and enter an ID for the tab under Tab Title (you later
map a label to this ID under Labels and Translations). Each of these tabs can have up to 3 columns and you can
define which fields are displayed in each column.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 507
Labels and Translations

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when you
select a variant for the analysis tool in the Explorer.

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about the variant.
The description is visible in the Variants pane in the configu-
ration screen.

Related Information

Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]

Work Orders [page 35]

8.6.9 Fields for Configuring Work Orders

You can define variants of this analysis tool. These variants can then be selected by business users from the
Explorer.

Preconfigured Variant

SAP also delivers a preconfigured variant. For more information about preconfigured variants, see
Preconfigured Variants [page 491].

Columns

In this section you define which columns/fields business users see by default when they choose this variant of
the Work Orders analysis tool in the Explorer. You can choose from a predefined list of columns.

Filters

In this section you define the filter field values for the work orders variant.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

508 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Sorting

In this section you define which columns are displayed under Sort in the View Settings of the Work Orders
analysis tool and whether the column should be sorted in ascending or desending order. The first entry in this
list is the default in the alert list.

Table Details

In this section you configure the Work Orders analysis tool for more information about a particular work order.
When you click on a work order you navigate in-place to more information about that work order.

You define the tabs containing this further information and enter an ID for the tab under Tab Title (you later
map a label to this ID under Labels and Translations). Each of these tabs can have up to 3 columns and you can
define which fields are displayed in each column.

Labels and Translations

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when you
select a variant for the analysis tool in the Explorer.

Variant Description The variant description you enter here is visible in the analy­
sis tool catalog after you have selected the variant by its
name.

Related Information

Explorer and Analysis Tools Configuration [page 489]

Work Orders [page 35]

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 509
8.6.10 Fields for Configuring Transformer Health Analytics

You can configure the analysis tool. The analysis tool can then be selected by business users in the Explorer
and viewed on the Equipment page.

Equipment

In this section, you select for which set of equipment the analysis should be performed.

 Note

To select the equipment, choose (Add new column). You at least need to select one set of equipment.

Field Description

Model ID Select the equipment model for which the analysis should
be performed. You can choose from all equipment models
that were created in the Models application.

Attribute Select the attribute that has a value, which defines that this
piece of equipment is eligible for transformer health
analytics, for example, Oil Type. You can choose from all
attributes that were created in the Templates application.

Attribute Value Enter the attribute value of the equipment or model. You
can enter any value for this field, for example, Mineral.

Time Filters

Per default, all latest oil samples for the eligible equipment are selected for the analysis in the Explorer. In this
section, you can define time ranges for the Explorer to only include the oil samples for a certain number of last
days, for example, the oil samples of the last five days. The business user can later switch between these time
ranges in the Explorer. You can define up to three time ranges.

 Note

You at least need to define the first time range.

Field Description

1st Time Range in Days Enter the first time range. Per default, the number of days is
set to 30. You can use any whole number greater than zero.

2nd Time Range in Days Enter a second time range if required. You can use any
whole number greater than zero.

3rd Time Range in Days Enter a third time range if required. You can use any whole
number greater than zero.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

510 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Calculation Schedule

In this section, you define the calculation schedule. The calculation schedule is needed to regularly process
new oil sample data and calculate the coordinates of the fault points in the Duval triangles based on the data.
The oil samples data includes the defined set of equipment, the data of the gases, and the oil sample date.

 Note

If you later change the set of equipment, this new set will be used in the next scheduled calculation.

Field Description

Start Select the start date and time of the calculation schedule.

End Define whether the calculation schedule should end at a

certain date and time. Per default, the end date is set to
None.

Repeats Every Define whether the calculation schedule should repeat in a

certain interval. You can choose from daily, weekly, or
monthly intervals. Per default, the calculation schedule is
set to 1 Day. If you enter 0 in the field, the calculation only
runs once.

Gas Concentration Indicators

In this section, you select the indicators for the five gases of an oil sample. In the indicators, the gas
concentration values for the gases are stored.

Field Description

Template Select the equipment or model template. You can choose

from all equipment models or model templates that were
created in the Models or the Templates applications.

Indicator Group Select the indicator group of the selected template. You can
choose from all groups that are assigned to the template.

Gas Displays the five mandatory gases of an oil sample

Indicator For each of the gases, select the indicator of the indicator
group that should be the source for the gas concentration
values. You can choose from all indicators that were created
in the Templates application.

Gas Concentration Thresholds

In this section, you can enter lowest valid gas concentrations for the five gases of an oil sample. If one or more
gas concentrations of an oil sample fall below the entered lowest valid gas concentrations, the oil sample is
marked as Limited in the oil sample details table on the Equipment page. The limited oil sample is not used in

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights PUBLIC 511
any analysis, but still displayed in the table. If you leave the field empty for a gas, all gas concentrations of this
gas are valid.

Field Description

Gas Displays the five mandatory gases of an oil sample

Lowest Valid Gas Concentration in ppm Enter a lowest valid gas concentration for a gas. You can use
any whole number greater than zero. If you leave the field
empty for a gas, all gas concentrations of this gas are valid.

Labels and Translations

 Note

To add a label, choose (Add New Tab).

Field Description

Language Select the language in which you want to maintain text val­
ues.

Variant Name Enter a name for the variant. The name is visible when the
business user selects the variant in the Explorer.

Variant Description Enter a description to provide more details about the variant.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

512 PUBLIC Configuring SAP Predictive Asset Insights
Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Hyperlinks
Some links are classified by an icon and/or a mouseover text. These links provide additional information.
About the icons:

● Links with the icon : You are entering a Web site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, you agree (unless expressly stated otherwise in your
agreements with SAP) to this:

● The content of the linked-to site is not SAP documentation. You may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this information.
● SAP does not agree or disagree with the content on the linked-to site, nor does SAP warrant the availability and correctness. SAP shall not be liable for any
damages caused by the use of such content unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

● Links with the icon : You are leaving the documentation for that particular SAP product or service and are entering a SAP-hosted Web site. By using such
links, you agree that (unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP) you may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this
information.

Videos Hosted on External Platforms

Some videos may point to third-party video hosting platforms. SAP cannot guarantee the future availability of videos stored on these platforms. Furthermore, any
advertisements or other content hosted on these platforms (for example, suggested videos or by navigating to other videos hosted on the same site), are not within
the control or responsibility of SAP.

Beta and Other Experimental Features

Experimental features are not part of the officially delivered scope that SAP guarantees for future releases. This means that experimental features may be changed by
SAP at any time for any reason without notice. Experimental features are not for productive use. You may not demonstrate, test, examine, evaluate or otherwise use
the experimental features in a live operating environment or with data that has not been sufficiently backed up.
The purpose of experimental features is to get feedback early on, allowing customers and partners to influence the future product accordingly. By providing your
feedback (e.g. in the SAP Community), you accept that intellectual property rights of the contributions or derivative works shall remain the exclusive property of SAP.

Example Code
Any software coding and/or code snippets are examples. They are not for productive use. The example code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax
and phrasing rules. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the example code. SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the use of
example code unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

Gender-Related Language
We try not to use gender-specific word forms and formulations. As appropriate for context and readability, SAP may use masculine word forms to refer to all genders.

Application Help for SAP Predictive Asset Insights

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information PUBLIC 513
www.sap.com/contactsap

© 2021 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form

or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP
affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors

contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for

informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any
kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or
SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth
in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and
services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty.

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as
their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP
SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All
other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their
respective companies.

Please see https://www.sap.com/about/legal/trademark.html for

additional trademark information and notices.

THE BEST RUN